SET Manual

SET Manual

Issue 6/A

Author:

TE

Issue:

6/A

Date:

18/04/2006

Part Number:

TE200147

Copyright:

Trend Control Systems Limited Horsham, W. Sussex

All rights reserved. This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this manual may be reproduced, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language or computer language, or transmitted in any form whatsoever without the prior consent of the publisher. Manufactured for and on behalf of the Environmental and Combustion Controls Division of Honeywell Technologies Sàrl, Ecublens, Route du Bois 37, Switzerland by its Authorized Representative, Trend Control Systems Limited For information contact: Trend Control Systems Limited P.O. Box 34 Horsham W. Sussex RH12 2YF NOTICE: Trend Control Systems Limited makes no representations or warranties of any kind whatsoever with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Trend Control Systems Limited shall not be liable for any errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. Trend Control Systems Limited reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revisions or changes. Microsoft Windows XP©, and Microsoft Windows 2000© are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 2.3

3 3.1

3.2 3.3 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 5 5.1 5.2

5.3 5.4 5.5 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

6.5 6.6

ABOUT THIS MANUAL............................................................................................................................... 15 Conventions Used in this Manual ..................................................................................................................... 16 Contacting Trend .............................................................................................................................................. 16 ABOUT SET.................................................................................................................................................... 17 What's New in Version 6.0 ............................................................................................................................... 17 Compatibility .................................................................................................................................................... 18 The SET Window ............................................................................................................................................. 19 2.3.1 Display Area........................................................................................................................................ 19 2.3.2 Item Selector ....................................................................................................................................... 20 2.3.3 Menu Bar............................................................................................................................................. 20 2.3.4 Project View........................................................................................................................................ 20 2.3.5 Search Library..................................................................................................................................... 20 2.3.6 Status Bar ............................................................................................................................................ 21 2.3.7 Strategy Library .................................................................................................................................. 21 2.3.8 System View ....................................................................................................................................... 22 2.3.9 Toolbars .............................................................................................................................................. 25 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................ 27 Install SET ........................................................................................................................................................ 27 3.1.1 Install the Software ............................................................................................................................. 27 3.1.2 Licence SET ........................................................................................................................................ 28 3.1.3 Customise SET.................................................................................................................................... 29 3.1.4 Connect to the IQ Network ................................................................................................................. 29 Upgrade from a Previous Version..................................................................................................................... 29 Update the Licence ........................................................................................................................................... 30 CONNECT TO THE IQ NETWORK........................................................................................................... 31 Connect over Ethernet....................................................................................................................................... 31 Connect using a Controller or Node Controller ................................................................................................ 32 Connect using a SANC ..................................................................................................................................... 33 CUSTOMISE TOOLSET .............................................................................................................................. 35 Disable Users .................................................................................................................................................... 35 Specify Comms Connections ............................................................................................................................ 35 5.2.1 Set up the CNC Tab ............................................................................................................................ 36 5.2.2 Set up the Autodialling Tab ................................................................................................................ 37 5.2.3 Set up the Messaging Tab ................................................................................................................... 38 5.2.4 Delete a Comms Connection............................................................................................................... 38 5.2.5 Edit a Comms Connection................................................................................................................... 39 Specify the Loading and Saving of Site Data ................................................................................................... 39 Specify the Refresh Options ............................................................................................................................. 40 Specify Whether the Tracker Window is Displayed ......................................................................................... 41 CUSTOMISE SET .......................................................................................................................................... 43 Disable the Controller and Identifier Check ..................................................................................................... 43 Set up Default Labels........................................................................................................................................ 44 Set up the Sensor Library.................................................................................................................................. 44 6.3.1 Delete a Sensor Definition from the Library....................................................................................... 46 6.3.2 Edit a Sensor Definition ...................................................................................................................... 46 Set up the Strategy Library ............................................................................................................................... 47 6.4.1 Add a Strategy Block Group ............................................................................................................... 47 6.4.2 Add a Strategy Block .......................................................................................................................... 48 6.4.3 Copy an Old Strategy Block to the Custom Library ........................................................................... 49 6.4.4 Delete a Strategy Block....................................................................................................................... 49 6.4.5 Delete a Strategy Block Group............................................................................................................ 50 6.4.6 Edit Strategy Block Strategy ............................................................................................................... 50 6.4.7 Edit Strategy Block Properties ............................................................................................................ 50 6.4.8 Rename a Strategy Block Group ......................................................................................................... 50 6.4.9 Set up Strategy Block Page Details ..................................................................................................... 50 Set up Users ...................................................................................................................................................... 51 6.5.1 Delete a User ....................................................................................................................................... 52 6.5.2 Edit a User........................................................................................................................................... 52 Specify Auto Edit.............................................................................................................................................. 53

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

3

Table of Contents 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 7 7.1

7.2

7.3

4

Specify Company Information ......................................................................................................................... 53 Specify File Backup Options ............................................................................................................................ 54 Specify Module Tracking ................................................................................................................................. 55 Specify the Default Comms Connection......................................................................................................... 55 Specify the Default Display Language ........................................................................................................... 56 Specify the Default Display Options .............................................................................................................. 56 Specify the Default Print Options ................................................................................................................... 57 Specify the Gap in the Sequence Table Between Pages ................................................................................. 57 Specify the Toolbar Theme............................................................................................................................. 58 Specify IQ3 Directory Module Parameter Defaults........................................................................................ 58 Specify IQ3 Display Module Parameter Defaults........................................................................................... 59 Specify the Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 60 Specify Where Strategy Blocks are Stored ..................................................................................................... 60 Specify Where Projects are Stored ................................................................................................................. 61 Specify Module Prompts ................................................................................................................................ 62 Specify Which Toolbars Are Displayed ......................................................................................................... 62 Turn Auto Routing ON/OFF........................................................................................................................... 62 Turn Module Tool Tips ON/OFF ................................................................................................................... 62 Turn Tip of the Day ON/OFF ......................................................................................................................... 63 IQ3 QUICK TOURS ...................................................................................................................................... 65 Quick Tour 1 - The Basics................................................................................................................................ 65 7.1.1 Lesson 1 - Starting SET ...................................................................................................................... 66 7.1.2 Lesson 1 - Creating a New SET Project ............................................................................................. 67 7.1.3 Lesson 1 - Understanding the SET Window....................................................................................... 68 7.1.4 Lesson 2 - Adding a Lan..................................................................................................................... 68 7.1.5 Lesson 2 - Adding an IQ Controller.................................................................................................... 69 7.1.6 Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Address Module ........................................................................................ 70 7.1.7 Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Network Module........................................................................................ 71 7.1.8 Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Sensor Type Modules ................................................................................ 72 7.1.9 Lesson 3 - Setting Up I/O Modules .................................................................................................... 73 7.1.10 Lesson 3 - Adding Modules to the Strategy.................................................................................... 73 7.1.11 Lesson 3 - Moving Modules ........................................................................................................... 75 7.1.12 Lesson 3 - Editing Modules ............................................................................................................ 76 7.1.13 Lesson 3 - Linking Modules ........................................................................................................... 77 7.1.14 Lesson 3 - Adding Pages................................................................................................................. 77 7.1.15 Lesson 4 - Defining the Strategy’s Issue......................................................................................... 79 7.1.16 Lesson 4 - Print Project Documentation ......................................................................................... 79 7.1.17 Lesson 5 - Creating an IQ3 File ...................................................................................................... 79 Quick Tour 2 - Beyond Basics.......................................................................................................................... 80 7.2.1 Lesson 1 - Loading an Existing Project .............................................................................................. 81 7.2.2 Lesson 1 - Linking Between Pages ..................................................................................................... 82 7.2.3 Lesson 1 - Linking to a Specific Value............................................................................................... 83 7.2.4 Lesson 2 - Adding Text to a Page ....................................................................................................... 83 7.2.5 Lesson 2 - Using TO Connectives ...................................................................................................... 84 7.2.6 Lesson 3 - Principles of Display and Directory Modules ................................................................... 84 7.2.7 Lesson 3 - Adding Directory Modules................................................................................................ 85 7.2.8 Lesson 3 - Adding Dynamic Display Modules ................................................................................... 86 7.2.9 Lesson 3 - Adding Static Display Modules......................................................................................... 86 7.2.10 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Backdrops).......................................................... 87 7.2.11 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Moving Items) .................................................... 88 7.2.12 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Linking Pages).................................................... 88 7.2.13 Lesson 4 - Changing a Module’s Sequence Step ............................................................................ 89 7.2.14 Lesson 4 - Event Driven Strategy ................................................................................................... 89 7.2.15 Lesson 5 - Principles of Using Strategy Blocks.............................................................................. 90 7.2.16 Lesson 5 - Using Strategy Blocks ................................................................................................... 90 Quick Tour 3 - Making SET Work for You ..................................................................................................... 92 7.3.1 Lesson 1 - What is Backwards Engineering?...................................................................................... 92 7.3.2 Lesson 1 - Uploading the Strategy in the Required Format ................................................................ 92 7.3.3 Lesson 1 - Importing an IQ3 File........................................................................................................ 92 7.3.4 Lesson 2 - Principles of Strategy Blocks ............................................................................................ 93 7.3.5 Lesson 2 - Creating a Strategy Block.................................................................................................. 93 SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Table of Contents

8 8.1 8.2

8.3 8.4

8.5

8.6 8.7 8.8

8.9 9 9.1 9.2 9.3 10 11

7.3.6 Lesson 3 - Adding a Sensor Definition to the Library ........................................................................ 96 7.3.7 Lesson 4 - The Command Line Toolbar.............................................................................................. 97 7.3.8 Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar to Find Modules ......................................................... 97 7.3.9 Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar to Add Modules.......................................................... 97 7.3.10 Lesson 5 - Comparing Two Strategies ............................................................................................ 97 ENGINEER IQ CONTROLLERS ................................................................................................................ 99 Plan the System................................................................................................................................................. 99 Specify the SET Project .................................................................................................................................... 99 8.2.1 Create a Project ................................................................................................................................... 99 8.2.2 Open a Project ................................................................................................................................... 100 8.2.3 Import a Project................................................................................................................................. 100 8.2.4 Edit Project Details ........................................................................................................................... 101 8.2.5 Set up the Project's Remote Devices ................................................................................................. 102 8.2.6 Delete a SET Project ......................................................................................................................... 102 Create the Controllers ..................................................................................................................................... 102 8.3.1 Add a Lan.......................................................................................................................................... 103 8.3.2 Add Controllers................................................................................................................................. 103 Configure the Controller Strategy................................................................................................................... 105 8.4.1 Configure a Pre IQ3 Controller ......................................................................................................... 105 8.4.2 Configure an IQ3/XNC ..................................................................................................................... 106 8.4.3 Set up the Address Module ............................................................................................................... 107 8.4.4 Set up the IP Network Module .......................................................................................................... 108 8.4.5 Set up Sensor Type Modules............................................................................................................. 109 8.4.6 Configure ADL Support.................................................................................................................... 111 8.4.7 Configure XNC Support for IQ2 Controllers.................................................................................... 112 8.4.8 Set up the XNC Interface Module..................................................................................................... 114 8.4.9 Add Modules to a Strategy Page ....................................................................................................... 117 8.4.10 Move Modules .............................................................................................................................. 119 8.4.11 Link the Modules .......................................................................................................................... 119 8.4.12 Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy.............................................................................................. 122 8.4.13 Set up I/O Modules ....................................................................................................................... 125 8.4.14 Edit Modules ................................................................................................................................. 127 8.4.15 Set up the Sequence Table ............................................................................................................ 129 8.4.16 Set up Event Driven Strategy ........................................................................................................ 131 8.4.17 Set up Fast Sequencing ................................................................................................................. 131 8.4.18 Set up the Controllers Normal Occupation Times......................................................................... 132 8.4.19 Set up Exceptions.......................................................................................................................... 133 8.4.20 Set up IC Comms .......................................................................................................................... 134 8.4.21 Set up Controller Security ............................................................................................................. 135 8.4.22 Set up Display and Directory Modules ......................................................................................... 137 8.4.23 Set up Graphical Display Pages .................................................................................................... 145 Add Graphics and Text to Strategy Pages....................................................................................................... 146 8.5.1 Add Text to Strategy Pages............................................................................................................... 146 8.5.2 Delete Text and Graphics from a Strategy Page................................................................................ 147 8.5.3 Move Text and Lines on a Strategy Page.......................................................................................... 147 Test the Strategy ............................................................................................................................................. 147 Download Strategy to the Controller .............................................................................................................. 147 8.7.1 Download Strategy Using SET ......................................................................................................... 147 8.7.2 Download Strategy Using Another Tool........................................................................................... 149 Issue Project Documentation .......................................................................................................................... 149 8.8.1 Define a Strategy's Issue ................................................................................................................... 149 8.8.2 Specify the Notes Printed on the Front Page..................................................................................... 150 8.8.3 Print Project Overview ...................................................................................................................... 150 8.8.4 Print Project Documentation ............................................................................................................. 151 Backup the Project .......................................................................................................................................... 152 COMPARING STRATEGIES..................................................................................................................... 153 Compare Single Strategies.............................................................................................................................. 153 Compare Multiple Strategies .......................................................................................................................... 154 Restore a Strategy ........................................................................................................................................... 155 COMMISSIONING WITH LIVE VALUES.............................................................................................. 157 LIVE EDITING ............................................................................................................................................ 159

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

5

Table of Contents 12 GENERAL OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 161 12.1 Add a Connective to Alarm Status Information............................................................................................ 162 12.2 Add a Connective to System Information..................................................................................................... 163 12.3 Add a Connective ......................................................................................................................................... 164 12.4 Add a Module Using the Command Line Toolbar........................................................................................ 165 12.5 Add a Strategy Page...................................................................................................................................... 166 12.6 Add a To Connective .................................................................................................................................... 166 12.7 Add an Undefined Connective to a Module.................................................................................................. 166 12.8 Add an Undefined Connective to a Node ..................................................................................................... 167 12.9 Add Unplaced Modules to a Strategy Page .................................................................................................. 167 12.10 Authorise a TCL Application.................................................................................................................... 168 12.11 Change a Controller’s Type ...................................................................................................................... 169 12.12 Change a Node’s Value ............................................................................................................................ 170 12.13 Close a Project .......................................................................................................................................... 170 12.14 Close a Strategy Page ............................................................................................................................... 170 12.15 Convert an IQ2 Strategy to an IQ3 Strategy ............................................................................................. 170 12.16 Copy a Strategy Page................................................................................................................................ 172 12.17 Copy a Controller ..................................................................................................................................... 172 12.18 Copy and Paste Modules........................................................................................................................... 173 12.19 Create an IQ2 File..................................................................................................................................... 173 12.20 Create an IQ3 File..................................................................................................................................... 173 12.21 Create an LDF File ................................................................................................................................... 174 12.22 Create Multiple Data Files........................................................................................................................ 174 12.23 Create Plant Directories ............................................................................................................................ 175 12.24 Define an Undefined Connective's Destination ........................................................................................ 175 12.25 Delete a Connective .................................................................................................................................. 176 12.26 Delete a Controller.................................................................................................................................... 177 12.27 Delete a Link............................................................................................................................................. 177 12.28 Delete a Plant Directory............................................................................................................................ 177 12.29 Delete a Strategy Page .............................................................................................................................. 177 12.30 Delete Modules......................................................................................................................................... 177 12.31 Disable a Module ...................................................................................................................................... 177 12.32 Display Information about Autodialing Devices ...................................................................................... 178 12.33 Display IQ System Communications Information.................................................................................... 178 12.34 Display Keyboard Short Cuts ................................................................................................................... 179 12.35 Display the Item Selector.......................................................................................................................... 179 12.36 Display the Strategy Library..................................................................................................................... 179 12.37 Display the System View.......................................................................................................................... 179 12.38 Display the Tracker View ......................................................................................................................... 180 12.39 Display the Tip of the Day........................................................................................................................ 180 12.40 Dock Panes ............................................................................................................................................... 180 12.41 Download a Single Page of Strategy ........................................................................................................ 180 12.42 Download a TCL Application................................................................................................................... 181 12.43 Edit Controller Details .............................................................................................................................. 182 12.44 Enter Configuration Mode on Pre IQ3 Controllers................................................................................... 183 12.45 Export Data to 963.................................................................................................................................... 184 12.46 Export Data to IP Tool.............................................................................................................................. 184 12.47 Find a Module........................................................................................................................................... 185 12.48 Find and Replace Labels........................................................................................................................... 185 12.49 Find Fixed System Nodes ......................................................................................................................... 186 12.50 Find Where a Node is Used ...................................................................................................................... 188 12.51 Find where a Sequence Step is Used ........................................................................................................ 189 12.52 Go to a Strategy Page................................................................................................................................ 189 12.53 Import a Backdrop File ............................................................................................................................. 190 12.54 Import an ACE File .................................................................................................................................. 191 12.55 Import an IQ2 File .................................................................................................................................... 191 12.56 Import an IQ3 File .................................................................................................................................... 192 12.57 Move Panes............................................................................................................................................... 192 12.58 Perform a SET Command Using the Command Line Toolbar ................................................................. 193 12.59 Position the Toolbars ................................................................................................................................ 193 12.60 Position the Windows ............................................................................................................................... 193 6

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Table of Contents 12.61 Print a Single Page of Strategy.................................................................................................................. 194 12.62 Redraw the Screen..................................................................................................................................... 194 12.63 Rename a Plant Directory ......................................................................................................................... 194 12.64 Resize Panes.............................................................................................................................................. 194 12.65 Run SET.................................................................................................................................................... 195 12.66 Select Modules .......................................................................................................................................... 196 12.67 Set up Page Details.................................................................................................................................... 196 12.68 Set up the Site Codes................................................................................................................................. 197 12.69 Specify the Next Module Number............................................................................................................. 197 12.70 Specify the Position of the Next Window ................................................................................................. 198 12.71 Specify Which Configuration Parameters are Displayed .......................................................................... 198 12.72 Turn the Status Bar ON/OFF .................................................................................................................... 198 12.73 Undo the Last Action ................................................................................................................................ 198 12.74 Upload Strategy from an IQ Controller..................................................................................................... 198 12.75 View Device Details ................................................................................................................................. 200 12.76 View Lan Details....................................................................................................................................... 200 12.77 View Page Details ..................................................................................................................................... 201 12.78 View Project Details ................................................................................................................................. 201 12.79 View Strategy Block Details ..................................................................................................................... 201 12.80 View Strategy Issues ................................................................................................................................. 202 12.81 View the Next Module List....................................................................................................................... 202 12.82 Zoom IN/OUT........................................................................................................................................... 203 13 BROWSING THE IQ SYSTEM.................................................................................................................. 205 13.1 Basic Browsing ............................................................................................................................................. 205 13.1.1 Run SET and Display the System View........................................................................................ 205 13.1.2 Navigate the System...................................................................................................................... 207 13.1.3 Run a ToolSET Applet.................................................................................................................. 208 13.1.4 Refresh the System View .............................................................................................................. 208 13.1.5 Set up the System View ................................................................................................................ 209 13.1.6 Specify the Current User Role....................................................................................................... 214 13.2 Display a List of Objects............................................................................................................................... 214 13.2.1 Display a List of Device Contents................................................................................................. 214 13.2.2 Display a List of Devices on a Lan ............................................................................................... 215 13.2.3 Display a List of Internetwork Devices......................................................................................... 215 13.2.4 Display a List of Module Parameters ............................................................................................ 216 13.2.5 Display a List of Modules ............................................................................................................. 217 13.2.6 Display a List of the Site Content ................................................................................................. 217 13.3 Display Graphs.............................................................................................................................................. 218 13.3.1 Display a Chart.............................................................................................................................. 218 13.3.2 Display a Compact Graph ............................................................................................................. 218 13.3.3 Display a Precision Graph............................................................................................................. 218 13.4 Display Properties ......................................................................................................................................... 219 13.4.1 Display Device Properties ............................................................................................................. 219 13.4.2 Display Module Properties............................................................................................................ 220 13.4.3 Display Parameter Properties ........................................................................................................ 220 13.4.4 Display Site Properties .................................................................................................................. 220 13.5 Enter Configuration Mode on a Device ........................................................................................................ 221 13.6 Map the System............................................................................................................................................. 221 13.7 Send a Text Comms Message ....................................................................................................................... 222 13.8 View Alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 223 13.8.1 View Current Alarms .................................................................................................................... 223 13.8.2 View Historic Alarms.................................................................................................................... 223 13.8.3 View Incoming Alarms ................................................................................................................. 223 13.9 View an IQ3 Controller’s Web Pages ........................................................................................................... 224 13.10 Upload/Download Strategy ....................................................................................................................... 224 13.10.1 Download a Single Strategy to Multiple Controllers .................................................................... 224 13.10.2 Download Different Strategies to Multiple Controllers ................................................................ 226 13.10.3 Download to a Single Controller................................................................................................... 228 13.10.4 Upload from a Single Controller ................................................................................................... 229 13.10.5 Upload from Multiple Controllers................................................................................................. 230 APPENDICIES ....................................................................................................................................................... 233 SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

7

Table of Contents A1 APPENDIX 1 IQ2 MODULES.................................................................................................................... 233 A1.1 IQ2 Address Module................................................................................................................................. 233 A1.2 IQ2 Alarm Destination Modules............................................................................................................... 235 A1.3 IQ2 Alarm Group Modules....................................................................................................................... 235 A1.4 IQ2 Alarm Route Modules ....................................................................................................................... 236 A1.5 IQ2 Autodial Modules .............................................................................................................................. 236 A1.6 IQ2 Comport Modules .............................................................................................................................. 236 A1.7 IQ2 Critical Alarm Modules ..................................................................................................................... 237 A1.8 IQ2 Directory Modules............................................................................................................................. 237 A1.9 IQ2 Display Modules................................................................................................................................ 238 A1.10 IQ2 Driver Modules.................................................................................................................................. 238 A1.10.1 IQ2 Analogue Driver Modules ..................................................................................................... 238 A1.10.2 IQ2 Binary Switch Driver Modules .............................................................................................. 239 A1.10.3 IQ2 Digital Driver Modules.......................................................................................................... 240 A1.10.4 IQ2 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules ............................................................................. 240 A1.10.5 IQ2 Raise/Lower End Driver Modules ......................................................................................... 242 A1.10.6 IQ2 Time Proportional Driver Modules........................................................................................ 243 A1.10.7 IQ2 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules............................................................................. 244 A1.11 IQ2 Function Modules .............................................................................................................................. 245 A1.11.1 IQ2 ABS Function Modules ......................................................................................................... 245 A1.11.2 IQ2 Add Function Modules .......................................................................................................... 245 A1.11.3 IQ2 Adder/Scaler Function Modules ............................................................................................ 246 A1.11.4 IQ2 Analogue to Digital Function Modules.................................................................................. 246 A1.11.5 IQ2 Average Function Modules.................................................................................................... 247 A1.11.6 IQ2 Comparator Function Modules .............................................................................................. 247 A1.11.7 IQ2 Divide Function Modules ...................................................................................................... 248 A1.11.8 IQ2 Enthalpy Function Modules................................................................................................... 248 A1.11.9 IQ2 Filter Function Modules ........................................................................................................ 248 A1.11.10 IQ2 Gate Function Modules ......................................................................................................... 249 A1.11.11 IQ2 Hysteresis Band Function Modules....................................................................................... 249 A1.11.12 IQ2 Hysteresis Limits Function Modules..................................................................................... 249 A1.11.13 IQ2 Limit at Function Modules .................................................................................................... 250 A1.11.14 IQ2 Limit to Function Modules.................................................................................................... 250 A1.11.15 IQ2 Log Function Modules .......................................................................................................... 250 A1.11.16 IQ2 Lookup Function Modules .................................................................................................... 251 A1.11.17 IQ2 Maximum Function Modules ................................................................................................ 251 A1.11.18 IQ2 Minimum Function Modules................................................................................................. 251 A1.11.19 IQ2 Multiply Function Modules................................................................................................... 252 A1.11.20 IQ2 Power Function Modules....................................................................................................... 252 A1.11.21 IQ2 Proximity Function Modules................................................................................................. 252 A1.11.22 IQ2 Rescale from Function Modules............................................................................................ 253 A1.11.23 IQ2 Rescale to Function Modules ................................................................................................ 253 A1.11.24 IQ2 Square Root Function Modules ............................................................................................. 253 A1.11.25 IQ2 TRIG Function Modules ....................................................................................................... 254 A1.11.26 IQ2 TRUNC Function Modules ................................................................................................... 254 A1.12 IQ2 IC Comms Modules........................................................................................................................... 254 A1.12.1 IQ2 Average IC Comms Modules ................................................................................................ 254 A1.12.2 IQ2 Data From IC Comms Modules............................................................................................. 255 A1.12.3 IQ2 Data To IC Comms Modules ................................................................................................. 255 A1.12.4 IQ2 Global To IC Comms Modules.............................................................................................. 256 A1.12.5 IQ2 Maximum IC Comms Modules ............................................................................................. 257 A1.12.6 IQ2 Minimum IC Comms Modules .............................................................................................. 257 A1.12.7 IQ2 Sum IC Comms Modules....................................................................................................... 258 A1.13 IQ2 Input Modules.................................................................................................................................... 258 A1.13.1 IQ2 Adjustment Knob Modules.................................................................................................... 258 A1.13.2 IQ2 Digital Input Modules............................................................................................................ 259 A1.13.3 IQ2 External Digital Sensor Modules ........................................................................................... 259 A1.13.4 IQ2 External Sensor Modules ....................................................................................................... 260 A1.13.5 IQ2 Internal Digital Sensor Modules ............................................................................................ 261 A1.13.6 IQ2 Internal Sensor Modules ........................................................................................................ 261 A1.13.7 IQ2 Knob Modules ....................................................................................................................... 262 8

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Table of Contents A1.13.8 IQ2 Switch Modules...................................................................................................................... 262 IQ2 Logic Modules ................................................................................................................................... 263 A1.14.1 IQ2 Combination Logic Modules.................................................................................................. 263 A1.14.2 IQ2 Counter Logic Modules.......................................................................................................... 263 A1.14.3 IQ2 Delay Logic Modules............................................................................................................. 264 A1.14.4 IQ2 D to A Logic Modules ........................................................................................................... 264 A1.14.5 IQ2 Fan Out Logic Modules ......................................................................................................... 265 A1.14.6 IQ2 Hours Run Logic Modules ..................................................................................................... 265 A1.14.7 IQ2 Readback Logic Modules....................................................................................................... 266 A1.14.8 IQ2 Timer Logic Modules............................................................................................................. 266 A1.15 IQ2 Loop Modules .................................................................................................................................... 267 A1.16 IQ2 Modem Modules ................................................................................................................................ 268 A1.17 IQ2 OSS Modules ..................................................................................................................................... 268 A1.18 IQ2 Page Modules..................................................................................................................................... 270 A1.19 IQ2 Plot Modules ...................................................................................................................................... 270 A1.20 IQ2 Record Modules ................................................................................................................................. 270 A1.21 IQ2 Schedule Modules.............................................................................................................................. 271 A1.22 IQ2 Sensor Type Modules......................................................................................................................... 272 A1.23 IQ2 Store Modules .................................................................................................................................... 274 A1.24 IQ2 Time Modules .................................................................................................................................... 274 A1.25 IQ2 User Modules ..................................................................................................................................... 274 A1.26 IQ2 Zone Modules .................................................................................................................................... 275 A2 APPENDIX 2 IQ3 MODULES .................................................................................................................... 277 A2.1 IQ3 Address Modules ............................................................................................................................... 279 A2.1.1 IQ3 v1.3 or Greater Address Modules .......................................................................................... 279 A2.1.2 IQ3 Pre v1.3 Address Modules ..................................................................................................... 281 A2.2 IQ3 Alarm Destination Modules ............................................................................................................... 284 A2.3 IQ3 Alarm Group Modules ....................................................................................................................... 286 A2.4 IQ3 Alarm Route Modules........................................................................................................................ 286 A2.5 IQ3 Directory Modules ............................................................................................................................. 286 A2.6 IQ3 Display Modules ................................................................................................................................ 287 A2.6.1 IQ3 Dynamic Display Modules..................................................................................................... 287 A2.6.2 IQ3 Static Display Modules .......................................................................................................... 288 A2.7 IQ3 Driver Modules .................................................................................................................................. 290 A2.7.1 IQ3 Analogue Driver Modules...................................................................................................... 290 A2.7.2 IQ3 Binary Switch Driver Modules .............................................................................................. 291 A2.7.3 IQ3 Digital Driver Modules .......................................................................................................... 293 A2.7.4 IQ3 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules.............................................................................. 295 A2.7.5 IQ3 Raise/Lower End Driver Modules.......................................................................................... 297 A2.7.6 IQ3 Time Proportional Driver Modules ........................................................................................ 299 A2.7.7 IQ3 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules ............................................................................. 301 A2.8 IQ3 Function Modules .............................................................................................................................. 303 A2.8.1 IQ3 ABS Function Modules.......................................................................................................... 303 A2.8.2 IQ3 Add Function Modules........................................................................................................... 304 A2.8.3 IQ3 Adder/Scaler Function Modules............................................................................................. 304 A2.8.4 IQ3 Analogue to Digital Function Modules .................................................................................. 305 A2.8.5 IQ3 Average Function Modules .................................................................................................... 306 A2.8.6 IQ3 Comparator Function Modules .............................................................................................. 306 A2.8.7 IQ3 Divide Function Modules....................................................................................................... 307 A2.8.8 IQ3 Enthalpy Function Modules ................................................................................................... 307 A2.8.9 IQ3 Filter Function Modules......................................................................................................... 308 A2.8.10 IQ3 Gate Function Modules .......................................................................................................... 308 A2.8.11 IQ3 Hysteresis Band Function Modules........................................................................................ 309 A2.8.12 IQ3 Hysteresis Limits Function Modules...................................................................................... 309 A2.8.13 IQ3 Limit at Function Modules..................................................................................................... 310 A2.8.14 IQ3 Limit to Function Modules..................................................................................................... 310 A2.8.15 IQ3 Log Function Modules ........................................................................................................... 311 A2.8.16 IQ3 Lookup Function Modules ..................................................................................................... 311 A2.8.17 IQ3 Maximum Function Modules................................................................................................. 312 A2.8.18 IQ3 Minimum Function Modules.................................................................................................. 312 A2.8.19 IQ3 Multiply Function Modules.................................................................................................... 313 A1.14

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

9

Table of Contents A2.8.20 IQ3 Power Function Modules ....................................................................................................... 313 A2.8.21 IQ3 Proximity Function Modules ................................................................................................. 314 A2.8.22 IQ3 Rescale from Function Modules ............................................................................................ 314 A2.8.23 IQ3 Rescale to Function Modules................................................................................................. 315 A2.8.24 IQ3 Square Root Function Modules ............................................................................................. 315 A2.8.25 IQ3 TRIG Function Modules........................................................................................................ 316 A2.8.26 IQ3 TRUNC Function Modules.................................................................................................... 316 A2.9 IQ3 I/O Modules....................................................................................................................................... 317 A2.10 IQ3 IC Comms Modules........................................................................................................................... 317 A2.10.1 IQ3 Average IC Comms Modules ................................................................................................ 317 A2.10.2 IQ3 Data To IC Comms Modules ................................................................................................. 318 A2.10.3 IQ3 Global To IC Comms Modules.............................................................................................. 319 A2.10.4 IQ3 Maximum IC Comms Modules ............................................................................................. 319 A2.10.5 IQ3 Minimum IC Comms Modules .............................................................................................. 320 A2.10.6 IQ3 Sum IC Comms Modules....................................................................................................... 321 A2.11 IQ3 Input Modules.................................................................................................................................... 321 A2.11.1 IQ3 Analogue Node Modules ....................................................................................................... 321 A2.11.2 IQ3 Digital Byte Modules............................................................................................................. 322 A2.11.3 IQ3 External Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................. 323 A2.11.4 IQ3 External Digital Sensor Modules ........................................................................................... 324 A2.11.5 IQ3 External Sensor Modules ....................................................................................................... 324 A2.11.6 IQ3 Internal Digital Input Modules .............................................................................................. 326 A2.11.7 IQ3 Internal Digital Sensor Modules ............................................................................................ 327 A2.11.8 IQ3 Internal Sensor Modules ........................................................................................................ 327 A2.11.9 IQ3 Knob Modules ....................................................................................................................... 329 A2.11.10 IQ3 Switch Modules..................................................................................................................... 329 A2.12 IQ3 Logic Modules................................................................................................................................... 330 A2.12.1 IQ3 Combination Logic Modules ................................................................................................. 330 A2.12.2 IQ3 Counter Logic Modules ......................................................................................................... 331 A2.12.3 IQ3 Delay Logic Modules ............................................................................................................ 331 A2.12.4 IQ3 D to A Logic Modules ........................................................................................................... 332 A2.12.5 IQ3 Fan Out Logic Modules ......................................................................................................... 333 A2.12.6 IQ3 Hours Run Logic Modules..................................................................................................... 334 A2.12.7 IQ3 Readback Logic Modules ...................................................................................................... 334 A2.12.8 IQ3 Timer Logic Modules ............................................................................................................ 335 A2.13 IQ3 Loop Modules.................................................................................................................................... 336 A2.14 IQ3 Network Modules .............................................................................................................................. 337 A2.14.1 IQ3 IP Network Modules.............................................................................................................. 337 A2.14.2 IQ3 Lan Network Modules ........................................................................................................... 338 A2.15 IQ3 OSS Modules..................................................................................................................................... 339 A2.16 IQ3 Page Modules .................................................................................................................................... 340 A2.17 IQ3 Plot Modules...................................................................................................................................... 341 A2.18 IQ3 Schedule Modules.............................................................................................................................. 341 A2.19 IQ3 Sensor Type Modules ........................................................................................................................ 342 A2.20 IQ3 Time Modules.................................................................................................................................... 343 A2.21 IQ3 User Modules..................................................................................................................................... 344 A2.21.1 IQ3 v1.3 or Greater User Modules................................................................................................ 344 A2.21.2 IQ3 Pre v1.3 User Modules .......................................................................................................... 346 A2.22 IQ3 Virtual CNC Modules........................................................................................................................ 347 A2.23 IQ3 XNC Interface Modules..................................................................................................................... 348 A2.24 IQ3 Zone Modules .................................................................................................................................... 349 A3 APPENDIX 3 MENU COMMANDS .......................................................................................................... 351 A3.1 Comms Menu............................................................................................................................................ 351 A3.1.1 Comms>Config............................................................................................................................. 351 A3.1.2 Comms>Download ....................................................................................................................... 351 A3.1.3 Comms>Download this page........................................................................................................ 351 A3.1.4 Comms>Live Edit......................................................................................................................... 351 A3.1.5 Comms>Live Values .................................................................................................................... 351 A3.1.6 Comms>Upload ............................................................................................................................ 351 A3.2 Device Menu............................................................................................................................................. 351 A3.2.1 Device>Address Module .............................................................................................................. 352 10

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Table of Contents

A3.3

A3.4

A3.5

A3.6

A3.7

A3.8

A3.2.2 Device>Autodial Module.............................................................................................................. 352 A3.2.3 Device>Comports ......................................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.4 Device>Device Details.................................................................................................................. 352 A3.2.5 Device>I/O Setup.......................................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.6 Device>Issue Details..................................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.7 Device>Modem Module ............................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.8 Device>Network Module.............................................................................................................. 352 A3.2.9 Device>Notes................................................................................................................................ 352 A3.2.10 Device>Record Module ................................................................................................................ 352 A3.2.11 Device>Re-Enable All Modules ................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.12 Device>Sensor Types.................................................................................................................... 352 A3.2.13 Device>Store Modules.................................................................................................................. 352 Edit Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 352 A3.3.1 Edit>Auto Routing ........................................................................................................................ 353 A3.3.2 Edit>Copy ..................................................................................................................................... 353 A3.3.3 Edit>Cut ........................................................................................................................................ 353 A3.3.4 Edit>Delete Page........................................................................................................................... 353 A3.3.5 Edit>Insert Page ............................................................................................................................ 353 A3.3.6 Edit>Paste ..................................................................................................................................... 353 A3.3.7 Edit>Undo Last ............................................................................................................................. 353 File Menu .................................................................................................................................................. 353 A3.4.1 File>Close SET Project................................................................................................................. 353 A3.4.2 File>Close Strategy....................................................................................................................... 353 A3.4.3 File>Compare>IQ2 (V2>) ............................................................................................................ 353 A3.4.4 File>Compare>IQ3 ....................................................................................................................... 353 A3.4.5 File>Compare>SCN...................................................................................................................... 353 A3.4.6 File>Exit........................................................................................................................................ 354 A3.4.7 File>Open Project /New Project.................................................................................................... 354 A3.4.8 File>Print ...................................................................................................................................... 354 A3.4.9 File>Print Overview...................................................................................................................... 354 A3.4.10 File>Print Setup ............................................................................................................................ 354 Help Menu................................................................................................................................................. 354 A3.5.1 Help>About SET........................................................................................................................... 354 A3.5.2 Help>Help Topics ......................................................................................................................... 354 A3.5.3 Help>Getting Help ........................................................................................................................ 354 A3.5.4 Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 1 .................................................................................................. 354 A3.5.5 Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 2 .................................................................................................. 354 A3.5.6 Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 3 .................................................................................................. 355 A3.5.7 Help>Tip of Day ........................................................................................................................... 355 Project Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 355 A3.6.1 Project>Create Data Files.............................................................................................................. 355 A3.6.2 Project>Export Project Data to 963 v1.2....................................................................................... 355 A3.6.3 Project>Export Project Data to 963 v2.......................................................................................... 355 A3.6.4 Project>Import ACE File .............................................................................................................. 355 A3.6.5 Project>Import Backdrop File....................................................................................................... 355 A3.6.6 Project>Import IQ2 File (V2.1> Firmware Only)......................................................................... 355 A3.6.7 Project>Import IQ3 File ................................................................................................................ 355 A3.6.8 Project>Project Details.................................................................................................................. 355 A3.6.9 Project>Project Compare .............................................................................................................. 355 A3.6.10 Project>Site(s)............................................................................................................................... 355 Strategy Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 356 A3.7.1 Strategy>Create LDF File ............................................................................................................. 356 A3.7.2 Strategy>Create IQ2 File .............................................................................................................. 356 A3.7.3 Strategy>Create IQ3 File .............................................................................................................. 356 Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 356 A3.8.1 Tools>Command Line................................................................................................................... 356 A3.8.2 Tools>Display and Directory Setup .............................................................................................. 356 A3.8.3 Tools>Export Device List ............................................................................................................. 357 A3.8.4 Tools>Free/Next Module List ....................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.5 Tools>IQL Tool 2 ......................................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.6 Tools>Label Find and Replace...................................................................................................... 357

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

11

Table of Contents A3.8.7 Tools>Monitor Incoming Alarms ................................................................................................. 357 A3.8.8 Tools>SDU Tool........................................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.9 Tools>Sequence Steps>Free......................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.10 Tools>Sequence Steps>Insert....................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.11 Tools>Sequence Steps>Move....................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.12 Tools>Sequence Steps>Skip......................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.13 Tools>SET Options ...................................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.14 Tools>ToolSET Options............................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.15 Tools>Trend-IP Tool .................................................................................................................... 357 A3.8.16 Tools>Unlock XNC Application .................................................................................................. 357 A3.8.17 Tools>Unplaced Modules............................................................................................................. 357 A3.8.18 Tools>User Role ........................................................................................................................... 357 A3.9 View Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 358 A3.9.1 View Alarms ................................................................................................................................. 358 A3.9.2 View>Command Line................................................................................................................... 358 A3.9.3 View>Comms ............................................................................................................................... 358 A3.9.4 View>Draw Tool .......................................................................................................................... 358 A3.9.5 View>Drivers ............................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.6 View>Full Screen ......................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.7 View>Functions............................................................................................................................ 359 A3.9.8 View>Functions 2......................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.9 View>ICComms ........................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.10 View>Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.11 View>Logics................................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.12 View>Other .................................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.13 View>Pointers .............................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.14 View>Project View....................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.15 View>SET Tools .......................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.16 View>Sequence ............................................................................................................................ 359 A3.9.17 View>Standard ............................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.18 View>Status Bar ........................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.19 View>Strategy Library ................................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.20 View>System View ...................................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.21 View>Theme>Grippered .............................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.22 View>Theme>Office 2003 ........................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.23 View>Theme>Office XP .............................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.24 View>Theme>Win XP Theme ..................................................................................................... 359 A3.9.25 View>Theme>Visio 2003............................................................................................................. 359 A3.9.26 View>Tracker View ..................................................................................................................... 360 A3.9.27 View>Window Position................................................................................................................ 360 A3.9.28 View>Zoom 25%.......................................................................................................................... 360 A3.9.29 View>Zoom 50%.......................................................................................................................... 360 A3.9.30 View>Zoom 75%.......................................................................................................................... 360 A3.9.31 View>Zoom 100%........................................................................................................................ 360 A3.9.32 View>Zoom 150%........................................................................................................................ 360 A3.9.33 View>Zoom 200%........................................................................................................................ 360 A3.9.34 View>Zoom 300%........................................................................................................................ 360 A3.9.35 View>Zoom Window ................................................................................................................... 360 A3.10 Window Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 360 A3.10.1 Window>Cascade ......................................................................................................................... 360 A3.10.2 Window>Tile Horizontally........................................................................................................... 360 A3.10.3 Window>Tile Vertically ............................................................................................................... 360 A3.10.4 Window>More Windows.............................................................................................................. 361 A4 APPENDIX 4 COMMAND LINE COMMANDS ..................................................................................... 363 A5 APPENDIX 5 TOOLBARS ......................................................................................................................... 367 A5.1 Alarms Toolbar......................................................................................................................................... 367 A5.2 Command Line Toolbar............................................................................................................................ 367 A5.3 Comms Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................ 367 A5.4 Draw Tools Toolbar.................................................................................................................................. 368 A5.5 Drivers Toolbar......................................................................................................................................... 368 A5.6 Functions 2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 368 12

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Table of Contents A5.7 Functions Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 368 A5.8 ICComms Toolbar..................................................................................................................................... 369 A5.9 Inputs Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 369 A5.10 Logics Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................... 370 A5.11 Other Toolbar............................................................................................................................................ 370 A5.12 Pointers Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................ 370 A5.13 Sequence Toolbar...................................................................................................................................... 371 A5.14 SET Tools Toolbar.................................................................................................................................... 371 A5.15 Standard Toolbar....................................................................................................................................... 371 A5.16 Window Position Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 372 A6 APPENDIX 6 KEYBOARD SHORT CUTS .............................................................................................. 373 INDEX...................................................................................................................................................................... 375

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

13

Table of Contents

This page is intentionally left blank.

14

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About this Manual 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual applies to the System Engineering Tool (SET) version 6.0. It is designed to help you become familiar with the principles of how to use SET to configure the strategies within IQ controllers. It is divided into several sections. It is assumed that the engineer has a good understanding of the IQ system, and IQ configuration, as well as building control. About SET This section describes SET. Installation This section describes how SET should be installed, and licenced. Connect to the IQ Network This section describes how to physically connect the PC running SET to the IQ network. Customise ToolSET This section describes the tasks necessary to define certain parameters relating to how SET works, known as ToolSET functions. Customise SET This section describes how to change SET’s preferences to suite your requirements. It describes tasks such as specifying company information, the location of project information, and strategy blocks, and other default settings. IQ3 Quick Tours This section shows you how to use SET to configure IQ controllers in three easy to follow tours. This is an important section for engineers new to SET. The lessons are designed to be followed in order, quickly teaching the basic principles. Engineering IQ Controllers This section describes the process that should be followed to engineer a complete IQ system from start to finish using SET. It describes the order in which each task should be carried out, and briefly explains how you should go about performing each individual task. Comparing Strategies This section describes how to use SET to compare strategies in IQ controllers with the strategy held by SET. Commissioning with Live Values This section describes how to use SET to commission controllers using live values. Live Editing This section describes how to use SET to edit a controller’s configuration parameters as the strategy is drawn. General Operations This section provides a description of how to perform general SET operations. Browsing the IQ System This section describes how to use SET to browse the IQ system to which it is connected, and perform certain tasks. Other relevant documentation is: Autodialling Reference Manual (90-1353) IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533) IQ Controller Configuration Reference Card (91-1756) IQ Digital Analogue Array Reference Card (TB100522A) IQ241 Reference Card (TB103248) IQ3 Web Enabled Controller Data Sheet (TA200505). IQ3 Web Enabled Controller Installation Instructions (TG200626). Network Engineering Manual (92-1735) SET Data Sheet (TA200131) Sensor Scaling Reference Card (TB100521A) Strategy Symbols (91-1921) Product Data Sheets These documents are available in printed format, and in PDF format in the ‘Documentation’ directory (if you installed the documentation) as well as the Data CD-ROM.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

15

About this Manual 1.1

Conventions Used in this Manual

There are numerous items and instructions in this manual, the conventions below are designed to make it quick and easy to find and understand the information. Menu commands are in bold type. Buttons, and options in dialogue box that you need to select are in bold type. The names of text boxes and dialogue boxes are in bold type. Key combinations that you should press appear in normal type. If joined with a plus sign (+), press and hold the first key while you press the remaining one(s). For example CTRL+P indicates holding down the control key while pressing P. Text you should enter is in Italic type.

1.2

Contacting Trend

Head Office Trend Control Systems Ltd PO Box 34 Horsham Sussex RH12 2YF England Tel: +44 (0) 1403 211888 Fax: +44 (0) 1403 241608 Details of regional offices can be found on our Web site. Internet Our web site (www.trend-controls.com) provides information about our products and us. Technical Support Our Technical Support provides technical support during normal office hours. Before contacting them ensure that you have your Technical Support PIN number available. Without this we will be unable to provide you with full Technical Support. Trend Control Systems Ltd. PO Box 34 Horsham Sussex RH12 2YF England Tel: +44 (0) 1403 226600 Email: [email protected] Fax: +44 (0) 1403 217392

16

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About SET 2 ABOUT SET SET is a Windows based tool providing a graphical method of configuring the strategy within an IQ controller. It makes the task of engineering an IQ system very easy. Whether a site with large numbers of controllers covering a wide area, or a stand-alone controller, is being engineered, SET has the tools required to make life easier. It provides a powerful way to create IQ control strategies and support documentation. SET’s method of constructing strategies as strategy diagrams allows both configuration files (IQ3, LDF, IQ2) and printable documentation to be produced. Its graphical representation of the strategy makes the strategy easy to follow, and plant views allow the strategy to be selected by HVAC equipment rather than by controller. Common pieces of strategy can be stored, and used again and again, not only in one controller, but also in other controllers or projects, using the strategy block concept. SET understands controllers, automatically using standards for module inputs and outputs, automatically placing modules in the sequence table, and prompting for essential information. The use of projects means that all information relating to a particular site or job is automatically organised, saving time searching for the right file. The Project View provides a quick way of selecting the strategy for a particular controller. The Plant View enables modules used in the strategy relating to a particular piece of HVAC equipment to be grouped together. The Strategy Library contains reusable blocks of strategy. During the creation of a strategy, SET keeps track of module number, and sequence steps used automatically assigning the next module and sequence step as modules are added. SET also uses the standard source and destinations for individual modules. These parameters can be manually adjusted, but normally this will not be necessary. SET also allows event driven strategy and fast sequencing of modules to be quickly set up. When defining the links between modules, SET uses its understanding of IQ system devices to determine whether the link is valid, if it is not, SET will not allow the link to be made. The graphical representation of the strategy, used when creating and editing, consists of strategy pages. Strategy can be linked across these pages using connectives, enabling even the most complex strategies to be created. SET enables the module's parameters displayed on the screen to be specified. Intelligent routing of links between modules ensure that the links do not run over the top of modules, allowing modules to be moved around on the screen without having to re-route the module links. SET knows where each device is on the system, and with which strategy it is associated. This means that it can download strategy to the correct controller without having to be told where it is. Sensor definitions speed up the definition of sensor type modules. SET allows new sensor definitions to be created if the types of sensors being used do not match those already shipped with SET.

2.1

What's New in Version 6.0

Listed below are the main new features in version 6.0. For a full list read the ‘SET Version 6.0 New Features and Enhancements document’. New Features Support for IQ3v1.3 DHCP Network Module IQ Lan HOA Module New User module parameters IQ3/XNC support Time Zone exception editing. Multiple data file creation. Open multiple strategies from the same project. Tip of the day. Device Overview printout. X, Y Co-ordinate display.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

17

About SET Enhancements Strategy Block creation, editing and using. Strategy Library keyword filtering. Module search using keyboard. Improved group file transfer. Improved user interface. Full screen toggle. User interface theme option. Import / Export of D&D structure. Identifier and outstation check. Multi label support. Sensor Plot connections in IQ2. Drawing and Table printing defaults. Project menu. Copy and Paste multiple module Labels.

2.2

Compatibility

IQ Configuration SET can create configuration files for all IQ Controllers, however it does not configure time, and calendar modules. Network Access SET uses TCC to provide communications with the IQ network. This means that if TCC is able to connect to the Lan containing the controller, SET will be able to communicate with any IQ system device on that Lan. The table below illustrates the different sites that can be accessed with the different connections to the IQ network.

Connect to device Directly On local Lan On internetwork On remote Lan On autodialled Lan or internetwork (autodialled TMN v=4.1) /ADL

Connection Type Direct Serial Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*

TCP/IP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*

Dialled ADL N/A N/A N/A N/A No

SANC N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes

Yes*

Yes*

Yes

Yes

Yes** Yes** Yes Only able to access the /ADL device, and the device at the address of the /ADL device + 2.

No

*Requires use of TMN or equivalent on the IQ Network. **Requires use of TMN v4.1 or equivalent on the IQ Network.

18

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About SET 2.3

The SET Window

This section describes the different parts of the SET Window. The window divided into nine areas.

Display Area The Display Area displays the information requested. In the example above the Display Area shows a strategy page. Item Selector The Item Selector enables an object in the System View to be quickly located. Menu Bar The Menu Bar contains SET’s menus, which provide access to the application’s various features. Strategy Library The Strategy Library displays the reusable pieces of strategy known as strategy blocks shipped with SET, or that have been created. Project View The Project View displays information about the devices that have been added to the project and the strategy associated with them. It also displays reusable pieces of strategy known as strategy blocks that have been created. Search Library The Search Library displays a list of the strategy blocks that match the specified search criteria. Status Bar The status bar provides information about what SET is currently doing. System View The System View displays the connections that are currently available, any sites, and user nodes that have been added, and enables them to be browsed, and any relevant tasks performed. Toolbars The toolbars provide easy access to SET’s functions. 2.3.1

Display Area

The Display Area displays the information that has been requested. Windows launched from SET will normally be displayed in this area in a separate window. Windows in this area can be positioned as required either manually by resizing, and moving or using the Tile command, or the Window Position toolbar.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

19

About SET 2.3.2

Item Selector

The Item Selector appears above the System View, and is only visible when the System View is displayed. It enables an object in the tree to be quickly located. Simply specify the site, and if necessary Lan, device, and module, and the Item Selector will open the tree up at that point, and highlight the specified object. It also enables associated tasks to be performed. 2.3.3

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains SET’s menus, which provide access to the application’s various features. The following menus are available: Comms Window Device Menu Edit Menu File Menu Help Menu Project Menu Strategy Menu Tools Menu View Menu Window Menu The menus available at a particular time and the commands they contain will depend on the job currently being carried out by SET. For more details of the individual menus and their commands, see the ‘Menu Commands’ section of this manual. 2.3.4

Project View

The Project View displays information about the devices that have been added to the project, and the strategy associated with them. It is divided into two separate areas: Device View Plant View Device View The Device View contains all the controllers in the project arranged by Lan and the strategy pages that have been created for each controller. It enables Lans, and controllers to be added, deleted, and edited. It also enables strategy pages to be created, and provides access to modules such as the address module that do not appear on strategy pages. Icons indicate the type of object. The table below lists the different icons. Icon

Description Group of Strategy Pages IQ1 Series Controller IQ2 Series Controller IQ3 Series Controller Lan Site Strategy Page

Plant View The Plant View enables the strategy within controllers to be located by HVAC equipment type. Once set up the structure of the Plant View can be used to create display modules and directory modules. Icons indicate the type of object. The table below lists the different icons. Icon

2.3.5

Description Plant Directory Strategy Page Search Library

The Search Library displays a list of the strategy blocks that match the specified search criteria. It is divided into two separate areas: Search Area Strategy Blocks Area Search Area The Search Area enables the search criteria to be specified.

20

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About SET Strategy Blocks Area The Strategy Blocks Area contains list of the strategy blocks that match the specified search criteria. It is divided into two columns: Column Block Name Type 2.3.6

Description The name of the strategy block. Icons indicate the type of controller the strategy block can be used in. Strategy block for an IQ3 controller. Strategy block for an IQ3 controller. Indicates the library that contains the strategy block, can be Custom, Standard, or Old. Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the display. It provides information about what SET is currently doing, the number of free log points, free external I/O points, free brIQs, Lan and network address of the controller, the page number, module position, and the current time.

Address The network address of the selected controller. Free brIQs The number of free brIQs available in the current controller. It provides an indication of the amount of memory left in the controller for strategy. Only available for IQ3 controllers. Free External I/O points The number of free brIQs, free I/O points on external I/O modules available in the current controller. Only available for IQ3 controllers. Free Log points The number of free log points available in the current controller. This provides an indication of the amount of memory left in the controller for logging data. Only available for IQ3 controllers. Lan number The Lan number displays the Lan number of the selected controller. Module Co-ordinates The co-ordinates of the top left corner of the selected module If more than one module is selected the co-ordinates are those of the to left corner of the current module. ). Network Comms Status Lights ( Information about the status of communications in and out of the node connecting SET to the IQ network. The indicators flash green when SET is receiving, or transmitting information. If they appear grey, SET has been unable to locate the CNC. Clicking on the indicators displays the Communications Window. Page Number The number of the current strategy page. ) Remote Connection Indicator ( The status of any remote connection devices on the system. If grey, all of the devices are available for use, if red, at least one of them is attempting to make a connection, and if green, at least one is connected. Clicking on this icon displays the Remote Connection Window. 2.3.7

Strategy Library

The Strategy Library displays the reusable pieces of strategy known as strategy blocks that have been created. It is divided into three separate areas: Description Area Strategy Blocks Area Toolbar Description Area The Description Area constrains a description of the selected strategy block.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

21

About SET Strategy Blocks Area Strategy Blocks Area contains pieces of standard strategy (strategy blocks), which can be re-used. It is organised into three different areas Custom Library, Standard Library, and Old Library. The Custom Library contains strategy blocks that you have set up, the Standard Library contains standard strategy blocks that are supplied with SET, and the Old Library contains strategy blocks created with an earlier version of SET. Strategy blocks in the Standard Library cannot be changed or deleted. strategy blocks in the Old Library can be deleted, or moved to the Custom Library. Icon

Description Standard Library Custom Library Old Library Strategy block group. Old strategy block group Strategy block sub group. Strategy block for an IQ3 controller. Strategy block for an IQ2 controller. Strategy block for an unknown controller type, normally an old strategy block. Strategy Block Page

Toolbar The toolbar contains buttons that enables the Strategy Library to be searched, or filtered. Button

2.3.8

Description Displays the Search Library, which enables the library of plant blocks to be searched. Enables the list of strategy blocks to be filtered. System View

The System View displays the current System Object Model (TSOM model). It is divided into two different areas: Sites Area User Nodes Area User Nodes Area The User Nodes Area contains all the user nodes that have been added to the System View. User nodes are shortcuts to items already in the System View and allow a user-defined structure to be created (to allow faster access to regularly used parts of the system). Icon

Description User Nodes User Parameter

There is no limit to the number of user nodes that can be added. Each user node can contain other user nodes, or user parameters. Access to user nodes (and some user parameters) can be restricted to particular user roles to prevent unauthorised accessed and reduce confusion to lower-level users. The user parameters contained within a user node can be from any point on the site, e.g. the value of a sensor, or a particular controller or Lan. The user parameters in the user nodes are not restricted to a single controller, but can come from several different controllers on different Lans, and even from different sites. The diagram below illustrates how user nodes can be used.

22

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About SET The structure above shows user nodes accessing information from two different sites ‘Albery House’ and ‘Foundry Lane’. The information inside the ‘Temperatures’ user node comes from different controllers. The structure has been designed to enable quick access to the required information. Note that structures displaying user parameters referring to parameters in different sites may be grouped together under one user node. The user node controls the refresh of data in the user nodes. A user node has two parameters relating to data refresh. The first is the Refresh is active parameter that determines whether the data is refreshed at all. By default this setting is OFF, which allows any communications traffic to be kept to a minimum. The second is the Refresh interval, which specifies the interval between refreshes, if refreshing is active. The data can be refreshed manually if required. In addition to user parameters a user node may have a reference to any system node (site, Lan, device, etc) as a child to enable favourite structures to be built. Sites Area The Sites Area contains a list of the sites that have been added, and the structure of those sites right down to the individual modules in a tree structure. Icons indicate the type of object. The table below lists the different icons. Icon Description Supervisors 921 Supervisor 940 Supervisor 942 Supervisor 943 Supervisor 945 Supervisor 963 Supervisor, 962 Supervisor, S2 Supervisor, or ViewPoint NDP TCC Application Trend X Application Unknown Supervisor Devices CNC EINC FNC Foreign device e.g. a device on BACnet. ID200 INC IQ3 Controller IQL Controller LINC LONC MNC PNC Pre IQ3 Controller Unknown Device Unknown Internetwork Device Virtual INC inside a device on LON XNC Site Structure Foreign Lan of Network Foreign Site Internetwork Lan Site Modules Address modules Alarm Destination modules Alarm Group modules Alarm Route modules

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

23

About SET Icon

Description Analogue Node modules Calendar modules Core of a controller that has not yet been discovered. Critical Alarm modules Digital Input modules Digital node modules Directory modules Display modules Driver modules Function modules IC Comms modules Knob modules Logic modules Loop modules Module Parameter OSS modules Page modules Plot modules Schedule modules Sensor modules Sensor Type modules Sequence Step modules Switch Modules Time modules Time zone modules Unknown Module Unknown Module Family User modules

A cross over the top of the icon indicates a problem, a black cross means that the comms have failed, and a grey cross indicates that the value is old (value initialised from file). Information from a site can be displayed by drilling down thorough the site to the required level. Once displayed, information can be updated, and devices edited etc depending on the functions available. The values of parameters, and the network structure are learnt when the structure is refreshed. Learnt structures can be saved enabling them to be viewed again quickly without the need for SET to communicate over the network. If up to-date information is required, then just the part of the system containing that information can be refreshed, reducing unnecessary communications and network traffic. Objects (internetworks, Lans, devices, modules, and module parameters) can be removed from the site, preventing them being accessed by the applets. The Sites section is available to all user roles, and provides the best way of finding out about the system. Each site specifies the name of the site, and the connection that is to be used to access the particular IQ network or devices referred to by the site name. It is recommended that the site name describes the particular IQ network or Device that is being accessed e.g. ‘Albery House’ refers to the IQ network in Albery House, and the connection specified is the one that will most often be used to connect to that site. For example, it may be possible to dial into the site, but you would normally connect directly to the site over the company IT networks. In this case, you should add two connections, one for the TCP/IP connection and another for the autodialled connection. When the site is created the TCP/IP connection should be specified for the site, although if you need to access the site by autodialling, the site’s connection can be changed accordingly.

24

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

About SET 2.3.9

Toolbars

SET has a number of toolbars that provide easy access to SET’s functions. Individual toolbars can be hidden/displayed, and positioned as required. The following toolbars are available: The following toolbars are available: Alarms toolbar Command Line toolbar Comms toolbar Draw Tools toolbar Drivers toolbar Functions 2 toolbar Functions toolbar ICComms toolbar Inputs toolbar Logics toolbar Other toolbar Pointers toolbar Sequence toolbar SET Tools Toolbar Standard toolbar Window Position toolbar For more details of the individual toolbars and their commands, see the ‘Toolbars’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

25

About SET

This page is intentionally left blank.

26

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Installation 3 INSTALLATION This section describes how SET should be installed to ensure that it operates correctly, and how to upgrade from a previous version of SET. Before installing SET, or upgrading SET to the latest version, you should ensure that the PC meets the system requirements. System Requirements The specifications below are those recommended to run SET. They refer to a standard PC with mouse, keyboard, hard drive, floppy disk drive, CDROM drive, monitor, and sound capabilities (optional). Hardware Processor RAM Free disk space Graphics card

Intel P4 or equivalent. 256 Mbytes RAM. 350 Mbytes for installation. 16 bit capable of 1024x768 resolution.

COM ports, PCI slots, Parallel ports, and USB ports are required to allow connection of LNC2/CNC2, Ethernet network card, printer, and modem if they are to be used. A single COM port and standard size PCI slot are required for use of an LNC2. Connection to a CNC2 requires a single COM port. A standard size PCI slot will be required if an Ethernet network card is to be used. Additional COM ports, PCI slots, Parallel ports, and USB ports should be specified as required for connection of modems, and printers. The use of a good printer is recommended, which can be connected to either an LPT port, USB port or may be accessed over the network, therefore this should be taken into account when specifying the required ports for the PC. If SET is to communicate with the IQ network using an SANC it is necessary for a V90 (56K) modem to be installed, and access to a PSTN line is required. If SET is to communicate with the IQ network over Ethernet a 100Mb/s Ethernet Network Card is an access to an Ethernet network is required. Software Operating system

Windows XP with Service Pack 2, with Internet Explorer version 6 or greater.

SET will also operate on Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 with Internet Explorer version 6 or greater and the SUN JAVA runtime environment v5.0 or greater. SET will not run on Windows 9x platforms. Minimum specification: Standard Intel P3 300 MHz or equivalent PC with 128 Mbytes RAM, 350 Mbytes free disk space for installation, 8 Mbyte graphics card capable of 1024x768 resolution, COM port, Parallel or USB port, mouse, keyboard, hard drive, CDROM drive, and monitor. Running Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 with Internet Explorer version 6 or greater and the SUN JAVA runtime environment v5.0 or greater.

3.1

Install SET

A step-by-step installation program performs the installation of the software. The installation follows the procedure described below: 1 2 3 4 3.1.1

Install the software as described in the ‘Install the Software’ section of this manual. Licence SET as described in the ‘Licence SET’ section of this manual. Customise SET as described in the ‘Customise SET’ section of this manual. Connect to the IQ network as described in the ‘Connect to the IQ Network’ section of this manual. Install the Software

The installation of SET is performed by a step-by-step installation program. To install the software: 1 Close all programs (including virus protection applications). 2 Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive, and wait for the installation screen to appear. If autorun is disabled, run install.exe from the root of the CD. 3

Follow the instructions on the screen.

SET requires Windows to be set-up to display using small fonts; if the PC is not configured in this way, it is necessary to change the PC connection. To set up small fonts: 1 On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2 Click Display. 3 Click the Settings tab. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

27

Installation 4 5

In the Font size list choose Small Fonts. Click OK.

3.1.2

Licence SET

3.1.2.1

Obtain an Unlock Code

The unlock code that will enable the SET to run is provided by your sales representative. To obtain an unlock code: 1 Contact your sales representative (e.g. your Sales Account Manager) who will provide you with the necessary information. Head Office +44 (0) 1403 211888 The licence information is valuable, you should keep it in a safe place in case SET needs to be reinstalled, or there is a problem with the licence in the future. 3.1.2.2

Enter the Unlock Code

SET cannot be used until a valid unlock code has been entered. Before attempting to licence SET, it is necessary to obtain a valid unlock code as described in the ‘Obtain an Unlock Code’ section of this manual. To enter the unlock code: 1 Run Windows. 2 On the Start menu, point to All Programs, Trend Control Systems, System Engineering Tool and then click System Engineering Tool. The Trend Product Licensing dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click Yes to display the S.E.T. Licence Details dialogue box.

4

In the Licenced To box enter the username supplied with your licence key.

This is divided into three parts each separated by a comma then a space. Part one is the company name, part two is always ‘Single user’ (note uppercase S and lower case u) and the third part is the licence type. E.g. My Company Ltd, Single user, Propak. All of the name details are case sensitive and must be typed in exactly as they were when the code was created. Note the company name entered here will appear on all printouts produced by SET. 5

In the Expiry Date box enter the expiry date supplied with your licence key.

This is in the format: day-month-year. The month is a three-letter code (Jan, Feb etc.) and the year should be four digits. Each part should be separated by a hyphen. E.g. 16-Dec-1999 6 7

In the Licence Key boxes enter the unlock code. Type the first 4-characters into the first box, the next 4characters into the second box, the next 4-characters into the third box, and the last 4-characters into the fourth box. Click OK. The New SET User dialogue box is displayed.

8 9

In the Enter User Name box enter the name for the user. Click OK. The User Setup dialogue box is displayed.

28

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Installation

10

In the User Role box click the required user role. The table below lists the different roles.

Role Browser Operator Supervisor Administrator Commissioning Engineer Engineer

Description A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system. A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system, and make simple adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, and make complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, and make more complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters from an engineering point of view, and make complex adjustments. A user who has full access to the system.

11 12 13

In the Password box enter the user’s password. In the Verify box enter the user’s password again. Click OK. The Log onto SET dialogue box is displayed.

14 15 16

In the User Name box select your username. In the Password box enter your password. Click OK.

3.1.3

Customise SET

Once SET has been installed and is running, it should be customised to specify the name and address printed on the strategy pages and other default settings. This is described in the ‘Customise SET’ section of this manual. 3.1.4

Connect to the IQ Network

If SET is to communicate with IQ controllers to upload/download files, or to access controllers in configuration mode, it is necessary for SET to be connected the IQ network. This is described in the ‘Connect to the IQ Network ’ section of this manual.

3.2

Upgrade from a Previous Version

If a previous version of SET is already installed on the PC, it can be upgraded to the latest version. To upgrade from a previous version: 1 Ensure that SET is not running, and close all programs (including virus protection applications). 2 Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If autorun is enabled on your system, the Installation screen will be displayed. If autorun is disabled, run install.exe from the root of the CD. 3 4 5

Click . The SET installation program will be started. Follow the instructions on the screen. Once the installation of SET is complete, and any necessary file copied to the new location the previous version of SET should be uninstalled using the Add/Remove Programs option in the Control Panel.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

29

Installation If upgrading SET using a service pack supplied on disk, or downloaded from our web site, you should follow the instructions provided with the service pack. Upgrading from version 4 If you have set up your own sensors definitions you will need to move the user sensors.mdb file from the Sensors sub-directory of the directory in which SET version 4 is installed to the same location in the directory in which the new version of SET has been installed. Unfortunately any default sensor labels that have been set up, and company details will be lost. The company logo Lcompany.bmp should be copied into the C:\Program Files\Trend Control Systems\SET directory from the directory in which the previous version of SET version 4 is installed.

3.3

Update the Licence

There are two reasons to update the licence, either if the user information has changed, or if the licence has expired. In both cases, you will need to contact your sales representative to obtain a new licence. To update the licence: 1 Obtain a valid unlock code from your sales representative. 2 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 3 On the Help menu click About SET. The About SET dialogue box is displayed.

4

Click Update Licence. The S.E.T. Licence Details dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the Licenced To box enter the username supplied with your licence key.

This is divided into three parts each separated by a comma then a space. Part one is the company name, part two is always Single user (note uppercase S and lower case u) and the third part is the licence type. E.g. My Company Ltd, Single user, Propak All of the name details are case sensitive and must be typed in exactly as they were when the code was created. Note the company name entered here will appear on all printouts produced by SET. 6

In the Expiry Date box enter the expiry date supplied with your licence key.

This is in the format: day-month-year. The month is a three-letter code (Jan, Feb etc.) and the year should be four digits. Each part should be separated by a hyphen. E.g. 16-Dec-1999 7 8 9

30

In the Licence Key boxes enter the licence key. Enter the first 4-characters into the first box, the next 4characters into the second box, the next 4-characters into the third box, and the last 4-characters into the fourth box. Click OK to return to the S.E.T. Licence Details dialogue box. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Connect to the IQ Network 4 CONNECT TO THE IQ NETWORK If SET is to communicate with IQ controllers to upload/download files, or to access controllers in configuration mode, it is necessary for SET to be connected to the controllers, over the IQ network, or directly. Connection to the network can be made over the IQ system current loop using a NBOX/CNC2, over Ethernet using a virtual CNC, using a software ANC (SANC) and modem to dial into an IQ network, or using and ADL to dial into connect to a controller. Connect to the IQ Network over Ethernet Connect to the IQ Network using a Controller or Node Controller Connect to the IQ Network using a SANC.

4.1

Connect over Ethernet

SET can be connected to the IQ network over Ethernet using a standard Ethernet connection; this allows the office IT network to be used to connect SET to the IQ network. Connecting SET in this way requires the use of a device containing a virtual CNC (e.g. 3xtend/EINC L, or IQ3 controller) operating in supervisor mode. To connect to the IQ network over Ethernet: 1 Ensure SET is not running. 2 If necessary install a device that contains a virtual CNC (e.g. 3xtend/EINC L or IQ3) and ensure that a virtual CNC set up to operate in supervisor mode. For details of this installation instructions supplied with the product. 3 Fit a standard Ethernet card into the PC running SET, following the PC manufacturer’s instructions for fitting an expansion card, and the instructions supplied with the Ethernet card. 4 Plug the Ethernet network cabling into the Ethernet card. 5 Configure Windows Networking to suit the Ethernet network. Note that assistance from the IT department responsible for the Ethernet network will normally be required. 6

Set up a TCP/IP comms connection to connect to the device containing the virtual CNC over Ethernet, as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual. If connection to an autodialled site is required a TCP+TMN connection must be used instead. This allows the connection to the device containing the virtual CNC, over a PSTN link. The dialling device that is to make the connection to the site and the telephone number of the site need to be specified.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

31

Connect to the IQ Network 4.2

Connect using a Controller or Node Controller

SET can be connected to the IQ network over the IQ system current loop using either a node controller such as an NBOX/CNC2, or an IQ controller using the controller’s local supervisor port. To connect to a controller or node controller: 1 Ensure SET is not running. 2 If necessary install the controller, or node controller as described in the installation instructions supplied with it. 3 Connect the COM port being used by SET to the controller’s local supervisor port, or the node’s RS232 port using the appropriate cables, as shown below.

For full details of connecting to specific controllers/node controllers refer to the installation instructions for that device. Note that, if connecting to a controller, whose local supervisor port does not allow access to the IQ network, it will only be possible to communicate with that controller, and the Direct Connection check box in the Connection Details dialogue box must be selected when you attempt to make the connection. 4

Set up a Serial comms connection to connect to the controller’s local supervisor port, or the node’s RS232 port, as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual.

If connection to an autodialled site is required a TCP+TMN connection must be used instead. This allows the connection to the controller’s local supervisor port, or the node’s RS232 port, the dialling device that is to be used to make the connection, and the telephone number of the site to which the connection is required to be specified. If connection to a /ADL device is required an ADL connection must be used instead. This allows the connection to the controller’s local supervisor port, or the node’s RS232 port, and the telephone number of the ADL device to which the connection is required to be specified.

32

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Connect to the IQ Network 4.3

Connect using a SANC

A directly connected modem, connected to a landline, can be used to dial out to a modem on a specified IQ network using a software ANC (SANC). To connect to the IQ Network Using a SANC: 1 Fit a standard PC modem card into the PC running SET, following the PC manufacturer’s instructions for fitting an expansion card, and the instructions supplied with the modem card. Note that the modem must be a standard V90 modem (56K), and the IQ network to have an autodialling device to which the PC can dial in. 2 3 4

Install the drivers for the card. Connect the PC modem card to the telephone socket as described in the instructions supplied with the card. Set up a SANC comms connection, as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual. This allows the modem, and the telephone number of the site to be specified.

TCC will set the modem up as required, but should you not be able to connect using SANC ensure that the modem is the following parameters defined. Setting Echo of commands. Modem text messages. Speed of the serial port. Hardware (RTS/CTS) data flow control. DSR when connected (DSR follows carrier). DCD control (DCD follows carrier). Error detection. Stores the settings in non-volatile memory profile. Stores the settings in non-volatile memory profile

Value Off ON Locked ON ON ON OFF 0 1

AT Command ATE0 ATV1 AT&B1 AT&H1 AT&S1 AT&C1 AT&M0 AT&W0 AT&W1

Before making any of these changes it is recommended that the modem be rest to the factory default settings (AT&F). After the settings have been made the modem must be set to use the new settings (ATZ). Note that the AT commands described above are for a US Robotics 56JK Faxmodem.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

33

Connect to the IQ Network

This page is intentionally left blank.

34

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise ToolSET 5 CUSTOMISE TOOLSET This section describes the tasks necessary to define certain parameters relating to how SET works, known as ToolSET functions. Disable Users Specify Comms Connections Specify the Loading and Saving of Site Data Specify the Refresh Options Specify Whether the Tracker Window is Displayed

5.1

Disable Users

It is possible to specify whether SET prompts you to log on. This is useful if only one person uses as it removes the need to log on. To disable users: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

Click Do not show Logon window. Click OK.

Clicking Do not show this again check box in the Log onto SET dialogue box also disables users.

5.2

Specify Comms Connections

A comms connection specifies how SET communicates with the IQ network, or with a directly connected IQ controller. SET is supplied with several standard connections that cover the most common types of connection. However, if these are not suitable, additional ones can be added. The table below lists the comms connections that are supplied with SET. Connection Comm 1 [19200] Connection Comm 1 [9600] Connection Comm 2 [19200] Connection Comm 2 [9600] Connection TCP Connection

Description Connection using COM 1 at 19200 baud. Connection using COM 1 at 9600 baud. Connection using COM 2 at 19200 baud. Connection using COM 2 at 9600 baud. TCP/IP connection using a device with an IP address of 0.0.0.0. With ports 10004, 10005, 10006, 100057 available for connection.

To specify a comms connection: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

35

Customise ToolSET

3

Click Add. This displays the TUA Editor Window.

Note that the exact appearance of the TUA Editor Window will vary depending on the settings of the site currently selected. 4 5 6

In the Site name text box enter a name for the TUA. Set up the CNC tab to define the connection. Ensure that the TUA Cnc data is valid check box is selected. If displayed, set up the Auto dialling tab to specify the autodialled connection. Ensure that the TUA auto dialling data is valid check box is selected. If the TUA requires a non-standard retry time or number of retry attempts to be specified, set up the Messaging tab. Click OK.

7 8

Note for the connection to work the appropriate physical connections must have been made as described in the ‘Connect to the IQ Network’ section of this manual. 5.2.1

Set up the CNC Tab

The CNC tab enables the method the personal computer uses to make its connection to the IQ network to be defined. To set up the CNC tab: 1 Click the CNC tab. 2 Click the appropriate option to specify the type of connection that is to be used. The display will change to display the parameters that need to be set up for the selected type of connection. These are explained below. Connection Serial TCP/IP ADL SANC Serial+TMN

TCP+TMN

36

Description Specifies connection to the IQ network using a serial port connection. Specifies connection to the IQ network using a virtual CNC in a device such as IQ3 controller or EINC over Ethernet (TCP/IP). Specifies connection to the Autodial Lite IQ network with a personal computer modem. Specifies connection to the IQ network using a software ANC. This uses a personal computer modem for communications. The modem may connect to sites with ANC/TMN controllers as their autodialled connection. Specifies connection to the IQ network using a serial port connection, to a site accessed over an autodialled link using an autodialling device on the IQ network. When selected an additional tab Auto dialing is displayed. The information in this tab must also be set up for the connection to work. Specifies connection to the IQ network using an IQ3 controller or EINC over Ethernet (TCP/IP) to a site accessed over an autodialled link using an autodialling device on the IQ network. When selected an additional tab Auto dialing is displayed. The information in this tab must also be set up for the connection to work. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise ToolSET 3

Specify the settings for the selected connection.

Serial or Serial+TMN In the Baud rate box select the baud rate for communications between the personal computer and the device. It must match the value set on the device. When connection is made directly, this should be 9600. In the COM port number box enter the number of the COM port connected to the device. TCP/IP or TCP+TMN In the Remote IP address box enter the IP address or host name of the device (e.g. EINC) containing the virtual CNC that is to be used to connect to the IQ network. If entering an IP address it must be entered in the format shown below. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx E.g. 128.1.24.34 Specify the port numbers of the virtual CNCs to which to which the software may connect by adding them to the Remote IP port list. To add a port to the list, enter the required number into the box above Add and click Add. To remove a port from the list, select it, and then click Remove. If the list is empty there will be no ports will be available used. If ports are specified in the list, then only those in the list can be used to make the connection. The software will be able to connect to the IQ network using any of the ports in the specified range. Because each port has a specific address on the IQ network, the address of software on the IQ network will vary depending on which port it uses. If alarms are to be sent to the software a single port should be specified to ensure that the same network address is used. ADL or SANC In the Baud rate box click the baud rate for communications between the personal computer and the modem from the list. For ADL it should be 2400. In the COM port number box enter the number of the COM port connected to the modem. In the Site phone number box enter the phone number of the site that is to be connected to. The number may be up to 20 characters in length, and include the following characters. Characters 0 to 9 ABCD#* J or : K or ; or , < M or =

Description Dialing characters. Considered as dialing characters on some systems. Wait for secondary dial tone. 2 second pause (Note on some autodiallers this may be a 1 second pause). Pulse dialing. Tone dialing.

If required enter the phone number of the personal computer in the personal computer phone number (optional) box. This can include the same characters as the site phone number. In the Link Pin box enter the four-digit code used to authorise the use of the CNC link. 4

Check that the TUA Cnc data is valid check box is selected.

5.2.2

Set up the Autodialling Tab

The Auto dialing tab enables both the details of the site to which the autodialler is to connect, and which autodiallers can be used to be specified. This tab is only displayed if Serial+TMN or TCP+TMN has been selected on the CNC tab. To set up the Auto dialing tab: 1 Click the Auto dialing tab. 2 Click the appropriate option to specify the type of dialler that is to be used. Dialler ANC ANY MNC TMN TMNE XN28

Description Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the ANCs on the network. Enables any autodialling device on the network to be used. Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the MNCs on the network. Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the TMNs (not TMNE) on the network. Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the TMNEs on the network. Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the XN28 s on the network.

Note that if a TMNG is being used you should select ANC. 3

In the Phone / connection number box enter the phone number of the site that is to be connected to. The number may be up to 20-characters in length, and include the following characters.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

37

Customise ToolSET Characters 0 to 9 ABCD#* J or : K or ; or , < M or = 4

Description Dialing characters. Considered as dialing characters on some systems. Wait for secondary dial tone. 2 second pause (Note on some autodiallers this may be a 1 second pause). Pulse dialing. Tone dialing.

Specify which autodialling devices can be used to make the connection to the specified number by adding them to the Dialler List. To add a device to the list, enter the network address into the box above Add and click Add. If the list is to specify diallers that CANNOT be used, the address should be prefixed with a minus sign ‘-’. If the autodialling device is on the internetwork, select the check box next to it in the list. To remove a device from the list, select it, and then click Remove.

If the list is empty any dialler that matches the technology type specified (Any, TMN, MNC, TMNE, ANC, or XN28) will be used. If devices are specified in the list, then only those devices will be used to make the connection. If required, the list can specify devices that cannot be used. Note that positive and negative addresses cannot be mixed in the list (the list can only contain either devices that can be used or devices that cannot be used). 5.2.3

Set up the Messaging Tab

The Messaging tab is only displayed if the advanced settings have been displayed. It enables the maximum number of times that an attempt is made to send a particular message, and the time in seconds between retries, if no response was received. To set up the Messaging tab: 1 Display the advanced settings as described in the ‘Displaying the Advanced Settings’ section of this manual. 2 Click the Messaging tab. 3 In the Retry time (secs) box enter the time in seconds between retries if a message has failed. The default is 5 seconds, unless the connection is using an autodialled link (not ADL connection) in which case it is 15 seconds. 4 In the Max number of attempts box enter the maximum number of times that an attempt to send a particular message. The default is 3. 5.2.4

Delete a Comms Connection

If there are comms connections that are not required, they can be deleted. To delete a comms connection: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

38

In the TUA box click the required connection. Click Delete. The selected connection will be deleted. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise ToolSET 5.2.5

Edit a Comms Connection

Existing comms connections can be edited. To edit a comms connection: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the TUA box click the required connection. Click Edit. The TUA dialogue box is displayed.

Note that the exact appearance of the TUA dialogue box will vary depending on the settings of the site currently selected. 5 6

5.3

Edit the connection as required. Once the settings are correct click OK to return to the ToolSET Options dialogue box, and then click OK.

Specify the Loading and Saving of Site Data

It is possible to specify what information from the System View is saved when SET is closed. To specify the loading and saving of site data: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click the required option. The table below lists the different options.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

39

Customise ToolSET Option All Site Data No Data Site, Lan, and Controllers Site, Lan, and Controllers and IO 4

Description All data in the System View will be saved. No information in the System View will be saved. Only the basic Lan and controller structure of the site will be saved. The basic Lan and controller structure of the site will be saved plus details of any I/O modules.

Click OK.

5.4

Specify the Refresh Options

The refresh options determine the way in which the System View is refreshed. There are two refresh options, the Refresh action which determines the amount of information about the selected node that is discovered, and the Site refresh action which determine how much of a site is refreshed. To specify the refresh options: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Refresh action area click the required option to specify the refresh action. The different options are explained below: Option Discover all sub node details Discover types/Values of subnodes Simple node discover

4

Meaning Information about the selected node, and nodes directly below it is discovered. Information about the selected node is discovered along with the structure of nodes directly below it. Only information about the selected node is discovered.

In the Site Refresh action area click the required option to specify the site refresh action. The different options are explained below: Option Show internetwork population Show local lan population Show only basic site structure

Meaning Displays only an icon for the local Lan, and displays an icon for the internetwork (if available) along with the internetwork structure. Displays an icon for the local Lan along with its structure, there is no icon for the internetwork. Displays only an icon for the local Lan, and one for the internetwork (if available). The structure of the internetwork and local Lan are not discovered.

Note that the amount of information discovered about each of the devices displayed in the structure is determined by the Refresh action. 5

40

Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise ToolSET 5.5

Specify Whether the Tracker Window is Displayed

It is possible to specify whether the Tracker Window is ON or OFF when SET is run. To specify whether the Tracker Window is ON/OFF: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

Click Show Tracker Window to display the Tracker Window. Click OK.

Note that the Tracker Window can always be displayed/hidden later clicking Tracker View on the View menu.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

41

Customise ToolSET

This page is intentionally left blank.

42

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 6 CUSTOMISE SET This section describes how to change SET’s preferences to suite your requirements. It describes tasks such as specifying company information, the location of project information, strategy blocks, and other default settings. Although the setting up any of these options is not mandatory, it is recommended that the following be specified: Set up Default Labels Set up the Sensor Library Set up the Strategy Library Set up Users Specify Auto Edit Specify Company Information Specify File Backup Options Specify Module Tracking Specify the Default Comms Connection Specify the Default Display Language Specify the Default Display Options Specify the Gap in the Sequence Table Between Pages Specify the IQ3 Directory Module Parameter Defaults Specify the IQ3 Display Module Parameter Defaults Specify the Printer Specify the Refresh Options Specify Where Projects are Stored Specify Where Strategy Blocks are Stored Specify Whether SET Prompts for the Module Number Specify Which Toolbars Are Displayed Turn Auto Routing ON/OFF Turn Module Tool Tips ON/OFF

6.1

Disable the Controller and Identifier Check

When SET attempts to communicate with a device to upload or download strategy it will check that the local node number and identifier in the address module match the one in actual controller. To disable the controller and identifier check: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. This displays the SET Options dialogue box.

3 4

Select the Disable Outstation and Identifier Check check box click the required comms connection. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

43

Customise SET 6.2

Set up Default Labels

SET enables a list of commonly used labels to be defined. A different list can be defined for sensors, digital inputs, knobs, units, drivers, switches, and general labels This saves time re-entering the same text when modules are added. The label at the top of the list is used as the default label. SET is shipped with some labels already specified, however more can be added, or existing labels removed. To add a label to a list: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. This displays the SET Options dialogue box.

3 4

Click Sensor, Digin, Knob, Units, Driver, Switch, or General to specify the list to which the label is to be added. The required list will be displayed in the box below. Click in the list at the point the label is to be added, and if necessary press ENTER to add a new line.

Note that entering a label at the top of the list will make it the default. 5 6

Enter the required label. Click Exit.

To remove a label from a list: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed. 3 Click Sensor, Digin, Knob, Units, Driver, Switch, or General to specify the list from which the label is to be removed. The required list will be displayed in the box below. 4 Highlight the required label. 5 Right-click the highlighted label, and on the displayed menu click Delete. 6 Click Exit. The position of a label in the list can be changed by highlighting it, right-clicking and on the displayed menu clicking Cut, and then right-clicking in the list at the new position, and on the displayed menu clicking Paste. This method can also be used to copy labels between lists.

6.3

Set up the Sensor Library

SET is supplied with a library of sensor definitions that can be used to set up the sensor type modules in the IQ controllers. Each definition in the library stores all the information required to correctly set up the sensor type modules to scale the input of a particular sensor into engineering units. The sensor library contains the definitions for all of the standard sensors to enable sensor type modules to be correctly set up. If you regularly use other sensors, the definitions for these can be added to the library. Once a definition has been added to the library it will be available in all projects. To add a sensor to the sensor library: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Sensor Types, or on the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

44

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET

4 5 6 7

In the Number box click an unused sensor type module. In the Sensor Part Number box enter the part number of the sensor. In the Scaling Range box enter the range of the sensor. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter the reference for the sensor. It is recommended that this reference consist of the part number followed by the range (e.g. PIL/4). Click Edit. In the Scaling box click the scaling type. The dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate parameters to be specified. The table below describes when each scaling type should be used.

8 9

Scaling Type Characterise scaling

Linear scaling Linearise ohms

thermistor

Linearise thermistor volts scaling Linearise volts scaling Log scaling

10

Use This type of scaling allows a sensor’s characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear characteristics. It is therefore recommended for use with all non-linear sensors providing the controller has version 2.1 firmware or greater. It is also used for lookup function modules. This type of scaling must be used on IQ3 controllers. Should be used for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a linear characteristic between the top and bottom of the range. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. Can be used instead of linearise thermistor volts. It should be used for non-Trend sensors where the resistance/temperature characteristic is known, as it requires entry of ohms against temperature directly from the characteristic. It enables the linearisation points on the temperature scale to be individually chosen so that they can be closer together over a part of the characteristic where the gradient is changing rapidly, and further apart where the gradient changes only gradually. It is not recommended for use with Trend sensors (use Linearise thermistor volts for these). This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. Should be used for thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. Should be used for sensors providing voltage or current signals that need to be linearised. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. This type of scaling is not normally used; it is for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a logarithmic characteristic between the top and bottom of range. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers.

Enter the required values or click on the required options to specify the sensor’s parameters. See the ‘Sensor Type Module’ section of this manual for details about sensor parameters.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

45

Customise SET Clicking Refresh will display a graph of the sensor’s characteristics as defined by the current parameters. This can be used at any point to check how the sensor reading will be scaled. 11 12 13

Once the parameters are correctly specified, click Save to Library. Repeat steps (5) to (12) to add the definitions for other sensors to the library. Click Exit.

Note that when adding a definition to the library, the sensor type module you select will be assigned the parameters for the definition that has just been created. 6.3.1

Delete a Sensor Definition from the Library

Unwanted sensor definitions can be deleted. It is not possible to delete the definitions originally supplied with SET. 1 2 3

Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Sensor Types, or on the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7 8

In the Unique Sensor Reference box click the required sensor definition. Click Edit. Click Delete From Library. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion; click Yes. Repeat steps (4) to (6) to remove any other definitions from the library. Click Exit.

The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of sensors that can be selected. 6.3.2

Edit a Sensor Definition

Note that before editing sensor definitions in the library when a SET project created with version of SET earlier the v1.1 is open, it is necessary to display a strategy page from the controller that is to be selected. To edit a sensor definition: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Sensor Types, or on the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

46

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

In the Number box click an unused sensor type module. In the Sensor Part Number box or Unique Sensor Reference box click the sensor definition that is to be edited. Click Edit. Enter the required values or click on the required options to specify the definition’s parameters. Once the parameters are correctly specified, click Apply. Repeat steps (5) to (8) to edit other sensors. Click Exit.

Note it is not possible to edit the sensor definitions supplied with SET. The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of sensors that can be selected.

6.4

Set up the Strategy Library

The Strategy Library contains strategy blocks, which are standard pieces of strategy that can be re-used. It is therefore recommended that strategy blocks be created for all the pieces of strategy that are regularly used. SET is supplied with a number of standard strategy blocks that can be used, or you can build up a library of different strategy blocks for all the different standard pieces of strategy you use. The strategy blocks are stored in the c:\program files\trend control systems\system engineering tool\strategy library\custom directory; if required, this location can be changed. When you create a strategy block all the links between modules are retained, as is the relative position of the modules on the page, and their order in the sequence table. A single strategy block can be made up of several pages of strategy that can either be used individually, or as a whole. Strategy blocks can be kept in groups (e.g. all AHU strategy blocks) so that they can be located quickly when required. If required each group can be divided using subgroups. To set up strategy blocks: 1 Add the required strategy block groups as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Block Group’ section of this manual. 2 Add the required strategy blocks as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Block’ section of this manual. 6.4.1

Add a Strategy Block Group

To create a strategy block group: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual and display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click Custom, and on the displayed menu click New Group. The Enter Group Name dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

47

Customise SET

3 4 5

In the box enter the name of the group. Click OK. Create any required strategy block sub groups as described below.

To create a strategy block sub group: 1 Right-click the group to which the sub group is to be added, and on the displayed menu click New Sub Group. The Enter Subgroup Name dialogue box is displayed.

2 3 6.4.2

In the box enter the name of the sub group. Click OK. Add a Strategy Block

To add a strategy block: 1 Create the necessary strategy block groups as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Block Group’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy block group that the strategy block is to be placed in and on the displayed menu click New Strategy Block. The Strategy Block Properties dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

In the Block Name box enter the name of the strategy block. In the Controller Type box select the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Firmware Version box select the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Revision box enter the revision number of the strategy block. In the Group box click the strategy block group to which the strategy block is to be added. In the Sub Group box click strategy block sub group to which the strategy block is to be added. In the Key Search box enter any keywords that can be used to search for the strategy block. In the Details box enter a description of the strategy block. Click OK. The new strategy block is created, with a blank page ready for strategy to be added.

Note that the strategy page is green to indicate that a strategy block is being edited. 12

Create the strategy for the strategy block as described in the ‘Configure the Controller Strategy’ section of this manual. Additional pages can be created for strategy by clicking .

48

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET If connectives are to be used to link modules on different pages it is necessary to ensure that each connective has a unique label, and that any modules to which it links have the same label. You should also ensure that the links between pages are backwards, i.e. from page 2 to page 1, but not from page 2 to page 3. When the strategy block is used SET matches the label of the connectives with the labels of modules already in the strategy and if a match is found the link is made. The pages in the strategy block are added in order therefore the modules on page 3 of the strategy block will not have been added to the strategy when SET is trying to find a match for a connective on page 2. If a match is not found the connective will be added as an undefined connective that must be defined after the strategy block has been used. 13 14 6.4.3

Once the strategy block is complete click you want to save the changes. Click Yes.

to close the strategy page. A dialogue box is displayed asking if

Copy an Old Strategy Block to the Custom Library

Old strategy blocks created using version of SET earlier than v6.0, that are stored in the Old Library can be copied into the Custom Library. Tip this enables old strategy blocks to be edited. To copy an old strategy block to the Custom Library: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 3 In the Old Library right-click the strategy block that is to be copied to the Custom Library, and on the displayed menu click Copy to Custom Library. The Strategy Block Properties dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6.4.4

In the Block Name box enter the name of the strategy block. In the Controller Type box select the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Firmware Version box select the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Revision box enter the revision number of the strategy block. In the Group box click the strategy block group to which the strategy block is to be added. In the Sub Group box click strategy block sub group to which the strategy block is to be added. In the Key Search box enter any keywords that can be used to search for the strategy block. In the Details box enter a description of the strategy block. Click OK. Delete a Strategy Block

If required, unwanted strategy blocks can be deleted. To delete a strategy block: 1 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy block to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Strategy Block. Note that deleting a strategy block will delete all the pages containing its strategy. Strategy blocks in the Standard Library cannot be deleted.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

49

Customise SET 6.4.5

Delete a Strategy Block Group

If required, unwanted strategy block groups and sub groups can be deleted. To delete a strategy block group or sub group: 1 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the group or sub group that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Group or Delete Subgroup. Caution the select group of sub group will be deleted without any warning. Note that the group/sub group must be emptied by deleting all the strategy blocks inside it, before it can be deleted. 6.4.6

Edit Strategy Block Strategy

The strategy used by a strategy block's can be edited. Note that it is only possible to edit the strategy blocks in the Custom Library. To edit a strategy block in the Old Library it is necessary to copy it to the custom library as described in the ‘Copy an Old Strategy Block to the Custom Library’ section of this manual. To edit strategy block strategy: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 3 In the Custom Library right-click the strategy block that is to be edited, and on the displayed menu click Edit/View. The strategy pages for the strategy block are loaded. 4 Click or to display the required page. 5 Edit the strategy as described in the ‘Configure the Controller Strategy’ section of this manual. 6 Click to close the strategy page. 7 A dialogue box is display asking if you want to save the changes. 8 Click Yes. 6.4.7

Edit Strategy Block Properties

If required, a strategy block's details can be edited. To edit strategy block details: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the strategy block that is to be edited, and on the displayed menu click Details. The Strategy Block Properties dialogue box is displayed. 4 Edit the details as required. 5 Click OK. 6.4.8

Rename a Strategy Block Group

If required, a strategy block group can be renamed. To rename a strategy block group: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the strategy block group that is to be renamed, and on the displayed menu click Rename. The Rename dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6.4.9

In the box enter the new name. Click OK. Set up Strategy Block Page Details

Strategy pages in a strategy blocks can be titled, and a text describing them added. To set up a strategy block page: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the strategy block page whose details are to be edited, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Page Properties dialogue box is displayed.

50

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET

4 5 6

In the Title enter a title for the page. In Details box enter the required details. Click OK.

6.5

Set up Users

SET enables users to be set up to so that the correct user can be assigned to the project, it also enables the information that appears in the System View to be defined. Each user has a username, password, and associated user role. The username will be added to descriptions of the things the user does, the password enables them to log on, and the user role determines how information in the System View is presented to them. The table below lists the different roles. Role Browser Operator Supervisor Administrator Commissioning Engineer Engineer

Description A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system. A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system, and make simple adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, and make complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, and make more complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters from an engineering point of view, and make complex adjustments. A user who has full access to the system.

SET is supplied with a single user Administrator that has a password of Administrator. This user is only used to set up other users. To add a user: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual to display the Log onto SET dialogue box. 2 In the User Name box click Administrator. 3 In the Password box enter the administrator’s password. This is ‘Administrator’ by default. 4 Click Edit/Add User. The Users dialogue box is displayed.

5

Click Add. The New ToolSET User dialogue box is displayed.

6

Enter the name for the user in the Enter User Name box. Only characters a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9 or the space character can be use, accented characters are not supported. Click OK. The User Setup dialogue box shown below is displayed.

7

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

51

Customise SET

8 9 10 11

In the User Role box click required user role. In the Password box enter the user’s password. If required this can be left blank allowing the user to log on without entering a password. Only characters a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9 or the space character can be use, accented characters are not supported. In the Verify box re-enter the user’s password. Click OK to return to the Log onto SET dialogue box.

If required the use of users can be disabled, as described in the ‘Disable Users’ section of this manual, and SET will automatically run up using the user specified when SET was licenced. This is useful if a single user is to access SET. 6.5.1

Delete a User

Users that are no longer required can be deleted. To delete a user: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual to display the Log onto SET dialogue box. 2 In the User Name box click Administrator. 3 In the Password box enter the administrator’s password. This is ‘Administrator’ by default. 4 Click Edit/Add User. The Users dialogue box is displayed.

5 6 7 6.5.2

Click the user that is to be deleted. Click Delete. SET prompts for confirmation of the deletion, click Yes. Click OK to return to the Log onto SET dialogue box. Edit a User

If required users can be edited to change their password, or changed their user role. To edit a user: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual to display the Log onto SET dialogue box. 2 In the User Name box click Administrator. 3 In the Password box enter the administrator’s password. This is ‘Administrator’ by default. 4 Click Edit/Add User. The Users dialogue box is displayed.

5 6 7

52

Click the user that is to be edited. Change the parameters if the user as required. Click OK to return to the Log onto SET dialogue box.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 6.6

Specify Auto Edit

When Auto Edit is enabled, SET will automatically display the relevant properties dialogue box when the module is first placed on a strategy page. To enable/disable Auto Edit: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

6.7

Click Auto Edit. Click Exit.

Specify Company Information

SET enables the company logo printed on the front sheet for each controller to be changed, from the to suit individual requirements (e.g. your company’s logo). The company address can also be changed from the default to your company’s address. Note that the company name is the name entered in the Licence box, and cannot be changed. To specify the company logo: 1 Create the company logo using any graphics package. The final size of the logo should be 1718 x 500 pixels. 2 Save logo as a BMP file called company.bmp. 3 Move the file to the c:\program files\trend control systems\system engineering tool directory, to overwrite the existing file. To specify the company address: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

53

Customise SET 3

In the Company Details area click Edit. The Company Details dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7 8 9

In the five Address Line boxes enter the company address. In the Telephone box enter the telephone number. In the Fax box enter the fax number. In the Email box enter the Email address. Click OK to return to the SET Options dialogue box. Click Exit.

6.8

Specify File Backup Options

Whenever a project is closed SET is automatically makes a backup of the file. This backup is stored in the same directory as the original file using the same filename but with the file extension .bak. If required this functionality can be turned off, or SET can be made to keep two backups. If two backups are made, the second will have the file extension .bak2. To specify the file backup options: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the File Backup Options area click the required option. The table below lists the available options. Option 1 Backup 2 Backups No Backup

4

Description When selected, SET keeps only the latest backup. When selected, SET keeps the last two backups. When selected, SET will not perform any automatic backups.

Click Exit.

To restore a backup, delete the original IQ, or TSET file, and rename the backup file.

54

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 6.9

Specify Module Tracking

SET can be configured so that during live edit the module selected on the strategy page is selected in the System View. To specify module tracking: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

Click Track modules in Live Edit. Click OK.

6.10 Specify the Default Comms Connection SET allows different connections for the comms port to be stored, and recalled quickly. To specify the default comms connection: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. This displays the SET Options dialogue box.

3 4

In the Default Comms Settings box click the required comms connection. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

55

Customise SET 6.11 Specify the Default Display Language Pre IQ3 controllers have a parameter in the address module, which specifies the language used by a Display Panel connected to the controller, and the language in which text alarms are sent. The Network Display Panel also uses this parameter to determine in which language to display its prompts. The display language can be set to English, Spanish, Finnish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, German, Italian, Portuguese or French. The default is English, and should be set to the language you require most often. To specify the default display language: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for the pre IQ3 controller for which the default display language is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 On the Device menu click Address Module. The IQ Address Module dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the Display Language box click the language that is to be the default.

5 6

Click . Click OK.

6.12 Specify the Default Display Options The configuration parameters displayed on the strategy page for each different type of module is different. The default for each type of module is for all the parameters that can appear on the page to be displayed. If required, the default for each type of module can be changed. To set up the default display options: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page that contains a module of the type for which the default display options are to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click a module of the type for which the default display options are to be changed, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Parameters dialogue box for that module type is displayed. 4 Select the appropriate check boxes on the left of the dialogue box to specify the module parameters that are to be displayed. Clicking , will select all the check boxes, clicking display setting to the current defaults. 5 6

56

will clear all the check boxes, and clicking

will return the

Click . Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 6.13 Specify the Default Print Options The default print options can be specified to save time when printing project documentation. The defaults will be used when is selected. To set up the default print options: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 On the File menu click Print. The Print dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Print what area, select the appropriate check boxes to specify the default print options. The table below describes the different options. Option Strategy Sensor List Digital Inputs List Knobs List Switch List Drivers List Time Zone List Sequence List Plots List ICComms List Analogue Nodes Used List Digital Nodes Used List Module Used List Sensor Types Directory Modules List Display Modules List Alarm Groups

Description Prints strategy pages. Prints a list of all the sensors in the strategy Prints a list of all the digital inputs in the strategy. Prints a list of all the knobs in the strategy. Prints a list of all the switches in the strategy. Prints a list of all the drivers in the strategy. Prints a list of all the time zones in the strategy. Prints the sequence table. Prints a list of all the plot modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the IC comms modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the analogue nodes in the strategy. Prints a list of all the digital nodes in the strategy. Prints a list of all the modules used in the strategy. Prints a list of all the sensor type modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the directory modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the display modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the alarm group modules in the strategy.

To select all options click Select All. 4 5

Click Set Default. Click OK.

6.14 Specify the Gap in the Sequence Table Between Pages When a new page is created, SET automatically leaves a gap in the sequence table. This means that modules can be added to one page without the need to change the sequence steps of modules on the next. E.g. If the last sequence step on page 2 was 20, and the number of sequence steps between pages to be skipped was 10, when page 3 is created a gap of 10 sequence steps would be left. This would mean that the sequence step of the first module on page 3 would be 31. To specify the gap in the sequence table between pages: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

57

Customise SET 3

Click , or on the Tools menu point to Sequence Steps and click Skip. The Sequence Steps to Skip dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

In the box enter the number of sequence steps that are to be skipped between pages. Click OK.

Note that this setting applies to all projects. The gap is only left when the page is created; as modules are added to the previous page, the gap will get smaller.

6.15 Specify the Toolbar Theme The appearance of the toolbars can be changed by specifying a different theme. To specify the toolbar theme: 1 Open a project. 2 On the View menu point to Theme and click the required theme.

6.16 Specify IQ3 Directory Module Parameter Defaults The default values for IQ3 directory module parameters can be specified. To set up IQ3 directory module parameter defaults: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for an IQ3 controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 3 Click dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the Themes area click Edit next to the Directory box. The Directory Themes dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to access the module. This can be in the range (1 to 99). The can be used to set the required value.

58

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 6

7 8 9

Specify default background colour for the page by clicking Background Colour, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Directory Themes dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Background Colour check box. In the Refresh Rate enter the default refresh rate in seconds. Specify the size of the page. In the Width box enter the default width of the page in pixels, and in the Height box enter default the height of the page in pixels. Alternatively in the Page Size box click the default page size. Click OK to return to the Display and Directory Setup dialogue box.

6.17 Specify IQ3 Display Module Parameter Defaults The default values for IQ3 display module parameters can be specified. To set up IQ3 display module parameter defaults: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for an IQ3 controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 3 Click dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the Themes area click Edit next to the Display box. The Display Themes dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to view or use the module. This can be in the range (1 to 99).

6

7

The can be used to set the required value. Specify the default foreground colour for the item by clicking Foreground Colour, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Foreground Colour check box. Specify the default background colour for the item by clicking Background Colour, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Background Colour check box.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

59

Customise SET 8

9 10 11 12 13

Specify the default colour used for the IQ3 dynamic display modules when the item is in an alarm by clicking InAlarm Colour, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the InAlarm Colour. In the Font Type box click the default font. In the Font Size box click the default font size. In the Width box enter the default width of the object in pixels. To size the text to fit click Width. In Text Align box click the default text alignment that is used if a specific object width is specified. You should ensure that the Width check box is clear. Click OK to return to the Display and Directory Setup dialogue box.

6.18 Specify the Printer The printer used by SET to print out the project documentation can be specified. If a printer is not specified, SET will use the Windows default printer. To specify the printer: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the File menu click Print Setup. The Print Set up dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6 7

In the Name box click the printer. To set up the printer click Properties. In the Size box click the paper size. In the Source box click the paper source. In the Orientation area click either the Portrait, or Landscape. Landscape is recommended. Click OK.

6.19 Specify Where Strategy Blocks are Stored All the files relating to a particular strategy block are stored in a sub-directory of the custom strategy library base directory (c:\program files\trend control systems\system engineering tool\strategy library\custom). Strategy blocks created using an earlier version of SET are stored in the old plant block directory (c:\program files\trend control systems\system engineering tool\plant blocks). If required these directories can be changed To change the custom strategy library base directory: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

60

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 3

To change the location of strategy blocks (custom strategy library base directory) click Edit in the Custom Strategy Library Base Directory area. To change the location of strategy blocks created in earlier version of SET click Edit in the Old Plant Block Directory area. The Browse for Folder dialogue box is displayed.

4

Click the required directory. If necessary, use the scroll bars to move up/down the list.

To create a new directory, navigate to the required location and click Make New Folder. 5 6

Click OK to return to the SET Options dialogue box. Click Exit.

6.20 Specify Where Projects are Stored All the files relating to a particular project are stored in a sub-directory of the base project directory (c:\set projects). The location of the base project directory can be changed if required. To change the location of the base project directory: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Base Project Directory area click Edit. This displays the Browse for Folder dialogue box.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

61

Customise SET 4 5 6

Click the required directory. If necessary, use the scroll bars to move up/down the list. Click OK to return to the SET Options dialogue box. Click Exit.

6.21 Specify Module Prompts SET can be configured to prompt for the module number and sequence step of modules when they are added. A separate setting is available for each type of module. To specify module prompts: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Next Module. The Next Module List 3 Click dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

Click the check box next to each module type that will prompt for the module number and sequence step. Click OK.

6.22 Specify Which Toolbars Are Displayed The toolbars displayed by SET can be specified to suit individual requirements. To specify which toolbars are displayed: 1 On the View menu click the name of the toolbar that is to be displayed. For example, to turn the Drivers toolbar OFF, on the View menu click Drivers to remove the tick. If required the toolbars can be moved by dragging them to the required position. When positioned on an edge of the screen, they appear as normal toolbars, when positioned elsewhere, they appear as floating toolbars.

6.23 Turn Auto Routing ON/OFF SET will automatically route the links between modules around the items on the page. If required, automatic routing can be switched ON or OFF as required. To switch auto routing ON/OFF: 1 Open a project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for any controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Click , or on the Edit menu click Auto Routing.

6.24 Turn Module Tool Tips ON/OFF When module tool tips are turned on, SET will automatically display the parameters for a module when the mouse is placed over it. Module Tool Tips can be switched ON or OFF as required. To turn module tool tips ON/OFF: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual.

62

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Customise SET 2

On the Tools menu click SET Options. This displays the SET Options dialogue box.

3 4

Select the Module Tool Tips check box. Click Exit.

6.25 Turn Tip of the Day ON/OFF If tip of the day is turned ON whenever SET is run the Tip of the Day dialogue box is displayed providing useful information about SET and its use. To turn tip of the day ON/OFF: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Help menu click Tip of the Day. This displays the Tip of the Day dialogue box.

3 4

Clear the Show Tips on StartUp check box to turn the tip of the day OFF, select it to turn tip of the day ON. Click Close.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

63

Customise SET

This page is intentionally left blank.

64

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7 IQ3 QUICK TOURS The IQ3 Quick Tours are designed to show you the many features of SET. By following the tours, you will learn the basics of using SET to engineer an IQ system. There are three tours: The first Quick Tour 1 - The Basics: Shows you how to get started by creating a basic SET project, with simple strategies, documenting it, and creating a file ready for downloading to the controller. The second Quick Tour 2 - Beyond Basics: Shows you to use the more advanced features of SET, such as strategy blocks, Display and Directory modules, connectives, and editing the sequence table. The third Quick Tour 3 - Making SET Work for You: Shows you how to get the best out of SET by creating your own strategy blocks, adding your own sensor definitions to the library, and using SET to reverse engineer a controller. If you require more information than that provided in the tours, the rest of this manual provides descriptions of all the tasks that can be carried out using SET.

7.1

Quick Tour 1 - The Basics

This tour is a step-by-step tutorial that shows you how easy it is to use SET to engineer an IQ system. This tour will show you how to create a simple project containing a single IQ controller, document it, and create an IQ3 file ready for downloading to the controller. Lesson 1- Creating a SET Project In this lesson, you will learn how to run SET, and create a new project. You will also learn about the SET Window. Starting SET. Creating a new SET Project. Understanding the SET Window. Lesson 2 - Adding a controller In this lesson, you will learn how to add a Lan, and an IQ controller to the project. Adding a Lan. Adding an IQ controller. Setting up the Address Module. Setting up the Sensor Type Modules. Setting up I/O Modules. Lesson 3 - Configuring the Strategy In this lesson, you will learn how to add modules to the strategy, edit module parameters, link them together, and add extra pages. Adding Modules to the Strategy. Moving Modules. Editing Modules. Linking Modules. Adding Pages. Lesson 4 - Documenting the Strategy In this lesson, you will learn how to control the version of the strategy, and print out a comprehensive report documenting the strategy. Defining the Strategy's Issue. Printing Project Documentation. Lesson 5 - Creating a Downloadable File In this lesson, you will learn how create a file for an individual IQ controller that can be downloaded to the controller using SET or another tool. Creating an IQ3 File.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

65

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.1

Lesson 1 - Starting SET

Before you can use SET it is necessary to start it. Starting SET: 1 On the Start menu point to All Programs, then point to Trend Control Systems, then point to System Engineering Tool and click System Engineering Tool. The Log onto SET dialogue box will be displayed.

2 3 4

In the User Name box click your name. In the Password box enter your password. Click OK. The SET dialogue box will be displayed.

This dialogue box provides access to the different functions of SET.

66

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.2

Lesson 1 - Creating a New SET Project

Every time you start SET, it lets you choose to open an existing project, create a new one, or to access other SET functions. For this tour, you will start from scratch, and create a new project. Creating a new project: 1 In the SET dialogue box, click Create New SET Project. 2 Click OK. The New Set Project dialogue box is displayed.

This dialogue box allows the details of the project to be specified. 3 4 5 6 7

In the Project Name box enter IQ3 SET Tours to specify the name of the project. In the Project Number box enter 12345678 to specify the project number. In the Client box enter My Company Ltd to specify the client of the project. In the Project Details box enter IQ3 SET Tour Project to specify the project details. In the Site Name box enter IQ3 SET Tour Project to specify the human readable site code for devices in the project.

Note that all devices in the project will be assigned the same human readable site code. 8

Check the machine-readable site code displayed in the Site GUID box. A new code can be generated by clicking Change. For the purposes of this tour use the one generated.

Note that all devices in the project will be assigned the same machine-readable site code. 9

Click OK.

SET will now create the project. A directory with the name specified as the project name is created in the Set Projects directory. In this case a directory called IQ3 SET Tours will be created.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

67

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.3

Lesson 1 - Understanding the SET Window

Once the project has been created, SET will display the project in the SET Window shown below. The SET Window has three areas, the Strategy Library, Project View, and the Display Area.

Strategy Library The Strategy Library displays the reusable pieces of strategy known as strategy blocks that have been created. Project View The Project View automatically appears on the left of the SET Window when the mouse is moved to the far left of the window. It is divided into two separate areas, the Device View, and the Plant View. The Device View section contains all the controllers in the project arranged by Lan. The Plant View enables the strategy within controllers to be located by HVAC equipment type. Display Area The Display Area will contain the selected strategy page once a controller has been added to the project. A strategy can be spread over several pages; and links made between the pages if necessary. 7.1.4

Lesson 2 - Adding a Lan

After the project has been created, the next step to engineering the system is to add the controllers to the project. Before this can be done, the Lans on which they sit must be added to the project. For this tour, you will add a single Lan (Lan 99). Adding a Lan:

1

68

to display it, and then in the Device View right-click IQ3 SET If the Project View is not displayed click Tours and on the displayed menu click Insert Lan. The Lan Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 2 3 4 5

In the Lan Number box enter 99 to specify the number of the Lan that is to be added. In the Label box enter IQ3 SET Tours to define the label for the Lan. In the Details box enter Contains controllers for the SET Tours to specify a description for the Lan. Click OK.

The Lan will be added to the Device View.

7.1.5

Lesson 2 - Adding an IQ Controller

Once the Lans have been added to the project, the controllers for which the strategy is to be created need to be added to the Device View. For this tour, you will add a single IQ3xcite/96 v1.0 at address 24 on Lan 99. Adding an IQ controller: 1 In the Device View right-click Lan 099, which is the Lan to which the controller is to be added and on the displayed menu click point to Insert Device and click Controller. The Controller dialogue box is displayed.

2

In the Address box enter 24 to specify the network address of the controller.

The network address is the address of the controller on the IQ network, set on the controller’s address switch. It can be set anywhere in the range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. Each address on a Lan must be unique. 3 4 5 6

In the Device Type box click IQ 3xx to define the type of controller. In the Firmware Version box click 1.3 from to define the firmware version of controller. In the Hardware Variant box click IQ 3xcite/96 from to define the hardware variant of controller. In the Name box enter IQ3 SET Tours Controller 1 to specify the name for the controller.

The details entered about the project have been automatically entered in the Details box if required this can be changed. For this tour leave it unchanged. 7

In the Engineer box enter your own name to specify the name of the engineer who designed the strategy.

The engineer’s name specifies the name of the engineer who has designed the strategy. This is useful if someone other than the engineer who designed the strategy is creating the SET project. 8 9 10 11

Click OK. The IQ Address Module dialogue box is displayed. It is possible to specify the address module parameters now, or leave it until later. For the purposes of this tour, click OK to leave it until later, and move on to the next stage. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed. This enables the sensor type modules to be specified now, or later. For the purposes of the tour click Exit to leave it until later. The I/O setup dialogue box is displayed. It is possible to add the I/O modules that are to be connected to the controller now, or leave it until later. For the purposes of the tour click Exit to leave it until later.

SET will now add the new controller to the Device View, and display a blank strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

69

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.6

Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Address Module

Before continuing with specifying the strategy for the controller, it is necessary to go back, and set up the address module. Normally, you would do this when the controller was added. Setting up the address module: 1 Currently the blank strategy page created for the controller should be displayed. On the Device menu click Address Module. This displays the IQ Address Module dialogue box.

You will notice that a number of the parameters are greyed out this is because this information would normally be set up using the IP Tool. If the Read Only check box next to a parameter is selected the parameter will be greyed out and not downloaded to the controller. For the purposes of this tour we shall assume that the following parameters have been set up using IP Tool: Identifier, Local Lan, Local Node, and Supervisor Port Address, 2

In the Attribute 2 box enter FLR4:*.

This is an optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified, either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. All the other parameters are set up in a similar way by entering the required value into dialogue box, or making selections from the list. The rest of the parameters do not need to be specified for this tour. 3

70

Click OK. The dialogue box is closed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.7

Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Network Module

After setting up the address module it is necessary to set up the network module. Note that this is only required for IQ3 controllers with v1.3 firmware of greater. Setting up the network module: 1 Currently the blank strategy page created for the controller should be displayed. On the Device menu click Network Module. This displays the Network Module dialogue box.

You will notice that a number of the parameters are greyed out this is because this information would normally be set up using the IP Tool. If the Read Only check box next to a parameter is selected the parameter will be greyed out and not downloaded to the controller. 2

In the Addressing Mode box select Obtain Automatically, to set the controller to obtain its Ethernet settings from a DHCP server.

All the other parameters are set up in a similar way by entering the required value into dialogue box, or making selections from the list. The rest of the parameters do not need to be specified for this tour. 3

Click OK. The dialogue box is closed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

71

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.8

Lesson 2 - Setting Up the Sensor Type Modules

It is now necessary to set up the sensor type modules. The sensor type modules define how an electrical input is scaled to provide a meaningful value in engineering units. SET uses a library of sensor definitions that contain all the necessary settings to set up sensor type modules in order to correctly scale the value of a sensor that uses that sensor type. Setting up the sensor type modules is simply a matter of selecting from which one of the sensor definitions in the library the module should take its settings. If required, additional definitions can be added to the library as described in ‘Quick Tour 3- Making SET Work for You’. Setting up the sensor type modules: 1 On the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

2 3

In the Number box click 01- to select the sensor type module that is to be set up. In the Sensor Part Number box click TE/TS to select the sensor definition that is to be used for sensor type module 1 from the library. Click Apply. The parameters for the sensor to be used by the sensor type module are displayed on the right of the dialogue box, and the characteristics are shown in the graph. Complete the set up of the sensor type modules by specifying two other modules as described in the table below.

4 5

Module No 2 3 6

Value AQ/D range 0 to 100 H/DT/H range 0 to 95

Click Exit.

The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of sensors that can be selected. Note that if required, the parameters of the sensor type modules can be defined individually without using definitions from the library.

72

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.9

Lesson 3 - Setting Up I/O Modules

The I/O modules used to interface between the controller and the HVAC equipment must be added to the strategy so that the sensors and drivers can be connected to them. To add an I/O module: 1 On the Device menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed.

2

Click Add. The I/O Module Setup dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Mod ID box click 2 to specify the module ID.

Note that this must match the address set on the I/O modules address switch. 4 5 6 7

In the Module Type box click xcite/IO/4UI/4AO to specify the type of I/O module In the Label box enter I/O Module 2 to specify a label that identifies the module. Click OK to return to the I/O Setup dialogue box. Click Exit.

7.1.10 Lesson 3 - Adding Modules to the Strategy Modules are added to the strategy by placing them onto a page. Adding modules to a page:

1 2

to display the Project View and double-click Os 024 - SET Tours Controller in the Device View Click (the controller whose strategy to which the modules are to be added). The tree structure will be expanded. Double-click Strategy Pages to display a list of all the pages created for the controller so far. The structure should appear as shown below.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

73

IQ3 Quick Tours

3

Currently there is only one page (P02 - Page 2) double-click it.

Tip: Steps (2) and (3) can be replaced by right-clicking the controller and on the displayed menu clicking Open from the displayed menu. This will display the first page of the controller’s strategy. Note that SET labels the first page ‘Page 2’ because although page 2 is the first true strategy page, page 1 is the title page of the strategy documentation. The first module that is to be added to the page is Sensor 1, an external sensor. 4

to display the Next Module List dialogue box The Next Module List dialogue box is displayed Click which enables the sequence step for the next module that is to be added to the page to be specified.

5 6 7

In the Next box in the Sequence Steps area enter 1. Click OK. Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Inputs and click External Sensor. The Select Module dialogue box is displayed allowing the sensor module number to be selected.

74

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 8

In the Module Number box enter 1 and click OK. The cursor changes to a hand , and the module appears on the screen. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the page. For now, just place the module anywhere. You will learn to move modules later in this lesson.

9

Note that the Parameters dialogue box for the module may be displayed. If this is the case, don’t worry, Auto Edit is enabled, click OK to close the dialogue box. 10

Now add the modules listed in the table below to the page.

Module Type Inputs- Knob Other - Loop Drivers - Analog

Module Number 1 1 1

Sequence Step N/A 2 3

7.1.11 Lesson 3 - Moving Modules All the modules for this part of the strategy are now on the page, however positions will probably need to be changed to make the strategy easy to understand. It is therefore necessary to move the modules around on the page. For the purposes of this tour, you should move the modules until the page looks like the page below.

Moving modules: 1 Point to S1, (the module to be moved), and hold down the left mouse button. 2 Drag the module to its new location (the top left of the page). 3 Release the mouse button. Sensor 1 is now in the correct position. 4 Move the rest of the modules around on the page until it appears the same as the diagram above.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

75

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.12 Lesson 3 - Editing Modules Now that the modules are in position, their configuration parameters can be edited so that they function as required. Editing Modules: 1 Double-click S1 (the module whose configuration parameters are to be edited). The dialogue shown below will be displayed.

2

In the Details box enter Space Temperature to specify further information about the module.

The details parameter for a module provides the ability to describe the module, how it functions, and how it operates. This parameter is not sent to the controller. 3

In the Label box enter Space Temperature to specify the label for the module.

The label parameter is sent to the controller (defining the ‘$’ parameter). It specifies a user-friendly label for the module, which can be up to 20-characters long. 4 5 6 7 8 9

In the I/O Module box click 02 – I/O Module 2 to specify the I/O module supplying the sensors input. In the I/O Channel box click 1 to specify the channel on I/O module supplying the sensors input. In the Type box click 01 – Trend Thermistor to specify the sensor type module to be used by the sensor. In the High Alarm Limit box enter 45 to specify the high alarm limit parameter. In the Low Alarm Limit box enter 20 to specify the low alarm limit parameter. Click OK.

The parameters for the other modules are defined in a similar way, by entering the required text in the appropriate box, selecting from a list, clicking buttons, or selecting checkboxes. 10

Specify the parameters of the other modules on the page according to the table below.

Module K1

L1 D1

76

Parameter Details Label Units Pin Level Top of Range Bottom of Range Value Label Details Label I/O Module

Value Occupied Setpoint Occupied Setpoint DegC 99 30 15 22 Control Loop 1 AHU 1 Driver AHU 1 Driver 02 – I/O Module 2

Tips Type the value into the appropriate box, or select the required value from the list.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours Module

Parameter In Phase Channel Antiphase Channel Start Delay

Value 5 6 10

Tips

A full description of the parameters for each module is provided in the ‘IQ Modules’ section of this manual. 7.1.13 Lesson 3 - Linking Modules Editing the modules does not define all their configuration parameters. Parameters that come from other modules in the strategy are specified by linking the modules together. Modules must be linked together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly. SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent silly mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. Linking Modules: 1 Click output V of S1, and drag the mouse to the source P of L1 (the parameter that is to be the destination). The cursor will change to a green circle

.

If the source is not a suitable type for the destination, SET will display a red cross a green circle 2 3

; if it is suitable, it will display

.

Release the mouse button. Make the other links in the same way until the links are as shown below. Module Parameter K1 D L1 D

Linked to L1 O D1 S

7.1.14 Lesson 3 - Adding Pages The strategy may require more modules than can be placed on a single page, if this is the case, additional pages can be added. Adding pages: 1 Click located at the bottom of the SET Window. A new strategy page will be created for the controller. If you move the mouse to the left of the window to display the Project View, you will see that a new page (P03 - Page 3) is now visible in the Device View. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

77

IQ3 Quick Tours 2

Now the new page has been created, practice what you have learned so far in the tour, and add the following modules. Module S2

K2

L2 D2

3

Parameter Details Label Type High Alarm Limit Low Alarm Limit Details Label Units Pin Level Top of Range Bottom of Range Output Value Label Details Label I/O Module In Phase Channel Antiphase Channel Start Delay

Value Space Temperature Space Temperature 01 – Trend Thermistor 45 20 Occupied Setpoint Occupied Setpoint DegC 99 30 15 22 Control Loop 2 AHU 2 Driver AHU 2 Driver 02 – I/O Module 2 7 8 10

Tips Type the value into the appropriate box, or select the required value from the list.

Move, edit, and link them until the page looks like the one below.

You can move between pages using the next and previous page buttons. Click to goto the previous page, or click to goto the next page. Alternatively, you could double-click the required page from the Device View in the Project View.

78

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.1.15 Lesson 4 - Defining the Strategy’s Issue Details about the strategy for a particular controller can be kept. They describe the current issue, and enable a description of the changes made since the previous version to be recorded. These details are included on the strategy pages when they are printed out. Define the Strategy’s Issue: 1 Ensure that the page you have just created is displayed, and on the Device menu click Issue Details. The Drawing Issue dialogue box is displayed.

2

This is the first issue of the strategy so click New to create a new issue.

The issue number is incremented to 1. It is now necessary to specify any changes made, and any pages that were changed. Because this is the first issue of the strategy, you will enter First Issue in both cases. 3 4 5 6 7

In the PCN/Details box enter First Issue. In the Pages Affected box enter First Issue. In the Date Approved box enter today’s date to specify the date the strategy was approved. In the Approved box enter your name. Click OK.

7.1.16 Lesson 4 - Print Project Documentation Once the issue details have been specified, you can print out the project documentation. It is possible to print out all the pages for a particular controller, a selected range, or just the current page. SET also provides a number of tables for each controller, which specify items, such as the sequence table etc, that do not appear on the strategy pages. It is possible to print out either all of these tables or none. For the purposes of this tour, you will print out everything. Printing the Tables and Pages: 1 In the Device View double-click P02 - Page:2 to display a strategy page for the controller for which the project documentation is required. 2 Click . SET will now print the project documentation. 7.1.17 Lesson 5 - Creating an IQ3 File In the first five lessons of this tour, you have created a strategy for an IQ controller. That strategy must be downloaded to the actual controller using SET. Before the strategy can be downloaded, a downloadable file must be created. For the purposes of this tour, you will create an IQ3 file. Creating an IQ2 file: 1 In the Device View double-click P02 - Page:2 to display a strategy page for the controller. 2 On the Strategy menu click Create IQ3File. Once SET has created the file, it displays a message indicating that the file has been created.

3

Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

79

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2

Quick Tour 2 - Beyond Basics

This tour is a step-by-step tutorial that takes you beyond the basic principles of using SET. It introduces features that will enable you to control how the strategy operates, and to speed up the process of creating better strategy. It builds on the project created in tour 1 using new techniques to expand the strategy. Lesson 1- More on Linking Modules In this lesson, you will learn more about linking modules, linking between pages, and linking to a specific value. Loading an Existing Project. Linking Between Pages. Linking to a Specific Value. Lesson 2 - Making Strategy Pages Easier to Understand In this lesson, you will learn how to open a project created earlier, make the strategy easier to understand by adding descriptive text to pages, and using TO Connectives. Adding Text to a Page. Using TO Connectives. Lesson 3 - Setting Up Display and Directory Modules In this lesson, you will learn how to set up display and directory modules to provide a structured way of accessing information from a particular controller with devices such as a Network Display Panel, or to provide graphical display pages. Principles of Display and Directory modules. Adding Directory Modules. Adding Dynamic Display Modules. Adding Static Display Modules. Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Backdrops). Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Moving Items). Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Linking Pages). Lesson 4 - Setting Up the Sequence Table In this lesson, you will learn how edit the sequence table by changing the sequence step for particular modules. Changing a Module's Sequence Step. Event Driven Strategy. Lesson 5 - Using Strategy Blocks In this lesson, you will learn how to re-use common pieces of strategy by making use of strategy blocks. Principles of Using Strategy Blocks. Using Strategy Blocks.

80

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2.1

Lesson 1 - Loading an Existing Project

This second tour uses the project you created in Tour 1, with additional modules and pages as a starting point. Therefore, it is necessary to load that project first. To load an existing project: 1 On the Start menu point to All Programs, then point to Trend Control Systems, then point to System Engineering Tool and click System Engineering Tool. The Log onto SET dialogue box will be displayed.

Note that if users have been disabled the Log onto SET dialogue box will not be displayed and you should go straight to step (5). 2 3 4

In the User Name box click your name. In the Password box enter your password. Click OK. The SET dialogue box will be displayed.

5 6

Click Open Existing SET Project. Click More Files and then click OK. The Open dialogue box is displayed.

7 8

Double-click Tours, and then double click IQ3 SET Tour 2. In the list at the bottom of the dialogue box click 12345678.tset.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

81

IQ3 Quick Tours 9

Click Open.

If SET is already running, you can still load an existing project by displaying the Project View, and on the File menu clicking Open/New Project. This is a similar project to the one you created in Tour 1, however some changes have been made. 7.2.2

Lesson 1 - Linking Between Pages

The nature of IQ strategies means that modules on one page may need to use the output from a module on another page as an input. SET uses connectives to enable these links between pages. Linking between pages:

1

Click to display the Project View and double-click Os 024 - SET Tours Controller in the Device View (the controller whose strategy to which the modules are to be added). The tree structure will be expanded. Double-click Strategy Pages to display a list of all the pages created for the controller so far. Double click p03 - Page: 3 to go to the second page. Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click on Connective. The Connectives dialogue box is displayed.

2 3 4

The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to find the required module. Icon

Description All connectives

Icon

Description Sensor connectives

Analogue node connectives

Switch connectives

Digital Input connectives

Undefined connectives

Digital node connectives

Time Module connectives

Knob connectives

System connectives

XNC interface module connectives 5 6 7 8

82

Click S1V Space Temperature. You may need to use the scroll bars to locate it. Click Select. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed. Position it to the left of L2. Click the left mouse button. A connective to output (V) of module S1 is added to the page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 9 10

Now add a connective to I1S Manual Override, and place it above the connective to S1, and a connective to Z1V Occupation Time Zone and place it at the bottom of the page. Click Exit.

It is now necessary to link the connective to the module to which it is supplying an input. 11 12 7.2.3

Click the connective to S1V, and drag the mouse to link it to the P attribute of L2. Now link the connective to I1S to the A attribute of L2, and the connective to Z1V to the S attribute of L2. Lesson 1 - Linking to a Specific Value

SET allows you link directly to a specific value by using an analogue node module. For this tour, you will add link the U attribute of L1 to a specific node with a value fixed at 10. Linking to a specific value: 1 to go to the first page (P02 - Page: 2). 2 Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Inputs and click Analogue Node. This places an analogue node module on the page. 3 Double-click the module that has just been added. The Analogue Module Parameters dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7

In the Label box enter Loop 1 Unoccupied Setpoint to specify the label for the node. In the Value box enter 10 to specify the value of the node. Click OK. Move the module to the left of L1.

It is now necessary to link the module to the module to which it is supplying an input. 8 9

Click the output (D) of the module, and drag the mouse to link it to the U attribute of L1. Now add the following modules to the strategy, and link them. Page P02 - Page: 2 P03 - Page: 3 P03 - Page: 3

7.2.4

Label Manual Level for Loop 1 Loop 2 Unoccupied Setpoint Manual Level for Loop 2

Linked to L attribute of L1 U attribute of L2 L attribute of L2

Value 15 10 15

Lesson 2 - Adding Text to a Page

IQ strategies can sometimes be difficult to understand; an engineer will regularly write on the strategy drawings to explain of how a particular piece of strategy works. SET allows you to do this by entering text onto pages. For the purposes of this tour, you will add a title to the top of each page, along with some explanatory text. Adding Text to a Page: 1 Go to the first page (P02 - Page: 2). 2 Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Text. This displays the Display Text dialogue box.

3 4

In the box enter SET Tour Page 1 of 2. Click Size 5 to specify the size of the text.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

83

IQ3 Quick Tours 5 6 7 8

Click Bold to make the text bold. Click OK. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the top of the page in the centre. Click the left mouse button. The text is placed on the page.

If you wish, lines, circles and rectangles can be added to the pages in a similar way. 9

Now enter the text listed in the table below. Text Control Loop 1 SET Tour Page 2 of 2 Control Loop 2

7.2.5

Page (P02 - Page: 2) (P03 - Page: 3) (P03 - Page: 3)

Position Below L1 Top of page in Centre Below L2

Formatting Size 1 not bold Size 5 bold Size 1 not bold

Lesson 2 - Using TO Connectives

When links are made between modules on different pages, the only indication of the link is the connective on the page containing the destination module. There is no indication on the page supplying the value that a link exists. SET allows you to indicate where a module is by providing a link to a module on another page using a to connective. For the purposes of this tour you will add to connectives on the first page indicating links to modules on the other page. Using TO Connectives: 1 Go to the first page (P02 - Page: 2). 2 Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click To Connective. The cursor changes to a hand . 3 Move the cursor to the to the right of I1 to position the to connective, and click the left mouse button. The to connective will be placed on the page. 4 Click the output S of I1. Note that the pointer will change to a 5 6

when it is moved over a parameter that can be linked.

Drag the mouse to the to connective. SET will display a green circle Release the mouse button.

.

The to connective will now indicate the connection between the output of I1, and the A attribute - Manual Override of L2 on page 3. 7

Now add some more to connectives to page 2 to indicate the other links to modules on page 3. These are described in the table below. Linked to Output of S1 Output of Z1

7.2.6

Location To the right of S1 To the right of Z1

Lesson 3 - Principles of Display and Directory Modules

Display and directory modules provide the ability to create pages of information that are defined within the controller. These pages can then be accessed from a web browser, or by supervisors/displays to present the user with meaningful information from the controller without the need for separate configuration. These displays are stored in a hierarchy, which enables the user to navigate to the required information. Directory modules provide that hierarchy, and display modules define what information is displayed within the hierarchy. The hierarchy below illustrates how display and directory modules are used. The directory modules are shown in bold text and the display modules in italic text. Main Plant (Directory Module 0) |----

AHUs (Directory Module 1)

|----

AHU 1 (Directory Module 2)

|

|-----

Value of Sensor 1 (Display Module 1)

|

|-----

Value of Driver 1 (Display Module 2)

|----

AHU 2 (Directory Module 3)

|

|-----

Value of Sensor 1 (Display Module 3)

|

|-----

Value of Driver 2 (Display Module 4)

84

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2.7

Lesson 3 - Adding Directory Modules

The first stage in setting up display and directory modules is to create the hierarchy by adding directory modules. For the purposes of this tour, you will create the hierarchy shown below:

Adding directory modules: 1 Go to the first page (P02 - Page: 2). 2 Click , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Display and Directory View box right-click P0 and on the displayed menu click Insert Directory. The Display and Directory dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7

In the Title box enter AHUs. Leave the 0 in the Pin level box. This enables all users to access the module. Click OK, a directory module called AHUs is added. Now add another directory module called AHU 1 one level down in the hierarchy, by right-clicking the directory module you have just added (AHUs), and clicking Insert Directory on the displayed menu, and entering the name of the module. Again leave the PIN Level at 0. Repeat the process to build up the hierarchy shown above. Right-click P0 (the directory module) and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters and edit the title it so that it is called Main Plant.

8 9

The number of directory modules that have been added is shown in the Directory box at the bottom of the dialogue box.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

85

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2.8

Lesson 3 - Adding Dynamic Display Modules

Now that the required hierarchy of directory modules has been created, the dynamic display modules need to be added to define the values that are displayed. Adding dynamic display modules: 1 In the Display Items box click S1 and drag it on onto the AHU 1 in the Display and Directory View box. 2 Release the mouse. A display module that displays the value of S1 is added. 3 Now add some more display modules until the structure in the Display and Directory View box appears as shown below.

The number of display modules that have been added is shown in the Display box at the bottom of the dialogue box. 7.2.9

Lesson 3 - Adding Static Display Modules

Now that the required hierarchy of directory modules and dynamic display modules need has been created, the static display modules need to be added to define the other information that is to be displayed. Adding Static Display Modules: 1 In the Display and Directory View box right-click AHU 1 and on the displayed menu click Insert Static Display Item. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

2 3 4

In the Label box enter Filter. Click OK. The static display module is added that will display the text ‘Filter’. Add more static display modules until the structure appears as shown below.

The number of display modules that have been added is shown in the Display box at the bottom of the dialogue box.

86

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2.10 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Backdrops) Having added the display and directory modules, you will now set up their parameters to correctly define the IQ3 controller’s graphical display pages. In this part of the tour you will specify a backdrop for the page. Specify a backdrop: 1 Right-click AHU 1, and on the displayed menu click Edit Web Page. The Graphical Display Page Editor is displayed as shown below.

2

Right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click Change next to Backdrop. The Select Backdrop dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6

Click Backdrop.jpg in the list. Click OK. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

87

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.2.11 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Moving Items) Having specified the backdrop you will move the items on the page to the required position. When they are first added to the SET places them in a table in the top left of the page. Move the items: 1 Point to AHU 2, (the item to be moved), and hold down the left mouse button. 2 Drag the item to its new location, (below the backdrop on the left). 3 Release the mouse button. 4 Move the rest of the items around on the page until it appears the same as the diagram below.

7.2.12 Lesson 3 - Setting up Graphical Display Pages (Linking Pages) The page now looks more or less as required it is now necessary to create a link between this page, and the page for AHU 2. You will also create a link to the detail page for sensor 1. Create a link to another graphical display pages: 1 Right-click AHU 2, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

2 3

In the Link Reference box enter trendModule:Views\Main Plant\Ahus\Ahu 2\Index.htm. Click OK.

Create a link to a module detail page: 1 Right-click Space Temperature xx.xx DegC, and on the displayed menu click Properties The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

2 3

88

Click Make a link to the item’s detail page. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 4 5 6

Now create a link to the module detail page for driver 1. Click OK to close the Graphical Display Page Editor. Click OK to close the Display and Directory Setup dialogue box.

7.2.13 Lesson 4 - Changing a Module’s Sequence Step If required, the position of a module in the sequence table can be changed. If you display the second page (P03 above the module) and D2 is located at Page: 3) you will notice that the sequence step of L2 is 5 (indicated by step 7. Although this does not really change the strategy, you will change the position of L2 in the sequence table to 6. Changing a module’s sequence step: 1 Go to the second page (P03 - Page: 3). 2 Right-click L2, and on the displayed menu click Sequence Step. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Module’s Sequence box click 005.

4 5

Click . This will remove L2 from sequence step 5. In the Sequence Table box click 006.

6

. 006 will now appear in the Module’s Sequence box, indicating that the module is at sequence Click step 6 in the sequence table. Click OK. Now complete the modifications to the sequence table by moving D1 to sequence step 4, L1 to sequence step 3, and S1 to sequence step 2.

7 8

7.2.14 Lesson 4 - Event Driven Strategy Event driven strategy can be used in IQ3 controllers to cause a particular piece of strategy to be processed when an event occurs. This is useful for lighting strategies where the light must be turned on as soon as the switch is turned on. Event driven strategy is a block of strategy that performs a particular isolated function. When any input in any module in that block of strategy is changed the strategy will be processed. Care should be taken to ensure that the output of a module in the block does not change the input of a previous module otherwise the strategy will continue to be processed in a loop. The modules in a block of event driven strategy do not appear in the sequence table. For this tutorial we will create a piece of strategy that turns the lights on during occupancy, and off during non occupancy, but also allows the lights to be turned on for a period during non occupancy. To set up event driven strategy: 1 Click , located at the bottom of the SET Window to create another page. 2 Add the modules in the table below to the page, and edit their parameters by double-clicking them to display the Parameters dialogue box. Module Type Time zone Digital Driver

External digital Input

Logic Combination

Parameter Label Label Details I/O Module In Phase Channel Label I/O Module In Phase Channel Label J K

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Value Lighting Occupancy Lighting Lighting 00 – Base IO 11 Light Switch 00 – Base IO 2 Lighting E F

89

IQ3 Quick Tours 3

Link the modules as described in the table below: Module Type I2 Z2 G1

Module Parameter S Output D

Linked To G1E G1F D3S

To make the strategy event driven all the modules must be removed from the sequence table, in this case G1, and D3. 4 5

, and then clicking Remove the modules from the sequence table by clicking to change the pointer to a G1, and D3. Once the required modules have been removed from the sequence table, right-click. The cursor will change back to normal.

For mode details about removing modules from the sequence table see the ‘Remove Modules from the Sequence Table’ section of this manual. 7.2.15 Lesson 5 - Principles of Using Strategy Blocks Using strategy blocks will save a great deal of time if you regularly re-use pieces of strategy. It is possible to use an entire strategy block in a strategy, or to use individual pages from the strategy block. The strategy blocks available are displayed in the Strategy Library, and can simply be dragged into the strategy as required. 7.2.16 Lesson 5 - Using Strategy Blocks For this tour you will use the Alarm Handling strategy blocks to add strategy. To use a strategy block: 1 Display any of the strategy pages.

2 3

to display the Strategy Library. Click Expand the tree to show the alarm handling strategy blocks. The Strategy Library will now look like the diagram below.

4

Click Route - Time Enabled and drag it onto the strategy page.

The pointer will appear as a placed. 5

90

, and will change to a

when over an area where the strategy block can be

Release the mouse button. The Block Settings dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours

The dialogue box enables the module numbers of the modules being used to be specified. SET automatically uses the next available module for each type of module. For the purpose of this tour the defaults will be used. 6

Click OK.

SET will create a new page for the strategy, and add the modules in the strategy block to it.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

91

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.3

Quick Tour 3 - Making SET Work for You

This tour is a step-by-step tutorial that shows you how to use some of the more advanced features of SET, and how SET can be customised to suit your requirements. Lesson 1 - Backwards Engineering an IQ Controller In this lesson, you will learn how to upload the strategy in the required format, and then import that file into SET. What is Backwards Engineering? Uploading the Strategy in the Required Format. Importing an IQ3 File. Lesson 2 - Creating Your Own Strategy Block In this lesson, you will learn how to create your own strategy block. Principles of Strategy Blocks. Creating a Strategy Block. Lesson 3 - Adding Sensor Definitions to the Library In this lesson, you will learn how to add sensors to the library of sensors that can be used to quickly set up the parameters for sensor type modules. Adding a Sensor to the Sensor Library. Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar In this lesson, you will learn about the Command Line toolbar, how to use it to find modules in the strategy, and how to add modules to strategy pages. The Command Line toolbar. Using the Command Line toolbar to Find Modules. Using the Command Line toolbar to Add Modules. Lesson 5 - Comparing Strategy In this lesson, you will learn how to compare the strategy held by SET with strategy in the actual controller. Comparing two Strategies. 7.3.1

Lesson 1 - What is Backwards Engineering?

Backwards engineering is the process of taking an IQ controller for which there is no documentation of the strategy, and getting it to a situation where the strategy can be documented and modified using SET. This means that controllers engineered without SET, or for which the SET project has been lost, can be modified using all the latest features of SET. Backward engineering has two separate stages: Uploading the strategy. Importing the strategy. 7.3.2

Lesson 1 - Uploading the Strategy in the Required Format

The controller that is to be backwards engineered the strategy must be uploaded from the controller in IQ3 format using SET. Once the file is uploaded, ensure that the filename is in the format Lxxxnyyy.IQ3. Where ‘xxx’ specifies the Lan number, and ‘yyy’ specifies the network address. E.g. the file for controller 25 on Lan 24 would be L024n025.IQ3. For the purposes of this tour an IQ3 file has been provided in the ‘c:\set projects\IQ3 tour 3\upload’ directory, so it is not necessary to upload a file. 7.3.3

Lesson 1 - Importing an IQ3 File

Once the strategy has been uploaded in a suitable format, the next stage in the process is to import the file into the required SET project. You will import the IQ3 file supplied for the purpose of this tour located in the ‘c:\set projects\IQ3 tour 3\upload’ directory. Importing an IQF File: 1 Open the project in the C:\Set Projects\Tour\IQ3 SET Tour 3 directory as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 On the Project menu click Import IQ3 File. The Select IQ3 file to import dialogue box is displayed.

92

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours

3 4

Navigate to the C:\Set Projects\Tours\IQ3 SET Tour 3\Upload directory, and click L099n025.IQ3. Click Open.

SET will now import the file, creating the controller 25, adding four strategy pages, and putting the strategy into the specified locations. Once the process is complete, SET displays the final page containing strategy. 5

Compare the strategy of the controller that has just been imported with that of controller 24. You will notice slight differences in the layout of the two strategies, in particular, the connectives are not reproduced (although the modules inputs are all specified correctly), and some modules may be overlapping slightly.

The strategy can now be documented and engineered using SET. 7.3.4

Lesson 2 - Principles of Strategy Blocks

Strategy blocks allow standard pieces of strategy to be re-used without the need to recreate the strategy each time it is required. You can build up a library of different strategy blocks for all the different standard pieces of strategy you use. When you create a strategy block all the links between modules are retained, as is the relative position of the modules on the page. The actual modules used are determined at the time the strategy block is used by the appropriate pointer (e.g. if a logic module is used, and the logic pointer is set to 5, the first logic module used will be logic module 5). The sequence pointer determines the sequence step of first module in the sequence table. SET prompts for the actual module that is to be used when the strategy block used. Each strategy block can be made up of several pages of strategy, and it is possible to use the entire strategy block, or just a particular page. 7.3.5

Lesson 2 - Creating a Strategy Block

For the purpose of this tour you will create a plant block consisting of two pages, similar to the strategy in Tour 1. Creating a strategy block:

1 2

to display the Strategy Library. Click Right-click the Custom and on the displayed menu click New Group. The Enter Group Name dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the box enter IQ3 Tour as the name of the group. Click OK. Right click IQ3 Tour and on the displayed menu click New Strategy Block. The Strategy Block Properties dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

93

IQ3 Quick Tours

6 7 8 9 10 11

In the Block Name box enter Tour 3 to specify the name of the strategy block. In the Controller Type box click IQ3 to specify the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Firmware Version box click 1.3 to specify the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be used. In the Revision box enter 1 to specify the revision number of the strategy block. In the Group box ensure that IQ3 tour is selected. In the Details box enter SET Tour 3 strategy block.

For the purposes of this tour leave the other fields blank. 12

Click OK.

SET will now create a strategy block called Tour 3 and open a blank strategy page ready for strategy to be added. Note that the strategy page is green to indicate that a strategy block is being edited. 13 14

Click to add a second page. Add the following modules to the strategy pages as described in the ‘Configure the Controller Strategy’ section of this manual.

Module Sensor Type 1

Page N/A

I/O Module

N/A

S1

1

K1

1

L1

1

D1

1

94

Parameter Sensor Part Scaling Range Mod ID Module Type Label Sequence Step Details Label Type High Alarm Limit Low Alarm Limit Details Label Units Pin Level Top of Range Bottom of Range Output Value Sequence Step Label Sequence Step Details

Value H/DT/T -40 to +110 Type 5 2 Xcite/IO/4UI/4AO I/O Module 2 1 Space Temperature Space Temperature 01 – Trend Thermistor 45 20 Occupied Setpoint Occupied Setpoint DegC 99 30 15 22 2 Control Loop 1 3 AHU 1 Driver

Links N/A N/A

V linked to L1 P

D linked to L1 O

D linked to D1 S N/A

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours Module

Page

S2

2

K2

2

L2

2

D2

2

15 16

Parameter Label I/O Module In Phase Channel Antiphase Channel Start Delay Sequence Step Details Label Type High Alarm Limit Low Alarm Limit Details Label Units Pin Level Top of Range Bottom of Range Output Value Sequence Step Label Sequence Step Details Label I/O Module In Phase Channel Antiphase Channel Start Delay

Once the strategy block is complete click you want to save the changes. Click Yes.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Value AHU 1 Driver 02 – I/O Module 2 5 6 10 4 Space Temperature Space Temperature 01 – Trend Thermistor 45 20 Occupied Setpoint Occupied Setpoint DegC 99 30 15 22 5 Control Loop 2 6 AHU 2 Driver AHU 2 Driver 02 – I/O Module 2 7 8 10

Links

V linked to L2 P

D linked to L2 O

D linked to D2 S N/A

to close the strategy page. A dialogue box is displayed asking if

95

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.3.6

Lesson 3 - Adding a Sensor Definition to the Library

SET uses a library of sensor definitions, which enable sensor type modules to be defined quickly. This library contains definitions that enable the sensor type module to be set up for all the standard sensors. If you regularly use sensors for which definitions do not exist in the library, you can add them to the library so that they will always be available for use. In this lesson, you will add a sensor definition to the library. Adding a sensor definition to the library: 1 On the Device menu click Sensor Types. This displays the Sensor Type dialogue box.

2

In the Number box click 04 - to specify an unused sensor type module (this could be any unused sensor type module). In the Sensor Part Number box enter Tour 3 to specify the part number for the sensor. In the Scaling Range box enter 90 - 110, to specify the range for the sensor. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter Tour 3 90 - 110, to specify the reference for the sensor. Click Edit.

3 4 5 6

The dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate parameters to be specified. It is necessary to define the output value for a specific input value. The number of values entered depends on the sensor’s characteristics, and how accurate the reading needs to be. 7

In the first box in the Input (X) column enter 0.486, and in the first box in the Output (Y) column enter 110, to specify the sensor’s scaling parameters. Specify the other parameters for the sensor to those listed in the table below.

8

Input (X) 0.555 0.636 0.73 0.839 9 10 11 12 13

Output (Y) 105 100 95 90

In the Input Type box enter Thermistor (KOhms) to specify the type of input for the sensor. In the Upper Limit box enter 110 to specify sensor’s upper limit. In the Lower Limit box enter 90 to specify sensor’s lower limit. Once the sensor’s parameters are correctly specified, click Save to Library. Click Exit.

Note that sensor type module 4 in the controller has been set up to use the parameters specified. You may wish to remove this setting, if you are only setting up the library.

96

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

IQ3 Quick Tours 7.3.7

Lesson 4 - The Command Line Toolbar

The Command Line toolbar, shown below, enables many of SET’s commands to be performed simply by entering the appropriate command.

Using the Command Line toolbar can speed up use of SET enabling modules to be added to the strategy at a particular sequence step, or modules to be located quickly. The Command Line toolbar also allows other SET commands such as redrawing the screen, displaying another page, or zooming in and out. A full list of the commands that can be entered in the Command Line toolbar is provided in the ‘Command Line toolbar Commands’ section of this manual. The Command Line toolbar will be of particular use if you are familiar with using ACE, which was mainly driven by a similar process. In fact, most of the commands from ACE (where applicable) can be used in SET’s Command Line toolbar. 7.3.8

Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar to Find Modules

The Command Line toolbar can be used to find modules in the strategy. By entering the item reference (e.g. S1) to specify sensor 1) you can locate the page containing a particular module. For this tour, you will find the location of Loop 1. Using the Command Line toolbar to find modules: 1 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 2 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 3 In the Command Line toolbar enter L1, to specify the item reference for the module that is to be located. 4 Click . SET will now locate Loop 1 and display ‘L1 on Pages(s) 2’ in the Command Line toolbar indicating that loop 1 is located on page 2. 5

Repeat the process to locate other modules in the strategy. The item reference should be in the format shown below.

specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1specifies a sensor). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module (e.g. to find sensor 3 type S3). 7.3.9

Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar to Add Modules

The Command Line toolbar can be used to add modules to the strategy on the current strategy page. Adding modules in this way enables a particular module to be added to the strategy at a specific sequence step. This saves time if you wish to add a module completely out of sequence with the pointers. For this tour, you will add loop module 5 to the first page of strategy at step 56 in the sequence table. Using the Command Line toolbar to add modules: 1 Goto the first page of strategy for controller 24 (P02 - Page: 2) as described in the ‘Goto a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 3 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 4 In the Command Line toolbar enter L#5#56 to specify the module that is to be added. 5 Press Enter. The cursor changes to a hand , and an outline of the module appears on the screen. 6 Move the cursor to the right of Z1 and click. The module is placed on the page. 7.3.10 Lesson 5 - Comparing Two Strategies SET enables two strategies to be compared. It does this by comparing a strategy uploaded from an IQ controller with the strategy held by SET. For the purposes of this tour, you will compare an IQ3 file that has been supplied with the strategy for controller 24. When the comparison is performed, you can choose whether of not the strategy is updated to reflect the changes, and whether a report listing the differences is printed. To compare two strategies: 1 Display a strategy page for controller 24 on Lan 99 as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

97

IQ3 Quick Tours 2

On the File menu point to Compare and click IQ3. This displays the Open dialogue box.

3 4

Click Compare.iq3 to select the file that is to be compared with the strategy held by SET. Click Open. This displays the Compare and Update dialogue box.

5

Select the Update Database, Backup Database, and Print Report File check boxes.

Update Database will cause SET to update its strategy to be the same as the chosen file. Backup Database ensures that SET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it allowing the strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable. Print Report File causes SET to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified printer. 6

Click Start.

SET will now compare the strategy in the file Compare.iq3 with the strategy stored by SET, and modify the strategy in SET to be the same as the IQ3 file. It also prints out a report that describing the differences. From this report you can see that the settings for sensor type module 4 were different; in the IQ3 file the module had not been set up, whereas in SET it had. If you now look at sensor type module 4 you will see that it has been cleared down by the process. The report also shows that Loop 5 was not present in the IQ3 file, if you now check the first page of strategy, ‘L5’ has been removed.

98

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8 ENGINEER IQ CONTROLLERS This section describes the process of using SET to engineer IQ Controllers. Although SET can be used in the way that best suits individual needs, it is recommended that the procedure below be followed: Plan the System Specify the SET Project Create the Controllers Configure the Controller Strategy Add Text and Graphics to Strategy Pages Test the Strategy Download the Strategy Issue Project Documentation Backup the Project

8.1

Plan the System

Good planning is necessary prior to starting work because it reduces the actual amount of time spent engineering the system, reduces the number of errors, and produces a better result. It is important to understand the HVAC equipment that is being controlled, and the hardware that interfaces with it, to ensure that the strategy is written so that the controller correctly interfaces with the HVAC equipment. The HVAC equipment will need to be maintained; therefore it is necessary to know the maintenance intervals of the pieces of HVAC equipment so that this can be built into the strategy. It is also necessary to understand how the system is to be used so that the appropriate adjustments can be included. This is helpful in deciding on the setpoints, OSS settings etc. When engineering a system that uses the IQ network, it is not only necessary to understand the requirements of the control strategy within individual controllers; it is also necessary to understand how various controllers interact with each other. This enables IC Comms to be set up, and the devices’ addresses can be set up correctly.

8.2

Specify the SET Project

Having planned the system the next stage is to specify the SET project that is to be used. This is done by either: Creating a new SET project, or Opening an existing project, or Importing a SET project. 8.2.1

Create a Project

Creating a new project will create a directory in the c:\Set Projects directory in which to store all the files relating to the project. SET will automatically create sub-directories within it to store information (e.g. IQ3 files). If the default location of this directory is not suitable, a more suitable one can be specified by changing the base project directory as described in the ‘Specify Where Projects are Stored’ section of this manual. Create a project: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Create New SET Project. 3 Click OK. The New Set Project dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7 8

In the Project Name box enter the project name. In the Project Number box enter the project number. In the Client box enter the client name. In the Project Details box enter the project details. In the Site Name box enter human readable site code for devices in the project.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

99

Engineer IQ Controllers Note that all devices in the project will be assigned the same human readable site code. 9

Check the machine-readable site code displayed in the Site GUID box. A code can be generated by clicking Change.

Note that all devices in the project will be assigned the same machine-readable site code. 10 11

Click OK. If necessary, edit the project details.

Note that it is possible to create a project while SET is running by displaying the Project View, and on the File menu clicking Open/New Project to display the SET dialogue box. 8.2.2

Open a Project

SET projects can be opened as required. To open a project: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Open Existing SET Project. 3 In the list at the bottom of the dialogue box click the required project. To display a list of projects in another directory click Change, navigate to the directory containing the required project and click OK. The project should now appear in the list. To open a file not in the list click More Files then click OK to display the Open dialogue box, click the required file and click Open. To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 4

Click OK. The selected project will be opened.

To open a recent project or controller: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Open Recent SET File. 3 In the list at the bottom of the dialogue box click the required project (TSET files) or controller (IQ files). To display a list of projects in another directory click Change, navigate to the directory containing the required project and click OK. The project should now appear in the list. 4 Click OK. The selected project will be opened. Note that if opening a controller that is an IQ3/XNC the XNP Update Settings dialogue box may be displayed is the number of stores, inputs outputs and version stored in the SET file is different to those stored in the XNP file. Click Update to use the values stored in the XNP file, or Ignore to use the values stored in the SET File. Note that it is possible to open a project while SET is running by displaying the Project View, and on the File menu clicking Open/New Project to display the SET dialogue box. 8.2.3

Import a Project

The entire contents of a project can be imported from a SET.ZIP file. This enables a project to be restored from a backup, or moved between computers. To import a project: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is be displayed, click Import Project from ZIP. The Select Project Zip File dialogue box is displayed.

3

100

In the folder list click the zip file for the required project.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is displayed. 4 5

Click Open. A dialogue box is displayed to indicate the progress. When the process is complete, another dialogue box is displayed. Click OK.

If the project already exists, only information that is newer than the existing information will be imported. Note that it is possible to open a project while SET is running by displaying the Project View, and on the File menu clicking Open/New Project to display the SET dialogue box. 8.2.4

Edit Project Details

The project details describe the name of the project, the client name, and a reference number. They are specified when the project is created, but can be edited later if necessary. To edit the project details: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 3 In the Device View right-click the project name, and on the displayed menu click Project Details. The Project Details dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

Change the project details as required by entering the required text into the appropriate box. Once the details have been correctly specified, click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

101

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.2.5

Set up the Project's Remote Devices

For projects containing for IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater it is possible to specify a list of remote devices that can be used for all the controllers in the project. The remote device list should be placed in all devices on the network an contain as many devices (at least 2) from each subnet as possible (i.e. divide the number of slots in the list by the number of subnets) and be put in every device that supports the list. If automatic addressing is being used the devices must be specified using host names, and if manual addressing is being used the list should contain the devices with the lowest IP addresses. To set up the projects remote devices: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the address module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click Network Module on the displayed menu, or on the Device menu click Network Module. The Network Module dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Remote Devices box click

4 5 6 7 8 9

In the IP Address box enter the host name or IP address of the remote device. In the Subnet box enter the device’s subnet mask. Click OK. Repeat steps (3) to (6) until all the required devices have been specified. There is a maximum of 20 devices. Click Set Project Details. Click OK.

8.2.6

the Remote Device dialogue box is displayed.

Delete a SET Project

SET does not provide a facility for deleting a SET project. To remove a SET project from the system it is necessary to delete the subdirectory for the required project and all its contents from the c:\set projects directory using Windows Explorer.

8.3

Create the Controllers

When creating the controllers it is necessary to specify the structure of the network before beginning to configure the strategy for any controller. This is to ensure SET downloads the various strategies to the correct devices. The network structure is created by: Adding the Lans, and then Adding the controllers to those Lans. 102

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.3.1

Add a Lan

Lans must be added to the project to define the network structure of the site containing the actual controllers. To add a Lan: 1 Specify the project as described in the ‘Specify the SET Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 3 In the Device View click the top level of the project. 4 Right-click, and on the displayed menu click Insert Lan. The Lan Details dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the Lan Number box enter the number of the Lan (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10). 0 specifies a stand-alone Lan. In the Label box enter a label for the Lan. In the Details box enter a description for the Lan. Click OK.

6 7 8

8.3.1.1

Delete a Lan

If required, Lans that are no longer required can be deleted. To delete a Lan: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right-click the Lan that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Lan. 3 SET will ask for confirmation of the deletion, if you click Yes it will then ask it all the files associated with the Lan are to be deleted. Clicking Yes will remove the Lan from the project, and delete any associated files. Clicking No will remove the Lan from the project, but leave the files associated with it. 8.3.1.2

Edit Lan Details

It is possible to specify information about the Lans in the network structure, which can be viewed later. To edit details for a particular Lan: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right-click the Lan for which details are to be viewed, and on the displayed menu click Lan Details. The Lan Details dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the appropriate boxes enter the required details.

Note that it is not possible to change the Lan number. 4

Once the details have been specified, click OK.

8.3.2

Add Controllers

IQ3 controllers must be added to the project before their strategy can be specified. The table below describes the settings required for particular controllers options: Option IQ3 Controller with XNC support

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Required Setting Device Type Firmware version

IQ3xx 1.3 103

Engineer IQ Controllers Option Pre-IQ3 Controller with ADL Support Pre-IQ3 Controller with XNC Support

Required Setting Device Type Firmware version Device Type Firmware version

IQ22x 2.0 or greater IQ22x 1.0

To add a controller: 1 Add the Lan to which the controller is to be added, as described in the ‘Add a Lan’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 3 In the Device View right-click the Lan to which the IQ controller is to be added, and on the displayed menu point to Insert Device and click Controller from the displayed menu. The Controller dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

In the Address box enter the network address of the controller. (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10). In the Device Type box click the required device type.

Note that clicking Controller Filter and specifying which controllers are shown filters the list of available controllers. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

In the Firmware Version box click the firmware version of the IQ controller that is to be added. In the Hardware Variant box click the hardware variant of the IQ controller that is to be added. In the Name box enter a name for the controller. In the Details box enter details about the controller. In the Engineer box enter the name of the engineer designing the strategy. Click OK. The IQ Address Module dialogue box is displayed. Specify the address module parameters by entering the required value for each address module parameter into the appropriate box, or clicking the required options. For more details see the ‘Set up the Address Module’ section of this manual.

Note that if adding an IQ3 controller with v1.3 firmware of greater the network modules must be setup as described in the ‘Set up the Network Modules’ section of this manual. 13 14 15 16 17

Click OK. The Sensor Types dialogue box is displayed. Specify the sensor type modules as required. For more details see the ‘Set up the Sensor Type Module Manually’ and the ‘Set up the Sensor Type Module Using a Sensor Definition’ sections of this manual. Once all the required sensor types are specified, click Exit. If add an IQ3 controller the I/O Set up dialogue box is displayed for pre IQ3 controllers the process is complete. If adding an IQ3 controller set up the I/O modules as described in the ‘Set up I/O Modules Using the I/O Setup Dialogue Box’ section of this manual. Once all the I/O modules are specified click Exit. SET will display a blank strategy page for the new controller.

For IQ3 controllers SET will automatically allocate 233 brIQs of memory for the address module, network module, time module, and sequence table. If an IQ212/ATM was selected the first strategy page will already be filled with a strategy to support the atomic timemaster.

104

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4

Configure the Controller Strategy

SET enables the strategy for IQ3 controllers to be configured by adding modules to strategy pages, linking them together, and then editing the module’s configuration parameters to define the strategy. If required an existing IQ2 strategy can be converted to an IQ3 strategy as described in the ‘Convert an IQ2 Strategy to an IQ3 Strategy’ section of this manual. Once the strategy is complete, files that can be downloaded to the controllers can be created. Note that SET does not allow time modules to be set up. They must be set up using a piece of IQ software that allows access to the time modules. To configure an IQ3 controller: 1 Add a controller as described in the ‘Add Controllers’ section of this manual. 2 Set up the address module as described in the ‘Set up the Address Module’ section of this manual. 3 For controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that are to connect to an Ethernet network, set up the IP network module as described in the ‘Set up the IP Network Module’ section of this manual. 4 Set up the sensor type modules as described in the ‘Set up Sensor Type Modules’ section of this manual. Note that SET prompts for the set up of the address module, and sensor type modules when the controller is added. 5

Add the modules onto the pages as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

Modules can also be added by copying and pasting from another page, or by using strategy blocks to form the strategy. Strategy pages should be added as they are needed as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 6 7

Move the modules on the page so that the links can be easily made as described in the ‘Move Modules’ section of this manual. Link the module together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly as described in the ‘Link the Modules’ section of this manual.

SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. Connectives can be used to link to modules on other strategy pages. If the strategy is using IC Comms the link to an IC Comms module in another controller by linking to a dummy IC Comms module. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Set up the alarm handling strategy as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy’ section of this manual. Set up I/O modules as described in the ‘Set up I/O Modules’ section of this manual. Edit the module's configuration parameters as described in the ‘Edit Modules’ section of this manual. Set up the sequence table as described in the ‘Set up the Sequence Table’ section of this manual to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order. If required set up event driven strategy as described in the ‘Set up Event Driven Strategy’ section of this manual. Set up the controllers normal occupation times as described in the ‘Set up the Controllers Normal Occupation Times’ section of this manual. Set up any exceptions to the normal occupation times as described in the ‘Set up Exceptions’ section of this manual. Set up IC Comms as described in the ‘Set up IC Comms’ section of this manual. If controller security is required, the user modules should be set up as described in the ‘Set up Controller Security’ section of this manual. Set up display and directory modules as described in the ‘Set up Display and Directory Modules’ section of this manual. Set up graphical display pages as described in the ‘Set up Graphical Display Pages’ section of this manual.

Once the strategy is complete, an IQ3 file must be created as described in the ‘Create an IQ3 File’ section of this manual. Once created the file must be downloaded to the controller as described in the ‘Download Strategy to the Controller’ section of this manual. 8.4.1

Configure a Pre IQ3 Controller

SET enables the strategy for pre IQ3 controllers (IQ1x, and IQ2x controllers) to be configured by adding modules to strategy pages, linking them together, and then editing the module’s configuration parameters to define the strategy. Once the strategy is complete, files that can be downloaded to the controllers can be created. Note that SET does not allow calendar and time modules to be set up. These modules must be set up using a piece of software that allows access to the calendar or time modules. To configure a pre IQ3 controller: 1 Add a controller as described in the ‘Add Controllers’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

105

Engineer IQ Controllers 2 3

Set up the address module as described in the ‘Set up the Address Module’ section of this manual. Set up the sensor type modules as described in the ‘Set up Sensor Type Modules’ section of this manual.

Note that SET prompts for the set up of the address module, and sensor type modules when the controller is added. 4 5 6

Set up ADL support if the controller has it as described in the ‘Configure ADL Support’ section of this manual. Set up XNC support if the controller has it as described in the ‘Configure XNC Support for IQ2 Controllers’ section of this manual. Add the modules onto the pages as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

Modules can also be added by copying and pasting from another page, or by using strategy blocks to form the strategy. Strategy pages should be added as they are needed as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 7 8

Move the modules on the page so that the links can be easily made as described in the ‘Move Modules’ section of this manual. Link the modules together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly as described in the ‘Link the Modules’ section of this manual.

SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. Connectives can be used to link to modules on other strategy pages. Undefined connectives allow links to be made to modules that have not yet been put in the strategy, or links to be made to particular nodes. If the strategy is using IC Comms, it is possible to show that a module is linked to an IC Comms module in another controller by linking to a dummy IC Comms module. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Set up the alarm handling strategy as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy’ section of this manual. Edit the module's configuration parameters as described in the ‘Edit Modules’ section of this manual. Set up the sequence table as described in the ‘Set up the Sequence Table’ section of this manual to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order. If required set up fast sequencing as described in the ‘Set up Fast Sequencing’ section of this manual. Set up the controllers normal occupation times as described in the ‘Set up the Controllers Normal Occupation Times’ section of this manual. Set up IC Comms as described in the ‘Set up IC Comms’ section of this manual. If controller security is required, the user modules should be set up as described in the ‘Set up Controller Security’ section of this manual. Set up display and directory modules as described in the ‘Set up Display and Directory Modules’ section of this manual.

Once the strategy is complete, an IQ2, or LDF file must be created as described in the ‘Create an IQ2 file’ or ‘Create an LDF File’ section of this manual, and downloaded to the controller as described in the ‘Download Strategy to the Controller’ section of this manual. 8.4.2

Configure an IQ3/XNC

SET enables the strategy required by a specific TCL application to be configured by adding modules to strategy pages, linking them together, and then editing the module’s configuration parameters to define the strategy. To configure an IQ3/XNC: 1 Add an IQ3/XNC as described in the ‘Add Controllers’ section of this manual. 2 Set up the address module as described in the ‘Set up the Address Module’ section of this manual. 3 For controllers that are to connect to an Ethernet network, set up the IP network module as described in the ‘Set up the IP Network Module’ section of this manual. 4 Set up the sensor type modules as described in the ‘Set up Sensor Type Modules’ section of this manual. Note that SET prompts for the set up of the address module, and sensor type modules when the controller is added. 5 6

Set up the XNC interface module as described in the ‘Set up the XNC Interface Module’ section of this manual. Add the other modules required for the strategy onto the pages as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

Modules can also be added by copying and pasting from another page, or by using strategy blocks to form the strategy. Strategy pages should be added, as they are needed as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Page’ section of the SET Manual. 7

106

Move the modules on the page so that the links can be easily made as described in the ‘Move Modules’ section of this manual. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8

Link the module together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly as described in the ‘Link the Modules’ section of this manual.

SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. Connectives can be used to link to modules on other strategy pages. If the strategy is using IC Comms the link to an IC Comms module in another controller by linking to a dummy IC Comms module. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Set up the alarm handling strategy as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy’ section of the section of this manual. Set up I/O modules as described in the ‘Set up I/O Modules’ section of this manual. Edit the module's configuration parameters as described in the ‘Edit Modules’ section of this manual. Set up the sequence table as described in the ‘Set up the Sequence Table’ section of this manual to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order. If required set up event driven strategy as described in the ‘Set up Event Driven Strategy’ section of this manual. Set up the controllers normal occupation times as described in the ‘Set up the Controllers Normal Occupation Times’ section of this manual. Set up any exceptions to the normal occupation times as described in the ‘Set up Exceptions’ section of this manual. Set up IC Comms as described in the ‘Set up IC Comms’ section of this manual. If controller security is required, the user modules should be set up as described in the ‘Set up Controller Security’ section of this manual. Set up display and directory modules as described in the ‘Set up Display and Directory Modules’ section of this manual. Set up graphical display pages as described in the ‘Set up Graphical Display Pages’ section of this manual.

Once the strategy is complete, an IQ3 file must be created as described in the ‘Create an IQ3 section of this manual. Once created the file must be downloaded to the controller along with the associated TCL application as described in the ‘Download Strategy to the Controller’ section of this manual. 8.4.3

Set up the Address Module

The address module determines information about how the controller communicates over the network. To set up the address module for an IQ controller: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the address module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click Address Module on the displayed menu, or on the Device menu click Address Module. The IQ Address Module dialogue box is displayed.

3

Specify the address module parameters, by entering the required values into the different boxes. The parameters of the address module are described in the ‘Address Module' sections of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

107

Engineer IQ Controllers For IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater the language used for the display of web pages and alarms can be specified by clicking the required language in the Available Display Languages box and then clicking

.

. If required other languages can be downloaded to the controller The selected language will be displayed with a so that a different language can be used later without the need to download it. To do this, click the language that is . Languages that are to be downloaded are indicated by an . Languages that are not to be downloaded and click going to be downloaded are indicated by an . To specify a language not to be downloaded click it and then click . It is possible to prevent some information such as the identifier from being downloaded to the controller by selecting the appropriate Read Only check box. To set up this information the appropriate check box must be cleared. This is useful if the information has already been set up in the controller using the IP Tool. Note that for IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater the Ethernet settings are set up in the network module as described in the ‘Setup the Network Module’ section of this manual. 4 8.4.4

Click OK. Set up the IP Network Module

The IP network module determines the Ethernet settings for IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater. It needs to be to be set up if the controller is to connect to the IQ network using Ethernet, if its virtual CNC is to be used, if IP alarms are to be used, or the controller’s web server is to be accessed. To set up the network module for an IQ3 controller: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the IP network module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click Network Module on the displayed menu, or on the Device menu click Network Module. The Network Module dialogue box is displayed.

3

Specify the module’s parameters, by entering the required values into the different boxes. The parameters of the address module are described in the ‘IQ3 IP Network Modules’ of this manual.

It is possible to prevent some information such as the IP address from being downloaded to the controller by selecting the appropriate Read Only check box. To set up this information the appropriate check box must be cleared. This is useful if the information has already been set up in the controller using the IP Tool. in the WINS Servers area, the WINS Server dialogue box is displayed. In To specify the WINS servers click the IP Address box enter the IP address of the server, and click OK. in the DNS Servers area, the DNS Server dialogue box is displayed. In the IP To specify the DNS servers click Address box enter the IP address of the server, and click OK. 108

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers To specify the remote devices click the Remote Device dialogue box is displayed. In the IP Address box enter the IP address of the remote device, and in the Subnet box enter the device’s subnet mask, and click OK. If required the list of remote devices specified for the project can be used by clicking Use Project Defaults. Note that if the addressing mode is set to Obtain Automatically it is only possible to set up the UDP port, default router, and host name, all the other parameters will be set up by the DHCP server. 4

Click OK.

8.4.5

Set up Sensor Type Modules

8.4.5.1

Set up Sensor Type Modules Using a Sensor Definition

Sensor type modules need to be set up to define how the sensors scale their inputs. SET allows the sensor type modules to be defined using definitions stored in a library of sensor definitions, as described below. The parameters can also be defined manually, see the ‘Set up Sensor Type Module Manually’ section of this manual for details. Set up a sensor type module using a sensor from the library: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the sensor type modules are to be defined as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Sensor Types, or on the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the Number box click the sensor type module that is to be defined. In the Sensor Part Number or the Unique Sensor Reference box click the required definition, In the Scaling Range box click the required range.

The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of sensors that can be selected. Click Filter to display the Sensor Type Filter dialogue box, and then click the appropriate check boxes. 6

Click Apply. The parameters of the selected definition will be applied to the selected sensor type module.

The parameters for that sensor are displayed on the right of the dialogue box. The graph shows the sensors characteristics. 7 8

Repeat steps (3) to (6) for each sensor type module that is to be set up. Click Exit.

If the required sensor definition is not available in the library, definitions can be added to the library for that sensor as described in the ‘Set up the Sensor Library’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

109

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.5.2

Set up Sensor Type Modules Manually

Sensor type modules need to be set up to define how the sensors scale their inputs. SET allows the sensor type modules to be defined manually, as described below. They can also be defined using definitions stored in a library. See the ‘Set up Sensor Type Module Manually Using a Sensor Definition’ section of this manual for details. Note that before setting up the sensor type modules in a SET project created with version of SET earlier than v1.1, it is necessary to display a strategy page from the controller that is to be edited. 1

Display a strategy page for the controller for which the sensor type modules are to be defined as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Sensor Types, or on the Device menu click Sensor Types. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.

2

3 4 5

In the Number box click the sensor type module that is to be defined. In the Sensor Part Number box enter the part number of the sensor. In the Scaling Range box enter the range of the sensor. The drop-down list is empty when a new sensor is being added to the library. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter the reference for the sensor. It is recommended that this reference consist of the part number followed by the range (e.g. PIL/4). Click Edit. In the Scaling box click the scaling type. The Sensor Type dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate parameters to be specified. For IQ3 controllers you must use characterise scaling.

6 7 8

Scaling Type Characterise scaling

Linear scaling Log scaling

Linearise thermistor volts scaling

110

Use This type of scaling allows a sensor’s characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear characteristics. It is therefore recommended for use with all non-linear sensors. It is also used for lookup function modules. This type of scaling must be used on IQ3 controllers. Should be used for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a linear characteristic between the top and bottom of the range. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. This type of scaling is not normally used; it is for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a logarithmic characteristic between the top and bottom of range. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. Should be used for thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers Scaling Type Linearise volts scaling Linearise ohms

9

thermistor

Use Should be used for sensors providing voltage or current signals that need to be linearised. This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers. Can be used instead of linearise thermistor volts. It should be used for non-Trend sensors where the resistance/temperature characteristic is known, as it requires entry of ohms against temperature directly from the characteristic. It enables the linearisation points on the temperature scale to be individually chosen so that they can be closer together over a part of the characteristic where the gradient is changing rapidly, and further apart where the gradient changes only gradually. It is not recommended for use with Trend sensors (use Linearise thermistor volts for these). This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 controllers.

Specify the sensor’s parameters by entering the required value for each parameter into the appropriate box, or clicking the required options, or choosing the required value from a list. See the ‘Sensor Type Module’ section of this manual.

Clicking Refresh will display a graph of the sensor’s characteristics as defined by the current parameters. This can be used at any point to check how the sensor reading will be scaled. 10 11 12

Once the parameters are correctly specified, click Save. Repeat steps (3) to (10) to set up other sensor type modules. Click Exit.

8.4.6

Configure ADL Support

If the controller has ADL support, it is necessary to set up three additional modules; the autodial module, modem module, and the record module. This is described in the following sections of this manual: Set up the Autodial Module Set up the Modem Module Set up the Record Module 8.4.6.1

Set up the Autodial Module

It is only necessary to set up autodial modules for controllers with ADL support. To set up the autodial module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the autodial module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. This must be a controller with ADL support to be defined. 2 On the Device menu click Autodial Module. The Autodial Module dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the Telephone Number box enter the telephone number that is to be used to access the controller. The number may be up to 29-characters long. In the Auto-dial Pin box enter the PIN used to validate connections using the modem. This number must be 4-digits long. Click OK.

8.4.6.2

Set up the Modem Module

It is only necessary to set up modem modules for controllers with ADL support. To set up the modem module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the modem module is to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. This must be a controller with ADL support to be defined. 2 On the Device menu click Modem Module. The Modem Module dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

111

Engineer IQ Controllers 3

In the Modem Initialise 1 box enter the initialisation string that is sent to the modem whenever it is reinitialised. This can be up to 24-characters long and is set to ‘ATH&F’ by default. This should not normally be changed. In the Modem Initialise 2 box enter the initialisation string that is sent to the modem after the string defined above. This can be up to 24-characters long and is set to ‘ATS0=1’ by default. This should not normally be changed. In the Version Request box enter the string that is sent to the modem to cause a version response. This can be up to 16-characters long and is set to ‘ATI3’ by default. This should not normally be changed. Click OK.

4 5 6

8.4.6.3

Set up the Record Module

It is only necessary to set up record modules for controllers with ADL support. To set up the record module: 1 Display a strategy page for which the record module is to be set up, as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. This must be a controller with ADL support. 2 On the Device menu click Record Module. The Record Module dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the Proxy Port box enter the network address of the modem that is to be used to send alarms. In the Lan box enter the Lan number of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. In the Address box enter the network address of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. In the Telephone box enter the telephone number of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. The number may be up to 29-characters long, and include the following characters.

5 6

Characters 0 to 9 ABCD#* J K L M 7

Description Dialling characters. Considered as dialling characters on some systems. Wait for secondary dial tone. 2 second pause. Pulse dialling. Tone dialling.

Click OK.

8.4.7

Configure XNC Support for IQ2 Controllers

If the controller is an IQ2 with XNC support it is necessary to set up two additional modules; store modules, and comport modules. This is described in the following sections of this manual: Set up Comport Modules Set up Store Modules 8.4.7.1

Set up Comport Modules

Comport modules are only available on IQ2 controllers with XNC support. They are used on controllers with XNC support to define the setup of serial ports used to communicate with the 3rd party system and ports used to enable the TCL part to communicate directly over the IQ network. Each module has the following parameters that need to be defined. To set up the comport modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the comport module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Comports. The Comport Module dialogue box is displayed.

112

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers

This dialogue box enables both comport modules to be set up. Comport module 1 is on the left, and comport module 2 is on the right. The set up for each is the same. 3 4

In the Label box enter a label for the module. In the Port Type box click the required port type.

The dialogue box will change to grey out the parameters that do not apply to the selected port type. 5 6

Specify the parameters for each comport module by entering the required values into the different boxes. The parameters of the module are described in the ‘IQ2 Comport Modules’ section of this manual. Click OK.

For a full description of comport modules see the ‘IQ2 Comport Modules’ section of this manual. 8.4.7.2

Set up Store Modules

Store modules are only available on IQ2 controllers with XNC support. They are used to hold strings of information that can be accessed by the TCL program. To set up the store modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the store module is to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. This must be a controller with XNC support to be defined. 2 On the Device menu click Store Modules. The Store Module dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6

In the Module column enter the number or the store module is to be set up by clicking. The module number will be displayed in the Module box. In the Label box enter the required text. It can be up to 40-characters long. Click Apply. Click OK.

For a full description of the store module see the ‘IQ Store Modules’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

113

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.8

Set up the XNC Interface Module

If configuring an IQ3/XNC it is necessary to set up the XNC interface module. The XNC interface module defines the alarm group module to which runtime alarms are to be sent, the user alarm labels, the initial value of the stores strings, and the linking of the TCL application’s inputs and outputs to modules in the IQ strategy. To set up the XNC interface module: 1 Display a strategy page for the device for which the XNC interface module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click XNC Interface Module on the displayed. The XNC Interface Module dialogue box is displayed.

3

Specify the number of inputs, outputs, and stores available by either linking the XNC application file (XNP file) that is to be linked to the IQ strategy as described in the ‘Link the XNC Application File’ section of this manual, or specify the required inputs, outputs, and stores manually as described in the ‘Specify Stores, Inputs and Outputs Manually’ section of this manual.

Note that if the XNC application file is not linked now it must be linked before the strategy and TCL code is downloaded to the IQ3/XNC as described in the ‘Link the XNC Application File’ section of this manual 4

5

Specify the initial value of each of the stores by double-clicking the appropriate store’s string and entering the required value. Information can be copied and pasted by right-clicking on the label and clicking Copy Label or Paste Label on the displayed menu as required. Information can be pasted into more than one store by copying the required information to the clipboard; the information for each store must be on a new line, selecting the required stores, right-clicking, and clicking Paste on the displayed menu. Clicking Select All will select all the values. Specify the initial value of each of the inputs, and outputs by double-clicking on the value and entering the value.

If an XNC application file has been linked the values of the inputs, outputs, and stores can be reset to those specified in the file by selecting the Overwrite Values check box and clicking Re-load. 6

Specify the labels of each of the inputs, and outputs by double-clicking on the label and entering the new label. Labels can be copied and pasted by right-clicking on the label and clicking Copy Label or Paste Label on the displayed menu as required. Labels can be pasted into more than one input, or output by copying the required information to the clipboard, the information for each input or output must be on a new line, selecting the required input or output, right-clicking, and clicking Paste on the displayed menu. Clicking Select All will select all the labels.

If an XNC application file has been linked the labels of the inputs and outputs can be reset to those specified by the application file by selecting the Overwrite Labels check box and clicking Re-load.

114

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 7 8

In the Alarm Label boxes 1-6 enter values of the XNC interface module’s user alarm labels. These are the labels used by TCL’s GENALARM function for the alarm description. Add the knob or switch modules that are to be linked to the TCL application’s inputs to the strategy: Click Add Knobs, or Add Switches as required. A dialogue box is displayed asking for the number of the knob or switch modules that are to be added to the strategy. In the Start box enter the required module number. For a range of modules, enter the first module number that is to be used; subsequent modules will be used for the other inputs in the range. In the Total box enter the total number of modules that are being added. Click OK. The specified modules will be added to the strategy page. If the selected strategy page already contains modules a new strategy page will be created.

9

Add the sensor or digital input modules that are to be linked to the TCL application’s outputs from the strategy: Click Add Sensors, or Add Digins as required. A dialogue box is displayed asking for the number of the sensor or digital input modules that are to be added to the strategy. In the Start box enter the required module number. For a range of modules, enter the first module number that is to be used; subsequent modules will be used for the other outputs in the range. In the Total box enter the total number of modules that are being added. Click OK. The specified modules will be added to the strategy page. If the selected strategy page already contains modules a new strategy page will be created.

10

Link TCL application’s inputs and outputs to the required modules in the IQ strategy by clicking the module that is to be linked to an input or output in the box underneath Add Switches, or Add Digins, dragging it onto the required input or output, and releasing the mouse button. More than one module can be linked at a time by holding down the CRTL key and clicking on the modules that are to be linked, and then dragging them onto the first input/output that is to be linked and releasing the mouse button. The first module in the selection will be linked to the input/output the mouse was positioned over when the mouse button was released, the other modules will linked to the modules below that module.

If required modules can be linked to the TCL application's inputs and outputs manually as described in the ‘Link TCL Inputs and Outputs to Modules Manually’ section of this manual. 11

Click OK.

8.4.8.1

Link TCL Inputs and Outputs to Modules Manually

The inputs and outputs of a TCL application need to be linked to parameters in the IQ strategy that apply to the TCL application. This can be done manually by adding the modules and linking them to the TCL application's input/output connectives as described below, or when setting up the XNC interface Module as described in the ‘Set up the XNC Interface Module’ section of this manual. Linking the inputs and outputs manually enables them to be linked to modules other than sensors, digital inputs, knobs, and switches. It also enables them to be linked to any module parameter. To manually link TCL inputs and outputs to IQ strategy: 1 Obtain the TCL application from the developer. 2 Display a strategy page for the device for which the XNC interface module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Add the module the input or output is to be linked to as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of the this manual. 4 Add the connective to the TCL input or output as described in the ‘Add a Connective’ section of this manual. Connectives to TCL inputs and outputs are referred to in the Connectives dialogue box with a lower case ‘t’ 5 6

Link the module parameter to the connective as described in the ‘Link the Modules’ section of this manual. Click OK.

8.4.8.2

Link the XNC Application File

To Link the XNC Application File: 1 Obtain the TCL application from the developer. 2 Display a strategy page for the device for which the XNC interface module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click XNC Interface Module on the displayed. The XNC Interface Module dialogue box is displayed. 4

Click

. The Select XNC App File dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

115

Engineer IQ Controllers

5

In the folder list click the XNC application file.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 6

Click Open. The TCL application will be loaded and the applications file name added to the XNC App box. Details of the application’s name, author, and ID are also displayed in the appropriate boxes; all of these are read only.

Note that if the number of stores, inputs, or outputs is in the XNP file different to the number specified by SET a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click Yes to continue and update the settings in SET with those in the XNP file or click No to cancel the process. 8.4.8.3

Specify Stores, Inputs and Outputs Manually

The stores, inputs and outputs of a TCL application can be specified manually, without the need for the TCL application. This enables the IQ strategy for a specific TCL application to be produced before the application has been completed. To manually link TCL inputs and outputs to IQ strategy: 1 Display a strategy page for the device for which the XNC interface module is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click XNC Interface Module on the displayed menu. The XNC Interface Module dialogue box is displayed.

3

116

Click Change next to the Total box for the store, inputs, or outputs. The Change Total dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers

4 5

In the box enter the required number of stores, inputs, or outputs. Click OK.

Note that if stores, inputs, or outputs already exist, if the new number is higher than the number already specified the last one would be removed, if it were less additional stores, inputs, or outputs will be added. 8.4.9

Add Modules to a Strategy Page

Modules are added to the strategy by adding them to a strategy page. When configuring an IQ3 controller only the modules used in the strategy are added to the controller’s memory. This enables the number of each type of module to be adjusted to suit the requirements of the strategy, so long as the memory capacity of the controller is not exceeded. The total available capacity in is dependent on the controller type see the controller’s data sheet for details. SET keeps a tally of the brIQs used and the amount available to be used. This is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the page. If the limit is exceeded, then SET will prohibit the creation of further modules. When configuring a pre IQ3 controller the number of each type of module is predefined therefore SET will limit the number of each type of module to ensure that the controller’s capacity is not exceeded. To add a module to a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page to which the module is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click the required module type in the appropriate toolbar, or right-click the page where the module is to be placed, and on the displayed menu point to the type of module (Inputs, Functions, Logic, Other, ICComms, Alarms, or Drivers) click the module. The cursor will change to a hand . E.g. to add a combination logic module right-click the page where the module is to be placed, and on the displayed menu point to Logic and click 1: Combination. 3

If SET has been configured to prompt for the module number and sequence step that is to be used a dialogue box is displayed allowing them to be specified is displayed. If required entered the required module number and sequence step in the appropriate box. Clicking on will check to see that the module number is valid, and unused. When the information is correct click OK to add the module.

When adding IC Comms modules you will be prompted to specify the output type. When adding OSS modules you will be prompted to specify the whether heating or cooling is required. For more details about using IC Comms modules see the ‘Set up IC Comms’ section of this manual. The next module for each module type can be specified in advance as described in the ‘Specify the Next Module Number’ section of this manual. 4

Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the page. If the module is already in the strategy SET will automatically use a connective. If Auto Edit is enabled, the Parameters dialogue box for the module will be displayed.

Modules can also be added to a strategy by using the Command Line toolbar or by copying and pasting modules as described in the ‘Using the Command Line Toolbar’ and ‘Copy and Past Modules’ sections of this manual. Strategy blocks can be used to add pieces of reusable strategy see the ‘Use Strategy Blocks’ section of this manual. 8.4.9.1

Use Strategy Blocks

If the project is going to involve the re-use of pieces of standard strategy, the use of strategy blocks will save a great deal of time. Time spent creating the strategy blocks may save time later in the project. If strategy blocks have been created, they will already be in the Strategy Library. When a strategy block is used, the actual modules included are determined by the appropriate pointer (e.g. if a Logic module is used, and the logic pointer is set to 5 the first logic module used will be logic module 5). The order of the modules in the sequence table is determined when the strategy block is created. The sequence pointer determines the sequence step of the first module. When SET adds a connective from the strategy block it tries to match the connective’s label with the label of modules already in the strategy and if one is found it defines the connective as a link to that module. If a strategy block that uses connectives is to be used more than once in the same controller it is necessary to change the label of any modules in the strategy that are linked using connectives. This ensures that a match is not found when the strategy block is added next time. If this is not done SET will make the link to the module that is already in the strategy not the one in the strategy block. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

117

Engineer IQ Controllers It is possible to use an entire strategy block in a strategy, or to use individual pages from the strategy block. When an entire strategy block is used SET will automatically add the pages necessary for the modules. If an individual page is used the strategy block modules are added to the existing page. To use a strategy block: 1 Check that the next module numbers that are to be used are correct by viewing the Next Module List, as described in the ‘View the Next Module List’ section of this manual, if not change them as described in the ‘Specify the Next Module Number’ section of this manual. 2 Display the strategy page for the controller to which the strategy block page is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. If adding an individual page from a strategy block you should select the page to which the modules are to be added. 3 Display the Strategy Library as described in the ‘Display the Strategy Library’ section of this manual. 4 In the Strategy Blocks Area, click the group containing the required strategy block in order to open the group, if necessary click the sub group containing the required strategy block in order to open it and clicking the required controller in the displayed dialogue box enables the list of strategy blocks can Clicking be filtered by controller type. It is also possible to search the library by clicking to display the Search Library, entering the keywords that are to be matched in the box and clicking Search. Any strategy blocks whose keywords match the search are displayed in the bottom of the Search Library. To close the Search Library window click . The Search Library can be hidden, moved and resized in the same way as the Strategy Library. 5

To use the entire strategy block from either the Strategy Library or Search Library drag it on to the strategy page and release the mouse button. To use a single page of a strategy block click the required page in the strategy block and it onto the page and release the mouse button. The Block Settings dialogue box is displayed.

6

Check the module availability. The dialogue box lists the number of modules used by the strategy block, or part of the strategy block that is being used; it also lists the number of available modules in the controller. If there are not enough available modules the number of available modules will be in red, if there are enough it will be in green. If this happens you should click Cancel and adjust the strategy so that the strategy block will fit. In the case of IQ3 controllers if there are not enough I/O modules clicking I/O Setup will enable additional I/O modules to be added.

The list of modules can be sorted by module by clicking will sort the list by module label. 7

Check the actual module number of each module being added by clicking change the module number click OK.

118

will sort the modules by module type, and clicking next to the required module. To

, click the required module from the list in the dialogue box, and click

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8 9

If display and directory modules in the strategy block are to be used select the Import D&D Modules check box. Click OK.

Note that any links between pages are changed to undefined connectives. Define these undefined connective's Destination’ as described in the ‘Define an Undefined Connective's Destination’ section of this manual after the strategy block has been used. If a module with a label that matches with the label of the connective the connective will be defined to use that module. 8.4.10 Move Modules SET allows either a single module, or a group of modules to be moved, so that the strategy is displayed in a way that is easy to follow. To move an individual module: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module to be moved as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Point to the module to be moved, and hold down the left mouse button. 3 Drag the module to its new location, and release the mouse button. To move a group of modules: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module to be moved as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Select the modules that are to be moved as described in the ‘Select Modules’ section of this manual. 3 Drag the modules to their new location, and release the mouse button. To align modules: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the modules to be aligned as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Select the modules that are to be aligned as described in the ‘Select Modules’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click any of the selected modules, and on the displayed menu click Align Left Edge, or Align Top Edge. The co-ordinates of the top left corner of the selected module are indicated in the status bar. If more than one module is selected the co-ordinates are those of the top left corner of the current module. This can be used to position modules precisely on the page. Note that when modules are moved, the links between the modules are automatically routed to avoid other modules, and links. 8.4.11 Link the Modules Modules must be linked together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly. SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. Links to modules on the same strategy page are very easy to create as explained below. Connectives can be used to link to modules on other strategy pages. Undefined connectives allow links to be made to modules that have not yet been put in the strategy, or links to be made to particular nodes. If the strategy is using IC comms, it is possible to show that a module is linked to an IC comms module in another controller by linking to a dummy IC comms module. These procedures are explained in the next few sections of this manual. To link the modules: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be linked together as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click, on the parameter of a module that is to be the start point of the link (normally the output of a module), and hold the mouse button down. The pointer will change to a 3

when it is moved over a parameter that can be linked.

Drag the mouse to the parameter that is to be the end point of the link (normally the input to a module).

The pointer will change to a if the parameters can be linked. If the parameter is not a suitable type to be linked to the start point of the link, the pointer will change to a ; if it is suitable, it will display a green circle. 4

Release the mouse button.

The link will be drawn between the modules, and the two module parameters linked together in strategy. Links made between the outputs of two modules are drawn as dotted lines. The link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

119

Engineer IQ Controllers Note that alarm group modules can only be linked to the ‘G’ parameter of alarm route modules. They can be linked to as many alarm route modules as required. The link between alarm route modules and alarm destination modules must be made by dragging the link from the (input) of the alarm destination module to the ‘D’ parameter of the alarm route module. An alarm route module can be linked to as many alarm destinations as required. Alarm group module zero cannot be placed on the page for a link to be made; therefore the ‘G’ parameter of the alarm route module must be set to ‘0’. ‘0’ is the default value when the module is first placed on the page, therefore ‘G’ can be left as the default, or an existing link deleted to return ‘G’ to ‘0’. 8.4.11.1 Link Modules on Different Pages Modules must be linked together so that the information flows through the strategy correctly. SET uses its knowledge of modules to prevent silly mistakes such as connecting a digital value to a point requiring an analogue value. SET uses connectives to link modules on different pages. To link to a module on another page: 1 Add a connective to the module that is to be linked to onto the strategy page as described in the ‘Add a Connective’ section of this manual. 2 Click the connective. 3 Drag the mouse to the parameter that is to be linked to the connective. If the parameter is not a suitable type 4

for the connective, SET will display a red cross Release the mouse button.

; if it is suitable, it will display a green circle

.

Note the link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page. If required, to connectives can be used to indicate the other end of this link as described in the ‘Add a To Connective’ section of this manual. However, to connectives do not actually make the connection, they just make the strategy easier to follow. 8.4.11.2 Link to a Module not in the Strategy Links to modules not currently in the strategy are made using undefined connectives. To link to a module not in the strategy: 1 Place an undefined connective onto the strategy page as described in the ‘Add an Undefined Connective to a Module’ section of this manual. 2 Click the undefined connective, hold the mouse button down, and drag the mouse to the parameter that is to be linked to the undefined connective. If the parameter is not a suitable type for the undefined connective, SET will display a red cross it will display a green circle 3

; if it is suitable,

.

Release the mouse button.

Note the link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page. When the destination for the undefined connective is available, it should be defined; see the ‘Define an Undefined Connective's Destination’ section of this manual for details. 8.4.11.3 Link to a Node For pre IQ3 controllers links can be made to specific nodes in the strategy using undefined connectives. This enables links to be made to nodes whose value is fixed, or to alarm bits. To link to a node with a fixed value: 1 Place an undefined connective to the required node onto the strategy page, as described in the ‘Add an Undefined Connective to a Node’ section of this manual. 2 Click the undefined connective, hold the mouse button down, and drag the mouse to the parameter to which it is to be linked. If the parameter is not a suitable type for the undefined connective, SET will display a red cross it will display a green circle 3

; if it is suitable,

.

Release the mouse button.

Note the link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page. 8.4.11.4 Link to Alarm Status Information in an IQ3 Controller For IQ3 controllers the statuses of the module’s alarms are available as outputs from the module and can be linked to in the normal way. If required a connective to the alarm status information can be added as described in the ‘Add a Connective to Alarm Status Information’ section of this manual.

120

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.11.5 Link to a Specific Value For IQ3 controllers, links can be made to a specific value by using an analogue node module. To link to a specific value: 1 Add an analogue node module to the strategy page, as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page section of this manual. 2 Double-click the module that has just been added. The Analogue Module Parameters dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6

In the Label box to enter a label for the module specify the label for the node. In the Value box enter the required value to specify the value of the node. Click OK. Click the output (D) of the module, and drag the mouse to link it to the required place in the strategy.

If the parameter is not a suitable type for the undefined connective, SET will display a red cross it will display a green circle 7

; if it is suitable,

.

Release the mouse button.

Note the link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page. 8.4.11.6 Link to an IC Comms Module in Another Controller If the strategy is using IC comms, it is possible to show that a module is linked to an IC comms module in another controller by linking it to a dummy IC Comms module. Note that linking to a dummy IC comms module does not set up the IC comms module. To link a module to a dummy IC comms module: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module that is to be linked to the dummy IC comms module as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2

Click

3

ICComm from the menu that is displayed. The pointer changes to a . Drag the pointer to the required position of the dummy IC comms module (next to the input of the module parameter it is linked to), and click the mouse button.

, or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Dummy

8.4.11.7 Link to System Information If required links to various pieces of system information such as time, timing pulses, day of year, month of year etc can be made connectives that are automatically created when the controller is added. To link to system information: 1 Add a Connective to the piece of system information that is to be linked to onto the strategy page as described in the ‘Add a Connective to System Information’ section of this manual. 2 Click the connective. 3 Drag the mouse to the parameter that is to be linked to the connective. If the parameter is not a suitable type 4

for the connective, SET will display a red cross Release the mouse button.

; if it is suitable, it will display a green circle

.

Note the link is automatically routed around the other modules and links on the page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

121

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.11.8 Manually Route a Link SET automatically routes links between modules to avoid other modules, and links. Sometimes however, it may be necessary to route a link manually. To manually route a link: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the link as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the link, and on the displayed menu click Edit Link. The pointer changes to a . 3 Drag the link along the route that is required. To change direction, click the left mouse button (a point will be added to the link), and drag the link in the new direction. 4 Once the link has been routed as required, click the right mouse button. 8.4.12 Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy For IQ3 controllers and pre3 IQ controllers with version 3.0 firmware or greater it is possible to set up strategy to handle alarms. This provides the facility to send different alarms to different destinations, or to determine when the alarms are sent. It also enables alarms to be sent to another destination if the preferred destination is not available. If a strategy is not defined for alarm handling, all alarms will be sent to the alarm address defined in the address module. For pre-version 3.0 controllers, all alarms will be sent to the alarm address defined in the address module. To set up the alarm handling strategy for IQ3 controllers, and IQ2 controllers version 3.0 or greater: 1 Add a strategy page as described in the ‘Add a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Note that this is not necessary but it is recommended so that the alarm handling strategy is kept separate to the control strategy. 2 3 4 5

Add an alarm group module for each required grouping of alarms as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Add an alarm route module for each group as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Add an alarm destination module for each device to which alarms are to be sent as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Edit the module's configuration parameters, as described in the ‘Change a Module Configuration Parameters’ section of this manual. In the case of an alarm destination module, the node for the destination failed status can be changed as described in the Change a Module’s Destination’ section of this manual.

Note that if sending alarms to a 963 that has not learned the site it is recommended that the message format of the alarm destination modules be set to ‘Text’. 6 7

Add any other modules such as time zones, or nodes that are to provide inputs to the alarm route or alarm destination modules as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Link the modules together as required as described in the ‘Link the Modules’ section of this manual. Alarm group modules can only be linked to the ‘G’ parameter of alarm route modules. They can be linked to as many alarm route modules as required. The link between alarm route modules and alarm destination modules of the alarm destination module to the ‘D’ parameter of the must be made by dragging the link from the alarm route module. An alarm route module can be linked to as many alarm destination modules as required.

Note that alarm group module zero cannot be placed on the page for a link to be made; therefore the G parameter of the alarm route module must be set to 0. 0 is the default value when the module is first placed on the page, therefore G can be left as the default, or an existing link deleted to return G to 0. 8 9

Enable/disable the required alarms as described in the ‘Enable/Disable Alarms’ section of this manual. Set up the alarm handling groups as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Groups’ section of this manual.

To set up the alarm handling for IQ1x and pre-version 3.0 IQ2x controllers: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the alarm handling strategy is to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Address Module. This displays the IQ Address Module dialogue box.

122

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers

3 4 5 6

In the Alarm Address box enter the network address of the device to which alarms are to be sent. Range 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. If set to 0, alarms are not sent. If set to 2, alarms are sent to a device that is directly connected to the controller. In the Remote Lan box enter the Lan number of the device to which alarms are to be sent. Range 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Click OK. Enable/disable the required alarms as described in the ‘Enable/Disable Alarms’ section of this manual.

8.4.12.1 Enable/Disable Alarms Each item alarm in an IQ controller can be individually enabled/disabled in the strategy. SET allows alarms to be enabled from either the Parameters box for the individual module, or from the Alarm Grouping dialogue box. Note that for pre IQ3 controllers with pre-version 3.0 firmware, the alarms can only be enabled/disabled from the Properties box of the module. To enable/disable an alarm from the module’s properties box: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module for which the configuration parameters are to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the module, or connective, or right-click it, and click Edit Parameters on the displayed menu. The Parameters dialogue box for the module is displayed. 3 Click select or clear the Enable check box for the alarm that is to be enabled/disabled. 4 Click OK. To enable/disable an alarm from the Alarm Grouping dialogue box: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which alarms are to be enabled/disabled as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click . The Alarm Grouping dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

123

Engineer IQ Controllers 3 4

5 6 7

In one of the lists at the top of the dialogue box click the alarm group module containing the alarms that are to be enabled/disabled. Click the alarms that are to be enabled/disabled. The selected alarms will be highlighted. More than one alarm can be selected by dragging the mouse over the required alarms, and then releasing the mouse button, or by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required alarms. A range of alarms can be selected by holding down the SHIFT key, and then clicking the first and last alarm in the range. Clicking Select All will select all the alarms in the group displayed above. If required, the alarms displayed can be filtered to show particular types of alarms by clicking the appropriate button in the Filter area. Right-click one of the selected alarms, and click Enable Alarms or Disable Alarms on the displayed menu. Repeat steps (3) to (5) until the alarms have been enabled/disabled as required. Click OK.

8.4.12.2 Set up the Alarm Handling Groups For IQ3 controllers or pre IQ3 controllers with version 3.0 firmware or greater, alarm handling groups can be set up to group together alarms that are to be handled in the same way. The way in which each group of alarms is handled must be first specified as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy’ section of this manual. To set up the alarm handling groups: 1 Set up the alarm handling strategy as described in the ‘Set up the Alarm Handling Strategy’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the alarm handling groups are to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Click . The Alarm Grouping dialogue box is displayed.

4

From the lists at the top of the dialogue box the click the 2 alarm group modules between which the alarms are to be moved.

When initially setting up the alarm handling groups, all the alarms will be assigned to default alarm group module (g1 for IQ3 controllers, and g0 for pre IQ3 controllers). Therefore, initially one of the modules selected above should be the default alarm group module. 5

Click the alarm(s) that are to be moved into a different group. The selected alarms will be highlighted. More than one alarm can be selected by dragging the mouse over the required alarms, and then releasing the mouse button, or by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required alarms. A range of alarms can be selected by holding down the SHIFT key, and then clicking the first and last alarm in the range. Clicking Select All will select all the alarms in the group displayed above. If required, the alarms displayed can be filtered to show particular types of alarms by clicking the appropriate button in the Filter area.

6 7 8

or to move the selected alarms into the required group. Click Repeat steps (4) to (6) until the alarm groups are set up correctly. Click OK.

Note that alarms can be added to groups when editing the module's parameters.

124

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.13 Set up I/O Modules 8.4.13.1 Set up I/O Modules Using the I/O Setup Dialogue Box IQ3 controllers require the actual physical piece of hardware from which external sensors, external digital inputs obtain their inputs, and where drivers send their outputs to be specified. To set up the I/O modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the I/O modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click I/O Setup, or on the Device menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the I/O Module Setup box click the I/O module to which modules are to be assigned.

If the required I/O module is not available it should be added as described in the ‘Add an I/O module’ section of this manual. 4

In the I/O Assignment box click the module(s) that are to be assigned to the I/O module. To select a range of modules hold down the SHIFT key, and click the first and last module in the range. To select more than one module hold down the CTRL key, and click the required modules.

Clicking Sensor, Digin, or Driver will restrict the type of modules displayed in the I/O Assignment box. 5

Click Assign. The selected modules will be automatically be assigned to the I/O module using the next spare I/O channels.

To specify the I/O channel specifically the IQ module for the sensor or driver must be specified by editing the module as described in the ‘Set up I/O Modules By Editing the Modules’ section of this manual. 6

Click Exit.

To unassign a module repeat the process described above, but click Unassign instead of Assign. 8.4.13.2 Set up I/O Modules By Editing the Modules IQ3 controllers require the actual physical piece of hardware from which external sensors, and external digital inputs obtain their inputs, and where drivers send their outputs to be specified. To set up the I/O modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the I/O modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the sensor or driver that is to be assigned to an I/O module to display the Parameters dialogue box. 3 In the I/O Module Setup box click the I/O module to which the module is to be assigned. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

125

Engineer IQ Controllers 4 5

In the I/O Channel box click the I/O channel for the module. Click OK.

Note that it is necessary to add the required I/O modules before setting them up as described in the ‘Add an I/O Module’ section of this manual. 8.4.13.3 Add an I/O Module If additional I/O modules are to be used they must be added to the strategy so that the sensors and drivers can be connected to them. To add an I/O module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller to which the I/O modules are to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and point to Device and click I/O Setup on the menu that is displayed, or on the Device menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed. 3 Click Add. The I/O Module Setup dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7 8

In the Mod ID box enter the module ID. This must match the address set on the I/O modules address switch. In the Module Type box click the type of I/O module. In the Label box enter a label for the module. Click OK to return to the I/O Setup dialogue box. Click Exit.

Note that the IQ3 is limited to a maximum of 80 I/O points on external I/O modules. 8.4.13.4 Delete an I/O Module If required, unwanted I/O modules can be deleted from the strategy. To delete an I/O module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller from which the I/O modules are to be deleted. 2 Right-click the page and point to Device and click I/O Setup on the menu that is displayed, or on the Device menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed. 3 Click the I/O module that is to be deleted, to highlight it. 4 Click Remove. 5 A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes. 6 Click Exit. 8.4.13.5 Edit an I/O Module If required an I/O module’s label and address (module ID) can be changed. To add an I/O module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the I/O module for which the CAN address is to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and point to Device and click I/O Setup from the menu that is displayed, on the Device menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed. 3 Click the I/O module that is to be changed, to highlight it. 4 Click Edit. 5 Edit the module as required. 6 Click Exit.

126

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.14 Edit Modules 8.4.14.1 Change a Module’s Destination For pre IQ3 controllers SET automatically uses the standard values for the destination of each module. If this is not suitable, a different destination can be specified. It is recommended that, as far as is possible, the values assigned by SET be used. Note the destination of some modules (e.g. sensors) cannot be changed. If this is the case, the option will not be available. To change the destination (output) of a particular module: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module or connective to the module for which the destination is to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the module and on the displayed menu click Change Destination. If the module has more than one output, a dialogue box will be displayed asking which output is to be changed, click the required one, and click OK. This displays the Analogue Node Array dialogue box for modules with an analogue destination, and the Digital Node Array dialogue box for modules with a digital destination. 3

Click the required node or bit. If necessary, use the scroll bars to locate the required one. Its number, type, status, and associated alarm bits are displayed in the dialogue box. The number specifies the node number, the type specifies what the node is generally used for, the status specifies what is currently writing to the module, and the associated alarm bits indicate alarm bits that are associated with the selected node. Icons next to these parameters indicate this graphically. They are explained below.

Type Icon

Description Convention. This node is normally used by the strategy for a specific purpose (e.g. storing 0). It can be used providing it is not required for its normal use. Fixed system node. This module is always written to by a particular module in the strategy. Unused. Free. Read only. This node is used for a special purpose (e.g. time) by the controller. Its value can be read by the strategy, but not changed. System defaults (e.g. alarm enable bits) can be used with care.

Status Icon

Description Free to be used. Used as a destination. Can be used again with care. Associated Alarm Bits Icon Description There are no alarm bits associated with the selected node Free. Used as an alarm bit by the specified module. SET enables the location in the analogue or digital array of fixed system nodes, and nodes that have been placed in the strategy, to be found by entering the code for the required parameter into the Find box, and clicking Find. For more details see the ‘Find a Particular Node’ section of this manual. 4

Once the correct node has been selected, click ‘OK’.

8.4.14.2 Change a Module’s Configuration Parameters When a module is added to a strategy page, the configuration parameters are not defined. It is therefore necessary to set them up as required. Note that if Auto Edit is enabled, the dialogue box that enables the configuration parameters to be defined is automatically displayed. To change a module’s configuration parameters: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module or connective to the module for which the configuration parameters are to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the module, or connective, or right-click it, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Parameters dialogue box for the module is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

127

Engineer IQ Controllers

3

Edit the module's parameters as required. , , and enables the display attributes to be specified. Clicking will check all the check boxes. Clicking will uncheck all the check boxes, and clicking will return the display setting to the current defaults. If specifying a label, SET will prevent the entry of illegal characters ( ) { } , ; - " / \ and replace them with spaces.

Note that clicking 4

will set the default display options for the module to the ones currently selected.

Once all the parameters have been set up correctly click OK.

Note that performing this action on an undefined connective enables it to be defined. 8.4.14.3 Change a Driver's Output Channel For pre IQ3 controllers it is possible to change both the output and antiphase channels of a driver (L and A). To change a driver’s output channel: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the driver or connective to the required driver for which the output channel is to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the driver, and on the displayed menu click Change Channel. The Select Output dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

Click Channel, or Antiphase to specify whether the output channel or antiphase channel is to be changed. Click OK. The Channel Output dialogue box is displayed.

5

Click the required channel. If necessary, use the scroll bars to locate the channel. Its number, type, and status are displayed on the right of the dialogue box. The number specifies the channel number, the type specifies whether it is analogue, digital, or internal, and the status specifies which driver is currently using the module. Icons next to these parameters indicate this graphically. They are explained below.

Type Icon

Description Analogue - can only be used for drivers with analogue outputs. Digital Output - can only be used for drivers with digital outputs. Universal output - can be used for drivers with either analogue, or digital outputs. Note that the hardware must be set up accordingly.

Status Icon

6 128

Description Free to be used Used as a destination - Do not use again.

Once the correct channel has been selected, click OK. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.15 Set up the Sequence Table Once the strategy has been defined it is necessary to check the sequence table to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order. SET enables you to add modules to and remove modules from the sequence table as required, or change a modules sequence step. To help with this process, SET provides the ability to insert a gap in the sequence table to enable modules to be inserted in that position, or to move a module to a particular sequence step. This is described in the following sections of this manual: Add Modules to the Sequence Table Change a Module's Sequence Step Insert a Gap in the Sequence Table Move Modules in the Sequence Table Remove Modules from the Sequence Table 8.4.15.1 Add Modules to the Sequence Table Although when a module is placed in the strategy its position in the sequence table is specified, it may be necessary to add modules that do not normally appear in the sequence table (such as digital inputs for fast sequencing) into the sequence table. To add a module to the sequence table: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module that is to be added to the sequence table as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the module, and on the displayed menu click Sequence Step. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the Sequence Table box click the required sequence step.

4

Click

. This moves the selected sequence step to the Module’s Sequence box.

Note that if a module needs to be serviced more than once per cycle time, it can be added to the sequence table in more than one place. However, it is recommended that this be done only in exceptional circumstances. 8.4.15.2 Change a Module’s Sequence Step Although when a module placed in the strategy its position in the sequence table is specified, it may be necessary to change a module’s sequence step to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order, or to set up fast sequencing if it is required. To a change module’s sequence step: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module whose sequence step is to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the module, and on the displayed menu click Sequence Step from the displayed menu. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed.

The position of the module in the sequence table is indicated in the Module’s Sequence box. Free steps in the sequence table are listed in the Sequence Table box.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

129

Engineer IQ Controllers 3

To allocate a sequence step to the module, in the Sequence Table box click the required sequence step, and then click . This moves the selected sequence step to the Module’s Sequence box, adding the module to the sequence table at that step. To remove a module from a particular step in the sequence table, in the . This moves the selected sequence step Module’s Sequence box click the sequence step, and then click to the Sequence Table box, and removes the module from that sequence step in the sequence table.

Note that if a module in an IQ controller needs to be serviced more than once per cycle time, it can be added to the sequence table in more than one place. However, it is recommended that this be done only in exceptional circumstances. Important - For a module that enables sequence steps to be specified, it must appear in the sequence table at least once (does not apply to digital input modules). 4

Click OK.

8.4.15.3 Insert a Gap in the Sequence Table If required, a gap of a specified number of sequence steps can be inserted in the sequence table before a specified step. All the modules in the sequence table above the point at which the gap is to be added are moved to make space for the gap. To insert a gap in the sequence table: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module that is in the sequence table at the step before which the gap is to be inserted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. or on the Tools menu point to Sequence Steps and click Insert. The Insert Sequence Steps 2 Click dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the box enter the number of steps that are to be added. Click OK. Click the module that is in the sequence table at the step before which the gap is to be inserted.

8.4.15.4 Move Modules in the Sequence Table Modules can be moved to a specified step in the sequence table. To move modules in the sequence table: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules whose positions in the sequence table are to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Change the next sequence step in the Next Module List to the required sequence step as described in the ‘Specify the Next Module Number’ section of this manual. or on the Tools menu point to Sequence Steps and click Move. The pointer changes to a . 3 Click 4 Click the module that is to be moved in the sequence table. The module will be moved to the sequence step specified by the sequence pointer and the pointer incremented by 1. 5 Repeat step (4) for all the modules that are to be moved in the sequence table. 6 Once the required modules have been moved, click anywhere on the page. The cursor changes back to normal. 8.4.15.5 Remove Modules from the Sequence Table When a module is placed on a strategy page, it is assigned a place in the sequence table. It is possible to remove a module from the sequence table completely. This is useful if the order in which the modules are processed is to be changed; a number of modules can be quickly removed from the sequence table, and then assigned a new place in the table. To remove modules from the sequence table: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules to be removed from the sequence table as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. . 2 Click , or on the Tools menu point to Sequence Steps and click Free. The pointer changes to a 3 Click each module that is to be removed from the sequence table in turn. Clicking on a module will remove it completely from the sequence table. 4 Once the required modules have been removed from the sequence table, right-click. The cursor will change back to normal.

130

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers Important – When configuring pre IQ3 controllers a module must appear in the sequence table at least once for it to function. When configuring IQ3 controllers removing a module from the sequence table will cause it to be event driven. 8.4.16 Set up Event Driven Strategy Event driven strategy can be used in IQ3 controllers to cause a particular piece of strategy to be processed when an event occurs. This is useful for lighting strategies where the light must be turned on as soon as the switch is turned on. Event driven strategy is a block of strategy that performs a particular isolated function. When any input in any module in that block of strategy is changed the strategy will be processed. Care should be taken to ensure that the output of a module in the block does not change the input of a previous module otherwise the strategy will continue to be processed in a loop. The modules in a block of event driven strategy do not appear in the sequence table. To set up event driven strategy: 1 Create the required strategy as required ensuring that is standalone. , and then clicking 2 Remove the modules from the sequence table by clicking to change the pointer to a each module that is to be removed from the sequence table. Once the required modules have been removed from the sequence table, right-click. The cursor will change back to normal. For more details about removing modules from the sequence table see the ‘Remove Modules from the Sequence Table’ section of this manual. 8.4.17 Set up Fast Sequencing Fast sequencing can be used in pre IQ3 controllers to reduce the time delay in processing strategy associated with a digital input. Digital inputs do not normally appear in the sequence table of pre IQ3 controllers because they are always serviced every 15.6 msecs. However, the modules that process their inputs can only be serviced when their turn occurs in the sequence table. To reduce this time delay, fast sequencing can be used to jump to the part of the sequence table that contains the strategy that processes the digital input. To set up fast sequencing: 1 If necessary, change the sequence steps of the modules in the part of the strategy that is to be fast sequenced so that they have sequential sequence steps, and are as near to the end of the sequence table as possible as described in the ‘Set up the Sequence Table’ section of this manual. 2 Display the strategy page containing the digital input that is to be fast sequenced as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the digital input, and on the displayed menu click Sequence Step. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed.

4

5 6 7 8

In the Sequence Table box click the sequence step immediately before the first sequence step of the strategy that is to be fast sequenced, and click . This moves the selected sequence step to the Module’s Sequence box. Click OK. Right-click the last module in the piece of strategy that is to be fast sequenced, and on the displayed menu click Sequence Step. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed. Click Add Return Step. Click OK. An R appears in the sequence indicator to indicate the return step.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

131

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.18 Set up the Controllers Normal Occupation Times The times the controller normally operates (standard week) must be set up by defining the times in the time zone module. To set up the controller’s normal occupation times: 1 If it has not already been done add a time zone module for each different set of occupation times that are required, as described in the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the time zone module to display a dialogue box similar to the one below.

3 4 5

In the Label box at the top of the dialogue box enter or select the name for the time zone module. In the Pin Level box enter the PIN level required to make changes to occupation times (1 to 99). Set up the operating times for each day as required by dragging each end of the bar to specify the times. To drag to the right, and then drag each end of the bar to specify the times. add another period click

Note that for pre IQ3 controllers there is a maximum of 3 periods. To set occupation for the whole day, right-click the day and on the displayed menu click On all day. To set nonoccupation for the whole day, right-click the day and on the displayed menu click Off all day. The times can be specified by clicking the required period and entering the start and stop times in the Start Time, and Stop Time boxes. Two periods can be merged by right-clicking a period and clicking Merge Left, or Merge right. Occupation times from one day can be copied and then pasted to another day, or the entire week, by right-clicking the day whose times are to be copied, clicking Copy Day on the displayed menu, right-clicking the day to which the times are to be pasted, and clicking Paste Day on the displayed menu. To paste the times to the entire week rightclick and click Paste for week on the displayed menu, and to paste them just to the working week (Monday to Friday) week right-click and click Paste for working week on the displayed menu. A single period can be copied by right-clicking it, and clicking Copy on the displayed menu, it can then be pasted where required in a similar way to pasting the entire day. To set occupation for the entire week, right-click and click On all week on the displayed menu. To set nonoccupation for the entire week, right-click and click Off all week on the displayed menu. 6 7

132

Click Graphic or Data to specify the required display mode. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.19 Set up Exceptions For IQ3 controllers any times that the controllers or to be in occupancy that are different to the normal occupation times can be specified by setting up exceptions. To set up exception: 1 Double-click the time zone module. The Time Zone dialogue box is displayed.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Click Add. The exception is added. In the Label box in the Exceptions area enter the name for the exception. In the Start Day box click the day of the month the exception is to start. In the Start Month box click the month the exception is to start. In the Stop Day box click the day of the month the exception is to stop. In the Stop Month box click the month the exception is to stop. In the Priority box click the priority of the exception. In the Use box specify whether the exception is occur once only, be repeated every year, or not used at all by clicking on the required option. Option Next Every Free

10

Description Exception will occur only once. Exception will be repeated every year. Exception will not be used.

Set up the operating times for the exception as required by dragging each end of the bar to specify the times. To add another period click drag to the right, and then drag each end of the bar to specify the times.

To set occupation for the whole day, right-click the day and on the displayed menu click On all day. To set nonoccupation for the whole day, right-click the day and on the displayed menu click Off all day. The times can be specified by clicking the required period and entering the start and stop times in the Start Time, and Stop Time boxes. Two periods can be merged by right-clicking a period and clicking Merge Left, or Merge right. Occupation times from one day can be copied and then pasted to another day, or the entire week, by right-clicking the day whose times are to be copied, clicking Copy Day on the displayed menu, right-clicking the day to which the times are to be pasted, and clicking Paste Day on the displayed menu. To paste the times to the entire week rightclick and click Paste for week on the displayed menu, and to paste them just to the working week (Monday to Friday) week right-click and click Paste for working week on the displayed menu. A single period can be copied by right-clicking it, and clicking Copy on the displayed menu, it can then be pasted where required in a similar way to pasting the entire day. 11 12 13

Click Apply. Repeat steps (2) to (11) for any other exceptions required for the time zone. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

133

Engineer IQ Controllers 8.4.19.1 Delete Exceptions Unwanted exceptions can be deleted. To set up exception: 1 Double-click the time zone module. The Time Zone dialogue box is displayed.

2 3 4 5

In the Label box click the exception that is to be deleted. Click Delete. The exception is deleted. Repeat steps (2) to (3) for any other exceptions that are to be deleted. Click OK.

8.4.20 Set up IC Comms If IC comms are to be used to send values to other controllers, or to obtain values from other controllers it is necessary to set up the IC Comms modules. To set up IC Comms: 1 Add the required IC comms modules. Remember to specify whether a bit, byte, or analogue value is to be sent when adding the module. See the ‘Add Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual for more details. When setting up IC comms you should remember that IQ3 controllers cannot send Data From IC Comms messages. If an IQ3 controller requires a value from another controller that controller should be configured to use a data to, or global data to IC comms message to send the required data to the IQ3 controller. Note that pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers can only send analogue values. If byte information is to be sent, it is necessary to use a D to A module to convert the value to an analogue value and sent that, and then convert it back to a digital value in the receiving controller using an A to D module. When sending Digital Bytes a D to A module should be used to convert the value to an analogue value. The table below list the possible combinations: IC Comms Type Data From Data To

Global To

Maximum 134

Digital Bit or Byte Analogue Digital Byte Digital Bit Analogue Digital Byte Digital Bit Analogue, and Attribute Match

Item

Configured in IQ2 to IQ3 Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Configured in IQ3 to IQ2 No No Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes

Configured in IQ3 to IQ3 No No Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes

Yes v1.2 or greater

Yes

Yes v1.2 or greater SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers IC Comms Type

Configured in IQ2 to IQ3 Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater

Sum Average Minimum

Configured in IQ3 to IQ2 Yes Yes Yes

Configured in IQ3 to IQ3 Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater

Pre v1.2 IQ3 contollers do not respond to maximum, minimum, sum, and average IC comms messages. They can use maximum, minimum, sum, and average IC comms messages to obtain information from pre IQ3 controllers or pre v1.2 IQ3 contollers. 2

If configuring an IQ3 controller that is to receive Data To IC comms messages from a pre IQ3 controller analogue nodes, or digital byte modules must be added. E.g. if the controller is to receive a data to IC comms message that is being sent to analogue node 104 analogue node module number 104 must be added. In a similar way if it is to receive a bit or byte value from a pre IQ3 controller that is to be written to byte 47 digital byte module number 47 must be added to the strategy.

8.4.21 Set up Controller Security If the controller is to have PIN protection enabled to protect the strategy within it from being changed by unauthorised users user modules must be added to provide the necessary protection. When a user attempts to make a change that is PIN protected, a PIN that matches one in the controller with a PIN level high enough to authorise the change will be requested by the controller. The controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a PIN level of 99. If no user modules are set up, the controller’s security is disabled. To set up controller security: 1 For IQ3 controllers set up the guest user as described in the ‘Set up the Guest User’ section of this manual. 2 Add the required user modules to the strategy. Caution the controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the at least one user module has a PIN level of 99. 8.4.21.1 Set up the Guest User For IQ3 controllers it is necessary to set up the guest user. This defines what information a user can access from the controller from a web browser and they don’t have a username and password. To setup the guest user: 1 Display a strategy page for the IQ3 controller for which guest user is to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click Users. Click The Select Module dialogue box is displayed. Click OK. The dialogue box will be closed. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the page. Double click the module to display the Parameters dialogue box if it is not already displayed. Select the Guest User (Not Logged In) check box. In the Pin box enter the 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a display, or must be sent by a tool/supervisor to authorise a change. In the Level box enter the PIN level to be assigned the to the guest user (Range = -1 to 99). In the Timeout box enter the length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off (Range = 1 to 15 minutes).

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

and select In the Home Page box select the required home page from the list. To specify a GraphIQ click the required page from the dialogue box that is displayed. To specify other pages enter the required code. For IQ3 controllers with v1.3 firmware or greater specify the information the guest user has access to when the controller is accessed from a web browser by selecting the required check boxes.

Check box Alarms Time Zones Modules GraphIQs pages GraphIQs Navigator 12

Description Specifies whether the user has access to alarms. Specifies whether the user has access to timezones. Specifies whether the user has access to module pages. Specifies whether the user has access to graphical display pages. Specifies whether the user has access to the navigator on graphical display pages.

Click OK.

If required the module’s output that defines whether the user is currently logged in or not can be linked to other pieces of strategy e.g. to cause a particular action when the user logs in. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

135

Engineer IQ Controllers For a full description of the user module see the ‘IQ3 User Module’ sections of this manual. IQ3 user modules can be edited and deleted just like any other module. 8.4.21.2 Add IQ3 User Modules to the Strategy IQ3 user modules enable PIN protection to be set up, which prevents unauthorised changes from being made to both the strategy, and items like setpoints. A user module defines the username and password, or PIN required to log on, and the PIN level assigned to people who log in using that PIN. It also defines the page that is displayed when a user logs in form a web browser, and how the period of inactivity before the user will automatically be logged off. To add an IQ3 user module: 1 Display a strategy page for the IQ3 controller for which user modules are to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

, or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click Users. Click The Select Module dialogue box is displayed. In the Module Number box enter the number of the user module that is to be added. Click OK. The dialogue box will be closed. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the page. If Auto Edit is enabled, the Parameters dialogue box for the module will be displayed. Double click the module to display the Parameters dialogue box if it is not already displayed. Clear the Guest User (Not Logged In) check box. In the Password box enter the user module’s password. In the Pin box enter the 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a display, or must be sent by a tool/supervisor to authorise a change. In the Level box enter the PIN level to be assigned the to the guest user (Range = -1 to 99). In the Timeout box enter the length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off (Range = 1 to 15 minutes). and select In the Home Page box select the required home page from the list. To specify a GraphIQ click the required page from the dialogue box that is displayed. To specify other pages enter the required code. For IQ3 controllers with v1.3 firmware or greater specify the information the guest user has access to when the controller is accessed from a web browser by selecting the required check boxes.

Check box Alarms Time Zones Modules GraphIQs pages Module Navigator Buttons 14

Description Specifies whether the user has access to alarms. Specifies whether the user has access to timezones. Specifies whether the user has access to module pages. Specifies whether the user has access to graphical display pages. Specifies whether the user has access to the module navigator buttons.

Click OK.

If required the module’s output that defines whether the user is currently logged in or not can be linked to other pieces of strategy e.g. to cause a particular action when the user logs in. For a full description of the user module see the ‘IQ3 User Module’ sections of this manual. IQ3 user modules can be edited and deleted just like any other module. 8.4.21.3 Add IQ2 User Modules to the Strategy IQ2 user modules enable PIN protection to be set up, which prevents unauthorised changes from being made to both the strategy, and items like setpoints. A user module defines the PIN required to log on, and the PIN level assigned to people who log in using that PIN. To add an IQ2 user module: 1 Display a strategy page for the IQ controller for which user modules are to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2

, or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click Users. Click The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be defined.

136

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 4 5 6 7

In the Level box enter the required PIN level (0 to 99). In the Pin box enter the PIN number (4-digits). Repeat steps (3) to (5) until all the required user modules have been set up. Click OK.

Caution the controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a PIN level of 99. 8.4.21.4 Delete IQ2 User Modules If required, user modules that have been added to the strategy can be removed. To delete a user module: 1 Display a strategy page for the IQ controller for which user modules are to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2

, or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click User Click Pins. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be deleted. Set the PIN level, and PIN to 0. Click OK.

Caution if PIN protection is to be used at least one user module with a PIN level of 99 must be set up. IQ3 user modules are deleted in the same way as any other module. 8.4.21.5 Edit IQ2 User Modules If required, once IQ2 user modules have been added to the strategy, they can be edited to change the associated PIN or PIN level. To edit a user module: 1 Display a strategy page for the IQ controller for which User modules are to be set up as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2

, or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Other and click User Click Pins. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be edited. Specify the PIN level, and PIN number as required. Click OK.

Note that setting the PIN level, and PIN number to 0 removes that user module from the strategy. IQ3 user modules are edited in the same way as any other module. 8.4.22 Set up Display and Directory Modules Display modules and directory modules enable a set of displays to be defined within the controller. Each page can show a mixture of different item types, e.g. sensor values, knob values etc, and, where appropriate, enable adjustments to be made, and values to be graphed. These pages can then be viewed on supervisory products such as the NDP. The display and directory modules can be defined either by manually setting them up, or by automatically setting them up using the Plant View.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

137

Engineer IQ Controllers PIN levels can set up for each directory module to prevent unauthorised use of those pages. When PIN levels have been set up, users will only have access to a directory module when logged on at a level equal to or above the directory module’s PIN level. SET will only allow display and directory modules to be set up if they exist in that particular controller. To set up the display and directory modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

If the Plant View has been set up, it can be used to form the structure required for the display and directory modules. To do this in the Plant View box click the required part of the Plant View, and drag it onto the Root area of the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse button in the correct place. Add any other directory modules that are required.

Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that a maximum of 9 directory modules be used. 5

Add any other display modules that are required.

The Free Modules Count area will display the number of free display and directory modules. If you use more modules than are available in the controller, you will not be allowed to continue until the module count is zero or greater. 6 7

If necessary, change the order of the display modules as described in the ‘Change the Order of Display Modules’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers edit the IQ3 display and directory modules as described in the ‘Edit IQ3 Display Module’, and ‘Edit IQ3 Directory Module’ sections of this manual. For pre IQ3 controllers set the PIN levels for the IQ2 display modules as described in the ‘Set up the PIN Level for an IQ2 Display Module’ section of this manual.

Note that the parameters of IQ3 display and directory modules can also be edited using the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor as described in the ‘Set up Graphical display pages’ section of this manual. 8

Click OK.

The display and directory module structure in another controller can be imported, as described in the ‘Import the Display and Directory Module Structure’ section of this manual, to save time when setting up the display and directory module structure. 8.4.22.1 Add an IQ3 Directory Module IQ3 directory modules form part of the description of an IQ3 graphical display page. Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that a maximum of 9 directory modules be used.

138

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers To add an IQ3 directory module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box right-click P0, or the directory module to which the new module is to be added, and on the displayed menu click Insert Directory. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the Title box enter the name for the directory module. Maximum length 30-characters.

Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that the length of the label does not exceed 12-characters. 5 6

7 8 9 10

to set it. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to access the module (1 to 99), or use Select the Colour check box, then click Change to display the Color dialogue box, then click the required background colour and click OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Colour check box. If required specify the backdrop for the page by clicking Change and selecting the required backdrop from the list in the dialogue box that is displayed. In the Refresh Rate box enter the required refresh rate in seconds. In the Width box enter the width of the page in pixels, and in the Height box enter the height of the page in pixels, or alternatively in the Page Size box click the required. Click OK.

8.4.22.2 Add an IQ2 Directory Module Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that a maximum of 9 directory modules be used. To add an IQ2 directory module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box right-click Root, or the directory module to which the new module is to be added, and on the displayed menu click Insert Directory. The Display and Directory box is displayed.

4

In the Label box enter the name for the directory module. Maximum length 20-characters.

Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that the length of the label does not exceed 12-characters. 5 6

In the Pin Level box enter the PIN level required to access the module (1 to 99). Click OK.

8.4.22.3 Add an IQ3 Dynamic Display Module Dynamic display modules enable values from the IQ3 controller to be included in the views. If required the value can be set to be a link to the Details page of the module from which the value is sourced. Each display module has a parent parameter, which is the directory module to which it is attached. This is specified automatically when the module is created. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

139

Engineer IQ Controllers To add an IQ3 display module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 If necessary, add the directory module to which the dynamic display item is to be added as described in the ‘Add an IQ3 Directory Module’ section of this manual. 4 In the Display Items box click the item that the display module is to access and drag it on onto the required directory module in the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse. If required, the items displayed in the Display Items box can be limited to specific item types by clicking the appropriate button as described in the table below. Button Digin Driver Knob Sensor Show All Switch Time Zone 5

Description Displays all digital inputs in the strategy. Displays all drivers in the strategy. Displays all knobs in the strategy. Displays all sensors in the strategy. Displays all items in the strategy. Displays all switches in the strategy. Displays all time zones in the strategy.

Set up the display module's parameters as required as described in the ‘Set up an IQ3 Dynamic Display Module Parameters’ section of this manual.

8.4.22.4 Add an IQ3 Static Display Module Static display modules enable static text to be included on the IQ3s graphical display pages. If required the static text can be set to be a link to any specified URL. Each display module has a parent parameter, which is the directory module to which it is attached. This is specified automatically when the module is created. To add an static display module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 If necessary, add the directory module to which the static display item is to be added as described in the ‘Add an IQ3 Directory Module’ section of this manual. 4 Right-click the directory module that is to contain the static display module and on the displayed menu click Insert Static Display Item. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the Label box enter the text that is to be displayed.

6 7

In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to view or use the module (1 to 99), or use If the text is to be a link click Change. The URL Editor dialogue box is displayed.

8 9 10

In the URL Type box click the required type of link. In the URL box enter the destination of the link. Click OK.

140

to set it

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 11

12

13 14 15 16 17 18

Specify the foreground colour for the item by selecting the Foreground Colour check box, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a foreground colour is not required clear the Foreground Colour check box. Specify the background ground colour for the item by selecting the Background Colour check box, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Background Colour check box. In the Font Type box click the required font. In the Font Size box click the required font size. In the Width box enter the width of the object in pixels. To size the text to fit click Width. If the object width has been specified specifically Text Align box click the required text alignment. You should ensure that the Width check box is cleared. Specify the position on the page in the X and Y boxes. Click OK.

8.4.22.5 Add an IQ2 Display Module To add an IQ2 display module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 If necessary, add the directory module to which the display module is to be added. 4 In the Display Items box click the item that the display module is to access and drag it on onto the required directory module in the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse. If required, the items displayed in the Display Items box can be limited to specific item types by clicking the appropriate button as described in the table below. Button Digin Driver Knob Sensor Show All Switch Time Zone 5

Description Displays all digital inputs in the strategy. Displays all drivers in the strategy. Displays all knobs in the strategy. Displays all sensors in the strategy. Displays all items in the strategy. Displays all switches in the strategy. Displays all time zones in the strategy.

Set Pin levels as required as described in the ‘Set up the PIN Level for an IQ2 Display Module’ section of this manual.

8.4.22.6 Set up an IQ3 Dynamic Display Module's Parameters To set an IQ3 dynamic display module’s parameters: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the display module that is to be set up is displayed. 4 Right-click the module and click Edit Parameters on the menu that is displayed. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

141

Engineer IQ Controllers 5

In the Item Reference box enter the required item reference. This should be in the form shown below:

specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g. S1 specifies sensor 1). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. the value of a sensor). The module parameter is specified using the parameter identifier (ID), and can be any parameter available within the specified module. For details of the parameters available for each module and their identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. If the module parameter is not specified the default overview parameters for the module type will be displayed. E.g. S1 would display the sensor label, value, and units. The table below lists the overview parameters for each module type. Module Type Alarm Destination Alarm Group Alarm Route Analogue Node Digital Byte Digital Input Directory Display Driver Function I/O Module IC Comms Knob Logic Loop OSS Plot Sensor Sensor Type Switch Time Module Time Zone User Virtual CNC

Overview Parameters Label Label Label and Status Label ands Value Label and Value Label and State Label Nothing Label and Value/Status Label and Output Value Label Label and Source Value Label, Value, and Units Label and Output Value Label and Output Value Label and State Label Label, Value, and Units Label Label and Status Label Label and Value Label and Status Label

Note that although multiple parameters are used as the default overview parameters it is only possible to specify single parameters. 6 7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 142

to set it. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to view/use the module (1 to 99), or use Specify the foreground colour for the item by selecting the Foreground Colour check box, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a foreground colour is not required clear the Foreground Colour check box. Specify the colour used for the item when it is in an alarm by selecting InAlarm Colour check box, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the InAlarm Colour check box. Specify the background ground colour for the item by selecting the Background Colour check box, clicking Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required clear the Background Colour check box In the Font Type box click the required font. In the Font Size box click the required font size. In the Width box enter the width of the object in pixels. To size the text to fit click Width. If the object width has been specified specifically in Text Align box click the required text alignment. You should ensure that the Width check box is cleared. If a link to the items detail page is required select the Make a link to the item’s detail page check box. Specify the position on the page in the X and Y boxes. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers 16

Click OK.

8.4.22.7 Set up the PIN Level for an IQ2 Display Module To set a PIN level for an IQ2 display module 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the display module for which the PIN level is to be set up is displayed. 4 Right-click the module for which the PIN level is to be set, and click Edit Parameters on the displayed menu. The Pin dialogue box is displayed.

5 6

In the Pin Level box enter the required PIN level (1 to 99). Click OK.

8.4.22.8 Change the Order of Display Modules To change the order of the display modules: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the display module that is to be moved is displayed. 4 Hold down the SHIFT key and click the display module that is to be moved. 5 Drag the module up/down to the required position. 6 Release the mouse button. 7 Click OK. 8.4.22.9 Delete a Display Module To delete a display module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the display module that is to be is to be deleted is displayed. 4 Right-click the module and that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Display Module. The module will be deleted. 5 Click OK. 8.4.22.10 Delete a Directory Module To delete a directory module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the display and directory modules are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the directory module that is to be is to be deleted is displayed. 4 Right-click the module and that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Directory. The module will be deleted. 5 Click OK. Note that every item below that directory will also be deleted. 8.4.22.11 Edit IQ3 Display Modules If required the parameters of IQ3 display modules can be edited.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

143

Engineer IQ Controllers To edit a display module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the display module as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 Right-click the module, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Styling dialogue box is displayed. 4 Edit the parameters as required. 5 Click OK. 8.4.22.12 Edit IQ3 Directory Modules If required the parameters of IQ3 directory modules can be edited. To edit a directory module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the directory module as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 Right-click the module, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Styling dialogue box is displayed. 4 Edit the parameters as required. 5 Click OK. 8.4.22.13 Export the Display and Directory Module Structure If a display and directory module structure has been set up it can be exported to a file (DnD file) that can be imported into another controller. This saves time if you have a number of controllers with a similar display and directory module structure. To export the display and directory module structure: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller from which the display and directory modules are to be exported as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 2 Click dialogue box is displayed. 3 Ensure the structure is as required. 4 Click Export. The Save as box is displayed.

5

In the File name box enter the required file name.

To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is displayed. 6

Click Save.

8.4.22.14 Import the Display and Directory Module Structure It is possible to import a display and directory module structure from another controller. This saves time if you have a number of controllers with a similar display and directory module structure. When a structure is imported it is added to any existing structure. All the necessary directory modules are created to create the structure. Display modules are created provide the module about which they are providing information is in the strategy.

144

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers To import the display and directory module structure: 1 Export the display and directory structure that is required as described in the ‘Export the Display Module Structure’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page for the controller into which the display and directory modules are to be imported as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup 3 Click dialogue box is displayed. 4 Click Import the Open dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the file list click the file that is to be imported.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 6

Click Open.

8.4.23 Set up Graphical Display Pages IQ3 controllers can set up to serve schematic pages (graphical display pages) to web browsers. These views can contain graphics, and live values from the controller itself. The set up of these views is done using the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor that is supplied and installed with SET. Details of using the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor are provided in the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor Manual (TE200629). To set up graphical display pages: 1 Create the required graphics files for the view's backdrop using a suitable graphics package and save it in the required format (JPG, and GIF files) in the Backdrops sub-directory of the directory in which SET is installed. It is recommended that JPG files be used. If required backdrops uploaded from an IQ3 controller can be imported as described in the ‘Import a Backdrop File’ section of this manual. Note that the use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. SET will prevent backdrops bigger than 200k being downloaded and limit the total size used by all backdrops in the controller to 2Mb. 2 3 4 5 6

Set up the display and directory modules as described in the ‘Set up Display and Directory Modules’ section of this manual to create the required page structure. A directory module is a page and a display module specifies an item on the page. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the graphical display pages are to be setup as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup Click dialogue box is displayed. Right-click the directory module that represents the page that is to be set up and on the displayed menu click Edit Web Page. The Graphical Display Page Editor is displayed with the selected page. Right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Styling dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

145

Engineer IQ Controllers

7 8 9

Specify the page’s title, PIN level, background colour, backdrop, refresh rate, and size. Click OK. Position the objects on the page as required by moving them, or aligning them.

For more details see the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor Manual (TE200629). 10 11 12

8.5

Edit the objects as required, by right-clicking the required object on the displayed menu clicking Properties. If there are other pages to set up navigate to the required page as described in the ‘Access Other Pages’ section of the IQ3 Graphical Display Page Editor Manual (TE200629) and set up that page in the same way as described above. Once all the pages are correctly set up click OK.

Add Graphics and Text to Strategy Pages

Graphics such as circles, lines, and rectangles can be added to a strategy page to highlight a particular area of the strategy, or to make the page easier to understand. To add a circle to a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Circle 3

. from the menu that is displayed. The pointer changes to a Drag the pointer to define the size of the circle, and release the mouse button.

To add a line to a strategy page: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Line from 3 4 5

the menu that is displayed. The pointer changes to a . Drag the pointer to define the length of the line, and release the mouse button. If required add more lines to the page. Once all the lines have added click .

To add a dotted line to a strategy page: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Dotted 3 4 5

Line from the menu that is displayed. The pointer changes to a . Drag the pointer to define the length of the line, and release the mouse button. If required add more lines to the page. Once all the lines have added click .

To add a rectangle to a strategy page: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Rectangle 3 8.5.1

from the menu that is displayed. The pointer changes to a . Drag the pointer to define the size of the rectangle, and release the mouse button. Add Text to Strategy Pages

Text can be added to the strategy page to title the page, to make it more understandable, or to describe the functionality of that part of the strategy in more detail. Once on the page, the text can be moved to the required position, or deleted when it is no longer required. Any text added to the page will be printed out when the page is printed. To add text to a strategy page: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Draw and click Text. The Display Text dialogue box is displayed.

146

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers

3 4 5 6 7 8.5.2

In the box enter the required text. Click the appropriate Size option to specify the size of the text. If the text is to be bold select the Bold check box. Click OK. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the text is to be placed and click. The text is placed on the page. Delete Text and Graphics from a Strategy Page

To delete a text and graphics from a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page containing the text or graphic that is to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the text/graphic that is to be, and on the displayed menu click Delete Module. 8.5.3

Move Text and Lines on a Strategy Page

To move a piece of text or line: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Point to the text/line that is to be moved, and hold down the left mouse button. 3 Drag the text/line to its new location, and release the mouse button.

8.6

Test the Strategy

Once the strategy has been created for a controller, it should be tested to ensure that it functions as expected. This test should be performed in a controller that is not connected to any plant to ensure that expensive plant will not be damaged should any errors occur. The strategy is in the controller it should be tested thoroughly to ensure that it operates as expected. The exact tests will depend on the strategy, however it is recommended that all the inputs be exercised, and the output of the drivers monitored. It is also important to check that the strategy deals with any alarm conditions correctly.

8.7 8.7.1

Download Strategy to the Controller Download Strategy Using SET

SET can download strategy to IQ controllers over a network, or to a directly connected controller. SET downloads the strategy using the appropriate file format (IQ3, IQ2, or LDF) for the type of controller. To download to an IQ controller using SET: 1 Connect the PC running SET to the IQ network, or directly connect to the controller’s supervisor or direct connection port using a suitable cable as described in the controller’s documentation. Note that if downloading to an IQ3 controller you must connect to the IQ Network over Ethernet as described in the ‘Connecting to the IQ Network over Ethernet’ section of this manual. 2 3

Ensure that there is a comms connection available that will enable SET to communicate with the controller to which the strategy is to be downloaded. See the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual for details. Display a strategy page from the controller whose strategy is to be downloaded as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

Note this means that if the strategy for one controller (controller A) is to be downloaded to another controller (controller B) you must select a strategy page from controller A. 4

Click

, or on the Comms menu click Download. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

147

Engineer IQ Controllers

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. 5

To select a different controller, edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.

Caution if downloading to a different controller, ensure that its firmware version is the same or higher than the controller for which the strategy was created. 6 7

To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection is to be used in the Standard Comms box click the required connection.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one that will be associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will not be added to the list of comms connections. 8 9

10 11

If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection. If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers enter the required username in the User Name box, and the password in the Password box. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box. For earlier controllers enter the PIN into the Pin box. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel the download.

If OK was selected the IQ3 Download, IQF Download, or LDF Download window will be displayed depending on the selected controller.

12

The download file is automatically determined by the address of the controller and is automatically created if

13

it does not exist. To specify a different file click and navigate to the required file. If downloading to IQ3 controllers connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>).

148

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers Note that when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. This is because it is only possible to download the IQ3 file using the current loop. If this box is not selected and there are IQ3 controllers connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be downloaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Downloads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. 14 15

If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is downloaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are downloaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being downloaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 16

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 17

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File(s) check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 18 19

Specify whether the window is to be closed when the download is complete by selecting the Close this dialogue box when download completes check box. Click Start to begin the download. If the Start button is greyed out, the specified file does not exit, and a different file must be specified before the download can take place.

If the download fails, or is stopped, the Start button will change to Retry, clicking Retry; will attempt the download again. If SET is directly connected controller, the Lan, and Node settings are ignored, and the strategy will be sent to the controller to which SET is connected. However, if it is connected to an IQ2 controller whose supervisor port has been set up to allow communication over the network, the Lan, and Node settings will be used, and the strategy downloaded to the specified controller over the network. 8.7.2

Download Strategy Using Another Tool

If required the strategy can be downloaded to the controller using another tool that is capable of downloading the files. If this is to be done then SET can create the strategy file (IQ3, LDF, or IQ2) so that it can be downloaded using other tools. To download to an IQ controller using another tool: 1 Use SET to create the strategy file, as described in the ‘Create an IQ3 File’ ‘Create an LDF File’, or ‘Create an IQ2 File’ sections of this manual. 2 Download the strategy using the tool as describe in the tool’s documentation. If required the files required for strategy download can be created for more than one controller in a single operation as described in the ‘Create Multiple Data Files’ section of this manual.

8.8

Issue Project Documentation

Once the project is complete it is necessary to issue the project documentation. This involves defining the strategy issue for each device, printing the project overview, and printing out the project documentation for each controller in the project. 8.8.1

Define a Strategy's Issue

Details about the strategy for a particular controller can be kept. They describe the current issue, and enable a description of the changes made since the previous version to be recorded. These details are included on the strategy pages for the device when they are printed out. To add a new issue: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which issue details are to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Issue Details, or on the Device menu click Issue Details. The Drawing Issue dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

149

Engineer IQ Controllers

3 4 5 6 7 8

Click New. In the PCN/Details box enter details about the issue. In the Pages Affected box enter the numbers of the strategy pages that have been changed since the last issue. In the Date Approved box enter the approval date. In the Approved box enter the name of the person who approved the strategy. Click OK.

To delete the previous issue details: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which issue details are to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Issue Details, or on the Device menu click Issue Details. The Drawing Issue dialogue box is displayed. 3 Click Delete Last. 4 Click OK. 8.8.2

Specify the Notes Printed on the Front Page

The notes printed on the front page of the printout can be defined. To define the notes printed on the front page: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the notes are to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Notes, or on the Device menu click Notes. The Notes dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 8.8.3

In the box enter the required notes. Click OK. Print Project Overview

The project overview provides an overview of all the controllers in the project. It lists the Lan number, address, device type name, identifier, version and serial number/MAC address of each controller as well as the issue and revision number of the strategy. The project name, number, details, client, site name, and site GUID are also printed. To print the project overview: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View click the next to the required controllers. SET will indicate the selected controllers with a . 3 On the File menu click Print Overview. The Print dialogue box is displayed.

150

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Engineer IQ Controllers

4 5

In the Number of copies box enter the number of copies required. Click OK.

8.8.4

Print Project Documentation

SET enables the strategy pages for each controller to be printed out. It is possible to print out all the pages for a particular controller, or selected controllers. SET also provides a number of tables for each controller, which specify items such as the sequence table etc that do not appear on the strategy pages which can also be printed out To print project documentation: 1 Display any strategy page for the controller whose project documentation is to be printed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. If the project documentation is to be printed for more than one controller display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual and In the Device View click the next to the required controllers. SET will indicate the selected controllers with a . 2

On the File menu click Print. This displays the Print dialogue box.

3

In the Name box click the required printer. Clicking Properties enables the printer properties to be adjusted.

SET will default to the Windows default printer, if a different printer is to always be used, it can be specified as the default printer for SET as described in the ‘Specify the Printer’ section of this manual. 4

In the Print what area specify what is to be printed by selecting the appropriate check. The table below describes the different options. Option Strategy Sensor List Digital Inputs List Knobs List Switch List Drivers List Time Zone List Sequence List Plots List ICComms List Analogue Nodes Used List

Description Prints strategy pages. Prints a list of all the sensors in the strategy. Prints a list of all the digital inputs in the strategy. Prints a list of all the knobs in the strategy. Prints a list of all the switches in the strategy. Prints a list of all the drivers in the strategy. Prints a list of all the time zones in the strategy. Prints the sequence table. Prints a list of all the plot modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the ic comms modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the analogue nodes in the strategy.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

151

Engineer IQ Controllers Option Digital Nodes Used List Module Used List Sensor Types Directory Modules List Display Modules List Alarm Groups

Description Prints a list of all the digital nodes in the strategy. Prints a list of all the modules used in the strategy. Prints a list of all the sensor type modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the directory modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the display modules in the strategy. Prints a list of all the alarm group modules in the strategy.

To select all options click Select All. 5 6 7 8

In the Print range area click the appropriate option to specify the range of pages that are to be printed. In the Order box click the appropriate option to specify if all, odd, or even pages in the range are to be printed. In the Number of copies box enter the number of copies required. Click OK.

Note that clicking

8.9

will automatically print all the project documentation for the selected controller.

Backup the Project

Once the project is complete, it is recommended that all the files for a particular project be backed up and stored in a safe place (e.g. firesafe). The entire contents of a project can be exported to a single SET.ZIP file, this enables a project to be backed up, or moved between computers. Once a project has been backup in this way it can be restored by importing the project. To export a project: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is be displayed click Export Project to Zip. The Project Export (ZIP) dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the Project box click the project that is to be exported from the list. In the Destination box enter the destination of the zip file.

Clicking on Browse displays the Browse for Folder dialogue box, which allows the destination to be specified by viewing the directory structure on the PC. To locate the required directory, click the directory, and then click OK to return to the Project Export (ZIP) dialogue box. 5 6

Click OK. The project will be exported to a zip file named .Set.zip. A dialogue box is displayed indicating the progress of the export. When the process is complete, another dialogue box is displayed. Click OK.

It is advisable to make backups of the project as part of your normal working practice to prevent data being lost. Note that it is possible to export a project a project while SET is running by displaying the Project View, and on the File menu click Open/New Project to display the SET dialogue box.

152

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Comparing Strategies 9 COMPARING STRATEGIES SET enables strategies to be uploaded from IQ controllers and compare it with strategy held by SET. SET can either compare a single strategy, or multiple strategies.

9.1

Compare Single Strategies

SET enables the strategy held in a project for a particular IQ controller to be compared with an IQ3 file, IQ2 file, or SCN file uploaded from a controller. A tab delimited file (named LxxxNyyy.rep, where xxx=Lan number, and yyy=controller number) is produced listing any differences between the strategy in the project, and the chosen file. If required, SET can update the strategy in the project to make it the same as the file. If required, the strategies of several controllers can be compared with the appropriate uploaded file as described in the ‘Compare Multiple Strategies' section of this manual. To compare the strategy for a controller: 1 Upload the strategy from the required controller in IQ3, IQ2, or SCN format as described in the ‘Upload Strategy from an IQ Controller’ section of this manual. For controllers with IQ3 controllers the file must be uploaded as an IQ3 file. For pre IQ3 controllers version 2.0 firmware or greater, the file must be uploaded as an IQ2 file. For pre IQ3 controllers with older firmware (less than v2.0) the file must be uploaded in SCN format. 2 3

Display a strategy page for the controller for which the strategy is to be compared as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. On the File menu point to Compare and click IQ3 to compare the strategy with an IQ3 file, or on the File menu point to Compare and click IQ2 (V2>) to compare the strategy with an IQ2 file, or on the File menu point to Compare and click SCN to compare the strategy with an SCN file. The Open dialogue box is displayed.

Note that it is only possible to compare a SCN file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware below version 2.0, and to compare an IQF file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware of version 2.0 or above.

4 5

Navigate to the directory containing the required file. Click the required IQ3, SCN or IQ2 file, and click Open. The Compare and Update dialogue box is displayed.

6

Click the required options. Update Database will cause SET to update its strategy to be the same as the chosen file. Backup Database ensures that SET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it allowing the strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable. Print Report File causes SET to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified printer.

Note that if none of the options are selected, a .rep file listing the difference between the strategies is created in the directory for the Lan containing the device. 7

Click Start.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

153

Comparing Strategies If Update Database is selected, SET will modify the strategy pages and linking to reflect the changes. Modules that have been added to the strategy will only be correctly positioned on the page, and linked if the x, y, and page parameters have been specified (IQ3 controllers and IQ2 firmware version 2.1 and above). Modules that do not have the x, y, and page parameters will not be placed on a page, but will be added to the strategy as unplaced modules. These modules are used in the strategy, and linked to other modules, but they do not appear on any of the strategy pages. It is necessary to add any unplaced modules to a page and make any links manually. If a module is to be linked to a module on a different page, the connective will not be added by SET; this must be done manually using the unplaced modules list.

9.2

Compare Multiple Strategies

SET enables a batch comparison of strategies. The strategy held in a project for each selected controller is compared with the IQ3 file, IQ2 file, or SCN file associated with each controller. A tab delimited file (named LxxxNyyy.rep, where xxx=Lan number, and yyy=controller number) is produced for each selected controller listing any differences between the strategy in the project, and the associated file. If required, SET can update the strategy in the project to make it the same as the file. To compare the strategy held by set for a controller with a file other than the one associated with it, using SET's single file comparison as described in the ‘Compare Single Strategies’ section of this manual. To compare the strategy for a controller: 1 Upload the strategy from the required controllers in IQ3, IQ2, or SCN format as described in the ‘Upload Strategy from an IQ Controller’ section of this manual. It is possible to upload from more than one controller at a time as described in the ‘Upload from Multiple Controllers’ section of this manual. For controllers with IQ3 controllers the file must be uploaded as an IQ3 file. For pre IQ3 controllers with version 2.0 firmware or greater, the file must be uploaded as an IQ2 file. For pre IQ3 controllers with older firmware (less than v2.0) the file must be uploaded in SCN format. Note that the file must be in the Upload sub-directory of the project’s directory in the base project directory. The file name must be in the format Ln. E.g. the file for controller 25 on Lan 24 would be L024n025.IQ2. If the file is uploaded using SET, it will automatically be placed in the correct place, and be named appropriately. 2 3 4 5

6

Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. In the Device View click the next to each controller for which the strategy is to be compared. SET will indicate the selected controllers with a . On the Project menu click Project Compare. This displays a message box. Click OK. The Compare and Update dialogue box is displayed.

Click the required options. Update Database will cause SET to update its strategy to be the same as the chosen file. Backup Database ensures that SET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it allowing the strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable. Print Report File causes SET to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified printer.

Note that if none of the options are selected, a .rep file listing the difference between the strategies is created in the directory for the Lan containing the device. 7

Click Start. The comparison will be performed. If SET cannot complete the comparison for one of the selected controllers, a will be placed next to it in the Device View and a message box explaining the problem displayed.

If the Update Database is selected, SET will modify the strategy pages and linking to reflect the changes. Modules that have been added to the strategy will only be correctly positioned on the page, and linked if the x, y, and page parameters have been specified (IQ3 controllers and IQ2 firmware version 2.1 and above). Modules that do not have the x, y, and page parameters will not be placed on a page, but will be added to the strategy as unplaced modules. These modules are used in the strategy, and linked to other modules, but they do not appear on any of the strategy pages. It is necessary to add any unplaced modules to a page and make any links manually. If a module is to be linked to a module on a different page, the connective will not be added by SET; this must be done manually using the unplaced modules list. 154

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Comparing Strategies 9.3

Restore a Strategy

When SET compares a strategy with either an IQ3 and SCN or IQ2 file and updates its strategy, a backup of the existing file can be requested. This backup can be used to return the strategy to its original state before the compare was performed, if the changes made during the compare process cause a problem. To restore a backup: 1 Run Windows Explorer, and goto the Set Projects directory. 2 Goto the subdirectory for the project, and then open the required Lan subdirectory. 3 Delete the .IQ file for the controller whose strategy was backed up. 4 Rename the .BAK file for the controller to .IQ.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

155

Comparing Strategies

This page is intentionally left blank.

156

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Commissioning with Live Values 10 COMMISSIONING WITH LIVE VALUES SET enables you to connect to an IQ controller and display the live output values on the strategy page. In this mode the values of knobs and switches can be adjusted by editing the modules and changing the output values. The new values are then sent to the controller and the results can be seen on the strategy page. The SET strategy and the controller strategy must be identical or some of the values may not make sense. No checking is done to confirm the strategy is correct. If required this feature can be used on more that one controller at a time. This is useful for checking ic comms across the system. Warning when using this feature the controller will be controlling any HVAC equipment to which it is connected; using incorrect strategy may result in damage to HVAC equipment or injury to people. To commission a controller with live values. 1 Open the SET project containing the required controller as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the strategy held by SET (displayed on the page) and that in the controller are identical by downloading the strategy first, or running a compare as described in the ‘Download Strategy Using SET’, and ‘Compare a Single Strategy’ sections of this manual. 3 Ensure that there is a comms connection available that will enable SET to communicate with the controller. See the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual for details. 4 Display the strategy page that contains the required piece of strategy as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 5

Click

or on the Comms menu click Live Values. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. 6 7 8

To select a different controller, edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection is to be used in the Standard Comms box click the required connection.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one, which will be associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. 9 10

11 12

If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection. If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers enter the required username in the User Name box, and the password in the Password box. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box. For earlier controllers enter the PIN into the Pin box. In the Refresh Int box enter the required refresh rate for the values. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

157

Commissioning with Live Values 13

Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel.

If OK was selected the output values from the controller will be displayed on the strategy pages.

14

158

To stop live values click

.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Live Editing 11 LIVE EDITING SET enables a strategy to be modified in the controller at the same time as the drawing on the strategy page is modified. The SET Live Edit feature not only enables knobs and switches to be changed like Live Values, but also enables any strategy changes to be made. The changes made to the strategy page are then downloaded to the controller. These changes may include parameter changes, deletion, and addition of modules, and modification, deletion, or addition of connections. To see the effects of the strategy changes on the strategy page the live value commissioning feature may also be selected. Using these two features together enables any strategy design faults to be detected, modified, and the effects of the changes observed. The SET strategy and the controller strategy must be identical or some of the values may not make sense. No checking is done to confirm the strategy is correct. Warning when using this feature the controller will be controlling any HVAC equipment to which it is connected; using incorrect strategy may result in damage to HVAC equipment or injury to people. To edit a controller live. 1 Open the SET project containing the required controller as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the strategy held by SET (displayed on the page) and that in the controller are identical by downloading the strategy first, or running a compare as described in the ‘Download Strategy Using SET’ and ‘Compare Single Strategies’ sections of this manual. 3 Ensure that there is a comms connection available that will enable SET to communicate with the controller. See the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual for details. 4 Display the strategy page that contains the required piece of strategy as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 5

Click

or on the Comms menu click Live Edit. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. 6 7 8

To select a different controller, edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection is to be used in the Standard Comms Connection box click the required connection.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one that will be associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. 9

If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

159

Live Editing 10

11 12 13

If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers enter the required username in the User Name box, and the password in the Password box. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box. For earlier controllers enter the PIN into the Pin box. In the Refresh Int box enter the required refresh rate for the values. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel.

If OK was selected the connection will be made. 14

You can now make changes to the strategy such as editing module parameters, adding/deleting modules, linking the strategy; in the same way as for engineering IQ controllers and they will be sent directly to the controller.

. When in live edit mode with live If required live values can be displayed while in live edit mode by clicking values displayed the output of a module can be overridden by double-clicking the module’s output and entering the required output value in the dialogue box that is displayed. This will disable the module and the specified out put used by modules linked to the module’s output. To return too normal operation double-click the module to display the Module Parameters dialogue box and clearing the Disable Module check box. If the modules are left overridden, on completing Live Edit a warning will be given enabling all modules to have their overrides removed. 15

160

To stop live editing click

.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12 GENERAL OPERATIONS This section describes SET's general operations. It is arranged in alphabetical order. Add a Connective Add a Connective to System Information Add a Strategy Page Add an Undefined Connective to a Module Add Unplaced Modules to a Strategy Page Change a Node's Value Close a Strategy Page Copy a Controller Copy and Paste Modules Create an IQ3File Create Multiple Data Files Define an Undefined Connective's Destination Delete a Controller Delete a Plant Directory Delete Modules Display Information about Autodialing Devices Display Keyboard Short Cuts Display the Project View Display the System View Display the Tracker Window Edit Controller Details Export Data to 963 Find a Module Find Fixed System Nodes Find where a Sequence Step is Used Import a Backdrop File Import an IQ2 File Perform a SET Command Using the Command Line Toolbar Position the Windows Redraw the Screen Run SET Specify the Next Module Number Specify Which Configuration Parameters are Displayed Undo the Last Action Upload Strategy from an IQ Controller View Lan Details View Project Details View Strategy Issues Zoom IN/OUT

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Add a Connective to Alarm Status Information Add a Module Using the Command Line Toolbar Add a TO Connective Add an Undefined Connective to a Node Change a Controller's Type Close a Project Convert an IQ2 Strategy to an IQ3 Strategy Copy a Strategy Page Create an IQ2 File Create an LDF File Create Plant Directories Delete a Connective Delete a Link Delete a Strategy Page Disable a Module Display IQ System Communications Information Display the Item Selector Display the Strategy Library Display the Tip of the Day Download a Single Page of Strategy Enter Configuration Mode on Pre IQ3 controllers Export Data to IP Tool Find and Replace Labels Find Where a Node is Used Go to a Strategy Page Import an ACE File Import an IQ3File Position the Toolbars Print a Single Page of Strategy Rename a Plant Directory Select Modules Specify the Position of the Next Window Turn the Status Bar ON/OFF Unlock a TCL Application View Device Details View Page Details View Strategy Block Details View the Next Module List

161

General Operations 12.1 Add a Connective to Alarm Status Information For IQ3 controllers, links to the various alarm status information (e.g. the status of a loop’s PV Fail alarm) can be made using connectives that are automatically created when the module is placed on the page. To add a connective to alarm status information: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module to which the alarm status is to be linked as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and point to Other and click Connective on the displayed menu. The Connective dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and any connectives that are available.

3

Click the module for which the alarm status is required. Any connectives associated with the module will be displayed in the Associated Connectives box.

The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen making it easier to find the required module. Icon

Description All connectives

Icon

Description Sensor connectives

Analogue node connectives

Switch connectives

Digital Input connectives

Undefined connectives

Digital node connectives

Time Module connectives

Knob connectives

System connectives

XNC interface module connectives The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label enter the required label in the box next to the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the box next to the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1. 4 5 6 7

162

Click the connective that represents the required alarm status to highlight it. Once the required connective is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on the page. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.2 Add a Connective to System Information Links to various pieces of system information such as time, timing pulses, day of year, month of year etc can be made using connectives that are automatically created when the controller is added. To add a connective to system information: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module to which the system information is to be linked as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and point to Other and click Connective on the displayed menu. The Connective dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and any connectives that are available.

3

Click the connective that represents the required alarm status to highlight it.

The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen making it easier to find the required module. Icon

Description All connectives

Icon

Description Sensor connectives

Analogue node connectives

Switch connectives

Digital Input connectives

Undefined connectives

Digital node connectives

Time Module connectives

Knob connectives

System connectives

XNC interface module connectives The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label enter the required label in the box next to the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the box next to the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1. 4 5 6

Once the required connective is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on the page. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

163

General Operations 12.3 Add a Connective Connectives allow links to be made between modules on different pages, modules on the same page (where linking to the module would make the strategy hard to understand), or to nodes that have been defined as connectives (see the ‘Add an Undefined Connective to a Node’ section of this manual) for pre IQ3 controllers, and to the various alarm status information (e.g. the status of a loop’s PV Fail alarm) for IQ3 controllers. To add a connective: 1 Display the strategy page to which the connective is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and on the displayed menu point to 2 Click Other and click Connective from the displayed menu. The Connectives dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and any nodes that have been defined as connectives.

3

Click the module parameter, or node to which the connective is to point. If configuring an IQ3 controller when you click a module or node any associated connectives will be displayed in the Associated Connectives box. If required these can be selected instead.

The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen making it easier to find the required module. Icon

Description All connectives

Icon

Description Sensor connectives

Analogue node connectives

Switch connectives

Digital Input connectives

Undefined connectives

Digital node connectives

Time Module connectives

Knob connectives

System connectives

XNC interface module connectives The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label enter the required label in the box next to the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the box next to the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1. 4 5

Once the required module parameter is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on the page.

Note there is no need to set up the parameters for the connective because it is a link to a module, which has already been defined. 6 7

164

Repeat steps (3) to (5) for any other connectives. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.4 Add a Module Using the Command Line Toolbar The Command Line Toolbar enables modules to be added to a strategy page. To add a module using the Command Line toolbar: 1 Display the strategy page to which the module is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 3 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 4 Specify the module that is to be added in the following format: ## Where is one of the commands described in the table below that specifies a type of module. Module ABS Function Module Add Function Module Adder/Scaler Function Module Adjustment Knob Module Alarm Destination Module Alarm Group Module Alarm Route Module Analogue to Digital Function Module Analogue Driver Module Average Function Module Binary Switch Driver Module Combination Logic Module Comparator Function Module Counter Logic Module D to A Logic Module Delay Logic Module Digital Driver Module Digital Input Module Divide Function Module Enthalpy Function Module External Digital Sensor Module External Sensor Module Fan Out Logic Module Filter Function Module Gate Function Module Hours Run Logic Module Hysteresis Band Function Module Hysteresis Limits Function Module

Command F24 F20 F8 KA ALARM DEST ALARM GROUP ALARM ROUTE F18

Module Internal Digital Sensor Module Internal Sensor Module Knob Module Limit at Function Module Limit to Function Module Log Function Module

Command S4 S2 K F4 F5 F6

Lookup Function Module

F19

Loop Module

L

D2 F13 D5 G1 F15 G4 G8 G5 D1 I F10 F16 S3 S1 G7 F1 F14 G6 F17 F21

Maximum Function Module Minimum Function Module Multiply Function Module Plot Module Power Function Module Proximity Function Module Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Module Raise/Lower End Driver Module Readback Logic Module Rescale from Function Module Rescale to Function Module Schedule Module Square Root Function Module Switch Module Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module Time Proportional Driver Module Timer Logic Module TRIG Function Module TRUNC Function Module Zone Module

F12 F11 F9 P F23 F22 D7 D4 G3 F2 F3 H F7 W D6 D3 G2 F26 F25 TZ

is an integer that specifies the number of the module, and specifies the location of the module in the sequence table. E.g. F1#7#103 This command would place function module 7 on the page as a filter module, and assign it to sequence step 103. It is not necessary to type all parts of the code e.g. to add a type 1 function module using the next module number and sequence step type F1. 5

Press ENTER to add the module to the page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

165

General Operations 12.5 Add a Strategy Page SET stores the strategy on strategy pages. Each strategy page is sized to ensure that the pages can be printed out. Pages should be added as they are required. When a strategy page is added, SET inserts a gap in the sequence table to allow modules to be added to the previous page without affecting the positions in the sequence table of the modules on the new page. The size of this gap can be specified as described in the ‘Specify the Gap in the Sequence Table Between Pages’ section of this manual. To add a strategy page from the Project View: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View, select the controller to which the strategy page is to be added. 3 Right-click Strategy Pages and click Insert Page on the displayed menu. The new page will be added to the list of pages in the Project View. To add a strategy page using the New Page button: 1 Display a strategy page containing strategy for the required controller as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click . The new page will be displayed. To insert a strategy page before another: 1 Display the strategy page before another page is to be inserted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Page and then click Insert Page. The new page will be displayed. Information about when a strategy page was created or modified is automatically stored. Text information can also be stored about the page; e.g. to describe the function of the strategy on the page. See the ‘Set up Page Information ’ section of this manual.

12.6 Add a To Connective To connectives provide visual indication on the strategy pages that a module is providing an input to modules on other pages. They indicate all the modules on other pages linked to the module to which they are connected. They should be added to strategy pages to make the strategy drawings easier to understand. To add a To connective: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module providing the input to modules on other pages as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , or right-click anywhere on the page and on the displayed menu point to Other and click To 2 Click Connective. The cursor changes to a hand . 3 Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. 4 Click the parameter that provides an input (source) to modules on other pages. The cursor will change to a when it is moved over a parameter that can be linked. 5

Drag the mouse to the to connective, and release the mouse button. SET will display a green circle the cursor is in the right place.

when

Note that adding a To connective does not link modules together; they provide a visual indication of existing links.

12.7 Add an Undefined Connective to a Module An undefined connective to a module can be used to link a module to another that is not currently in the strategy. To add an undefined connective to a module: 1 Display the strategy page to which the undefined connective is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and point to Other and click Undefined Connective on the displayed menu. For IQ3 controllers the cursor changes to a hand . For pre IQ3 controllers the Undefined Connective dialogue box is displayed. In the Label box enter the label for the undefined connective, and select Analogue, or Digital to specify whether the connective is to an analogue or digital node, and click OK, the cursor changes to a hand . 3

Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on the page.

Note that as soon as the module the undefined connective represents is added to the strategy, the undefined connective should be defined accordingly.

166

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.8 Add an Undefined Connective to a Node For pre IQ3 controllers an undefined connective to a node can be used to link the input of a module to a particular node (such as an alarm bit), or a node with a constant value. To add an undefined connective to a node: 1 Display the strategy page to which the undefined connective is to be added as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page where you want to put the connective and point to Other and click Undefined Connective on the displayed menu. The Undefined Connective dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6

In the Label box enter a label for the undefined connective. Click either Analogue or Digital to specify whether the node is analogue or digital. Click Array. This displays the Analogue node Array dialogue box for analogue nodes, and the Digital Node Array dialogue box for digital nodes. Click the required node or bit. If necessary, use the scroll bars to locate the required node. The node number, its type, and status are displayed on the right of the dialogue box. The type specifies what the node is generally used for, and the status specifies what is currently writing to the module. Icons next to these parameters indicate this graphically. They are explained below.

Type Icon

Description Convention. The node is normally used by the strategy for a specific purpose (e.g. storing 0). It can either be used for its conventional use, or if the conventional use is never required, it can be used for another purpose. Fixed system node. This module is always written to by a particular module in the strategy. Free. Read only. This node is used for a special purpose (e.g. time) by the controller. Its value can be read by the strategy, but not changed. System defaults (e.g. alarm enable bits) can be used with care.

Status Icon

Description Free to be used. Used as a destination. Can be used again with care.

SET enables the location in the analogue or digital array of fixed system nodes, and nodes that have been placed in the strategy, to be found by entering the code for the required parameter into the Find box, and clicking Find. For more details see the ‘Find Fixed System Nodes’ section of this manual. 7 8 9 10

Once the correct node is selected, click OK to return to the Undefined Connective dialogue box. If the node is to provide a constant value, enter that value into the Fixed Node box. Click OK. The cursor changes to a hand . Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click to place the connective on the page.

12.9 Add Unplaced Modules to a Strategy Page If the strategy stored by SET has been compared with a file uploaded from a controller, and modules without the x, y, and page parameters defined have been added; the new modules will be regarded by SET as ‘unplaced modules’. Unplaced modules do not appear on any strategy page, although links to other modules are maintained, but not shown. It is therefore necessary to add these unplaced modules to a strategy page, and link them accordingly. This ensures that all of the strategy is visible. To add unplaced modules to a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page onto which the modules are to be placed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click Unplaced Modules. The Unplaced Modules dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

167

General Operations

3

Double-click the required module to place it on the page.

Note that it will now be necessary to link the module as required. 4

Once all the modules have been placed on the page, click Finished.

12.10

Authorise a TCL Application

Sometimes the designer will lock a TCL application. To enable the application to be used in a particular IQ3/XNC it must be authorised for use by that particular IQ3/XNC. Not all TCL applications are locked, and even if they are you may already have been supplied with a file that will run on your IQ3/XNC. If you attempt to download a TCL application that is not authorised to run on the selected IQ3/XNC an error message will be displayed. Authorising a TCL application is a two-part process: Obtain an unlock code. Enter the unlock code. To obtain an unlock code: 1 Browse the system to display the device that is to run the application as described in the ‘Browsing the IQ System with SET’ section of this manual. 2 Right click on device and on the displayed menu click TCL Authorise. The TCL Authorise Applet dialogue box is displayed.

3

168

Click Open File. The Open dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

4

In the folder list click the required file.

The dialogue box will display the files in the ‘set projects\\xnc\downloads’ where is the name of the current SET project. To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double click the folders in the folder list until the file is displayed. 5 6 7

Click Open. The file is opened and details displayed in the TCL Authorise Applet dialogue box. Make a note of the device’s MAC address, the application title, and identity. Send this information to the supplier of the TCL application, asking for an unlock code.

To enter the unlock code: 1 Obtain an unlock code as described above. 2 Browse the system to display the device that is to run the application as described in the ‘Browsing the IQ System with SET’ section of this manual. 3 Right click on device and on the displayed menu click TCL Authorise. The TCL Authorise Applet dialogue box is displayed. 4 Click Open File. The Open dialogue box is displayed. 5 In the folder list click the application file for which you have the unlock code. 6 Click Open. 7 In the Key from application owner to enable this application on this controller box enter the unlock code that has been supplied. 8 Click Enable. If the code is valid the application will be unlocked, and the MAC Address, Application Title, and Identity boxes are hidden. If it is invalid a message is displayed. If an invalid code is entered 3 times it is necessary to restart the application before you can try again. 9

Click Save Enabled File to save the enabled file. The file will be saved in the same directory as the original file, named according to the following format: Ln.xnc

Where specifies the Lan number of the device. specifies the network address of the device. Note that closing the application without saving the enabled file will lose the unlocked application. If required the file can be downloaded to the IQ3/XNC by clicking on Download this enables the application to be downloaded, but not saved. For more details of downloading a TCL application see the ‘Download a TCL Application’ section of this manual. This process can also be used to change the device that a TCL application can be used on by selecting the new IQ3/XNC loading the unlocked file and obtaining an unlock code for the new device.

12.11

Change a Controller’s Type

SET enables the type of controller to be changed after it has been added to the network structure. However, it is not recommended that this be done after strategy has been defined for the controller, because features available in the original controller type may not be available in the new controller type. To change a controller’s type: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller whose type is to be changed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Device Details. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

169

General Operations

3

In the Device Type box click type of controller to define the type of IQ controller that is to be added.

The list contains all the different IQ controllers. Where there is a range of similar controllers e.g. IQ211, and IQ212 a generic name may be listed, e.g. ‘IQ21x’. 4 5 6

In the Firmware Version box click the firmware version of the IQ controller that is to be added. In the Hardware Variant box click the hardware variant of the IQ controller that is to be added. Click OK.

12.12

Change a Node’s Value

If a node is being used in the strategy to provide a fixed value, the value can be changed. To change the value of a node: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the connective that points to the node as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the connective pointing to the node, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Fixed Value Node dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the Fixed Node box enter the value for the node. Click OK.

12.13

Close a Project

If required a project can be closed without closing SET. To close a project: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 On the File menu click Close SET Project. The project will be closed leaving SET running.

12.14

Close a Strategy Page

To close a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page that is to be closed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the File menu click Close Strategy.

12.15

Convert an IQ2 Strategy to an IQ3 Strategy

SET enables an IQ2 strategy to be converted to an IQ3 strategy by changing the type of controller. Because of the differences between IQ2 strategy, and IQ3 strategy there are several things that the conversion process will change this is shown in the table below. Module Sensor Type Adjustment knob

170

Description Modules that use any scaling other than characterise (5) are removed. Added to the strategy as a knob that is not linked.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations Module Schedule Data From IC Comms Multistate Driver Cascade Driver Critical Alarms Autodial Modules Comport Modules Modem Modules Record Modules Store Modules

Description For IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware of greater the modules are converted. For IQ3 controllers with pre version 1.1 firmware the modules are removed from the strategy but left on page with a cross though. Removed from the strategy but left on page with a cross. Removed from the strategy but left on page with a cross. Removed from the strategy but left on page with a cross. Removed from the strategy but left on page with a cross. Removed from the strategy. Removed from the strategy. Removed from the strategy. Removed from the strategy. Removed from the strategy.

Modules not available in IQ3 controllers will be placed on the page with a big red cross through them, and any links that are invalid (e.g. to nodes that don’t exist such as module outputs) are shown as red. To convert an IQ2 strategy to an IQ3 strategy: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller whose strategy is to be converted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Device Details. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5 6

In the Device Type box click IQ 3xx. In the Firmware Version box click the firmware version. In the Hardware Variant box click the hardware variant. Click OK.

Once the strategy is converted you will need to check it and make adjustments form parts of the strategy that cannot be converted. The table below lists some common problems and how they can be solved. Module Sensor Type that do not use characterise scaling. Adjustment knob replaced by a knob. Data From IC Comms. Knobs and switches

Solution Add the sensor type module using the same module number and configure it using characterise scaling. The knob should be linked to the parameter that is to be adjusted. Note that that this is not supported on IC Comms modules. Removed but left on page with a cross though. You should configure the controller containing the required data to send it to the IQ3. Link the input of the knob or switch to output of the module as shown below.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

171

General Operations Module as destination node.

Solution IQ2

IC Comms received from an IQ2 controller for an analogue node, or a digital bit/byte. Digital Byte IC Comms to be sent to another controller.

Add an analogue node, or digital byte module as required.

12.16

IQ3

This problem only occurs on pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers because Digital Byte IC Comms messages are not supported. You should use a D to A module to convert the value to an analogue and sent that, and convert it back to a digital in the receiving controller using an A to D module.

Copy a Strategy Page

Strategy pages can be copied to the clipboard (in emf format) so that they can be pasted into other applications. To copy a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be copied as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Page and click Copy to Clipboard. The page is copied to the clipboard in emf format.

12.17

Copy a Controller

If a number of controllers are to use the same, or similar, strategy it is possible to duplicate controllers by copying them to a different address. Controllers can be copied into another project. To duplicate a controller: 1 Open the project containing the controller that is to be duplicated as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 3 In the Device View right-click the controller that is to be duplicated, and on the displayed menu click Copy Device. The Enter Destination dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6 7

In the Project box click the project into which the controller is to be copied. In the Lan box enter the Lan number for the new controller (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10). In the Node box enter the network address of the controller (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10). Click OK.

This method can only be used to duplicate controllers within the same project. Copying, and renaming the .IQ files in the Set Projects directory using Windows Explorer enables controllers to be copied between projects by. E.g. If controller 27 on Lan 24 was to use the same strategy as controller 26 on the same Lan, the file L024n026.IQ in the Lan024 sub directory of the Set Projects directory should be copied into the same directory after renaming as L024n027.IQ. When the project is loaded next time, the new controller will appear in the Project View. The two controllers will now be identical, and if necessary, changes can now be made to the duplicate strategy. Note that controllers can be removed from the SET Project by deleting or moving their .IQ file.

172

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.18

Copy and Paste Modules

Modules can be added to a strategy page, by copying them from one strategy page, and pasting them onto the required strategy page (this could be elsewhere on the same page). To copy and paste modules: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be copied as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Select the required modules as described in the ‘Select Modules’ section of this manual. 3 Click , or right-click the selected module(s) and on the displayed menu click Copy, or press CTRL+C, or choose on the Edit menu click Copy. To cut modules, click , or right-click the selected module(s) and on the displayed menu click Cut, or press CTRL+X, or on the Edit menu click Cut. 4 Display the page onto which the modules are to be placed copied as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 5 Check that the next module numbers that are to be used are correct by viewing the Next Module List, as described in the ‘View the Next Module List’ section of this manual, if not change them as described in the ‘Specify the Next Module Number’ section of this manual. , or press CTRL+V, or on the Edit menu click Paste. The modules are placed onto the current 6 Click strategy page using new module numbers and sequence steps as defined by the current values of the appropriate pointers. A single module can be copied, or cut by right-clicking it, and on the displayed menu clicking Copy or Cut from the displayed menu. The sequence order used for the modules when they are pasted is defined by the order in which they were selected starting with the next sequence step as defined by the sequence pointer. If the sequence step order is important, then the modules should be selected using the CTRL key, and mouse method, not the block select, or select all methods. Alternatively, the sequence table could be subsequently edited to ensure that the modules are ordered correctly. Note that if modules are cut from a page, and not pasted back onto a page, they will not appear on any page, but SET still thinks the modules are being used. If this is the case, it is necessary to add these unplaced modules onto the relevant pages as described in the ‘Add Unplaced Modules to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

12.19

Create an IQ2 File

SET can create an IQ2 file of the strategy for each IQ2 controller with version 2.0 firmware or greater in the project. The file can then be downloaded to the appropriate controller using SET, or other suitable tool. The file is stored in the Download directory for the current project. To create an IQ2 file: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which an IQ2 file is to be created as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Strategy menu click Create IQ2 File. Once SET has created the file, it displays a message box indicating that the file has been created.

Note that SET cannot create IQ2 files for controllers with firmware earlier then v2.0. If the controller is of an earlier firmware version, the Create IQ2 File menu will not be available, and an LDF file must be created. 3

Click OK.

Note that before downloading the file with some tools, it may be necessary to change the file extension to .IQF. If required the files required for strategy download can be created for more than one controller in a single operation as described in the ‘Create Multiple Data Files’ section of this manual.

12.20

Create an IQ3 File

SET can create an IQ3 file of the strategy for each IQ3 controller in the project. The file can then be downloaded to the appropriate controller using SET, or other suitable tool. The file is stored in the Download directory for the current project. To create an IQ3 file: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which an IQ3 file is to be created as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

173

General Operations 2

On the Strategy menu click Create IQ3 File. Once SET has created the file, it displays a message box indicating that the file has been created.

3

Click OK.

The filename is in the format: Ln.. Where specifies the Lan number of the controller. specifies the network address of the controller. is only used for IQ3 files that contain the option addressing information. A different letter indicates the type of information that is contained see the table below for more details. Letter I A U

Description The file contains the controllers IP address The file contains the controller’s Lan and outstation numbers. The file contains the supervisor port

indicates the file format (IQ3), e.g. L099n020.IQwould be the file name given to the file uploaded from controller 20 on Lan 99. If required the files required for strategy download can be created for more than one controller in a single operation as described in the ‘Create Multiple Data Files’ section of this manual.

12.21

Create an LDF File

SET can create an LDF file of the strategy for each pre IQ3 controller with firmware earlier than version 2.0 in the project. The file can then be downloaded to a controller using SET, or other suitable tool. The file is stored in the Download directory for the current project. Two LDF files are created with filenames using two naming conventions. The first convention is where the first three characters of the file name specify the Lan number, and the next three specify the controller's address e.g. 024025.LDF would be the LDF file for controller 25 on Lan 24. This is the same as that used by 822 Toolbox. The other format is that used by other tools, which includes an L before the Lan number, and an n before the controller address e.g. the file for controller 25 on Lan 24 would be L024n025.LDF. To create an LDF file: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which an LDF file is to be created as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Strategy menu click Create LDF File. Once SET has created the file, it displays a message box indicating that the file has been created.

Note that SET cannot create LDF files for pre IQ3 controllers with version 2.0 firmware or above. If the controller is of a newer firmware version, the Create LDF File menu will not be available, and an IQ2 file must be created. 3

Click OK.

If required the files required for strategy download can be created for more than one controller in a single operation as described in the ‘Create Multiple Data Files’ section of this manual.

12.22

Create Multiple Data Files

SET can create the files required for downloading to more than one controller in a single step from Project View. The files are stored in the download directory for the current project. To create multiple data files: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View click the next to the required controllers. SET will indicate the selected controllers with a . 3 On the Project menu click Create Data Files. This displays a dialogue box asking for confirmation of the action. 174

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 4 5

Click OK. A data file will be created for each of the selected controllers. The progress is indicated by a dialogue box. Once the process is complete a dialogue box is displayed, click OK.

12.23

Create Plant Directories

The plant directories are available from the Plant View, and enable strategy pages to be grouped together. This grouping allows individual strategy pages to be located, in an alternative way to selecting the controller containing the strategy, e.g. the HVAC equipment they control. The structure of plant directories can also be used to set up the display modules and directory modules. To create a plant directory: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Plant View right-click the top-level of the project, and on the displayed menu click Insert Plant Directory. 3 Enter the name of the plant directory. 4 Click the mouse away from the text that has just been entered. 5 In the Device View select the strategy page that is to be put in the plant directory. 6 Click the left mouse button, and drag the strategy page into the required Plant directory, or into the appropriate directory in the Plant View. Note that plant directories can be sub-divided by adding directories within directories. In the Plant View, rightclick the Plant Directory to which more levels are to be added and on the displayed menu click Insert Directory, Then proceed from step (3) above.

12.24

Define an Undefined Connective's Destination

If an undefined connective has been used to link to a module that is not yet in the strategy, as soon as the module is added, the undefined connective should be defined. To define an undefined connective: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the undefined connective as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the undefined connective, or click , or right-click the page and point to Other and click Connective on the displayed menu. The Connectives dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click the undefined connective that is to be defined. If required, the list can be filtered to only show undefined connectives by clicking

4 5

.

Click Define. The pointer changes to a . In the dialogue box click the module to which the connective is to point. The Confirm dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

175

General Operations

6

Click Yes to confirm the change, or No to cancel it.

12.25

Delete a Connective

If a connective is no longer required, it should be deleted. To delete a connective: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the connective that is to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or right-click the page and on the displayed menu point to Other and click Connective. The Connectives dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click the connective that is to be deleted.

The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen making it easier to find the required module. Icon

Description All connectives

Icon

Description Sensor connectives

Analogue node connectives

Switch connectives

Digital Input connectives

Undefined connectives

Digital node connectives

Time Module connectives

Knob connectives

System connectives

XNC interface module connectives The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label enter the required label in the box next to the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the box next to the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1. 4 5

176

Click Delete. The selected connective will be deleted. Click Exit.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.26

Delete a Controller

Controllers that are no longer required in the project can be deleted. To delete a controller: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right-click the controller that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Device. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. 3 Click Yes to delete it. Remember that deleting a controller will also permanently delete the strategy pages and associated strategy.

12.27

Delete a Link

If required, unwanted links can be deleted. To delete a link: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the link as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the link, and on the displayed menu click Delete Link.

12.28

Delete a Plant Directory

To delete a plant directory: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Plant View right-click the plant directory, or the directory that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Directory.

12.29

Delete a Strategy Page

If required, unwanted strategy pages can be deleted. To delete a strategy page: 1 Display the page that is to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click or right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu point to Page and then click Delete Page, or on the Edit menu click Delete Page. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. 3 Click Yes. Note that deleting a strategy page will delete all the strategy on it. If an attempt is made to delete the first strategy page (page 2), the page will not be deleted, only the strategy on it.

12.30

Delete Modules

SET allows either a single module, or a group of modules to be deleted from a strategy page. To delete an individual module from a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page containing the module that is to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the module that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete Module. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. 3 Click Yes. To delete a group of modules from a strategy page: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be deleted as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Select the modules that are to be deleted specified as described in the ‘Select Modules’ section of this manual. 3 Press DEL, or right-click the page, and on the displayed menu click Delete Selection. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion. 4 Click Yes.

12.31

Disable a Module

If required the output of a module can be prevented from having an effect on the rest of the strategy by disabling it. Modules are disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. When a module is disabled it appears red on the strategy page. To disable a module: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module for that is to be disabled as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

177

General Operations 2

Double-click the module, or connective, or right-click it, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Parameters dialogue box for the module is displayed.

3 4

Click Enabled. Click OK.

To enable the module again repeat the process and click Disabled. To enable all disabled modules in the strategy on the Device menu click Re-Enable All Modules or right-click the strategy page and on the displayed menu point to Device and click Re-Enable All Modules. Note that the module can also be enabled and disabled by the strategy by linking a digital value to the required modules Enable input.

12.32

Display Information about Autodialing Devices

Information all the autodialling devices on the network can be displayed in the Dialler Window. To view information about autodialling devices: 1 Browse the system as described in the ‘Basic Browsing’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the sites name, and on the displayed menu click Dialler window. The Dialler Window is displayed.

Or 1

Click

). The Dialler Window is displayed.

Note that when the Dialler Window is displayed in this way it will use the current connection to access the IQ network. To close the window click at the top right of the window. The display can be cleared by right-clicking in the main area of the window, and on the displayed menu clicking Clear All. It is also possible to drop a connection by rightclicking the connection that is to be dropped, and on the displayed menu clicking Drop link of selected. The information in the window in the window can be refreshed by right-clicking in the main area of the window, and on the displayed menu clicking Re-Inquire status. The Dialler Window is described in more detail in the Dialler Window Applet Manual (TE200530).

12.33

Display IQ System Communications Information

The communications IN and OUT of the node the application is using to connect to the IQ network can be displayed in the Communications Window. To view the communications information: 1 Browse the system as described in the ‘Basic Browsing’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the site name, and on the displayed menu click Comms window. The Communications Window is displayed.

178

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

Or 1

Click on the Basic Comms Display

.

Note that when the Communications Window is displayed in this way it will use the current connection to access the IQ network. Communications IN are on the left, and communications OUT are on the right. Each of the boxes has horizontal and vertical scroll bars, which enable more information to be accessed. To close the window click at the top right of the window. The display can be cleared by right-clicking in the main area of the window, and on the displayed menu clicking Clear entries from the displayed menu. The communications can be paused, logged to file, blank lines inserted, and more details about a frame can be viewed by double-clicking the frame. The Communications Window is described in more detail in the Communication Window Applet Manual (TE200531).

12.34

Display Keyboard Short Cuts

When browsing the system it is possible to access a list of keyboard shortcuts. To display the list of keyboard shortcuts 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2

Click

12.35

.

Display the Item Selector

To display the Item Selector: 1

Click

12.36

to toggle the item selector ON/OFF.

Display the Strategy Library

To display the Strategy Library:

1

Click

, click the System View tab

, press CTRL+L, or on the View menu click Strategy Library.

To hide the Strategy Library: 1 Click the outside the Strategy Library. Note that if the Strategy Library has been docked it must be undocked before it can be hidden.

12.37

Display the System View

To display the System View:

1

Click

, click the System View tab

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

, press CTRL+L, or on the View menu click System View.

179

General Operations To hide the System View: 1 Click the outside the System View or click . Note that if the System View has been docked it must be undocked before it can be hidden.

12.38

Display the Tracker View

If required a list of devices that displays the immediate children in the structure of the site, or user node of the object currently selected in the System View can be displayed in the Tracker Window. As different devices are selected in the System View the information displayed changes accordingly. To display the Tracker Window: 1 On the View menu click Tracker View.

12.39

Display the Tip of the Day

If tip of the day is turned ON whenever SET is run the Tip of the Day dialogue box is displayed providing useful information about SET and its use. It is possible to view the tip of the day at any time To display the tip of the day: 1 Run SET as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 On the Help menu click Tip of the Day. This displays the Tip of the Day dialogue box.

3 4

If the Tell Me More button is available clicking it will display more information about the tip. To display the next tip click Next Tip. Click Close.

Note that clearing the Show Tips on StartUp check box prevents the tip of the day from being displayed when SET is run.

12.40

Dock Panes

The Project View, Strategy Library, System View and Search Library can be docked which prevent them from being hidden when you click outside. To dock panes: 1 Click . To undock panes: 1 Click .

12.41

Download a Single Page of Strategy

If required the strategy on a single strategy page can be downloaded to the controller enabling minor changes to be made to a strategy, and reducing the download time. 1 2 3 4 5

180

Open the SET project containing the required controller as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. Ensure that there is a comms connection available that will enable SET to communicate with the controller. See the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual for details. Display the strategy page that is to be downloaded as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. or on the Comms menu click Download this Page, or right click the page and on the displayed Click menu point to Page and then click Download Page. A dialogue box asking is you want to send the current page to the controller is displayed. Click Yes. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. 6

To select a different controller, edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.

Caution if downloading to a different controller, ensure that its firmware version is the same or higher than the controller for which the strategy was created. 7 8

To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection is to be used in the Standard Comms Connection box click the required connection.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one that will be associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will not be added to the list of comms connections. 9 10

11 12

If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection. If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers enter the required username in the User Name box, and the password in the Password box. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box. For earlier controllers enter the PIN into the Pin box. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel.

If OK was selected the strategy on the page will be downloaded. Note that before making change to a page that are to be downloaded using single page download you should ensure that the strategy held by SET (displayed on the page) and that in the controller are identical by downloading the strategy first, or run a compare as described in the ‘Download Strategy using SET’ and ‘Compare Single Strategies’ sections of this manual.

12.42

Download a TCL Application

TCL applications can either be downloaded by SET with the strategy file as described in the ‘Download Strategy Using SET’ section of this manual or using the TCL Authorise Applet as described below. To download a TCL application using the TCL Authorise Applet: 1 Obtain an unlock code as described in the ‘Authorise a TCL Application’ section of this manual. 2 Browse the system to display the device that is to run the application as described in the ‘Browsing the IQ System with SET’ section of this manual. 3 Right click on device and on the displayed menu click TCL Authorise. The TCL Authorise Applet dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

181

General Operations

4

Click Open File. The Open dialogue box is displayed.

5

In the folder list click the required application file. This file must be authorised to run on the selected IQ3/XNC, see the ‘Authorise a TCL Application’ section of this manual for more details. Click Open. Click Download. If the IQ3/XNC’s security is enabled a dialogue box is displayed asking for a username and password. Enter a valid user name and password with a high enough authority and click OK. The file will be downloaded.

6 7

If the TCL application is not authorised to run on the selected IQ3/XNC an error message will be displayed and the file will not be downloaded.

12.43

Edit Controller Details

The device details enable information about the controller, and who designed the strategy to be stored. They are normally set up when a controller is added, however, if required, they can be set up or edited later. To edit a controller’s details: 1 Display a strategy page for which details are to be edited as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Device Details. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.

182

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

3 4

In the appropriate boxes enter the required details. Once the details have been specified, click OK.

12.44

Enter Configuration Mode on Pre IQ3 Controllers

SET provides access to the configuration mode of pre IQ3 controllers on the network. Once the configuration mode for a particular device has been entered, configuration commands can be entered and sent to the controller. To enter configuration mode: 1 Display the strategy page for the controller that is to be accessed in configuration mode as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. or on the Comms menu click Config. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed. 2 Click

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. 3 4 5

To select a different controller, edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection is to be used in the Standard Comms Connection box click the required connection.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one that will be associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will not be added to the list of comms connections. 6 7 8

If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you wan to continue is displayed. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

183

General Operations If OK was selected the Config Session Window will be displayed.

9

Type the required configuration command into the box at the bottom of the Config Session Window and press ENTER or click Go to send the command to the device.

The system prompts the available functions; the upper case character in each prompt is the key to be used to select the function. Most functions also require an additional numeric value. To exit from any page of data and save any changes, made, press X+ENTER. To exit from any page of data and not save any changes made, press Q+ENTER. The commands are as explained in the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533) for IQ controllers. If required keywords can be embedded in the commands to provide quicker access too commonly used commands It is also possible to send a previously used command, or a favourite command to the controller, by selecting the required command from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER or clicking Go. If a module is selected, the next and previous module of the same type can be viewed by clicking < or >. To send a Q, or X to the controller click Q or X. 10

To close the session exit configuration mode (click X at the top-level configuration prompts).

Note that if no commands are sent to the device for a period it will automatically exit configuration mode and the Config Session Window will close. For more details of using the Config Session Window see the Config/Text Comms/Mapping Applet Manual (TE200536)

12.45

Export Data to 963

The labels etc defined for a controller or specified controllers can be exported to a 96database. This saves time when engineering 96and ensures that the labels etc are correct. To export data to the 963: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View click the next to each controller for which data is to be exported. SET will indicate the selected controllers with a . 3 On the Project menu click Export Project Data to 96v2 or Export Project Data to 96v1.2 depending on the version of 963 the data will be exported to a file called s2.mdb in the set projects directory. 4 Move the file into the 963’s install directory. Caution: this will overwrite any system information already learned by 963.

12.46

Export Data to IP Tool

The identifier, IP address, subnet mask, default router, UDP port number, Lan number, and node number for all the IQ3 controllers in the current project can be exported to a file that can be imported into IP Tool and used to defined the devices address settings. To export data to the IP Tool: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display a strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 3 On the Tools menu click Export Device List. The Device List File dialogue box is displayed.

184

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

4

In the File name box enter the required file name.

To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is displayed. 5

Click Save.

12.47

Find a Module

SET allows modules used in the strategy to be located. To find a module: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the module that is to be located as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 3 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 4 In the Command Line toolbar enter the code for the module that is to be located in the format shown below. specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module (e.g. to find sensor type S3). 5

Click

or press CTRL. The Command Line toolbar will now display the page(s) containing that module.

To goto the module itself click or press CTRL again. If the module has been found on more than one page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .

12.48

Find and Replace Labels

The find and replace option enables labels to be replaced by specified text. To find and replace labels: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the labels that are to be replaced. 2 On the Tools menu click Label Find and Replace. The Label Find and Replace dialogue box is displayed with a list of all module labels from the selected controller in the Module List box. This list defines the labels that will be searched.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

185

General Operations

3

Select the modules that the find and replace is to search by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required modules.

To select a range, click the first module in the range, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the last module in the range. To select all the modules click Select All. If required the modules displayed in the Module List box can be reduced by filtering on the module type and label. To filter on module type, enter the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies a sensor) in the Module Filter box and click Apply Filter. For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. To filter on module label, enter the module label in the Label Filter box and click Apply Filter. To view all modules in the strategy click Show All. 4 5

In the Original text box enter the text that is to be replaced. In the Replace with box enter the text that is to be used as the replacement.

Note that if required text can be copied and pasted into the Original text box and Replace with box. 6 7 8

Click Replace Selected Text, or Replace Entire Label to specify whether the selected text, or the entire label is to be replaced. Click Replace. Click Exit.

To replace labels using paste: 1 Copy the list of new labels. This can be done either from a text editor where the labels have been entered (each label on a different line), or from another controller using this process but selecting Copy Label in step (5). 2 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the labels that are to be replaced. 3 On the Tools menu click Label Find and Replace. The Label Find and Replace dialogue box is displayed with a list of all module labels from the selected controller in the Module List box. 4 Select the modules whose labels are to be changed by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required modules. To select a range, click the first module in the range, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the last module in the range. To select all the modules click Select All. 5 6

Click Paste Label. Click Exit.

12.49

Find Fixed System Nodes

When either the Analogue Node Array, or Digital Node Array dialogue box is displayed, it is possible to find the location of fixed system nodes, and nodes that have been placed in the strategy from either array. To find a particular node: 1 Display either the Analogue Node Array, or Digital Node Array dialogue box. 2 In the Find box enter the code for the required node. The codes for the individual parameters are described below: For the analogue array: 186

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies a sensor). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module, and is the letter (D or V) used in to define the module's destination (e.g. to find the output for sensor type S3V). The following can be entered without specifying a and : Analogue Node 0 50 -1 100 1

Standard Value Standard location for the value 0 Standard location for the value 50 Standard location for the value -1 Standard location for the value 100 Standard location for the value 1

For the digital array: specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. W specifies a switch). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. Note that for critical alarm modules you must use ‘CA’ not ‘M’ which is the module identifier. specifies the number of the module. is a letter, or combination of letters that define the bit required (e.g. to find the location of the sensor high alarm enable bit for sensor type S3EH). Note that if you select a user module e.g. ‘U2’ SET will find the bit that indicates whether that user is logged on. The table below lists the different letters that can be used. Module Type Critical Alarms Digital Inputs

Drivers

IC Comms Loops

Sensors

Switches

Letter ADA ASA A E R V AM AR EM ER M R F AP AS EP ES O P S AH AL AO AR EH EL EO ER H L O R V

Description Device acknowledge bit Supervisor acknowledge bit Acknowledge status bit Enable bit Required status bit Status bit Maintenance alarm acknowledge bit Readback alarm acknowledge bit Maintenance alarm enable bit Readback alarm enable bit Maintenance alarm status bit Readback alarm status bit Fail Bit Process variable alarm acknowledge bit Setpoint deviation alarm acknowledge bit Process variable alarm enable bit Setpoint deviation alarm enable bit Fail action Process variable alarm status bit Setpoint deviation alarm status bit High alarm acknowledge bit Low alarm acknowledge bit Outside Limits alarm acknowledge bit Read alarm acknowledge bit High alarm enable bit Low alarm enable bit Outside Limits alarm enable bit Read alarm enable bit High alarm status bit Low alarm status bit Outside Limits alarm status bit Read alarm status bit Status bit

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

187

General Operations The following can be entered without specifying a and : Code 0 1 15m 1m 24h 30m 60m CONL CONL INHIB D1=INHIB DEF FAIL INHIB FBAT FDRT FDRT INHIB FPIA FPIA INHIB FPRM FPRM INHIB FRAM FRAM INHIB FRTC INHIB FSWR FSWR INHIB FTKA INHIB FTKP INHIB FTRC HELP HELP INHIB HIGH INHIB LOW INHIB MINT INHIB Month OUTL INHIB READ INHIB Reset SDEV INHIB SDGT INHIB Test flag Week Year

12.50

Description Default location for 0 Default location for 1 5 minute timing pulse 1 minute timing pulse Daily minute timing pulse 30 minute timing pulse Hourly timing pulse Controller on line alarm status bit Controller on line alarm inhibit bit Global Digital input alarm inhibit bit Emergency password in use bit Global loop fail alarm inhibit bit Battery failed status bit Fail dual asynchronous receiver transmitter alarm status bit FDRT alarm inhibit bit Fail peripheral interface adapter alarm status bit FPIA alarm inhibit bit Fail programmable read only memory alarm states bit FPRM alarm inhibit bit Fail random access memory alarm status bit FRAM alarm inhibit bit FRTC alarm inhibit bit Fail software alarm status bit FSWR alarm inhibit bit FTKA alarm inhibit bit FTKP alarm inhibit bit Fail real time clock alarm status bit Checksum failure alarm status bit Help alarm inhibit bit Global Sensor high alarm inhibit bit Global Sensor low alarm inhibit bit Global maintenance interval alarm inhibit bit Monthly timing pulse Global Sensor out of limits alarm inhibit bit Global Sensor read alarm inhibit bit Power reset bit Global setpoint deviation alarm inhibit bit Global driver grace time alarm inhibit bit Alarm text flag Weekly timing pulse Yearly timing pulse

Find Where a Node is Used

SET allows you to find out where a particular node is used in the strategy. To find where a node is used: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the required node as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 3 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 4 Specify the node that is to be located. The command should be in the format shown below: For analogue nodes: A specifies the number of the node

188

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations For digital nodes: B, specifies the number of the byte containing the required bit. is the number of the bit that is required. 5

Click

. The Command Line toolbar will display the module that uses the specified node.

To see on which page that node is located in the click again. The Command Line toolbar will now display the page(s) containing that module, to goto the module itself click again. If the module has been found on more than one page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .

12.51

Find where a Sequence Step is Used

SET allows the module located at a particular sequence step to be found. To find where a sequence step is used: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller containing the required module as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 3 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 4 Specify the sequence step in the format shown below. Q is the sequence step that is to be found 5

Click

. The Command Line toolbar will display the module located at the specified sequence step.

To see on which page that module is located in the click again. The Command Line toolbar will now display the page(s) containing that module to goto the module itself, and click again. If the module has been found on more than one page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .

12.52

Go to a Strategy Page

It is possible to move to another strategy page in several different ways. Using the Next and Previous Page buttons: 1 Click or press the PG UP key to go to the previous strategy page, or next strategy page.

or press the PG DN key to go to the

Note that the Command Line toolbar’s commands NEXT and PREV can be used to perform these functions from the Command Line toolbar. Using the Go to button: 1 Click . A list of pages for the controller is displayed. 2 Click the required page. From the Device View: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View double-click the controller containing the required page. The view will expand to show the contents of the controller. 3 Double-click Strategy Pages. The view will expand to show list the pages available for that controller. 4 Double-click the page that is to be displayed. Or To display the first page of strategy for a controller: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right click the controller containing the required page and click Open on the displayed menu. Using the Plant View: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Plant View double-click the required directories to expand the view until the required page is visible. 3 Double-click the page that is to be displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

189

General Operations Note that for IQ3/XNCs the XNP Update Settings dialogue box may be displayed is the number of stores, inputs outputs and version stored in the SET file is different to those stored in the XNP file. Click Update to use the values stored in the XNP file, or Ignore to use the values stored in the SET File. It is possible to specify the location of the strategy page as described in the ‘Specify the Position of the Next Window’ section of this manual. If a strategy page has been displayed, but has been covered up by other windows, e.g. a page from another controller has been displayed; it can be brought to the front by clicking the required page on the Window menu. Pressing CTRL+F or clicking Full Screen on the View menu displays the current strategy full screen.

12.53

Import a Backdrop File

If backdrop files (.IQ3.Backdrops) have been uploaded from IQ3 controllers they can be imported into the backdrop directory of the current SET project so that they can be used. To import a backdrop file: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. 2 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 3 On the Project menu click Import Backdrop File. The Select IQ3 Backdrop file to import dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the folder list click the file that is to be imported.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 5

190

Click Open. The backdrops in the file will be imported into the backdrops directory for the current SET project. A dialogue box is displayed indicating the progress of the process. Once the process is complete the dialogue box shown below is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.54

Import an ACE File

ACE files for individual controllers can be imported into a SET project. This enables IQ controllers that were engineering in ACE to be added. When importing ACE files, SET attempts to layout the pages as best it can, however some tidying up of each strategy page will be required. To import an ACE file: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual, or create a new one as described in the ‘Create a Project’ section of this manual. 2 On the Project menu click Import ACE File. The Select ACE file to import dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the folder list click the ACE file that is to be imported.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 4

Click Open.

Note that the ACE file must have been saved in the format used by ACE version 3.4. If the file was created on an earlier version, then an ‘ACE Database Too Old Update and Try Again’ error occurs, and it is necessary to open it in ACE and re-save it in ACE version 3.4 before attempting to import it into SET. Tip: An ACE macro can be imported by first placing it in a controller using ACE, saving the ACE file, and then importing the file into in SET.

12.55

Import an IQ2 File

IQ2 files from IQ Controllers with version 2.1 firmware or above be imported into a SET project. This enables controllers for which the strategy is not available in SET to be backwards engineered. This allows strategy modification, or documentation to be carried out using SET. To import an IQ2 file: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual, or create a new one as described in the ‘Create a Project’ section of this manual. If using an existing project, ensure that it does not already contain a controller with the same network address as the one that is to be imported. 2 3

Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. On the Project menu click Import IQ2 File (V2.1> Firmware Only). The Select IQF file to import dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

191

General Operations If a file does not exist for the controller you can upload the required file from the controller using the System View, as described in the ‘Upload/Download Strategy’ section of this manual. 4

In the folder list click the file that is to be imported.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 5

Click Open. The file will be imported.

If the x, y, and page parameters have been defined in the modules, the appropriate pages will be created, and the modules positioned accordingly. If the x, y, and page parameters are not defined, the modules will be added to the strategy but will subsequently need to be placed on the strategy pages as required.

12.56

Import an IQ3 File

IQ3 files from IQ3 controllers can be imported into a SET project. This enables controllers for which the strategy is not available in SET to be backwards engineered. This allows strategy modification, or documentation to be carried out using SET. To import an IQ3 file: 1 Open the required project as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual, or create a new one as described in the ‘Create a Project’ section of this manual. If using an existing project, ensure that it does not already contain a controller with the same network address as the one that is to be imported. 2 3

Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. On the Project menu click Import IQ3 File. The Select IQ3 file to import dialogue box is displayed.

If an IQ3 file does not exist for the controller you can upload the required file from the controller using the System View, as described in the ‘Upload/Download Strategy’ section of this manual. 4

In the folder list click the file that is to be imported.

To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 5

Click Open. The file will be imported.

If the x, y, and page parameters have been defined in the modules, the appropriate pages will be created, and the modules positioned accordingly. If the x, y, and page parameters are not defined, the modules will be added to the strategy but will subsequently need to be placed on the strategy pages as required.

12.57

Move Panes

The Project View, Strategy Library, System View and Search Library can be moved To move panes: 1 Dock the pane as described in the ‘Dock Panes’ section of this manual. 2

192

Click the left/right edge of the pane

and

are displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

3 4

Drag the mouse on top of or to attach the pane to the side of the SET Window. To position the pane as a floating box drag the mouse to the required position. Release the mouse button.

12.58

Perform a SET Command Using the Command Line Toolbar

The Command Line toolbar enables many of SET's commands to be performed simply by typing a command. To perform a SET command using the Command Line toolbar: 1 If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display it. 2 Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move cursor to the Command Line toolbar. 3 Press CTRL+L, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to activate the Command Line toolbar. 4 Enter the required command. 5 Press ENTER to carry out the command. The table below lists the available commands: SET Command Command to Type Add a dummy IC comms module DUMMY Add text to a page TEXT Draw a circle CIRCLE Draw a line LINE Draw a rectangle RECTANGLE Draw an ellipse ELLIPSE DRAW RECTANGLE SQUARE Fill the window with the used area of the EXTENT strategy page Goto the next page NEXT Goto the previous page PREV Redraw the screen REDRAW Zoom to a specific area Z

12.59

Position the Toolbars

The toolbars in the SET Window can be moved to any position on the screen to suit individual requirements. When docked the toolbars can appear on any edge of the window, when undocked they are known as floating toolbars, and can be positioned anywhere on the screen even outside the SET Window. To move a toolbar: 1 2

Click on a docked toolbar, or click the title bar on a floating toolbar. Drag the toolbar to the required position, and release the mouse button. If you drag the toolbar to the edge of the SET Window, it becomes a docked toolbar.

To dock a toolbar: 1 Move the toolbar to the required position at the side of the SET Window. To undock a toolbar: 1

Click

12.60

on the toolbar and move it to the required position.

Position the Windows

When a task that is performed displays a window the position of this window can be adjusted as required. To move a window: 1 Click the window’s title bar. 2 Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the window to the required position. 3 Release the mouse button. To tile all windows: 1 On the Window menu click Tile Vertically or Tile Horizontally. To cascade all windows: 1 On the Window menu click Cascade.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

193

General Operations To make a window full screen: 1 Click . To position a window in half of the screen: 1 Click , , , or depending on where the window is required. To position a window in a corner of the screen: 1 Click , , , or depending on where the window is required. To resize a window: 1 Move the mouse over one edge of the window. The pointer will change to a double-headed arrow (e.g. ). 2 Hold down the left mouse button, and move the mouse until the edge of the window is in the required position. 3 Release the mouse button. To lock the windows size and position: 1 Click .

12.61

Print a Single Page of Strategy

If required the strategy on a single strategy page can be printed. 1 2 3

Open the SET project containing the required controller as described in the ‘Open a Project’ section of this manual. Display the strategy page that is to be printed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Right click the page and on the displayed menu point to Page and then click Print Page

12.62

Redraw the Screen

If required the screen can be redrawn at any time. To redraw the screen: 1 Right-click the strategy page (do not click a module), and on the displayed menu click Redraw. Note that the Command Line toolbar’s REDRAW command can be used to redraw the screen.

12.63

Rename a Plant Directory

To rename a plant directory, or directory within a Plant Directory: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Plant View right-click the plant directory that is to be renamed, and on the displayed menu click Rename. 3 Enter the new name.

12.64

Resize Panes

The Project View, Strategy Library, System View and Search Library can be resized To resize panes: 1 Click the left/right edge of the pane and drag the mouse to the required position. 2 Release the mouse button.

194

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.65

Run SET

SET is run in the same way as any other Windows application. To run SET: 1 Run Windows. 2 On the Start menu point to All Programs, then point to Trend Control Systems, then point to System Engineering Tool and click System Engineering Tool. The Log onto SET dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

In the User Name box click your name. In the Password box enter your password. Click OK. The SET dialogue box is displayed.

6

Specify the task that is to be performed by selecting the required option. To open a new site file and browse the system click Open New Site File, and then click OK. To open an existing site file and browse the system, click Open Existing Site File, select the required file from the list at the bottom of the dialogue box, and then click OK. To browse the system without a site file open click Live Site. To open a new SET project, click Create New SET Project, and then click OK. To open existing SET project, click Open Existing SET Project, select the required file from the list at the bottom of the dialogue box, and then click OK. To open existing SET project and display the strategy for a specific controller, click Open Recent File option, select the required file IQ file from the list at the bottom of the dialogue box, and then click OK. This list also contains SET project files that can be selected, and opened. To import a project that has been zipped click Import Project from ZIP and select the required file from the dialogue box that is displayed. To export a project to a zip file click Export Project to ZIP and select the required project, and file location from the dialogue box that is displayed.

The first time SET is run it will ask for a valid licence to be entered, without this SET will not run. Once a valid licence has been entered SET will then prompt for a user to be added. If required the directory in which SET looks for, and save files can be changed by clicking Change and browsing to the required directory and then clicking OK. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

195

General Operations 12.66

Select Modules

SET allows modules to be selected so that operations (e.g. copying, or moving) can be performed on them. Modules that have been selected will change to yellow. To select modules by dragging: 1 Display the required strategy page containing the modules that are to be selected as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Drag the mouse around the required modules. To select modules by clicking: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be selected as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Hold down the CTRL key, and click the required modules. To select all modules on a page: 1 Display the strategy page containing the modules that are to be selected as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu click Select All. To deselect all selected modules: 1 Right-click anywhere on the page, and on the displayed menu click Unselect All. To deselect a single module: 1 Hold down the CTRL key, and click the required module.

12.67

Set up Page Details

Details about when a strategy page was created or modified is automatically stored. Text information can also be stored about the page; this is used to describe the function of the strategy on the page. To set up page details: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or in the Device View right-click the page for which information is to be viewed, and on the displayed menu point to Page and click PageDetails. The Page Info dialogue box is displayed.

3 4 5

196

In either the Line 1, or Line 2 box enter a description for the page. In Details box enter the required details. Click OK.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 12.68

Set up the Site Codes

This section describes how to set up the human readable and machine-readable (GUID) site codes for a site. To setup the site codes: 1 Display the site for which the site codes are to be set up in the System View. 2 Right-click the site and on the displayed menu click Site code manager. The Site Code Manager Window is displayed.

3 4 5

6 7 8

Click Discover site code(s). The Site Code Manager Applet will discover devices on the site. If the site contains more than one human readable site code, or more than one machine-readable site code a warning is displayed. Click Yes and goto (6) other wise goto (5). Click Assign New site codes. The Assign new site code dialogue box is displayed.

In the Human readable site code box specify the human readable site code, either click the required code in the box to select an existing site code or enter the required code. In the Machine readable site code box specify the machine-readable site code, either click the required code in the box to select an existing site code, or click New to generate a new machine-readable site code. If any of the controllers have security enabled in the Pin box enter the PIN that will authorise the change.

Note that only one PIN is sent therefore if the controllers have different PINs the change will fail. 9

Click OK. The $ parameter of the address module in the devices will be set to the text in the Human readable site code box, and the O parameter of the address module in the devices will be set to the text in the Machine readable site code box.

12.69

Specify the Next Module Number

The next module of each type that will be used is determined in the Next Module List. This contains the next module of each module type. It also specifies the sequence step for the next module that is added to the strategy. The next module numbers are automatically incremented when a module is placed on a strategy page. Sometimes the application will demand that a particular module is used, or the module needs to occur in a particular place in the sequence table. It is therefore possible to change the numbers to ensure that a particular module or sequence step is used. To specify the next module number: 1 View the Next Module List as described in the ‘View the Next Module List’ section of this manual. 2 In the Next box for the required module type or sequence step enter the required number.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

197

General Operations 12.70

Specify the Position of the Next Window

When a task that is performed displays a window the position of this window can be specified before it is displayed. To specify the position of the next window: 1 Hold down the CTRL key and click the appropriate button ( , button will appear depressed.

,

,

,

,

,

,

, or

). The selected

Note that the buttons can still be used to position other windows as described in the ‘Position the Windows’ section of this manual.

12.71

Specify Which Configuration Parameters are Displayed

The configuration parameters that are displayed on a strategy page are determined by specifying the display parameters for each module. When the module is first placed on a page, the default display options for that module type are used. The default display options should be configured to suite your requirements for each module type (Loop, Sensor etc), as described in the ‘Specify the Default Display Options’ section of this manual. To specify which configuration parameters are displayed: 1 Display the strategy page that contains the module for which the configuration parameters that are to displayed are to be specified as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Double-click the module, or connective, or right-click it, and on the displayed menu click Edit Parameters. The Parameters dialogue box for the module is displayed.

3 4

Click Display on the left of the required configuration parameter. Selected indicates that the parameter will be displayed. Clicking , will check all the check boxes, clicking will uncheck all the check boxes, and clicking will return the display settings to the current defaults. Click OK.

12.72

Turn the Status Bar ON/OFF

The Status Bar can be turned ON/OFF if required. To turn the Status Bar ON/OFF: 1 On the View menu click Status Bar to tick/untick the option; a tick ( ) indicates it is turned ON.

12.73

Undo the Last Action

If required, the last action performed can be undone. To undo the last action: 1 Press CTRL+Z, or on the Edit menu click Undo Last. Note that the Undo facility does not undo all actions.

12.74

Upload Strategy from an IQ Controller

SET can upload strategy from IQ controllers over a network, or from a directly connected controller. It uploads the strategy in different formats depending on the controller. For IQ3 controllers it uploads IQ3 files, for pre IQ3 controllers with firmware earlier than v2.0 it uploads SCN files, and for other pre IQ3 controllers it uploads IQ2 files. To upload strategy: 1 Connect the PC running SET to the IQ network, or directly connect to the controller’s supervisor or direct connection port using a suitable cable as described in the controller’s documentation. 2 Ensure that there is a standard comms configuration available that will enable SET to communicate with the controller from which the strategy is to be uploaded. See the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of this manual for details.

198

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations 3 4

Display a strategy page from the controller whose strategy is to be uploaded as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. Click , or on the Comms menu click Upload. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET automatically inserts the Lan number, and address of the controller whose strategy file is to be uploaded. 5 6 7

8 9 10

11

To upload from a different controller edit the Lan, and Node boxes to contain address of the controller from which the strategy is to be uploaded. If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access click Direct Connection. If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the upload. For IQ3 controllers enter the required username in the User Name box, and the password in the Password box. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box. For earlier controllers enter the PIN into the Pin box. If a different comms connection is to be used select the required one from the list. Click OK. SET will check to see that the identifier and controller address specified match the one to which SET is connecting. If they don’t match a dialogue box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel. If OK was selected a dialogue box similar to the one shown below is displayed.

Ensure that the location and filename of the uploaded file is correct. This is indicated in the text box. The default location and filename is determined by the address of the controller. If required a different filename , and can be specified by editing the text in the box, and a different directory specified by clicking navigating the required directory as described in the ‘Change the Upload Directory’ section of this manual. The location defaults to the Download directory for the current project, and the filename defaults to: Ln.zzz>

Where specifies the Lan number of the controller. specifies the network address of the controller. indicates the file format (IQ3, IQF, or SCN), e.g. L099n020.IQ3 would be the file name given to the file uploaded from controller 20 on Lan 99. Note that if uploading from IQ3 controllers the uploaded file will contain the IP address and Lan and outstation numbers. 12

If uploading from IQ3 controllers connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>).

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

199

General Operations Note that when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. This is because it is only possible to upload the IQ3 file using the current loop. If this box is not selected and there are IQ3 controllers connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be uploaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Uploads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. 13 14

If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is uploaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are uploaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being uploaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 15

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are uploaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. 16

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be uploaded by selecting the XNC File(s) check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be uploaded using the current loop. 17 18

Specify whether the window is to be closed when the upload is complete by selecting the Close this dialogue box when upload completes check box. Click Start to begin the upload. Clicking Stop will stop the upload.

If the upload fails, or is stopped, the Start button will change to Retry, clicking Retry; will attempt the upload again.

12.75

View Device Details

It is possible to view information about particular devices in the network structure. To view details for a particular device: 1 Display a strategy page for which details are to be viewed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the Device menu click Device Details. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.

12.76

View Lan Details

It is possible to view information about the Lans in the network structure. To view details for a particular Lan: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right-click the Lan for which details are to be viewed, and on the displayed menu click Lan Details. The Lan Details dialogue box is displayed.

200

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

12.77

View Page Details

Information about when a strategy page was created, and modified is stored. The text information can be used to store reminders about things that need to be done to the strategy on that page. To view page details: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or in the Device View right-click the page for which information is to be viewed, and on the displayed menu point to Page and click Page Details. The Page Info dialogue box is displayed.

12.78

View Project Details

It is possible to view information about the current project. To view details for the current project: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View Section of this manual. 2 In the Device View right-click the project name, and on the displayed menu click Project Details. The Project Details dialogue box is displayed.

12.79

View Strategy Block Details

Information about a strategy block can be viewed. This information is user definable, and could be used to describe how the strategy works. To view the details for a particular strategy block: 1 Display the Project View as described in the ‘Display the Project View’ section of this manual. 2 In the Strategy Blocks Area right-click the strategy block for which details are to be displayed, and on the displayed menu click Details. The Strategy Block Details dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

201

General Operations

12.80

View Strategy Issues

The issue details enable a record of changes made to the strategy to be kept. They describe the current issue, and contain a description of the changes made since the previous version. These details are included on the strategy pages for the controller when they are printed out. Note the latest information is used for the print out. To view issue details: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which issue details are to be viewed as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Issue Details, or the Device menu click Issue Details. The Issue Details dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the Number box use the arrows to select the required issue. In the Revision box use the arrows to select the required revision.

12.81

View the Next Module List

When configuring the controller it is possible view a list of modules that indicates the next module number for each module type, and the next sequence step that will be used. It also shows how many modules of each module type are still free for use. To view next module list: 1 Display a strategy page for the controller for which the list is required as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. , right-click the page and on the displayed menu click Next Module, or on the Tools menu click 2 Click Free/Next Module List. The Next Module List dialogue box is displayed.

202

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

General Operations

12.82

Zoom IN/OUT

SET enables the strategy page to seen in more detail by zooming IN/OUT. One of the standard magnification levels can be used, or you can zoom into a specific area. To use one of the standard magnification levels: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 On the View menu click the required magnification level. For example to zoom to 2 times size, On the View menu click Zoom 200%. To zoom to a specific area: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or on the View menu click Zoom Window, or right-click the strategy page (not on a module) and 3 4

on the displayed menu click Zoom Window. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass. . Hold down the left mouse button, and drag over the required area (indicated by a rectangle). Once the required area is surrounded by the rectangle, release the mouse button.

Note the Command Line toolbar’s command ZOOM can be used to perform this function from the Command Line toolbar. To fill the window with the used area of the strategy page: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Right-click the strategy page (not on a module), and on the displayed menu click Zoom Extent. Note the Command Line toolbar’s command EXTENT can be used to perform this function from the Command Line toolbar. To zoom with a mouse wheel: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Hold down the CTRL key and use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Moving the mouse around changes the centre point of the zoom. To zoom to a corner: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click the icon, or press the appropriate function key as described in the table below. Icon/Function Key /F5

Description Zooms to the top left corner

/F6

Zooms to the top right corner

/F7

Zooms to the bottom left corner

/F8

Zooms to the bottom left corner

To return to actual size: 1 Display the required strategy page as described in the ‘Go to a Strategy Page’ section of this manual. 2 Click , or on the View menu click Zoom 100%, or right-click the strategy page (not on a module) and on the displayed menu click Zoom Extent from the menu that is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

203

General Operations

This page is intentionally left blank.

204

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13 BROWSING THE IQ SYSTEM This section describes how to SET to browse an IQ system, and perform particular tasks such as entering configuration mode on the device, sending text comms, or displaying a map of the Lan. There is a summary of using SET to browse the IQ network in the following section: Basic Browsing For a more detailed description of the different tasks, see the following sections: Display a List of Objects Display Properties Enter Configuration Mode on Pre IQ3 Controllers Map the System Send a Text Comms Message Upload/Download Strategy View an IQ3 Controller's Graphical Display Pages

13.1 Basic Browsing This section describes the basic principles of browsing the system with the System View. To browse the system: 1 Physically connect to the IQ system as described in the ‘Connect to the IQ Network’ section of this manual. 2 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run SET and Display the System View’ section of the manual. 3 Click + next to Sites or User nodes in the System View. If the required site is not available, a site should be added as described in the ‘Add a Site’ section of this manual. 4 Navigate down the tree structure as described in the ‘Navigate the System’ section of this manual to locate to display the required information. Objects with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking + to reveal what is below them in the structure. SET will automatically learn the system structure of the next level, and display it. Note that if user nodes are being viewed, it may be necessary to turn on the automatic refresh as described in the ‘Turn a User Node’s Refresh ON/OFF’ section of this manual. If the object has not been identified, right-click and on the displayed menu click Refresh, to identify the selected object, or click Refresh all to identify all the objects on the next level down in the structure. 5

Once you have reached the required part of the system, you can run a ToolSET applet by right-clicking it, and selecting the required task from the displayed menu.

It is possible to specify the location of the window that is displayed as described in the ‘Specify the Position of the Next Window’ section of this manual. Once displayed it is possible to position the window as described in the ‘Position the Windows’ section of this manual. 13.1.1 Run SET and Display the System View If you want to browse the system you must run SET, and display the System View. This can be done in one of three ways: Connecting to a Live Site Creating a new site file Loading an existing site file. 13.1.1.1 Connect to a Live Site SET can be run and connected to a live site without a site file loaded. To run set an connect to a live site: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Live Site. 3 Click OK. The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

205

Browsing the IQ System

4

In the Standard Comms Connection box click the connection for the site.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of comms connections. 5

Click OK.

13.1.1.2 Create a Site File A site file stores information about the devices on a site, and modules in those devices, as well as the connections for the site. If required a blank site file can be created, and SET can then browse the system to find out what devices are available, and add them to the file. To create a site file: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Create New Site File. 3 Click OK. The ToolSET Project dialogue box is displayed.

4

In the Project Name box enter a name for the project.

If required the directory that the file is saved in can be changed by clicking Change browsing to the required directory, and then clicking OK. 5

Click OK. The Site Name dialogue box is displayed.

6 7

In the Site Name box enter a name for the site. Click OK. The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed.

206

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System

8

In the Standard Comms Connection box click the connection for the site.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of comms connections. 9

Click OK.

13.1.1.3 Open a Site File A site file stores information about the devices on a site, and modules in those devices, as well as the connections for the site. If required a site file can be opened, enabling access to information about the site without having to refresh objects, and saving time on unnecessary communications. To open a site file: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Open Existing Site File. A list of the existing site files is displayed in the bottom of the dialogue box. 3 In the list at the bottom of the dialogue box click the required site file. To display a list of files in another directory click Change, navigate to the directory containing the required project and click OK. The site file should now appear in the list. To open a file not in the list click More Files then click OK to display the Open dialogue box, click the required file and click Open. To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is displayed. 4

Click OK. The selected site file will be opened.

To open a recent site file: 1 Run SET and log on as described in the ‘Run SET’ section of this manual. 2 When the SET dialogue box is displayed click Open Recent Site File. 3 In the list at the bottom of the dialogue box click the required file. To display a list of files in another directory click Change, navigate to the directory containing the required project and click OK. The project should now appear in the list. 4 Click OK. The selected site file will be opened. 13.1.2 Navigate the System The IQ system can either be navigated by clicking the different areas of the system structure, to locate the required part of the system, or by using the Item Selector. To navigate the system by clicking the different areas: 1 Click + next to Sites or User nodes in the System View. If the required site is not available, a site should be added as described in the ‘Add a Site’ section of this manual. 2 Navigate down the tree structure to locate to display the required information. Objects with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking + to reveal what is below them in the structure. SET will automatically learn the system structure of the next level, and display it.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

207

Browsing the IQ System To navigate the system using the Item Selector: 1 Display the Item Selector as described in the ‘Display the Item Selector’ section of this manual. 2 In the list at the top of the Item Selector click the required site. If the required site is not available, a site should be added. 3 In the Lan, Os and Mod boxes enter the required Lan number, network address, and module. It is only necessary to specify the required level, e.g. if you want to view a particular Lan it is only necessary to specify the Lan number. The Lan number can be any integer in the range 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 126 specifies the internetwork. The network address can be any integer in the range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. The module specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1 specifies sensor 1). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. 4

Click Find. SET will go to the specified part on the system, and expand the structure of the site so that it is visible.

13.1.3 Run a ToolSET Applet ToolSET applets that are associated with a type of system object can be run from the System View or the Item Selector. Applets that are not associated with a type of system object can be run from the Tools menu. This allows different tasks such as entering configuration mode, or displaying information about a device, or uploading a file can be carried out on the selected part of the system. The tasks that are available are dependent on the part of the system that is selected. For example, if an IQ controller has been selected it is possible to go into configuration mode where as if a Lan is selected, the Lan can be mapped. Note that applets are only accessible if the current user role is equal to or higher than that required for access to the applet. To run an applet from the System View: 1 Navigate to the required part of the system, as described in the ‘Navigate the System’ section of this manual. 2 Once you have reached the required part of the system right-click, and on the displayed menu click the required task. To run an applet from the Item Selector: 1 Display the Item Selector as described in the ‘Display the Item Selector’ section of this manual. 2 In the Context box specify click the required part of the system. This tells SET what the object is e.g. Lan, or device. 3 In the Action box click the required task from the list 4 Click Go. To run an applet from the Tools menu: 1 Choose Tools and then choose the required applet from the displayed menu. If the task opens a new window it is possible to move between then by clicking each window. The window can be closed by clicking , or on the Window menu clicking More Windows to display the Arrange Windows dialogue box, selecting the window in the list, and then clicking Close Window. 13.1.4 Refresh the System View If required data in the System View can be refreshed manually. To manually refresh data: 1 Select the object for which data is to be refreshed. 2 Right-click the object and on the displayed menu click Refresh, to refresh the selected object, or Refresh all to refresh all the objects on the next level down in the structure. has the same effect as clicking Refresh, and clicking

Clicking on Refresh all.

has the same effect as clicking

To stop a refresh once it has bee started: 1

Click

.

To prevent automatic refreshing: 1

208

Click

.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13.1.4.1 Turn a User Node's Refresh ON/OFF If there are a large number of user nodes in the System View all refreshing their values, a large amount of unnecessary network traffic may be created. Therefore, it is recommended that the refresh of user nodes is not active unless they are being accessed. To add turn a user node’s refresh rate ON/OFF: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the user node and on the displayed menu click Edit. The Add or Edit User node dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

Select/clear Refresh is active check box. Selected indicates the refresh is on. Once the settings are correct, click OK.

13.1.5 Set up the System View The way in which the System View appears is dependant on the current user role, however it can be set up to display only the devices and objects that are required by removing objects. User nodes can be added to enable fast access to the required points on the system. Sites that use different connections can also be added to enable access to devices on different parts of the system. If required this set up can be saved as site file for use later by another applications such as OPC Server. Objects that are not in System View will not be accessible. To set up the System View: 1 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 2 Create the required sites as described in the ‘Add a Site’ section of this manual. 3 Navigate down the structure of each site to identify the objects on the site as described in the ‘Navigate the System’ section of this manual. Objects with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking the + to reveal what is below them in the structure. 4 Delete any unwanted objects (parameters, modules, or sites etc) from the System View as described in the ‘Delete an Object’ section of this manual. 5 Add any user nodes that are required as described in the ‘Add a User Node’ section of this manual. 6 Save the set up as a site file as described in the ‘Save the Site File’ section of this manual (Optional). 13.1.5.1 Add a Site 13.1.5.1.1

Add a Non IQ System Site

A non IQ system site specifies how SET communicates with a non IQ network (e.g. BACnet). If required, several different sites can be specified; it is then possible to swap between them as required. To add a site: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. or on the Project menu click Sites. The Choose Type of site dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click

4

Click the required type of site from the list. This displays a dialogue box that enables the connection to be specified. Define the site and its connection as required. See the appropriate documentation for more details.

5

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

209

Browsing the IQ System 13.1.5.1.2 Add an IQ System Site An IQ system site specifies how SET communicates with a specific part of the IQ network. If required, several different sites can be specified; it is then possible to swap between them as required. To add a site: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 4

or on the Project menu click Sites. The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed. Click Click Add. The Site Name dialogue box is displayed.

If additional site drivers have been installed (e.g. BACnet) a dialogue box will be displayed that enables the type of site to be specified. If this happens select Trend from the list. 5 6

In the Site name box enter a name for the site. Click OK to return to the Site Connections dialogue box.

7

In the Comms Connection box click the required connection for the site.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and on the displayed menu clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Standard Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of comms connections. 8

Click OK.

13.1.5.1.3 Delete a Site If there are sites in the list that are not required, they can be deleted. To delete a site: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3

210

Click

. The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System

4 5 6

In the Site List box click the site that is to be deleted. Click Delete. The selected connection will be deleted. Click OK.

13.1.5.1.4 Edit a Site If there is a site in the list that needs to be changed, it can be edited as required by changing the name, or changing the connection used to communicate with it. To change a site’s name: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. . The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed.

3

Click

4 5

In the Site List box click the site for which the name is to be changed. Click Edit. The Site Name dialogue box is displayed.

6 7 8

In the Site name box enter the new name for the site. Click OK to return to the Site Connections dialogue box. Click OK.

To change a site’s connection: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

211

Browsing the IQ System 3 4

Click . The Site Connections dialogue box is displayed. In the Comms Connection box click the required connection for the site.

If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box, and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection to be specified as required as described in the ‘Specify Comms Connections’ section of the manual. Note that the connection specified here will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of comms connections. 5

Click OK.

13.1.5.2 Delete an Object from the System View If required, any object can be removed from the System View, preventing access to it by users with lower levels of access. To delete an object from the System View: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Navigate to the required part of the system, as describe in the ‘Navigate the System’ section of this manual. 4 Right-click the item that is to be removed, and on the displayed menu click Delete. Note that deleting an object in the System View will mean that if cannot be accessed from a user node. Once an object has been removed from the System View, the System View must be refreshed to add it back in again as described in the ‘Refresh the System View’ section of this manual. 13.1.5.3 Add a User Node User nodes allow a user-defined structure to be created to allow faster access to regularly used parts of the system. There is no limit to the number of user nodes that can be added. Each user node can contain other user nodes, or user parameters. Access to user nodes (and some user parameters) can be restricted to particular user roles to prevent unauthorised accessed and reduce confusion to lower-level users. To add a user node: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click User nodes, and on the displayed menu click New user node. If the user node is to be inside another user node, right-click the user node and on the displayed menu click New user node. The Add or Edit User node dialogue box is displayed.

4 5 6

In the Name box enter the name for the user node. In the Refresh interval(s) box enter the rate in seconds at which any values contained in a user node are refreshed. If the user node is to refresh the values, select the Refresh is active check box.

Note that if there are a large number of user nodes in the tree view all refreshing their values, a large amount of unnecessary network traffic may be created. Therefore it is recommended that the refresh of user nodes is not active unless they are being accessed. 7 8 9

212

In the User Role box click the lowest level user role that will have access to the user node. Once the settings are correct click OK. Add the required user parameters.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13.1.5.3.1 Add User Parameters to a User Node User parameters are either modules or parameters that are to be collected under a user node for common refreshing. To add user parameters to a user node: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Navigate down the user node structure to display the user node to which user parameters are to be added. User nodes with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking the + to reveal what is below them in the structure. 4 Navigate down the structure of the site to display the user parameter that is to be added to the user node. Objects with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking the + to reveal what is below them in the structure. 5 Click the module/parameter that is to be added to the user node in either the System View, or the Tracker Window, hold down the left mouse button and drag it on to the required user node. If multiple selections are required, the selection must be made from the Tracker Window. Hold down the CTRL key, and then click the required user parameters. To select a range, click the first one in the range, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the last one in the range. 6

Release the mouse button. The selected parameters will be added to the user node, and no further action is required. If a user parameter is a module or module parameter, a dialogue box similar to the one shown below will be displayed.

7 8

In the Name box enter the name for the user parameter. In the Significant change box enter the amount by which the user parameter must change before it is updated in the user node.

Note that, if the refresh for the user node containing the user parameter is not active it will not be updated, even if the value change by more than the significant change value. 9 10

In the User Role box click the lowest level user role that will have access to the user parameter from the list. Once the settings are correct, click OK. If more than one parameter is selected you can click OK All to accept the changes to all parameters.

13.1.5.3.2 Delete a User Node If there are user nodes in the System View that are not required, they can be deleted. To delete a user node: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the user node that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Remove. 13.1.5.3.3 Delete User Parameters from a User Node To delete user parameters from a user node: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Navigate down the user node structure to display the user parameter that is be deleted. User nodes with a + next to them can be expanded by clicking the + to reveal what is below them in the structure. 4 Right-click the user parameter that is to be deleted, and on the displayed menu click Delete. More than one user parameter can be deleted at a time by selecting them in the Tracker Window, right-clicking the selection, and on the displayed menu, clicking Remove. To select more than one user parameter, hold down the CTRL key, and then click the required user parameters. To select a range, click the first one in the range, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the last one in the range.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

213

Browsing the IQ System 13.1.5.3.4 Edit a User Node To edit a user node: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer as described in the ‘Specify the Current User Role’ section of this manual. 3 Right-click the user node that is to be edited, and on the displayed menu click Edit. The Add or Edit User node dialogue box is displayed.

4 5

Edit the user node as required. Once the settings are correct click OK.

13.1.5.4 Save the Site File The appearance of the IQ system currently displayed in the System View is saved when SET is closed. What is saved depends on how SET has been configured. See the ‘Specify the Loading and Saving of Site Data’ section of this manual. 13.1.6 Specify the Current User Role The current user role determines how the site structure displayed in the System View. Each user has an associated user role, if required this role can be changed so that the information displayed in the System View can be tailored to suit your requirements. To specify the current user role: 1 Run SET and display the System View as described in the ‘Run Set and Display the System View’ section of this manual. 2 On the Tools menu click User Role. The User Setup dialogue box is displayed.

3

In the User Role box click the required role. The table below lists the different roles. Role Browser Operator Supervisor Administrator Commissioning Engineer Engineer

4 5 6

Description A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system. A user who is able to view limited parameters on the system, and make simple adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, and make complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters on the system, make more complex adjustments. A user who is able to view parameters from an engineering point of view, make complex adjustments. A user who has full access to the system.

In the Password box enter your password. In the Verify box re-enter your password. Click OK.

13.2 Display a List of Objects 13.2.1 Display a List of Device Contents If required a list of the contents of the device currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of device contents: 1 Display the device whose content you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the device and on the displayed menu click List device contents. The List View Window will be displayed as shown below. 214

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it. 13.2.2 Display a List of Devices on a Lan If required a list of devices on Lan currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of devices on the Lan: 1 Display the Lan whose content you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the Lan and on the displayed menu click List devices on lan. The List View Window is displayed.

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it. 13.2.3 Display a List of Internetwork Devices If required a list of internetwork devices for the internetwork currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of internetwork: 1 Display the internetwork you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the internetwork and on the displayed menu click List Iwrk devices. The List View Window will be displayed as shown below.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

215

Browsing the IQ System

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it. 13.2.4 Display a List of Module Parameters If required a list of the parameters for the module currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of module parameters: 1 Display the module whose parameters you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the module and on the displayed menu click List modules parameters from the displayed menu. The List View Window will be displayed as shown below.

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it.

216

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13.2.5 Display a List of Modules If required a list of the modules of the type currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of modules: 1 Display the type of module in the required controller you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the module type and on the displayed menu click List modules. The List View Window is displayed.

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it. 13.2.6 Display a List of the Site Content If required a list of the content of the site currently selected in the System View can be displayed. To display a list of the site content: 1 Display the site whose content you want to display as a list. 2 Right-click on the site and on the displayed menu click List the site content. The List View Window is displayed.

To refresh the information in the list right-click, and on the displayed menu click Refresh, The list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking , and on the displayed menu clicking Copy from the menu that is displayed Objects can be deleted by right-clicking the object on the displayed menu clicking Delete. Depending on your installation other ToolSET applets can be run by right-clicking the object and choosing the required applet from the menu that is displayed. You can navigate to other parts of the system by double-click on objects to display the part of the system below it.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

217

Browsing the IQ System 13.3 Display Graphs 13.3.1 Display a Chart It is possible to chart a value in an IQ controller. To chart values: 1 Display the parameter that you want to chart in the System View. Note not all parameters can be charted. 2

Right-click the parameter and choose Chart from the menu that is displayed. The Chart Interval dialogue box is displayed.

3 4

In the box enter the interval, in seconds, between chart values. Click OK. The selected value(s) will now be charted.

Clicking will close the graph. The refresh rate of the chart can be changed. To view the time and the value for a point on the graph press CTRL and then move the mouse to that point, the time and value will be displayed. You can zoom in and out of the graph. If required other traces can be added to, or removed from the graph. The scaling of the Y-axis can be fixed. A graph can be printed, or copied to the clipboard. 13.3.2 Display a Compact Graph It is possible to display compact logs of a sensor in an IQ controller to be displayed as a graph. Each graph can show up to 1000 values. To display a compact graph: 1 Display the sensor you want to display as a graph in the System View. 2 Right-click the sensor that is to be graphed and on the displayed menu click Graph. The Choose Log Interval dialogue box is displayed.

If a graph is already displayed you will be prompted whether the graph is to be in a new window or be added to the existing graph. Click Yes to add the graph to the existing window, or No to display it in a new window. 3 4 5

In the Interval box click the interval at which the sensor is being logged. Click Compact comms (FAST). Click OK. The graph is displayed.

Clicking will close the chart. To view the time and the value for a point on the graph press CTRL and then move the mouse to that point, the time and value will be displayed. You can zoom in and out of the graph. If required other traces can be added to, or removed from the graph. The scaling of the Y-axis can be fixed. A graph can be printed, or copied to the clipboard. The points of a trace can be displayed as a list of points, or saved to a text file allowing the data to be imported into a spreadsheet or other software package. 13.3.3 Display a Precision Graph It is possible to display precision logs of a sensor in an IQ controller to be displayed as a graph. Each graph can show up to 1000 values. To display a precision graph: 1 Display the sensor you want to display as a graph in the System View. 2 Right-click the sensor that is to be graphed and on the displayed menu click Graph. The Choose Log Interval dialogue box is displayed.

218

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System

If a graph is already displayed you will be prompted whether the graph is to be in a new window or be added to the existing graph. Click Yes to add the graph to the existing window, or No to display it in a new window. 3 4 5

In the Interval box click the interval at which the sensor is being logged. Click Longhand comms (ACCURATE). Click OK. The graph is displayed.

will close the chart. To view the time and the value for a point on the graph press CTRL and then Clicking move the mouse to that point, the time and value will be displayed. You can zoom in and out of the graph. If required other traces can be added to, or removed from the graph. The scaling of the Y-axis can be fixed. A graph can be printed, or copied to the clipboard. The points of a trace can be displayed as a list of points, or saved to a text file allowing the data to be imported into a spreadsheet or other software package.

13.4 Display Properties 13.4.1 Display Device Properties Information about a selected device on the IQ System can be displayed in the Device Properties dialogue box. To display device information: 1 Display the device for which information is required. 2 Right-click the device, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Device Properties dialogue box is displayed.

If required the information can be updated.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

219

Browsing the IQ System 13.4.2 Display Module Properties Information about a selected module on the IQ system can be displayed in the Module Properties dialogue box. To display module information: 1 Display the module for which information is required. 2 Right-click the module, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Module Properties dialogue box is displayed.

If required the information can be updated. The module's parameters can be displayed by clicking the Parameters tab. This also enables the parameters to be changed. 13.4.3 Display Parameter Properties Information about a selected module parameter on the IQ system can be displayed in the Parameter Properties dialogue box. To display parameter information: 1 Display the list containing the parameter for which information is required. 2 Right-click the parameter, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Parameter Properties dialogue box is displayed.

The colour of the box around the parameter indicates its status. Clicking Key displays a dialogue box that explains the meaning of each of the colours. If required the information can be updated. The value of the parameter can be changed 13.4.4 Display Site Properties Information about a selected site on the IQ system can be displayed in the Site Properties dialogue box. To display site information: 1 Display the site for which information is required. 2 Right-click the site, and on the displayed menu click Properties. The Site Properties dialogue box is displayed.

220

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System

If required a PIN can be specified for all the controllers on the site.

13.5 Enter Configuration Mode on a Device Configuration mode enables parameters within the device to be viewed, or adjusted as required, providing the user has the correct access rights. To enter configuration mode: 1 Display the controller for which configuration mode is required. 2 Right-click the controller and on the displayed menu click Config session. The Config Session Window is displayed.

3

In the box at the bottom of the Config Session Window enter the required configuration command and press ENTER or click Go to send the command to the device.

The system prompts the available functions; the upper case character in each prompt is the key to be used to select the function. Most functions also require an additional numeric value. To exit from any page of data and save any changes, made, enter X+ENTER. To exit from any page of data and not save any changes made, enter Q+ENTER. The commands are as explained in the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533) for IQ controllers. If required keywords can be embedded in the commands to provide quicker access too commonly used commands. It is also possible to send a previously used command, or a favourite command to the controller, by clicking the required command from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER, or clicking Go. If a module is selected, the next and previous module of the same type can be viewed by clicking < or >. To send a Q, or X to the controller click Q or ’. 4

Click X at the top-level configuration prompts to close the session and exit configuration mode.

Note that if no commands are sent to the device for a period of time it will automatically exit configuration mode and the Config Session Window will close.

13.6 Map the System If required the site can be displayed as a map. Once the site has been mapped, tasks such as entering configuration mode can be performed from the map as required. To map the site: 1 Browse the system to display the part that is to be mapped. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

221

Browsing the IQ System 2

Right-click part of the system that is to be mapped and on the displayed menu click Map Lan, or Map Internetwork. The Network Device Map Window will be displayed.

3

It is possible to view maps of the internetwork by double clicking Iwrk, or other Lans by mapping the internetwork, and then double clicking the required Lan.

The information on the screen is automatically refreshed; this refresh can be stopped by clicking Stop, and started by clicking Start. To force a refresh for a particular device right-click it and on the displayed menu click Refresh. Tasks can be performed by right-clicking the object in the map (e.g. Lan, and choosing the required one from the displayed menu. Note that it may be necessary to identify the device first so that the tasks that apply to the device can be worked out. 4

To close the map click

at the top of the window.

13.7 Send a Text Comms Message If required text comms requests or writes to be sent to the target controller or Lan. To send a text comms message: 1 Display the device for which a text comms session is required. 2 Right-click the device and on the displayed menu click Text comms. The Text Comms Session Window will be displayed.

3

In the box at the bottom of the Text Comms Session Window enter the required text communications message and press ENTER to send the command to the message.

The message will be sent as either a read, write with acknowledge, or write without acknowledge depending on what has been set in the text comms session options. The default is Auto (REQ – OWH) which means if the message contains an = it is sent as a write with acknowledge, otherwise it is sent as a read. If required you can force the message to be sent as a read, or a write by clicking Read or Write. It is also possible to send a previously used message, or a favourite message, by clicking the required message from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER. If required the last message sent can be repeated indefinitely by clicking Repeat. Click Stop to stop the message repeating. 4 222

To close the session click

at the top right of the window. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13.8 View Alarms 13.8.1 View Current Alarms All the current alarms (i.e. alarms that have occurred but not yet cleared) that have occurred on the IQ network that the Alarm Monitoring Applet is monitoring since the applet was loaded can be viewed as they arrive on the Current Alarms tab of the Alarm Monitoring Window. To view current alarms: 1 Ensure the devices on the network are configured to send alarms to the address being used by the applet. 2 Display the site for which alarms are to be monitored in the System View. 3 On the Tools menu click Monitor Incoming Alarms. The Alarm Monitoring Window is displayed. 4 Click the Current Alarms tab.

The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and is refreshed as new alarms occur. Colours are used to indicate whether the alarm is a set alarm or a cleared alarm. A red bell indicates a set alarm, and a green bell indicates a cleared alarm. 13.8.2 View Historic Alarms All the alarms that have been cleared (i.e. all set alarms for which a clear alarm has also been received) can be viewed on the Historic Alarms tab of the Alarm Monitoring Window. The alarms are grouped into set and cleared alarms; i.e. the set alarm and its corresponding cleared alarm appear on the same line. To view historic alarms: 1 Ensure the devices’ on the network are configured to send alarms to the address being used by the applet. 2 Display the site for which alarms are to be monitored in the System View. 3 On the Tools menu click Monitor Incoming Alarms. The Alarm Monitoring Window is displayed. 4 Click the Historic Alarms tab.

The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and displays the set alarm with its corresponding cleared alarm on the same line. 13.8.3 View Incoming Alarms All the alarms that have occurred on the IQ network that the Alarm Monitoring Applet is monitoring since the applet was loaded can be viewed on the Incoming Alarms tab of the Alarm Monitoring Window. To view incoming alarms: 1 Ensure the devices on the network are configured to send alarms to the address being used by the applet. 2 Display the site for which alarms are to be monitored in the System View. 3 On the Tools menu click Monitor Incoming Alarms. The Alarm Monitoring Window is displayed. 4 Click the Alarm History tab.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

223

Browsing the IQ System

The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and displays the set alarm with its corresponding cleared alarm on the same line. Colours are used to indicate whether the alarm is a set alarm or a cleared alarm. A red bell indicates a set alarm, and a green bell indicates a cleared alarm.

13.9 View an IQ3 Controller’s Web Pages It is possible to access the web pages made available to over an Ethernet network. These pages provide information about the module parameters in the controller, and enable alarms and graphs to be viewed, adjustments to be made, as well as access to the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages if they have been setup. To access an IQ3 controller’s web pages: 1 Browse the system to display the controller who’s web pages are to be displayed application as described in the ‘Browsing the IQ System with SET’ section of this manual. 2 Right click on device and on the displayed menu click Web page. Internet explorer will be loaded and the IQ3 controller accessed. Having accessed the controller you can navigate around the various pages to view the required information and if necessary make adjustments. Clicking on the different parts of the screen will enable you to perform different tasks the display will make is clear what can be done. When a reference to a module is displayed with an underline clicking on it will display the module’s detail page. For more details of using IQ3 controllers from a web browser see the ‘IQ3 Web User Guide’ for more details.

13.10

Upload/Download Strategy

13.10.1 Download a Single Strategy to Multiple Controllers It is possible to download strategy to more than one IQ controller over the network, in IQ3, IQF, IQ2, or LDF format. A single strategy can be downloaded to several different controllers. To prevent overloading the network, a maximum of four controllers will be downloaded to at one time, once the download to one is complete; the next device will be downloaded to. To download a single strategy to multiple controllers: 1 Create the file that is to be downloaded as described in the SET Manual. 2 View the site in the System View containing the controllers on the IQ System to which the strategy is to be downloaded. 3 Right-click the site and on the displayed menu click File Transfer. The File Transfer Window is displayed.

224

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 4

Add the devices to which strategy is to be downloaded to the Transfer List. This can be done by navigating down the site in the System View to locate the controllers, right-clicking each one, and on the displayed menu clicking Add to Transfer List. Right-clicking a Lan, and on the displayed menu clicking Add to Transfer List will add all the IQ controllers on that Lan to the Transfer List. Alternatively a Transfer List that has been previously saved can be loaded by clicking Load Device List, and selecting the required list from the dialogue box that is displayed.

Controllers can be removed from the Transfer List, by selecting them, and then clicking Remove. 5

6

Select the controllers in the Transfer List that are to be downloaded to, by holding down the CTRL key and clicking them. To select a range of controllers hold down the SHIFT key and click the first controller in the range, and then the last controller in the range. Clicking Select All will highlight all the devices in the list, and clicking Unselect All deselects all the devices. If any of the controllers that are to be downloaded to have security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers in the User Name box enter the required username, and in the Password box enter the password, see the ‘Change the Username and Password’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. For earlier controllers, in the Pin box enter the PIN, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual.

Note that only one password, or PIN is sent, therefore if the controllers have different passwords, or PINs the download will fail. 7

If downloading IQF files to IQ2 controllers earlier than v2 select the Use IQF for IQ2v1 check box. This will cause SET to use IQF files instead of IQ2 files.

Note that by default SET uses LDF files for IQ2 controllers earlier than v2. 8

If downloading only to IQ3 controllers connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box.

If this box is not selected and there are IQ3 controllers connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be downloaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Downloads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. Note that it is not possible to download backdrops, language files, and XNC files using the current loop therefore when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. 9 10

If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is downloaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are downloaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being downloaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 11

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 12

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 13 14 15

Select Display Download Dir. In the File Transfer List box click the format of the strategy file that is to be downloaded. In the File Transfer List click the file that is to be downloaded. If the required file does not appear in the list and change the download directory to the one containing the file as described in the ‘Change the click Download Directory’ section of this manual.

16

. The progress of the download is displayed on the right of the window. Clicking Click will stop the download.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

225

Browsing the IQ System The results of the download are displayed in the Results box; any controllers for which the download failed will be highlighted in the Transfer List making it easy to retry by clicking 17

Click

.

to close the File Transfer Window.

13.10.2 Download Different Strategies to Multiple Controllers It is possible to download strategy to more than one IQ controller over the network, in IQ3, IQF, IQ2, or LDF format. A different strategy can be downloaded to each controller. The format of the name of the strategy file is used to determine which device the file is downloaded to; therefore it is important that the strategy files are named appropriately in the format shown below: Ln.. Where specifies the Lan number of the controller. specifies the network address of the controller. is only used for IQ3 files that contain the option addressing information. A different letter indicates the type of information that is contained see the table below for more details. Letter I A U

Description The file contains the controller’s IP address. The file contains the controller’s Lan and outstation numbers. The file contains the supervisor port.

indicates the file format (IQ3, IQF, or SCN), e.g. L099n020.I.A.IQ3 would be the filename given to the file uploaded from controller 20 on Lan 99 that contains the IP address and Lan and outstation numbers. To prevent overloading the network, a maximum of four controllers will be downloaded to at one time; once the download to one is complete, the next device will be downloaded to. To different strategies to multiple controllers: 1 Create the files that are to be downloaded as described in the SET Manual. 2 View the site in the System View containing the controllers on the IQ system to which the strategy is to be downloaded. 3 Right-click the site and on the displayed menu click File Transfer. The File Transfer Window is displayed.

4

Add the devices to which strategy is to be downloaded to the Transfer List. This can be done by navigating down the site in the System View to locate the controllers, right-clicking each one, and on the displayed menu clicking Add to Transfer List. Right-clicking a Lan, and on the displayed menu clicking Add to Transfer List will add all the IQ controllers on that Lan to the Transfer List. Alternatively a Transfer List that has been previously saved can be loaded by clicking Load Device List, and selecting the required list from the dialogue box that is displayed.

Controllers can be removed from the Transfer List, by selecting them, and then clicking Remove.

226

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 5

6

Select the controllers in the Transfer List that are to be downloaded to, by holding down the CTRL key and clicking them. To select a range of controllers hold down the SHIFT key and click the first controller in the range, and then the last controller in the range. Clicking Select All will highlight all the devices in the list, and clicking Unselect All deselects all the devices. If any of the controllers that are to be downloaded to have security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers in the User Name box enter the required username, and in the Password box enter the password, see the ‘Change the Username and Password’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. For earlier controllers, in the Pin box enter the PIN, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual.

Note that only one password, or PIN is sent therefore, if the controllers have different passwords or PINs the download will fail. 7

If downloading IQF files to IQ2 controllers earlier than v2 select the Use IQF for IQ2v1 check box. This will cause SET to use IQF files instead of IQ2 files.

Note that by default SET uses LDF files for IQ2 controllers earlier than v2. 8

If downloading only to IQ3 controllers connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box.

If this box is not selected and there are IQ3 controllers connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be downloaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Downloads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. Note that it is not possible to download backdrops, language files, and XNC files using the current loop therefore when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. 9 10

If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is downloaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are downloaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being downloaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 11

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 12

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 13 14

Select Display Download Dir. Check that the strategy files that are to be downloaded are in the File Transfer Directory List. If the not appear in the list check the download is correctly specified in the Download Dir box. To change the

15

next to the Download Dir box as described in the ‘Change the Download download directory click Directory’ section of this manual. Click Unselect to ensure that a file is NOT selected in File Transfer Directory List.

16

Click

. The progress of the download is displayed on the right of the window.

The results of the download are displayed in the Results box; any controllers for which the download failed will be highlighted in the Transfer List making it easy to retry by clicking 17

Click

.

to close the File Transfer Window.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

227

Browsing the IQ System 13.10.3 Download to a Single Controller It is possible to download the strategy (IQ3, IQF, or LDF file) to a particular IQ controller. To download to a single controller: 1 Create the file that is to be downloaded as described in the SET Manual. 2 View the site containing the controller on the IQ System to which the strategy is to be downloaded. 3 Right-click the controller and on the displayed menu click Send IQ3 File to Device, Send IQF to Device or Send LDF to Device depending which file format is required. The IQ3 File Download IQF Download, or LDF Download dialogue box is displayed depending on the selected option.

4

5

6

The download file is automatically determined by the address of the controller. To specify a different file click and navigate to the required file as described in the ‘Specify the File that is Downloaded’ section of this manual. If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the download. For IQ3 controllers in the User Name box enter the required username, and in the Password box enter the password, see the ‘Change the Username and Password’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. For earlier controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. If downloading to an IQ3 controller connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box.

If this box is not selected and the IQ3 controller is connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be downloaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Downloads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. Note that it is not possible to download backdrops, language files, and XNC files using the current loop therefore when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. 7 8

If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is downloaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If downloading to IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are downloaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being downloaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 9

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 10

If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File(s) check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop. 11 12

Specify whether the window is to be closed when the download is complete by selecting the Close this dialogue box when download completes check box. Click Start to begin the download. If the Start button is greyed out, the specified file does not exit, and a different file must be specified as described in the ‘Specify the File that is Downloaded’ section of this manual before the download can take place.

If the download fails, or is stopped, the Start button will change to Retry, clicking Retry; will attempt the download again.

228

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 13.10.4 Upload from a Single Controller It is possible to upload the strategy data file from a particular IQ controller in IQ3, IQF, or SCN format. To upload from a single controller: 1 View the site containing the controller on the IQ System from which the strategy is to be uploaded. 2 Right-click the device and on the displayed menu click Get IQ3 File from Device, Get IQF from Device or Get SCN from Device depending which file format is required. The IQ3 File Upload, IQF Upload, or SCN Upload dialogue box is displayed depending on the selected option.

3

Ensure that the location and filename of the uploaded file is correct. This is indicated in the text box. The default location and filename is determined by the address of the controller. If required a different filename , and can be specified by editing the text in the box, and a different directory specified by clicking navigating the required directory as described in the ‘Change the Upload Directory’ section of this manual. The location defaults to the Download directory for the current project, and the filename defaults to: Ln.zzz>

Where specifies the Lan number of the controller. specifies the network address of the controller. indicates the file format (IQ3, IQF, or SCN), e.g. L099n020.IQ3 would be the file name given to the file uploaded from controller 20 on Lan 99. Note that if uploading from IQ3 controllers the uploaded file will contain the IP address and Lan and outstation numbers. 4

5

If the controller has security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the upload. For IQ3 controllers in the User Name box enter the required username, and in the Password box enter the password, see the ‘Change the Username and Password’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. For earlier controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. If uploading from an IQ3 controller connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>).

If this box is not selected and the IQ3 controller is connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be uploaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Uploads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. Note that it is not possible to upload backdrops, language files, and XNC files using the current loop therefore when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. 6 7

If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is uploaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are uploaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being uploaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 8

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are uploaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be uploaded using the current loop.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

229

Browsing the IQ System 9

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be uploaded by selecting the XNC File(s) check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be uploaded using the current loop. 10 11

Specify whether the window is to be closed when the upload is complete by selecting the Close this dialogue box when upload completes check box. Click Start to begin the upload. Clicking Stop will stop the upload.

If the upload fails, or is stopped, the Start button will change to Retry, clicking Retry; will attempt the upload again. 13.10.5 Upload from Multiple Controllers It is possible to upload strategy from more than one IQ controller over the network, in IQ3, IQF, IQ2, or SCN format. To prevent overloading the network, a maximum of four controllers can be uploaded from at one time; once the upload from one is complete, the upload from the next device will be started. The upload will generate a single strategy file for each controller from which strategy is uploaded. These files are stored in the upload directory, and named according to the following convention. Ln.zzz> Where specifies the Lan number of the controller. specifies the network address of the controller. indicates the file format (IQ3, IQF, or SCN), e.g. L099n020.IQ3 would be the file name given to the file uploaded from controller 20 on Lan 99. Note that if uploading from IQ3 controllers the uploaded file will contain the IP address and Lan and outstation numbers. To upload strategy from multiple controllers: 1 View the site containing the controllers on the IQ System to which strategy is to be uploaded. 2 Right-click the site and on the displayed menu click File Transfer. The File Transfer Window is displayed.

3

Specify the directory in which the uploaded files are to be stored as described in the ‘Change the Upload Directory’ section of this manual. The download directory defaults to the Download directory for the current project.

The contents of the upload directory can be viewed by selecting Display Upload Dir. 4

Add the devices from which strategy is to be uploaded to the Transfer List. This can be done by navigating down the site to locate the controllers, right-clicking each one, and on the displayed menu clicking Add to Transfer List. Right-clicking a Lan, and on the displayed menu click Add to Transfer List will add all the IQ controllers on that Lan to the Transfer List. Alternatively a Transfer List that has been previously saved can be loaded by clicking Load Device List, and selecting the required list from the dialogue box that is displayed. See the ‘Set up the Transfer List’ section of this manual.

Devices can be removed from the Transfer List, by selecting them, and then clicking Remove.

230

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Browsing the IQ System 5

6

Select the devices in the Transfer List from which strategy is to be uploaded to, by holding down the CTRL key and clicking them. To select a range of controllers hold down the SHIFT key and click the first controller in the range, and then the last controller in the range. Clicking Select All will highlight all the devices in the list, and clicking Unselect All deselects all the devices. If any of the controllers have security enabled it is necessary to specify the password that will authorise the upload. For IQ3 controllers in the User Name box enter the required username, and in the Password box enter the password, see the ‘Change the Username and Password’ section of this manual. For IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater a PIN must also be entered in the Pin box, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual. For earlier controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN, see the ‘Change the PIN’ section of this manual.

Note that only one password, or PIN is sent therefore if the controllers have different passwords, or PINs the upload will fail. 7

To upload IQF files from IQ2 controllers earlier than v2 instead of LDF files, select the Use IQF for IQ2v1 check box. This will cause SET to use IQF files instead of IQ2 files.

Note that by default SET uses LDF files for IQ2 controllers earlier than v2. 8

If uploading only from IQ3 controllers connected to the IQ network using the current loop select the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box.

If this box is not selected and there are IQ3 controllers connected to the current loop SET will attempt to make the connection using Ethernet, and then using the current loop, but only the IQ3 file will be uploaded even if the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are selected. Uploads to IQ3 controllers connected using Ethernet will include all the specified file types. Note that it is not possible to upload backdrops, language files, and XNC files using the current loop therefore when the Use IQ Lan (IQ3 v1.3>) check box is selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File boxes are greyed out. 9 10

If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the strategy file (IQ3 file) is uploaded by selecting the IQ3 File check box. If uploading from IQ3 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the IQ3’s Graphical Display Pages are uploaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.

Note that backdrop files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being uploaded, the total size used by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb. 11

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files used for the display of web pages and alarms are uploaded by selecting the Language Files check box.

Note that language files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. 12

If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have the XNC functionality enabled specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be uploaded by selecting the XNC File check box.

Note that the XNC file cannot be uploaded using the current loop.

13

. The progress of the upload is displayed on the right of the window. Clicking Click stop the upload.

will

The results of the upload are displayed in the Results box; any controllers for which the download failed will be highlighted in the Transfer List making it easy to retry by clicking 14

Click

.

to close the File Transfer Window.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

231

Browsing the IQ System

This page is intentionally left blank.

232

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules APPENDICIES A1

APPENDIX 1 IQ2 MODULES

This section describes in detail all of the configuration parameters for each IQ2 module. For further information, see the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533). Address Modules Alarm Group Modules Autodial Modules Critical Alarm Modules Display Modules Function Modules Input Modules Loop Modules OSS Modules Plot Modules Schedule Modules Store Modules User Modules

Alarm Destination Modules Alarm Route Modules Comport Modules Directory Modules Driver Modules IC Comms Modules Logic Modules Modem Modules Page Modules Record Modules Sensor Type Modules Time Modules Zone Modules

Throughout this section module parameters will be referenced by their letter, e.g. the E parameter would be referenced as E. The value of a module’s parameter is referenced by the parameter letter in brackets e.g. (E) refers to the actual value of the E parameter. For each module the module identifier is listed which should be used when accessing the module with text comms. There is also a description of how the module works and a table listing all the parameters associated with it, and a description of each parameter. The Type column of the tables in this section indicates how the parameter is defined. Text Const

Input Output Read Only

Description The parameter is defined in the relevant module parameters dialogue box by entering the required value, selecting from a list, checking the required option, or clicking a button. The destination (output) of modules, and driver channels is specified by right-clicking the module and on the displayed menu clicking Change Destination, or Change Channel. The value of the parameter is read from the module parameter to which it is linked. The value of the parameter is calculated by the module. The value is set in the controller, or generated by it and cannot be changed.

The ID column defines the identifier for the module parameter (parameter identifier) that should be used when accessing the parameter with text comms.

A1.1

IQ2 Address Module

Module Identifier

R

The address module stores all the addressing information and product specific non-network information (e.g. serial number). It has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Address

Display Language

F Attribute G Attribute

Description The network address of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. If set to 0, alarms are not sent. If set to 2, alarms are sent to a device that is directly connected to the controller. The language used by the controller, and the language in which text alarms are sent. This parameter is also used by the NDP to determine the language used for prompts. Range = English, Spanish, Finnish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, German, Italian, Portuguese and French. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID A

Const.

P

Const

F

Const

G

233

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter General Alarm Group H Attribute I Attribute Identifier Identity J Attribute K Attribute Loader Issue Local Address NDP Port Address

Own Lan Pin of the Day

Remote Lan Serial Number Supervisor Port Address

Text

234

Description The Alarm Group module to which general alarms from the controller are sent. Default = group 0. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. 15-character label for the module. The controller type, prom issue, and date. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 10-character label for the controller, which identifies the controller uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Displays the date and issue of the download kernel that is in the controller. The network address of the controller. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. The network address of the device (usually an NDP) connected to the IQ network using the controller’s NDP port. Not available on all controller types. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. If set to 0 the device connected using the NDP port will only be able to communicate with the local controller. The Lan number of the controller Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. Enables the Pin of the Day functionality to be enabled/disabled. Note this feature should be used with caution should the PIN be forgotten and Pin of the day has been disabled there is no way to unlock the controller. The Lan number of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 0 = local Lan. The serial number on the controller’s main board. The network address of the device (usually a supervisor or tool) connected to the IQ network using the controller’s supervisor port. Not available on all controller types. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. If set to 0 the device connected using the supervisor port will only be able to communicate with the local controller. If set to 120 the port will be disabled. Specifies whether the IQ controller is to transmit alarms in text or coded format. Selected = text, cleared = coded. Default = text.

Type Const

ID g

Const

H

Const

I

Const Read Only Const

D C J

Const

K

Read Only

c

Const

L

Const

O

Const

N

Const

-

Const

R

Read Only Const

s U

Const

T

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.2

IQ2 Alarm Destination Modules

Module Identifier

e

Alarm Destination modules define the destinations to which alarms can be sent. They specify the address on the IQ network to which the alarms are to be sent; the format in which the alarm is sent, and can determine when the alarms are sent. When an alarm is submitted for delivery the module will compare the priority of the alarm with the hold priority and if the alarm’s priority level is greater than the value of the hold priority, the alarm will be sent. If the alarm is not sent, it will be stored until the priority of the alarm is higher than the hold priority. If an alarm is sent, then any other alarms being held for that destination will also be sent. This allows calls to autodialled destinations to be limited to times when a high priority alarm is to be sent. The hold priority may be changed according to a time schedule in order to ensure that all low priority alarms are sent every day (e.g. during time of low call charges) in the event that a high priority alarm is not generated. Each alarm destination module has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Address Details Failed Hold Priority

Inhibit Clear Alarm Interval Label Message Format Page Remote Lan Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

A1.3

Description The network address of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. Additional information about the module. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The digital node that the module sets when it is unable to reach the specified destination. The priority level below which alarms are held. If an alarm is received above this level it, and all alarms will be sent. The destination will stay open to low priority alarms for 5 seconds after the last alarm is sent. Range = 0 to 255. Specifies whether the destination will send clear alarms. The time in minutes between attempts to send the message. It should be set to 0 for autodialling to allow continual retries. Range 0 to 32767. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The format of the alarm message. Range = Text, Coded, or Attribute. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The Lan number of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. (0 = local Lan.) The alarm route module(s) from which the destination accepts alarm. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Input

F

Input

H

Const Const

L I

Const Const

$ M

Const Const

p N

Input Const Const

S x y

IQ2 Alarm Group Modules

Module Identifier

g

Alarm Group modules are used to group together alarms that are to be handled in the same way. The module generating the alarm knows to which alarm group the alarm belongs. All alarms for a group are assigned a priority that is used by the alarm destination modules to determine when they will be transmitted. Each alarm group module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label New Alarm

Output Page

Description Additional information about the group. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Indicates whether an alarm assigned to that module has occurred. The value is set to 1 for a single cycle of the sequence table when an allocated to the group occurs after that it is reset to 0. If alarms are occurring faster than once per sequence cycle, the value will be set to 1 until one sequence cycle after the last alarm occurred. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The alarm route modules used to route alarms in the group. Specifies the strategy page containing the module.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID -

Const Output

$ N

Input Const

D p

235

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Priority X Coordinate Y Coordinate

A1.4

Description The priority of the alarm messages in the group. Range = 0 to 255. 0 is the lowest priority. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID P

Const

x

Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Const

y

IQ2 Alarm Route Modules

Module Identifier

o

Alarm Route modules are used to specify to which destination alarms in a particular group are sent. The route will pass the alarm onto the alarm destination providing the enable bit is set. If the enable bit is not set, the alarms will be stored in the alarm log, but will not be sent. Each alarm route module has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Destination Alarm Group Enable Input

Description The alarm destination modules to which the module will send alarms providing the enable input is set. The alarm group module(s) for which it is to route alarms. The digital node for which the value that the enables/disables the route is read. When set to 0 the route is disabled, when set to 1 the route is enabled. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Label Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

A1.5

Type Output

ID D

Input Input

G E

Const Const Const Const

$ p x y

IQ2 Autodial Modules

Module Identifier

a

Autodial modules are only available on controllers with ADL support. Each autodial module has the following parameters: Parameter Auto-dial password

Description 4-digit PIN used for validation of connections using the modem. Setting this to zero disables password checking. The telephone number of the controller. This telephone number is passed to the remote TMN and can be used by a supervisor for group identification (e.g. alarm recognition and acknowledgement). The number can be up to 29-characters

Devices own telephone number

A1.6

Type Const

ID A

Const

T

IQ2 Comport Modules

Module Identifier

c

Comport modules are only available on controllers with XNC support. They are used on controllers with XNC support to define the setup of serial ports used to communicate with the 3rd party system, and Trend ports used to enable the TCL part to communicate directly over the IQ network. Each comport module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Port Type

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The type of port the module is defining. Range = Serial, or Trend Lan.

Type Const Const

ID $ Y

The other parameters vary depending on the port type that has been selected. If a serial port has been specified the following parameters need to be defined. Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits

236

Description The baud rate of the port. Range = 300 baud, 600 baud, 1200 baud, 2400 baud, 4800 baud, 9600 baud, or 19200 baud The required number of data bits. Range = 7 or 8

Type Const

ID B

Const

D

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Parity Port Number Rx Termination Stop Bits Time out

Description The parity that is to be used. Range = Odd, or Even The number of the com port being used The RX terminator character. Range = 0 to 255 The required number of stop bits. Range = 1, or 2 The time out in milliseconds. Range 0 to 32767

Type Const

ID P

Const Const

N R

Const

S

Const

T

Type Const

ID D

Const

L

Const

A

Const

P

If a Trend port has been specified the following parameters: Parameter Destination Address Destination Lan Own Address Tx Protocol

A1.7

Description The network address to which the next message will be sent. Range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. The Lan number of the device to which the next message will be sent. Range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. The IQ network address of the port. Range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. The protocol used for transmission.

IQ2 Critical Alarm Modules

Module Identifier

M

Critical alarm modules are used to generate user-defined alarm messages. A critical alarm is a configurable text message that can be received and printed by a remote printer in addition to the supervisor. Alarm conditions anywhere in the controller may generate the critical alarm by using the appropriate strategy. The purpose of critical alarms is to provide an alarm message for the operator to report the occurrence of selected controller functions or HVAC equipment failure. The transmission of critical alarms takes priority over normal alarms. Each critical alarm module has the following parameters: Parameter Acknowledge Alarm Data Destination Page Remote LAN Text X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

A1.8

Description The last acknowledged states from alarm handling devices. The left most bit indicates the state of the alarm supervisor, and the right most bit indicates the state from the alarm destination. The state of the critical alarm byte. It shows the status of each bit in the byte. The network address of the device (usually a supervisor) to which the alarm messages are to be sent. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. (0 = Communication is disabled). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The Lan number of the device to which alarms are sent. Range 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. (0 = ANC+ on local Lan). The text of the alarm message. It can be up to 47-characters long. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Read Only

ID K

Read Only Const

M D

Const Const

p N

Const Const Const

T x y

IQ2 Directory Modules

Module Identifier

@

Directory modules provide the hierarchy to enable the user to select the HVAC equipment units and items they want to see. Each module has a parent parameter, which refers to the directory module that precedes it in the hierarchy. Directory module 1 is always the root of the structure (and its parent should be set to 1, as parent = 0 is taken to mean the module is not set up). When a PIN level is set, the user will need to be logged on at that PIN level or higher to have access to the directory. Each directory module has the following parameters: Parameter Label

Parent PIN Level

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that the length of the label does not exceed 12-characters. The number of the directory module that is above this module in the hierarchy. The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. Range = 0 to 99

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID $

Const Const

R P

237

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.9

IQ2 Display Modules

Module Identifier

~

Display modules enable items to be included in the views. Each display module has a parent parameter, which is the directory module to which it is attached. Each display module has the following parameters: Parameter Item Parent PIN Level

Description The module parameter that is to be displayed. The number of the Directory module that is above this module in the hierarchy. The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. Range = 0 to 99

Type Const Const

ID I R

Const

P

A1.10 IQ2 Driver Modules Driver modules are used to drive HVAC equipment using output channels. They can be sourced from control loops to provide a closed loop system, or can have fixed input levels to provide load cycling or timed switch ON/OFF. Analogue Driver Modules Digital Driver Modules Raise/Lower End Driver Modules Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules

Binary Switch Driver Modules Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules Time Proportional Driver Modules

A1.10.1 IQ2 Analogue Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The analogue driver module provides an analogue signal in the range 0 to 10 Vdc, or 0 to 20 mA depending on the hardware. It calculates the value of its output (L) by taking the value of the input S, limiting it to 0 to 100, and then applying offset and range values if specified. Each analogue driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details In phase Channel Inverted Label Maintenance Int Alarm Group Maintenance Int Enable Maintenance Interval Alarm Offset Page Range

Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm

238

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in. Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). The percentage of the output signal level (0 to 10 Vdc, or 0 to 20 mA) that corresponds to 0% input. Range = 0 to 100. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The linear range of the actuator. It allows the driver to drive actuators where the linear range of the actuator corresponds to an output signal of less than 0 to 10 volts, or 0 to 20 mA. It sets a percentage of this range to which the 0 to 100 input range will correspond. Range = 0 to 100 (10 = 100 Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm).

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const

$ m

Const

E1

Output

-

Const

O

Const Const

p R

Const

r

Output

-

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The analogue node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Input Const

ID E0 S T

Const Const

x y

A1.10.2 IQ2 Binary Switch Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The binary switch driver module provides an ON/OFF type output from an analogue input. It has an analogue input S and provides a single digital output L with an optional antiphase output A. The state of L is calculated by comparing the value of S with the ON and OFF switching levels. If (S) goes above the ON switching level, L will be set to 1, and if it is below the OFF switching level, L will be set to 0. If an antiphase output is used the state of A will always be opposite to the state of L. Each binary switch driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Int Alarm Group Maintenance Int Enable Maintenance Interval Alarm Off Level On Level Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const

$ m

Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). The value the input must fall below before the driver’s output is switched off. Range = 0 to 99 The value the input must rise above before the driver’s output is switched on. Range = 0 to 99 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in

Const

E1

Output

-

Const

F

Const

O

Const Const

p r

The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The analogue node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Output

-

Const Input

E0 S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

239

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.10.3 IQ2 Digital Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The digital driver module provides an ON/OFF type output controlled by the state of a digital bit. It has a single digital source S and provides a single digital output L with an optional antiphase output A. The state of L is determined directly by the state of S; if used, the state of A is always opposite to (L). Each digital driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Int Alarm Group Maintenance Int Enable Maintenance Interval Alarm Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in.

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Const

L

Const Const Const

I $ m

Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled.

Const

E1

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in.

Output

-

Const Const

p r

Output

-

Const Input

E0 S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

A1.10.4 IQ2 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The raise/lower continuous driver is designed to drive a split phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors with built-in positioning, limit switches, or clutches. It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to accept a feedback-input F. When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position, the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V causing the associated relay module to lower for a period. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V.

240

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback-input. If the feedback-input F is set to 0, the position of the valve is estimated by using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50% open, because the value has been driven open for half the full-scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by driving continuously in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback-input is used, the position of the valve will be known exactly. The module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error. Each raise/lower continuous driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details Feedback Address Fs Drive In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Alarm Status

Int Int Int

Maintenance Int Enable Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Readback Status

Alarm

Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s feedback input is read. The time (in seconds) taken for the actuator to move from one end stop to the other. Range = 1 to 32767 The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Input

F

Const

D

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const/Input

$ -

Const

m

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in

Output

-

Const

E1

Const Const

p r

The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Const/Input

-

Output

-

Const Input

E0 S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

241

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.10.5 IQ2 Raise/Lower End Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The raise/lower end driver is designed to drive a split-phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors without any built-in positioning or where there are no built-in limit switches, or clutches. It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to accept a feedback-input F. When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position, the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V causing the associated relay module to lower for a period. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V. The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback input. If the feedback-input (F) is set to 0, the position of the valve is estimated using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50% open because the value has been driven open for half the full scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by additionally driving for the full-scale drive time in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback input is used the position of the valve will be known exactly. The module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error. Each raise/lower end driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details Feedback Address Fs Drive In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Alarm Status

Int Int Int

Maintenance Int Enable Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm

242

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s feedback input is read. The time (in seconds) taken for the actuator to move from one end stop to the other. Range = 1 to 32767 The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in.

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Input

F

Const

D

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const/Input

$ -

Const

m

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in

Output

-

Const

E1

Const Const

p r

The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm)

Const/Input

-

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Readback Status

Alarm

Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID -

Const Input

E0 S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

A1.10.6 IQ2 Time Proportional Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The time proportional driver provides an output whose mark-space ratio is dependent on the input level. It has an analogue source S and provides a single digital output L with an antiphase output A. The state of L is determined by the value of S, and the period time. If (S) is greater than 0, (L) will be set to 1 for a length of time. This length of time is calculated as a percentage of the period time determined by the value of S. (A) will always be the opposite of (L). Each time proportional driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Alarm Status

Int Int Int

Maintenance Enable Page Period

Int

Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Readback Status

Alarm

Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const/Input

$ -

Const

m

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The length time (in seconds) for which the output is on when the source of the module is at 100%. Range = 0 to 3825 Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in.

Output

-

Const

E1

Const Const

p P

Const

r

Const/Input

-

Output

-

Const Input Const

E0 S T

Const

x

Const

y

The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

243

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.10.7 IQ2 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules Module Identifier

D

The time proportional + override driver module is designed to operate a raise/lower relay module using an analogue output channel. Its output L can have one of 3 values 10 V, 7 V, or 4 V. The output (L) is set to 10 V when the override-input (O) is set to 1; otherwise the output is time-proportioned between 4 V (ON) and 7 V (OFF). It also has an antiphase output A, which is not normally used, but is OFF when the value (L) is ON, and ON when the value of output (L) is OFF. Each time proportional + o/r driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Details In phase Channel Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Alarm Status

Int Int Int

Maintenance Enable Override

Int

Page Period Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Readback Status

Alarm

Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

244

Description The antiphase output channel of the driver (if used). If set to 0 the output is disabled. Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The output channel to be used by the driver. It is set to the standard by default, and should not normally need to be changed. If set to 0 the output is disabled. Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in.

Type Const

ID A

Const

-

Const

L

Const

I

Const Const/Input

$ -

Const

m

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s override input is read. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The length time (in seconds) for which the output is on when the source of the module is at 100%. Range = 0 to 3825 Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in

Output

-

Const

E1

Input

O

Const Const

p P

Const

r

The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm). Enables/Disables readback alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. The digital node from which the value of the driver’s input is read. The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Const/Input

-

Output

-

Const Input

E0 S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.11 IQ2 Function Modules Function modules allow mathematical calculations to be performed on a number of variables. ABS Function Modules Adder/Scaler Function Modules Average Function Modules Divide Function Modules Filter Function Modules Hysteresis Band Function Modules Limit at Function Modules Log Function Modules Maximum Function Modules Multiply Function Modules Proximity Function Modules Rescale to Function Modules TRIG Function Modules

Add Function Modules Analogue to Digital Function Modules Comparator Function Modules Enthalpy Function Modules Gate Function Modules Hysteresis Limits Function Module Limit to Function Modules Lookup Function Modules Minimum Function Modules Power Function Modules Rescale from Function Modules Square Root Function Modules TRUNC Function Modules

A1.11.1 IQ2 ABS Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The ABS function module calculates its output (D) by converting the input (G) to a positive value. If (G) is already positive, no change is made. Each ABS function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Input

ID G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

Note that in configuration mode the abs function module is known as the absolute function module. A1.11.2 IQ2 Add Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The add function module calculates its output (D) as the sum of four values (E), (F), (G), and (H). The module uses the following formula: (D)= (E) + (F) + (G) + (H) Each add function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the value of (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Either specifies the value of (F) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be linked to node 0. Specifies the node from which the value of (H) in the calculation is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be linked to node 0. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Input

H

Const Const Const Const

$ D p x

Const

y

Note that in configuration mode the add function module is known as the adder function module. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

245

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.11.3 IQ2 Adder/Scaler Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The adder/scaler function module calculates the output (D) as the sum of two inputs (G and H) or the ratio of the two signals according to the formula: (D) = ((E) x (G)) + ((F) x (H)) Each adder/scaler function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E

Input F Input G Input H Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the value of (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0 or 1 as appropriate. Either specifies the value of (F) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0 or 1 as appropriate. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. Specifies the node from which the value of (H) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Input

H

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.11.4 IQ2 Analogue to Digital Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The analogue to digital function module calculates its output (D) by converting the value of its analogue input (G) to a binary value. The alarm byte associated with the output D will contain the binary representation of (D). Note the value of (D) is limited the range 0 to 255, and is rounded to the nearest integer. Each analogue to digital function module has the following parameters: Parameter 0 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output Input G

246

Description The output (0) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (1) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (2) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (3) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (4) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (5) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (6) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (7) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the node whose value (G) is to be converted to digital format.

Type Output

ID -

Output

b

Output

-

Output

-

Output

-

Output

-

Output

-

Output

-

Input

G

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Label ,0 Label ,1 Label ,2 Label ,3 Label ,4 Label ,5 Label ,6 Label ,7 Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output 0. 20-character label for output 1. 20-character label for output 2. 20-character label for output 3. 20-character label for output 4. 20-character label for output 5. 20-character label for output 6. 20-character label for output 7. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const

ID $ D p x y

Note that the parameters Label, 1, Label, 2, Label, 3, Label, 4, Label, 5, Label, 6, Label, 7 are not stored in the controller they are only used by SET. A1.11.5 IQ2 Average Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The average function module calculates its output (D) as the average value of two, three, or four inputs (E), (F), (G), and (H). Each average function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the value of (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Either specifies the value of (F) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be linked to node 0. Specifies the node from which the value of (H) in the calculation is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be linked to node 0. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Input

H

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.11.6 IQ2 Comparator Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The comparator function module calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and F). When (F)>(E), (D)=1, and when (F)=(E), (D)=100, when (G) (E)-(F) or < (E) +(F). It is used to see if (E) and (G) are approximately equal. Each proximity function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate 252

Description Either specifies the value (E) with which the value (G) is compared in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. Either specifies the value (F) of the maximum difference in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Specifies the node from which the value (G) that is to be compared with (E) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.11.22 IQ2 Rescale from Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The rescale from function module calculates its output (D) by rescaling input (G) that can be between 0 and 100 to a range between a lower limit (E), and an upper limit (F). Note that if the value of (G) is outside the range 0 to 100, it will be limited at these values. Each rescale from function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the lower limit (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. Either specifies the upper limit (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.11.23 IQ2 Rescale to Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The rescale to function module rescales an input (G) that can vary between a lower value (E), and an upper value (F) to the output (D) that is limited to a percentage value between 0 and 100. Each rescale to function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the lower value of (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. Either specifies the upper value of (F) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Input

G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.11.24 IQ2 Square Root Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The square root function module calculates its output (D) as the square root of the input (G) multiplied by a value (E). Each square root function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Either specifies the value of (E) in the calculation, or the node from which the value is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 1. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID E

Input

G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

253

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.11.25 IQ2 TRIG Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The TRIG function module calculates the sin, cosine, or tangent of the input (G) in degrees, or radians. Each TRIG function module has the following parameters: Parameter Angle Type Input G Label Output Page Sub Type X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies whether the input (G) to the calculation is in degrees, or radians. Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies whether the module calculates the sin, cosine, or tangent of the input (G). Default = sin Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID R

Input

G

Const Const Const Const

$ D p E

Const Const

x y

Note that in configuration mode the TRIG function module is known as the trigonometric function module. A1.11.26 IQ2 TRUNC Function Modules Module Identifier

F

The TRUNC function module takes the value of its input (G), removes any digits after the decimal point and writes it to its output (D), e.g. 23.7654 would become 23. Each TRUNC function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the node from which the value of (G) in the calculation is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Input

ID G

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

Note that in configuration mode the TRUNC function module is known as the truncate function module.

A1.12 IQ2 IC Comms Modules IC Comms modules provide the facility for communication between IQ controllers, where two or more networked controllers are in use. There are several different types to cope with differing requirements. Average IC Comms Modules Data To IC Comms Modules Maximum IC Comms Modules Sum IC Comms Modules

Data From IC Comms Modules Global To IC Comms Modules Minimum IC Comms Modules

A1.12.1 IQ2 Average IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The average IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the average value, and places it in the destination (D). Each average IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Output Page

254

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module.

Type Const Const

ID $ I

Const Const

D p

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) The Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID A

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A1.12.2 IQ2 Data From IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The data from IC comms module obtains the value of a particular node (remote node) from another controller (remote controller) and places it in the destination node in the controller that sent the message. Each data from IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Address Remote Lan Remote Node

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. (0 specifies an interval of 15 seconds) The node in which the module places the value received from the remote controller. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The address of the remote controller. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 100. 0 disables communications. Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. The node, which the IC Comms message will access. This can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. Analogue values range = where is the analogue node. For byte values range where is the byte. For bit values range , where is the byte containing the bit that is to be written, and that is to be written, and is the bit. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s destination. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID I

Const

D

Const Const

p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A1.12.3 IQ2 Data To IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The data to IC comms module sends the value of a particular node (source address (S)) in the controller sending the message and places it in a particular node (remote node) in another controller (remote controller). Each data to IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Page Remote Address

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The address of the remote controller. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 100. 0 disables communications.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const Const

ID I

Const Const

p

255

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Remote Lan Remote Node

Significant Change Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node to which the value is to be written. This can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. Analogue values range = where is the analogue node. For byte values range where is the byte. For bit values range , where is the byte containing the bit that is to be written, and that is to be written, and is the bit. Note that byte values cannot be sent to pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers. The amount the value of the source address is allowed to change before a message is sent. Range -3276 to +3276 The node from which the module obtains the value to send. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID N

Const

R

Const

-

Const Const Const

S x y

A1.12.4 IQ2 Global To IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The global to IC comms module sends the value of a particular node (source address (S)) in the controller sending the message and places it in a particular node (remote node) in all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module. Each global to IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node

Significant Change Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

256

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node to which the value is to be written. This can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. Analogue values range = where is the analogue node. For byte values range where is the byte For bit values range , where is the byte containing the bit that is to be written, and that is to be written, and is the bit. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s source (S). Note that byte values cannot be sent to pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers. The amount the value of the source address is allowed to change before a message is sent. Range -3276 to +3276 The node from which the module obtains the value to send. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID I

Const Const

p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const

-

Const Const Const

S x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.12.5 IQ2 Maximum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The maximum IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the maximum value, and places it in the destination (D). Each maximum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. (0 specifies an interval of 15 seconds) The node to which the module writes its output. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID I

Const Const Const

D p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A1.12.6 IQ2 Minimum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The minimum IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the minimum value, and places it in the destination (D). Each minimum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. (0 specifies an interval of 15 seconds) The node to which the module writes its output. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const Const

ID I

Const Const Const

D p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

257

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.12.7 IQ2 Sum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier

N

The sum IC comms module requests the value a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the sum, and places it in the destination (D). Each sum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 546. (0 specifies an interval of 15 seconds) The node to which the module writes its output. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID I

Const Const Const

D p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A1.13 IQ2 Input Modules Input modules take an input from the outside world, to a point within the controller itself. There are several different types to cope with different types of input devices. Adjustment Knob Modules External Digital Sensor Modules Internal Digital Sensor Modules Knob Modules

Digital Input Modules External Sensor Modules Internal Sensor Modules Switch Modules

A1.13.1 IQ2 Adjustment Knob Modules Module Identifier

K

The adjustment knob module enables the value of a module parameter that can normally only be accessed in configuration mode to be changed (for example the high alarm value of a sensor). The knob is able to adjust the value of the parameter to any value within its normal range as set in the strategy. Each adjustment knob module has the following parameters: Parameter Adjustment Id Bottom of Range Details Label Output Page PIN Level Top of Range

258

Description The parameter that the adjustment knob is to adjust. It can be a maximum of 4-characters long. For example, ‘S1H’ specifies the high alarm for sensor 1 The minimum value of the knob range. Range = -3276.7 to +3276.7 Additional information about the knob. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the knob. The output of the knob. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The PIN level required before the knob can be adjusted. Range 0 to 99 Default = 0 The maximum value of the knob range. Range = -3276.7 to +3276.7

Type Const

ID A

Const

B

Const

-

Const Output

$ -

Const Const

p P

Const

T

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The value of the knob. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID %

Const Const Const

V x y

A1.13.2 IQ2 Digital Input Modules Module Identifier

I

The digital input module takes the status from a real digital device such as a pressure switch, connected to one of the controller's input or an internal digital input, checks the value against the required state, and places its value into a digital node. When adding a digital input, an internal digital input is indicated by a vertical symbol in the selection dialogue box. Each digital input module has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Enabled Delay Details Label Page Required State

Status Group

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Enables/Disables the alarm. Selected = Enabled (1) Range = 0 or 1 The length of time in minutes that the value must be in the wrong state before an alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 2730 Additional information about the input. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the sensor. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status that the input should be. When the input is not in this state, an alarm will be generated. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF =, 1 = ON) The output (S) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Default = 0 Specifies which alarm group the Status alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const

D

Const

-

Const Const Const

$ p R

Output

S

Const

d

Const Const

x y

A1.13.3 IQ2 External Digital Sensor Modules Module Identifier

S

The external digital sensor module is intended for use with universal inputs set to read digital values that require logging. Using this type of sensor ensures that the sensor logging the input is tied to the digital input performing the alarm handling functions (this is explained fully in the IQ2 configuration Reference Manual (90-1533). It takes the reading from a digital device, such as a pressure switch, connected to an input of the controller, and places the result in an analogue node. Each external digital sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label Output Page Units X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the sensor. The output (V) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required module. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const Output

$ V

Const Const

p %

Const Const

x y

Important if using this type of sensor, the corresponding digital input module MUST be added to the strategy.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

259

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.13.4 IQ2 External Sensor Modules Module Identifier

S

The external sensor module takes the reading from a real sensor connected to the analogue input of the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm levels. The sensor type determines how the scaling is performed. The sensor type is a separate module that defines parameters for a particular type of sensor. An offset is used to allow the reading to be adjusted to the actual value. Each external sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details High Alarm Delay High Alarm Enable High Alarm Group

High Alarm Limit Label Low Alarm Delay Low Alarm Enable Low Alarm Group

Low Alarm Limit Offset Outside Limits Alarm Enable Outside Limits Alarm Group Page Read Alarm Enable Read Alarm Group

Type Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

260

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The length of time in minutes that the sensor reading must be above the high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the high alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the high alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. 20-character user-friendly label for the sensor. The length of time in minutes that the sensor reading must be below the low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the low alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the low alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. The amount by which the sensor reading is to be increased, or decreased to make it accurate. Enables/Disables the outside limits alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the outside limits alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Enables/Disables the read alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the Read alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. Default = 1 The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const

D

Const Const

N0 h

Const Const Const

H $ A

Const Const

N1 l

Const Const

L O

Const

N3

Const

o

Const Const Const

p N2 r

Const

Y

Const

%

Output

V

Const Const

x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.13.5 IQ2 Internal Digital Sensor Modules Module Identifier

S

The internal digital sensor module allows a digital node to be monitored. It takes the value of a specified digital node, and puts into an analogue node. This allows digital values to be logged. Each internal digital sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label Page Source Value Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the sensor. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The digital node from which the sensor obtains its value. 0 = OFF, 1 ON. The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const Const Input

$ p S

Const

%

Output

V

Const Const

x y

A1.13.6 IQ2 Internal Sensor Modules Module Identifier

S

The internal sensor module allows an analogue node to be monitored. It takes the reading from an analogue node within the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm levels. Internal sensors have an exponent, and source instead of sensor type, and offset. The source defines the analogue node from which the sensor takes its value. The exponent determines the number of decimal places before the decimal point. Each internal sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Exponent High Alarm Delay High Alarm Enable High Alarm Group

High Alarm Limit Label Low Alarm Delay Low Alarm Enable Low Alarm Group

Low Alarm Limit Outside Limits Alarm Enable Outside Limits Alarm Group Page Read Alarm Enable

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The number of leading digits before the decimal point The length of time in minutes that the sensor reading must be above the high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the high alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the high alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. 20-character user-friendly label for the sensor. The length of time in minutes that the sensor reading must be below the low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the low alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the low alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. Enables/Disables the outside limits alarm. Selected = Enabled Specifies which alarm group the outside limits alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Enables/Disables the read alarm. Selected = Enabled

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID -

Const Const

D

Const Const

N0 h

Const Const Const

H $ A

Const/Input Const

N1 l

Const Const

L N3

Const

o

Const Const

p N2

261

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Read Alarm Group Source Value Type Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies which alarm group the Read alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The node from which the sensor obtains its value. The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. Default = 1 The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID r

Input Const

S Y

Const

%

Output

V

Const Const

x y

A1.13.7 IQ2 Knob Modules Module Identifier

K

The Knob module enables the value of an analogue node to be changed. It has user-defined limits between which its value can be adjusted. Use of the knob can be restricted by using the PIN level to prevent unauthorised adjustments. Each knob module has the following parameters: Parameter Bottom of Range Details Label Output Page PIN Level Top of Range Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The minimum value of the knob. Range = -3276.7 to +3276.7 Additional information about the knob. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the knob. The output of the knob. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The PIN level required before the knob can be adjusted. Range 0 to 99 Default = 0 The maximum value of the knob. Range = -3276.7 to +3276.7 The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The value of the knob. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID B

Const

-

Const Output

$ -

Const Const

p P

Const

T

Const

%

Const Const Const

V x y

A1.13.8 IQ2 Switch Modules Module Identifier

W

The switch module enables the status of a digital node to be changed. Each switch module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label Output Page PIN Level Status X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate 262

Description Additional information about the switch. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. 20-character user-friendly label for the switch. The output (V) of the switch. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The PIN level required before the switch can be adjusted. Range 0 to 99 The input value of the switch. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF, 1 = ON) Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const Output

$ V

Const Const

p P

Const

-

Const Const

x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.14 IQ2 Logic Modules Logic modules allow outputs to be generated as a function of a number of digital values within a control strategy. Combination Logic Modules Delay Logic Modules Fan Out Logic Modules Timer Logic Modules

Counter Logic Modules D to A Logic Modules Hours Run Logic Modules Readback Logic Modules

A1.14.1 IQ2 Combination Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The combination logic module calculates its output (D) (0 or 1) as the logical combination of up to 4 logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). Each logical function is itself a function of 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), and (H) which are AND’ed together ((E) AND (F) AND (G) AND (H)). An AND NOT function can also be achieved by specifying a lower case letter instead of upper case. This allows combinations of AND, and AND NOT functions within each of the logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). The output (D) is the result of all logical functions OR’ed together ((J) OR (K) OR (L) OR (M). Each combination logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Combination J

Combination K

Combination L

Combination M

Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by clicking the boxes for E, F, G or H in the J line of the Logic Combination Parameters dialogue box. Clicking on a box toggles the value between blank, upper case, and lower case letters. Upper case letters indicate the true state, and lower case letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions K, L, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, L, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and L. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (E) is read. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (F) is read. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (G) is read. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (H) is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID J

Const

K

Const

L

Const

M

Input Input Input Input Const Const Const Const Const

E F G H $ D p x y

A1.14.2 IQ2 Counter Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The counter logic module provides the facility for counting pulse type signals such as those provided by gas and electricity meters. It has two outputs rate (R) and cumulative count (M). (M) is the total number of times the input (S) has been set to 1 since the reset input (A) was last set to 1 multiplied by the scaling factor (F). (R) is the change in (M) over the period (T). Each counter logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Cumulative Count Label

Description The analogue node to which the cumulative count value (M) calculated by the module is sent. 20-character user-friendly label for the module.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID M

Const

$ 263

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Page Rate Reschedule Time

Reset Scale Factor Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The analogue node to which the rate (R) calculated by the module is written. Defines the time, in seconds, over which the rate is calculated. Range 0 to 1275 Default = 1 The value must be a multiple of the cycle time. Specifies the digital node used to reset the cumulative count value to zero When set to 1 the cumulative count value will be set to zero. The value of each pulse the module receives. The digital node that is to be counted. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID p R

Const

T

Input

A

Const/ Input Const Const

F S x y

A1.14.3 IQ2 Delay Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The delay logic module is specifically designed for interacting with the alarm reporting mechanism of the strategy allowing a grace time before alarms are reported. It calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and G). If they are different for longer than the grace time, the output (D) will be set to 1. If they are the same, output (D) will be 0. Each delay logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Grace Time

Input E Input G Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The delay (in seconds) on the change of the digital output or readback signals during which comparisons are not made. Range 0 to 32767 Default = 0 Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (E) is read. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (G) is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID T

Input Input Const Const Const Const Const

E G $ D p x y

A1.14.4 IQ2 D to A Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The D to A logic module converts the digital inputs E, F, G, H, I, J, K, and L into a single analogue output D. The value of (D) represents the binary value of the input bits. E specifies 1 when set, F specifies 2 when set, G specifies 4 when set, H specifies 8 when set, I specifies 16 when set, J specifies 32 when set, K specifies 64 when set, and L specifies 128 when set. e.g. with the following inputs (E)=1, (F)=0, (G)=1, (H)=0, (I)=1, (J)=0, (K)=0, (L)=0, output (D) would be 21. The module uses the following formula: D=1x(E) + 2x(F) + 4x(G) + 8x(H) + 16x(I) + 32x(J) + 64x(K) + 128x(L) Each D to A logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Input H Input I Input J Input K

264

Description Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (E) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (F) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (G) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (H) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (I) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (J) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (K) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0.

Type Input

ID E

Input

F

Input

G

Input

H

Input

I

Input

J

Input

K

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Input L Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (L) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked node 0,0. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Input

ID L

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.14.5 IQ2 Fan Out Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The fan out logic module takes its input S and writes the value to its in six outputs (J), (K), (L), (M), (N) and (O). Each fan out logic module has the following parameters: If required the value of the outputs can be set to be the opposite of the input. The module uses the following formula: (J)=(K)=(L)=(M)=(N)=(O)=(S) Each fan out logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Invert Label J Label K Label L Label M Label N Label O Output J Output K Output L Output M Output N Output O Page Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies whether the state of the outputs is the same, or opposite to the state of the input. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output J. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output K. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output L. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output M. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output N. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output O. The digital bit to which the module writes its output (J). The digital bit to which the module writes its output (K). The digital bit to which the module writes its output (L). The digital bit to which the module writes its output (M). The digital bit to which the module writes its output (N). The digital bit to which the module writes its output (O). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The digital node from which the input is read. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID I

Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Input Const Const

$ J K L M N O p S x y

Note that the parameters Label K, Label L, Label M, Label N, Label O are not stored in the controller they are only used by SET. A1.14.6 IQ2 Hours Run Logic Modules Module Identifier G The hours run logic module calculates its output (O) as the length of time in hours for which the source bit (S) has been ON since reset input (A) was last set to 1. It also calculates its other output (N) as 0 or 1 by comparing output (O) with input (I) (which specifies an interval) and if (O)>I sets (N) to 1 (interval exceeded). Each hours run logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Hours Output Interval limit Label Limit Exceeded Output Page Reset Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The analogue node where the cumulative number of hours run calculated by the module (O) is written. Specifies the node from which the maximum number of hours run is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The digital node that is set when the hours run limit is exceeded. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies digital node used to reset the count of hours and alarm condition. When set to 1 the count of hours and alarm condition will be set to zero. The digital node being timed. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID O

Input Const Const

I $ N

Const Input

p A

Input Const Const

S x y

265

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.14.7 IQ2 Readback Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The readback logic module calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two input signals (E) and (G). If the value of (E) and (G) differ for longer than the grace time, the output (D) is set to 1. It will be set back to 0 again when (E) and (G) remain the same for longer than the grace time. Two other inputs (F and H) can also be used in the comparison. The module uses the following formula to calculate its output: D=E and NOT G OR G and NOT E OR F and NOT H OR H and NOT F Each readback logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Grace Time Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The length of time in seconds after the input changes that comparisons are not made. Range 0 to 32767 Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (E) is read. If this parameter is not used it should be sourced from bit 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (F) is read. If this parameter is not used it should be sourced from bit 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (G) is read. If this parameter is not used it should be sourced from bit 0,0. Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (H) is read. If this parameter is not used it should be sourced from bit 0,0. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The digital node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID T

Input

E

Input

F

Input

G

Input

H

Const Const Const Const Const

$ D p x y

A1.14.8 IQ2 Timer Logic Modules Module Identifier

G

The timer logic module calculates its output (D) according to the state of its input (S) and the ON delay (N), minimum ON time (M), and OFF delay (F). If the input (S) is set to 1 the output (D) will not change to 1 until the ON delay time has passed. It will then remain as 1 for at least the length of time specified by the minimum ON time. When the input (S) changes to 0 the output (D) will only be set to 0 providing the minimum ON time has passed. If an OFF delay is set, the output will stay ON until the OFF delay has passed. Each timer logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Minimum On Off Delay On Delay Output Page Source Address X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

266

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The minimum time in seconds that the output of a timer module is ON. Range = 0 to 32767 The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is OFF before the output is turned OFF. Range 0 to 32767 The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is ON before the output is turned ON. Range 0 to 32767 The digital node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the digital node being timed. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID $ M

Const

F

Const

N

Const Const Input Const Const

D p S x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.15 IQ2 Loop Modules Module Identifier

L

Loop modules perform the mathematical calculations that determine the value of output (D) based on present, and past values of measured variables. The loop module compares the measured value (P) with the current setpoint. The difference between (P) and the current setpoint is the error. The loop will now calculate the value of output (D) to reduce the error. The choice of setpoint is dependent on the value of the setpoint select bit (S). If set to 1 the occupied setpoint (O) is used, if set to 0 the unoccupied setpoint (U) is used. If the manual select bit (A) is set to 1 the loop will use the manual level (L) as the current output level, if set to 0 the calculated value will be used for the output. Each loop module has the following parameters: Parameter Default Value Derivative Time Fail Action

Gain Integral Time Label Manual Address Manual Level Occupation Setpoint Output Page Process Variable PV Fail Alarm Enable PV Fail Alarm Group

Reschedule Time Setpoint Dev Alarm Enable Setpoint Dev Alarm Group

Setpoint Dev Level Setpoint Select Unoccupied Setpoint X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The value to which the loop will control if the process variable fails, and the fail action is set to use the default level. The loop’s derivative time in minutes. The action that is taken when the process variable for a loop is invalid. Range = 0 to 4 (0 = default PV, 1 - default OP, 2 - stay in default OP, 3 - freeze output, 4 - no action) Defines the way the loop responds to changes in the process variable. The integral time in minutes for the loop. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the digital node that determines whether manual override is imposed on the loop. 0 = normal, 1 = override. The analogue node from which the loop’s setpoint during manual override is read. The analogue node from which the loop’s setpoint during occupation is read. The analogue node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the analogue node supplying the input to the loop. Specifies whether the process variable fail alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 Specifies in seconds, how often the loop calculates its output. If set to 0 the loop is disabled. Specifies whether the setpoint deviation alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Specifies which alarm group the Setpoint Dev alarm is in. This parameter does not apply to controllers with firmware earlier than version 3.0. Default = 0 The maximum loop error value that can be reached before a deviation alarm is generated. The digital node that determines whether manual override is imposed on the loop. The analogue node from which the loop’s setpoint during nonoccupation is read. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID E

Const Const

T F

Const

G

Const Const Input

I $ A

Input

L

Input

O

Const Const Input Const

D p P E1

Const

f

Const

R

Const

E0

Const

s

Const

V

Input

I

Input

U

Const

x

Const

y

267

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.16 IQ2 Modem Modules Module Identifier

m

Modem modules are only available on controllers with ADL support. They are used to configure the modem connected to the controller. Each autodial module has the following parameters: Parameter Modem Initialise 1

Description The string that is sent to the modem whenever it is reinitialised. This can be up to 24-characters long. Default = ATH&F (should not normally be changed) The string that is sent to the modem after the Modem Initialise 1 string. This can be up to 24-characters long Default = ATS0=1 (should not normally be changed) The string sent to the modem that causes a version response. It can be up to 16-characters long. Default = ATI3 (should not normally be changed)

Modem Initialise 2 Version Request

Type Const

ID M

Const

D

Const

V

A1.17 IQ2 OSS Modules Module Identifier

O

Each time zone has an OSS module and a set of occupation times associated with it. The OSS module can be applied to heating and/or cooling. It provides a self-adaptive routine that learns the characteristics of the building by monitoring and comparing the outside air temperature against the inside air temperature, and the heating/cooling medium temperature. The OSS module then calculates the time that the heating/cooling should be switched on before the occupation of the building to achieve the desired temperature by the start of occupation (the optimum start time). It also calculates when the heating/cooling can be turned off before the end of occupation without diverging from comfortable condition until after the end of occupation (the optimum stop time). Each OSS module has the following parameters: Parameter Cool Down Limit Cooling Constant

Gain

Time

Cooling Medium Temp Cooling Medium Temp Cooling Setpoint Cooling Start Elevation

Cooling Stop Elevation

Heating Temp Heating Constant

268

Ave Medium Gain

Time

Description The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned off before the end of occupation (the cool down period). Range = 0 to 1439 The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the medium temperature. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range = 0 to 100 Specifies the analogue node from which the temperature of the cooling medium is read. If set to 0 the value of the Cooling Medium Temp parameter will be used. An estimate of temperature of the cooling medium (e.g. supply air temperature) used if an actual measurement of the temperature is not available. Specifies the analogue node from which the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. If set to 0 the cooling functions will be disabled. The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range -100 to +100 The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range -100 to +100 An estimate of temperature of the heating medium (e.g. supply air temperature) used if an actual measurement of the temperature is not available. The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the medium temperature. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range = 0 to 100

Type Const

ID D

Const

G

Input

A

Const

E

Input

S

Const

T

Const

P

Const

E

Const

G

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Heating Medium Temp Heating Setpoint Heating Start Elevation

Heating Stop Elevation

Inside Address Label Loss Time Constant

Output 0 Output 1

Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Outside Address Page Warm Up Limit X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the analogue node from which the temperature of the heating medium is read. If set to 0 the value of the Heating Medium Temp parameter will be used. Specifies the analogue node from which the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. If set to 0 the heating functions will be disabled. The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range -100 to +100 The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range -100 to +100 Specifies the analogue node from which the temperature inside the building is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to equalise with the outside air temperature at the end of occupation. It is continually adjusted by the OSS module to ensure accuracy at start and stop times. It should be set to a reasonable value to reduce the OSS module’s learning time. Range = 0 to 100 OTP OCCUPIED - Set between start of occupation, and end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. OSS OCCUPIED - Set between optimum start time and optimum stop time (used for switching loops to occupied setpoint). It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. NON-OCCUPIED - Set between occupation stop and optimum start time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. WARM UP - Set between optimum start time and the start of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. OCCUPIED - Set between start of occupation and optimum stop time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. COOL DOWN - Set between optimum stop time and the end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Mode-Set to 0 for heating, and 1 for cooling. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the analogue node from which the outside air temperature value is read. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned on before the start of occupation (the warm up period). Range = 0 to 1439 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Input

ID A

Input

S

Const

T

Const

P

Input

I

Const Const

$ L

Output

0

Output

1

Output

2

Output

3

Output

4

Output

5

Output

6

Input

O

Const Const

p W

Const

x

Const

y

269

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.18 IQ2 Page Modules Module Identifier

p

Page modules store the essential information for each strategy page used to display the modules in SET or other tools. SET defines a page module for each strategy page created in SET. Page modules have the following parameters: Parameter Label

Description 30-character user-friendly label for the module.

Type Const

ID $

A1.19 IQ2 Plot Modules Module Identifier

P

Plot modules enable the value of a sensor module to be recorded at regular intervals. Each plot can store up to 96 or 1000 values depending on the type of controller. After the maximum number of values is stored, the first will be overwritten so that subsequently the last 96 or 1000 values are available. Each plot module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Page Period

Sensor X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The interval between logs. For controllers that store 96 values per plot. Range = 0, 1, 2, or 3 (0=1 hour, 1=15 minutes, 2=24 hours, and 3=1minute) For controllers that can store 1000 values per plot: Range = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 (0=1 hour, 1=15 minutes, 2=24 hours, 3=1minute, 4=5 minutes, 5=10 minutes, 6=20 minutes, 7=30 minutes, 8=6 hours, and 9=1 second. The sensor whose values the plot module is recording. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const Const

ID $ p P

Const Const

S x

Const

y

A1.20 IQ2 Record Modules Module Identifier

r

Record modules are only available on controllers with ADL support. They are used to specify the telephone number that is required to access a particular controller and the network address of the modem that is to be used to dial the number. Each record module has the following parameters: Parameter Address Lan Page Proxy Port

Description The destination on the IQ network of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range = 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. The Lan containing the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range = 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The network address of the modem that is to be used to send alarms. Communications sent to this address are delivered using the address, Lan, and telephone number set within the record. It should be set to the supervisor port address. If the controller alarms are being sent to address 2 (local supervisor), the proxy port address should also be set to 2.

Type Const

ID R

Const

N

Const Const

p P

Range = 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10.

270

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Telephone

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The telephone number of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. The number may be up to 29-characters in length, and include the following characters. 0 to 9 Dialling characters. Considered as dialling characters on some ABCD systems. #* Wait for secondary dial tone. J 2 second pause K Pulse dialling. L Tone dialling. M Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID T

Const

x

Const

y

A1.21 IQ2 Schedule Modules Module Identifier

H

Schedule modules allow items to be turned off and on at times that are offset from the specified zone module’s occupation times. There are three different types of Schedule module: Occupation Time Profile, Optimum Start/Stop, and Fixed (ON). Each schedule module has the following parameters: Parameter Cool Down Label Manual Level Manual Select Non-Occupation Occupation Output Page Start Deviation Stop Deviation Type

Description Specifies either the output level used during cool down, or the analogue node from which it is read. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Either specifies the output level used when the schedule is in manual control, or the analogue node from which it is read. The digital node that forces the module to manual control. It is specified by linking it to the appropriate module setting it to 0,0 disables manual control. Either specifies the output level used during non-occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read. Either specifies the output level used during occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read. The analogue node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The difference (in minutes) between the start time specified in the zone module and the start time used by the schedule. Range = -32767 to +32767 The difference (in minutes) between the start time specified in the zone module and the start time used by the schedule. Range = -32767 to +32767 The type of schedule module to be used. Range = OTP - This type of schedule module is controlled by the occupation times set in the associated zone module + the start and stop deviation specified on the schedule module itself. (I.e. the output is on during the occupation period, and off during the unoccupied period subject to the application of the start and stop deviations). This allows three sets of start and stop times for each day of the week. OSS - This type of schedule module is controlled by the optimum start and stop times calculated by the OSS module. (I.e. the output is on during the occupation period, and off during the unoccupied period subject to the application of the start and stop deviations). Fixed - This type of schedule module is not under time control. The schedule output remains at the occupied level, and can only be changed by a manual override. It is only ever used as a temporary measure to turn HVAC equipment on continuously when it is normally controlled by a schedule. Disable - This disables the module.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID L

Const Const/Input

$ M

Input

A

Const/Input

N

Const/Input

O

Const Const Const

D p T

Const

P

Const

Y

271

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Warm Up X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate Zone

Description Specifies either the output level used during warm up, or the analogue node from which it is read. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page. The zone module from which the schedule’s occupation times are taken. Range 1 to 5

Type Const/Input

ID W

Const

x

Const Const

y Z

A1.22 IQ2 Sensor Type Modules Module Identifier

Y

A sensor type module is a module within a controller that stores information about a certain type of sensor. They are used by the sensor modules and lookup function modules to convert the input signal into engineering units. Each sensor type module has the following parameters: Parameter Part Number Range Scaling Type

Unique Sensor Reference

Description The part number for the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller. The operating range of the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller. The method used to interpret the reading from the sensor. Range = linear, log, linearise thermistor volts, linearise volts, linearise thermistor ohms, or characterise. Linear scaling should be used for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a linear characteristic between the top and bottom of range. Log scaling is not normally used; it is for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a logarithmic characteristic between the top and bottom of range. Linearise thermistor volts scaling should be used for thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised. Linearise volts scaling should be used for sensors providing voltage or current signals that need to be linearised. Linearise thermistor ohms can be used instead of linearise thermistor volts. It should be used for non-Trend sensors where the resistance/temperature characteristic is known, as it requires entry of ohms against temperature directly from the characteristic. It enables the linearisation points on the temperature scale to be individually chosen so that they can be closer together over a part of the characteristic where the gradient is changing rapidly, and further apart where the gradient changes only gradually. It is not recommended for use with Trend sensors. Characterise allows a sensor’s characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear characteristics. It is therefore recommended for use with all non-linear sensors providing the controller has version 2.1 firmware or greater. It is also used for lookup function modules. A reference for the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller.

Type Const

ID -

Const

-

Const

S

Const

-

Type Const

ID B

Const Const

E L

If Linear or Log scaling has been selected the following parameters need to be defined: Parameter Bottom of Range

Exponent Lower Limit

272

Description The value of the sensor at -20 mA when the input channel is linked for current (I), or the value of the sensor at either -10 V or -5 V (this depends on the controller type) if the channel is linked for voltage (V). The number of leading digits before the decimal point. The lowest rated value of the sensor.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules Parameter Top of Range

Description Value of the sensor at +20 mA when the input channel is linked for current (I), or the value of the sensor at either +10 V or +5 V (this depends on the controller type) if the channel is linked for voltage (V). The highest rated value of the sensor.

Upper Limit

Type Const

ID T

Const

U

If Linearise thermistor volts or Linearise volts scaling has been selected the following parameters need to be defined: Parameter Bottom of Range

Description The value of the sensor at -20 mA when the input channel is linked for current (I), or the value of the sensor at either -10 V or -5 V (this depends on the controller type) if the channel is linked for voltage (V). The voltage at bottom of range. The voltage at 25% of the range. The voltage at 50% of the range. The voltage at 75% of the range. The voltage at top of range. Value of the sensor at +20 mA when the input channel is linked for current (I), or the value of the sensor at either +10 V or +5 V (this depends on the controller type) if the channel is linked for voltage (V).

F G H I J Top of Range

Type Const

ID B

Const Const Const Const Const Const

F G H I J T

If Linearise thermistor ohms scaling has been selected the following parameters need to be defined: Parameter K L M N O U V W Y Z

Description The resistance at the temperature specified by the U parameter. The resistance at the temperature specified by the V parameter. The resistance at the temperature specified by the W parameter. The resistance at the temperature specified by the Y parameter. The resistance at the temperature specified by the Z parameter. The highest temperature in Deg C that the sensor is expected to measure. A temperature in Deg C at which the resistance is to be specified. A temperature in Deg C at which the resistance is to be specified. A temperature in Deg C at which the resistance is to be specified. The lowest temperature in Deg C that the sensor is expected to measure.

Type Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const

ID K L M N O U V W Y Z

If Characterise scaling has been selected the following parameters need to be defined: Parameter Exponent Input Points Input Type

Lower Limit Output Points

Upper Limit * is point number.

Description The number of leading digits before the decimal point. This parameter is not available when ‘Analogue Value’ is specified as the input type. The input points specify the actual value of the electrical input signal from the sensor, or the analogue input value from the lookup function module. Up to twenty can be defined. The type of input signal. It should be set to match the hardware-input channel connected to the sensor. If the input is from a lookup function module it should be set to Internal Analogue Value. Thermistor input channels may use either Thermistor Volts or Thermistor (KOhms). Normally the sensor characteristics will be given in kilohms so Thermistor (KOhms) should be used. However, Thermistor Volts enables a sensor’s characteristics to be produced by measuring voltage values at the input terminals and entering them in the thermistor volts table. Specifies the lowest rated value of the sensor. The Output Points specify the value of the output for the corresponding input point, or the analogue input value from the lookup function module. Up to 20 can be defined. Note that an output point must be defined for each input point. Specifies the highest rated value of the sensor.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID E

Const

P*

Const

Y

Const Const

L O

Const

U

273

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.23 IQ2 Store Modules Module Identifier Store modules are only available on controllers with XNC support. They are used to hold strings of information that can be assessed by the TCL program. Each store module has the following parameters: Parameter Label String

Description 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Note that this parameter is for SET use only and is not sent to the controller. The string that the module is to store. It can be up to 40characters long.

Type Const

ID -

Const

$

A1.24 IQ2 Time Modules Module Identifier

T

The time module is a module within a controller that stores information about the current date and time. Parameter Change by

Day End Day End Month Hours Minutes Month Start Day Start Month Weekday Year

Description Specifies the time adjustment for automatic winter/summer time changes. When set to a value other than 0 the controller will act as a timemaster. Range = 0 to 2 Where 0 no change, 1 = 1 hour, and 2 = 2 hours. The current day of the month. The day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is removed from the time. The month containing the day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is removed from the time. The current hours value. The current minutes value. The current month. Range = 1 to 12 Where 1 specifies January. The day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is added to the time. The month containing the day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is added to the time. The current day of the week. Range = 1 to 7 Where 1 specifies Monday. The current year.

Type Const

ID G

Output Const

D E

Const

T

Output Output Output

H N M

Const

S

Const

O

Output

W

Output

Y

A1.25 IQ2 User Modules Module Identifier

U

User modules provide the controller's security. Each module has a PIN, and a PIN level. When a user attempts to make a change that is PIN protected, a PIN that matches one in the controller with a PIN level high enough to authorise the change must be sent to the controller. The controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a PIN level of 99. If no user modules are set up, the controller’s security is disabled. Each user module has the following parameters: Parameter PIN PIN Level

274

Description The number that must be entered by the user to log on as that user (password). It is a 4-digit number. The password level for the user module. Range 0 to 99

Type Const

ID P

Const

L

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules A1.26 IQ2 Zone Modules Module Identifier

Z

Zone modules define the occupation times for the controller. Each module has a standard week of seven days each with three possible occupation periods that can be set up. Note SET only allows the standard week to be set up (i.e. day numbers 8 to 14) and does not allow the current week (days 1 to 7) or special days to be set up (zone 0). Each zone module has the following parameters: Parameter Current Value Display Mode Label Page PIN Level Time Zone X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The status of the module. When the value is 1 the zone is occupied when it is 0 it is unoccupied. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the zone’s occupation times are displayed graphically, or as text. 20-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The level of the PIN required by the user to make changes to the occupation times. Range = 0 to 99 This specifies the module number. The number of modules available will vary depending on the type of controller although most have 5. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID -

Const

-

Const Const Const

$ p P

Const

-

Const Const

x y

The following parameters are repeated for each of the zone’s seven standard weekdays. Parameter Period 1 Start Time Period 1 Stop Time Period 2 Start Time Period 2 Stop Time Period 3 Start Time Period 3 Stop Time

Description Specifies the beginning of the first period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the end of the first period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the beginning of the second period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the end of the second period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the beginning of the third period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the end of the third period of occupancy. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID E

Const

F

Const

G

Const

H

Const

I

Const

J

275

Appendix 1 IQ2 Modules

This page is intentionally left blank.

276

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2

APPENDIX 2 IQ3 MODULES

This section describes in detail all of the configuration parameters for each IQ module. Address Modules Alarm Group Modules Directory Modules Driver Modules I/O Modules Input Modules Loop Modules Page Modules Schedule Modules Time Modules XNC Interface Modules

Alarm Destination Modules Alarm Route Modules Display Modules Function Modules IC Comms Modules Logic Modules OSS Modules Plot Modules Sensor Type Modules User Modules Zone Modules

Throughout this section module parameters will be referenced by their letter the E parameter would be referenced as E. The value of a module’s parameter is referenced by the parameter letter in brackets e.g. (E) refers to the actual Value of the E parameter. For each module, the module identifier is listed which should be used when accessing the module with text comms, along with its default overview parameter, and size in brIQs. There is also a description of how the module works and a table listing all the parameters associated with it, and a description of each parameter. The Type column of the tables in this section indicates how the parameter is defined. Text Const Input Output Read Only

Description The parameter is defined in the relevant module parameters dialogue box by entering the required value, selecting from a list, checking the required option, or clicking a button. The value of the parameter is read from the module/node to which it is linked. The module calculates the parameter’s value. The value is set in the controller, or generated by it and cannot be changed.

The ID column defines the identifier for the module parameter (parameter identifier) that should be used when accessing the parameter with text comms. When configuring an IQ3 controller only the modules used in the strategy are added to the controller’s memory. This enables the number of each type of module to be adjusted to suit the requirements of the strategy, so long as the memory capacity of the controller is not exceeded. As a general guideline, the IQ3xcite has at least an equal capacity as a fully utilised IQ251. The available capacity is measured in brIQs, see the appropriate controller data sheet for details of the capacity of each type of IQ3 controller. Each type of module has memory requirement in brIQs as listed below: Module Address Modules Alarm Destination Modules Alarm Group Modules Alarm Route Modules Directory Modules Display Modules Dynamic Display Modules Static Display Modules Driver Modules Analogue Driver Modules Binary Switch Driver Modules Digital Driver Modules Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules Raise/Lower End Driver Modules Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules Time Proportional Driver Modules Function Modules ABS Function Modules Add Function Modules Adder/Scaler Function Modules Analogue to Digital Function Modules

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Size (brIQs) 24 14 9 9 13 19 19 52 54 52 57 57 54 53 12 15 15 19

277

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Module Average Function Modules Comparator Function Modules Divide Function Modules Enthalpy Function Modules Filter Function Modules Gate Function Modules Hysteresis Band Function Modules Hysteresis Limits Function Modules Limit at Function Modules Limit to Function Modules Log Function Modules Lookup Function Modules Maximum Function Modules Minimum Function Modules Multiply Function Modules Power Function Modules Proximity Function Modules Rescale from Function Modules Rescale to Function Modules Square Root Function Modules TRIG Function Modules TRUNC Function Modules IC Comms Modules Average IC Comms Modules Data To IC Comms Modules Global To IC Comms Modules Maximum IC Comms Modules Minimum IC Comms Modules Sum IC Comms Modules Input Modules Analogue Node Modules Digital Byte Modules External Digital Input Modules External Digital Sensor Modules External Sensor Modules Internal Digital Input Modules Internal Digital Sensor Modules Internal Sensor Modules Knob Modules Switch Modules I/O Modules Logic Modules Combination Logic Modules Counter Logic Modules D to A Logic Modules Delay Logic Modules Fan Out Logic Modules Hours Run Logic Modules Readback Logic Modules Timer Logic Modules Loop Modules Network Modules IP Network Modules Lan Network Modules OSS Modules Page Modules Plot Modules Schedule Modules

278

Size (brIQs) 15 13 14 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 13 13 15 15 14 13 14 14 14 13 14 12 17 19 19 17 17 17 14 16 28 68 76 26 66 74 13 10 14 19 18 19 14 18 16 18 18 55 0 0 50 4 12

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Module OTP Schedule Modules OSS Schedule Modules Sensor Type Modules User Modules Virtual CNC Modules XNC Interface Modules Zone Modules (The zone size includes 20 exceptions. If more exceptions are used they require 13 brIQs each.)

A2.1

Size (brIQs) 19 21 12 12 9 130 566

IQ3 Address Modules

Address modules contain addressing information relating to communications for a particular device, and product specific non-network information. The information stored depends on the version of IQ3 controller. IQ3 Pre v1.3 Address modules A2.1.1

IQ3 v1.3 or greater Address modules

IQ3 v1.3 or Greater Address Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

R 24 None

For IQ3 controllers with firmware version 1.3 the address module contains just the Trend specific addressing information (e.g. Lan number and network address) and product specific non-network information (e.g. serial number). Each v1.3 or greater address module has the following parameters: Parameter Archive Failed Attribute 2

Attribute 3

Attribute 4

Attribute 5

Attribute 6

Attribute 7

Build Checksum OK Controller on Line Corrupt Time

Description A digital value set to 1 when the archive of the running strategy file to flash memory has failed. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. The build number of the controller. A digital value set to 1 when the controller’s check sum is OK. A digital value set to 1 when the controller restarts successfully. A digital value set to 1 when the controller is unable to obtain the time from the timemaster.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Read Only

ID E4

Const

F

Const

G

Const

H

Const

I

Const

J

Const

K

Read Only Read Only

B e

Read Only

S0

Read Only

E5

279

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Default Language

Display

Email Server Address

Ethernet Mac Event Overrun External I/O Count External IQ Limit Failed I/O Failed PROM Failed RAM Failed RTC Failed Software Failed UART General Alarm Group Human Readable Identifier I/O Bus Failed Identifier

IP Address

Loader Issue Local Lan Local Node Low Flash Low RAM

280

Site

Description The language used for the display of web pages and alarms. A number of different languages can be downloaded to the controller. The language specified by this parameter is used for the display of web pages and alarms. The controller can be set to use any of the other downloaded languages instead by changing this parameter. SET enables the language used to be specified (Default Display Language) as well as the other languages to be downloaded from a list of available languages. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater. The IP address of the email server that the IQ3 is to use to send the email (DNS operation is not included) so a separate SMTP server must be used. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. The MAC address of the controller. A digital value set to 1 when there are too many event driven modules. The current number of external channels that are connected. The maximum number of external channels that may be connected (0 or 80). A digital value set to 1 when the peripheral interface adapter fails. A digital value set to 1 when the PROM checksum is wrong at power up. A digital value set to 1 when the controller cannot read from or write to RAM. A digital value set to 1 if any of the parameters of the real time clock are outside the range i.e. the RTC has failed. A digital value set to 1 when a software action requiring memory outside the defined boundaries is attempted. A digital value set to 1 when the supervisor port fails. The alarm group module to which general alarms from the controller are sent. A string that identifies the site containing the controller. Note that this is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. A digital value set to 1 when a communications failure is detected on the I/O bus. 30-character label for the controller. It is used in critical alarm messages and on the display panel to identify the controller. It is also used as the first controller attribute for text communications. The IP address of the controller. The IP address for each controller must be unique to avoid address clashes. If the Ethernet network to which the controller is connected has a DCHP server, it is important to ensure that the IP address of the controller is outside the range of IP addresses assigned by the server. If this is not the case, the DCHP server may assign the controller’s IP address to another device. Displays the date and issue of the download kernel that is in the controller. The Lan number of the controller. Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. The network address of the controller. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. A digital value set to 1 when the amount of memory used by graphics files (backdrops) is excessive. A digital value set to 1 when the controller runs low on RAM. When this occurs the controller will reboot.

Type Const

ID P

Const

Read Only Read Only

m E6

Read Only Read Only

o I

Read Only

S2

Read Only

S7

Read Only

S4

Read Only

S3

Read Only

S5

Read Only Const

S6 g

Const

$

Read Only

E0

Const

D

Const

i

Read Only

c

Const

N

Const

L

Read Only

E3

Read Only

E2

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Machine Readable Site Identifier Override Timer

Power Reset Default Router

Sequence Table Overrun Serial Number Strategy Corrupt Strategy Memory Size Strategy Memory Used Subnet Mask

Supervisor Port Address

UDP Port

Version A2.1.2

Description A unique string that identifies the site containing the controller to a computer. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. This parameter cannot be specified by SET. When set to a value greater than 0 the time will count down from the value to 0, and all the I/O modules with an override facility that is not linked to another module will go into override until the timer reaches 0. A digital pulse generated on power up. The IP address of the router to which messages are sent if the destination address is not on the local subnet. It should be set to the IP address of a router on the same subnet as the controller. A digital value set to 1 when controller is unable to complete the sequence of modules in the required time. The serial number on the controller’s main board. A digital value set to 1 when the checksum fails indicates that the strategy is corrupt. The total memory in the controller amount of memory in brIQs. This may change with firmware version. The amount of memory in brIQs used by the strategy in the controller. The subnet mask of the controller. The subnet mask must be the same for all devices not separated by routers that are to build Lans or an internetwork. This ensures that they are on the same subnet. The network address of the device (usually a supervisor or tool) connected to the IQ network using the controller’s supervisor port. Range = 0,4 to 120 excluding 10. If set to 0 the device connected using the supervisor port will only be able to communicate with the local controller. If set to 120 the port will be disabled. The UDP port of the controller. This defines the Ethernet port used by the controller to send messages to other IQ system devices. To construct an internetwork, the all the devices must use the same UDP port. If you are restricted to using one subnet, but wish to have separate sites on that subnet (i.e. more than one internetwork), then you can set different UDP port numbers for each group of devices. 25-character string containing the controller type, prom issue, and date.

Type Const

ID O

Const

Read Only Const

p v

Read Only

E1

Read Only Read Only

s S1

Read Only

a

Read Only

t

Const

n

Const

U

Const

u

Read Only

C

IQ3 Pre v1.3 Address Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

R 24 None

For IQ3 controllers with firmware version less than 1.3 the address module stores all the addressing information and product specific non-network information (e.g. serial number). Each pre v1.3 address module has the following parameters: Parameter Archive Failed Attribute 2

Description A digital value set to 1 when the archive of the running strategy file to flash memory has failed. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Read Only

ID E4

Const

F

281

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Attribute 3

Attribute 4

Attribute 5

Attribute 6

Attribute 7

Build Checksum OK Controller on Line Corrupt Time Default Language

Display

Email Server Address

Ethernet Mac Event Overrun External I/O Count External IQ Limit Failed I/O Failed PROM Failed RAM Failed RTC Failed Software Failed UART

282

Description Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. Optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified either uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes. The build number of the controller. A digital value set to 1 when the controller’s check sum is OK. A digital value set to 1 when the controller restarts successfully. A digital value set to 1 when the controller is unable to obtain the time from the timemaster. The language used for the display of web pages and alarms. A number of different languages can be downloaded to the controller. The language specified by this parameter is used for the display of web pages and alarms. The controller can be set to use any of the other downloaded languages instead by changing this parameter. SET enables the language used to be specified (Default Display Language) as well as the other languages to be downloaded from a list of available languages. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater. The IP address of the email server that the IQ3 is to use to send the email (DNS operation is not included) so a separate SMTP server must be used. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. The MAC address of the controller. A digital value set to 1 when there are too many event driven modules. The current number of external channels that are connected. The maximum number of external channels that may be connected (0 or 80). A digital value set to 1 when the peripheral interface adapter fails. A digital value set to 1 when the PROM checksum is wrong at power up. A digital value set to 1 when the controller cannot read from or write to RAM. A digital value set to 1 if any of the parameters of the real time clock are outside the range i.e. the RTC has failed. A digital value set to 1 when a software action requiring memory outside the defined boundaries is attempted. A digital value set to 1 when the supervisor port fails.

Type Const

ID G

Const

H

Const

I

Const

J

Const

K

Read Only Read Only

B e

Read Only

S0

Read Only

E5

Const

P

Const

Read Only Read Only

m E6

Read Only Read Only

o I

Read Only

S2

Read Only

S7

Read Only

S4

Read Only

S3

Read Only

S5

Read Only

S6

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter General Alarm Group Human Readable Identifier

Site

I/O Bus Failed Identifier

IP Address

Loader Issue Local Lan Local Node Low Flash Low RAM Machine Readable Site Identifier Override Timer

Power Reset Default Router

Sequence Table Overrun Serial Number Strategy Corrupt Strategy Memory Size Strategy Memory Used Subnet Mask

Description The alarm group module to which general alarms from the controller are sent. A string that identifies the site containing the controller. Note that this is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. A digital value set to 1 when a communications failure is detected on the I/O bus. 30-character label for the controller. It is used in critical alarm messages and on the display panel to identify the controller. It is also used as the first controller attribute for text communications. The IP address of the controller. The IP address for each controller must be unique to avoid address clashes. If the Ethernet network to which the controller is connected has a DCHP server, it is important to ensure that the IP address of the controller is outside the range of IP addresses assigned by the server. If this is not the case, the DCHP server may assign the controller’s IP address to another device. Displays the date and issue of the download kernel that is in the controller. The Lan number of the controller. Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. The network address of the controller. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. A digital value set to 1 when the amount of memory used by graphics files (backdrops) is excessive. A digital value set to 1 when the controller runs low on RAM. When this occurs the controller will reboot. A unique string that identifies the site containing the controller to a computer. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. This parameter cannot be specified by SET. When set to a value greater than 0 the time will count down from the value to 0, and all the I/O modules with an override facility that is not linked to another module will go into override until the timer reaches 0. A digital pulse generated on power up. The IP address of the router to which messages are sent if the destination address is not on the local subnet. It should be set to the IP address of a router on the same subnet as the controller. A digital value set to 1 when controller is unable to complete the sequence of modules in the required time. The serial number on the controller’s main board. A digital value set to 1 when the checksum fails indicates that the strategy is corrupt. The total memory in the controller amount of memory in brIQs. This may change with firmware version. The amount of memory in brIQs used by the strategy in the controller. The subnet mask of the controller. The subnet mask must be the same for all devices not separated by routers that are to build Lans or an internetwork. This ensures that they are on the same subnet.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID g

Const

$

Read Only

E0

Const

D

Const

i

Read Only

c

Const

N

Const

L

Read Only

E3

Read Only

E2

Const

O

Const

Read Only Const

p v

Read Only

E1

Read Only Read Only

s S1

Read Only

a

Read Only

t

Const

n

283

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Supervisor Port Address

UDP Port

Version

A2.2

Description The network address of the device (usually a supervisor or tool) connected to the IQ network using the controller’s supervisor port. Range = 0,4 to 120 excluding 10. If set to 0 the device connected using the supervisor port will only be able to communicate with the local controller. If set to 120 the port will be disabled. The UDP port of the controller. This defines the Ethernet port used by the controller to send messages to other IQ system devices. To construct an internetwork, the all the devices must use the same UDP port. If you are restricted to using one subnet, but wish to have separate sites on that subnet (i.e. more than one internetwork), then you can set different UDP port numbers for each group of devices. 25-character string containing the controller type, prom issue, and date.

Type Const

ID U

Const

u

Read Only

C

IQ3 Alarm Destination Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

e 14 $,F

Alarm destination modules define the destinations to which alarms can be sent. They specify where the alarms are to be sent; the format in which the alarm is sent, and can determine when the alarms are sent. Alarms can either be sent to an address on the IQ network, or to a specific IP address (version 1.1 firmware or greater). When an alarm is submitted for delivery the module will compare the priority of the alarm with the hold priority and if the alarm’s priority level is greater than the value of the hold priority, the alarm will be sent. If the alarm is not sent, it will be stored until the priority of the alarm is higher than the hold priority. If an alarm is sent, then any other alarms being held for that destination will also be sent. This allows calls to autodialled destinations to be limited to times when a high priority alarm is to be sent. The hold priority may be changed according to a time schedule in order to ensure that all low priority alarms are sent every day (e.g. during time of low call charges) in the event that a high priority alarm is not generated. Each alarm destination module has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Address

Destination Address

Destination Port

284

IP

Description This parameter is only available when Trend Address is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies the network address of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. This parameter is only available when IP Address is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies the IP address of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. You must ensure that the device is able to receive alarms. For v1.3 firmware or greater the host name can be used to specify the required devices instead of the IP address. This should be used if automatic addressing is being used. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater. This parameter is only available when IP Address is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies TCP port on which the device to which the alarms are to be sent listens for alarms. You must ensure that the device is able to receive alarms. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater.

Type Const

ID A

Const

i

Const

P

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Destination Type

Details Failed

From Email

Description Specifies whether the alarms are sent to an IQ system, or to a specific IP address. Range = Trend Address, Email or IP Address Trend Address causes the alarms to be sent to the address specified by the Alarm Address and Remote Lan parameters. Email causes the alarms to be sent to the address specified by the To Email parameter; the text in the Message box is added to the email. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater, and the Email option is only available in version 1.2 firmware or greater. Additional information about the module. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. Indicates when the module is unable to reach the specified destination. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range 0 to 1 (0= OK, 1 = Fail) This parameter is only available when Email is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies the email address of the controller sending the alarm. It should be in the standard format. E.g.

Type Const

ID -

Const

-

Output

F

Const

[email protected]

Hold Priority

Inhibit Clear Alarm Interval Label Message

Message Format Page Remote Lan

Source To Email

Max 64 characters Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. The priority level below which alarms are held. If an alarm is received above this level it, and all alarms will be sent. The destination will stay open to low priority alarms for 5 seconds after the last alarm is sent. Range = 0 to 255. Specifies whether the destination will send clear alarms. When selected clear alarm will not be sent. The time in minutes between attempts to send the message. It should be set to 0 for autodialling to allow continual retries. Range 0 to 32767. 30-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies a text message added to the end of the email after the normal alarm message. Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. The format of the alarm message. Range = Text, Coded, or Attribute. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. This parameter is only available when Trend address is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies the Lan number of the device to which alarms are sent. Range = 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. (0 = local Lan.) The alarm route module(s) from which the destination accepts alarm This parameter is only available when Email is selected in the Destination Type box. It specifies the email address to which the alarm is to be sent. It should be in the standard format. E.g.

Const/Input

H

Const

C

Const

R

Const Const

$

Const

M

Const Const

p N

Input Const

S

Const Const

x y

[email protected]

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Max 64 characters Note that this parameter is only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.2 firmware or greater. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

285

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.3

IQ3 Alarm Group Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

g 9 $

Alarm group modules are used to group together alarms that are to be handled in the same way. The module generating the alarm knows to which alarm group the alarm belongs. All alarms for a group are assigned a priority that is used by the alarm destination modules to determine when they will be transmitted. Each alarm group module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label New Alarm

Output Page Priority X Coordinate Y Coordinate

A2.4

Description Additional information about the group. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. User-friendly label for the module. Indicates whether an alarm assigned to that module has occurred. The value is set to 1 for a single cycle of the sequence table when an allocated to the group occurs after that it is reset to 0. If alarms are occurring faster than once per sequence cycle, the value will be set to 1 until one sequence cycle after the last alarm occurred It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The Alarm route module(s used to route alarms in the group Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The priority of the alarm messages in the group. Range = 0 to 255. 0 is the lowest priority. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const Output

$ N

Input Const Const

D p P

Const

x

Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Const

y

IQ3 Alarm Route Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

o 9 $,E

Alarm route modules are used to specify to which destination alarms in a particular group are sent. The route will pass the alarm onto the alarm destination providing the enable bit is set. If the enable bit is not set, the alarms will be stored in the alarm log, but will not be sent. Each alarm route module has the following parameters. Parameter Label Alarm Group Enable Input Alarm Destination X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate Page

A2.5

Description User-friendly label for the module. The alarm group module(s) for which it is to route alarms. Enables/Disables the route. Range = 0 to 1 (0 = Disabled, 1 Enabled) The alarm destination module(s) to which the module will send alarms providing the enable input is set. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the strategy page containing the module.

Type Const Input Const/Input

ID $ G E

Output

D

Const Const Const

x y p

IQ3 Directory Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

@ 13 $

IQ3 directory modules provide the hierarchy to enable the user to select the HVAC equipment units and items they want to see. Each module has a parent parameter, which refers to the directory module that precedes it in the hierarchy. Directory module 1 is always the root of the structure (and its parent should be set to 1, as parent = 0 is taken to mean the module is not set up). When a PIN level is set, the user will need to be logged on at that PIN level or higher to have access to the directory. Each directory module has the following parameters.

286

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Background Colour Backdrop

Height Parent PIN Level Refresh Rate Title

Width

A2.6

Description Specifies the colour used as the background colour for the page when displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Specifies the file that is to be used as the background for the page when displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Note that the use of backdrop files larger than 100k is not recommended. SET will prevent backdrops bigger than 200k being downloaded and limit the total size used by all backdrops in the controller to 2Mb. Specifies the height of the page in pixels. The number of the directory module that is above this module in the hierarchy. The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. Range = 0 to 99 Specifies the interval at which all controller values on the page are updated. 30-character user-friendly label for the module. This is the title of the page when displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that the length of the label does not exceed 12-characters. Specifies the width of the page in pixels.

Type Const

ID B

Const

D

Const Const

H R

Const

P

Const

E

Const

$

Const

W

IQ3 Display Modules

IQ3 display modules are used to define the items on the IQ3s Graphical Display Pages, and to provide the values on display and directory views. There are two types of IQ3 display module: Dynamic Display Modules Static Display Modules A2.6.1

IQ3 Dynamic Display Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

~ 19 None

Dynamic display modules enable values from the IQ3 controller to be included in the Graphical Display Pages. If required the value can be set to be a link to the Details page of the module from which the value is sourced. Each display module has a parent parameter, which is the directory module to which it is attached; this is specified automatically when the module is created. Each dynamic display module has the following parameters: Parameter Background Colour Clickable Font Size Font Type Foreground Colour InAlarm Colour

Description The background colour for the value when it is displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Specifies whether the value is a link to the detail page for the parameter that is being displayed. The size of the font used to display the value on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The font used to display the value on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The colour the value is displayed in on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The colour of the value on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page web view when the parameter from the controller being displayed is in an alarm condition.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID B

Const

C

Const

S

Const Const

N F

Const

A

287

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Item Reference

Description The module parameter that is to be displayed. This should be in the form shown below:

Type Const

ID I

Const

R

Const

P

Const

G

Const

W

Const

L

Const

T

specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1 specifies sensor 1). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. the value of a sensor). The module parameter is specified using the parameter identifier (ID), and can be any parameter available within the specified module. For details of the parameters available for each module and their identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. If the module parameter is not specified the default overview parameters for the module type would be used. E.g. S1 would display the sensor label, value, and units. Although multiple parameters are used as the default overview parameters it is only possible to specify single parameters. Parent PIN Level Text Alignment Width X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.6.2

The number of the Directory module that is above this module in the hierarchy. The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. Range = 0 to 99 The alignment of the value on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Note that this can only be set up if the width has been manually specified, not set to ‘0’. The width of the value on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. If set to ‘0’ the text will be automatically sized to the length of the label. The horizontal position of the top left corner of the value when it is displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The vertical position of the top left corner of the value when it is displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page.

IQ3 Static Display Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

~ 19 None

Static display modules enable static text to be included on the IQ3s Graphical Display Pages. If required the static text can be set to be a link to any specified URL. Each display module has a parent parameter, which is the directory module to which it is attached; this is specified automatically when the module is created. Each static display module has the following parameters: Parameter Background Colour Font Size Font Type Foreground Colour Label Link Reference

Description The background colour for the text when it is displayed on an IQ3 web view. The size of the font used to display the text on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The font used to display the text on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The colour the text is displayed in on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page.

Type Const

ID B

Const

S

Const Const

N F

The text that is displayed. The URL that will be accessed if the user clicks on the item. This link can be to a page of information held within the controller itself, a web site that is not the IQ3, or an email address.

Const Const

$ U

If linking to a page of information held within the controller the reference should be entered in the format shown below: trendModule: Where specifies the page that is to be displayed. The format of varies depending on the destination.

288

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Link Reference

Description If linking to a Graphical Display Page should be in the format below:

Type

ID

Const

R

Const

P

Const

G

Const

W

Const

L

Const

T

GraphIQs\\index.htm Where is the directory module structure of the Display module that defines the page. If linking to a Modules List Page should be in the format below: .htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. E.g. type S.htm to display the sensor module list page. If linking to a Modules Details Page should be in the format below: .htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module. E.g. to display the module details page for sensor 3 type S3. If linking to an email address enter the required email address E.g. [email protected]

Parent PIN Level Text Alignment Width X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

If linking to a web site enter the Website’s URL. E.g. http://www.trend-controls.com The number of the Directory module that is above this module in the hierarchy. The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. Range = 0 to 99 The alignment of the text on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. Note that this can only be set up if the width has been manually specified, not set to 0. The width of the text on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. If set to 0 the text will be automatically sized to the length of the label. The horizontal position of the top left corner of the text when it is displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page. The vertical position of the top left corner of the text when it is displayed on an IQ3 Graphical Display Page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

289

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.7

IQ3 Driver Modules

Driver modules are used to drive HVAC equipment using output channels. They can be sourced from control loops to provide a closed loop system, or can have fixed input levels to provide load cycling or timed switch ON/OFF. Analogue Driver Modules Digital Driver Modules Raise/Lower End Driver Modules Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules A2.7.1

Binary Switch Driver Modules Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules Time Proportional Driver Modules

IQ3 Analogue Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 52 $,l

The analogue driver module provides an analogue signal in the range 0 to 10 Vdc, or 0 to 20 mA depending on the hardware. It calculates the value of its output (l) by taking the value of the input S, limiting it to 0 to 100, and then applying offset and range values if specified. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each analogue driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Input Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Offset

290

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Default = 0 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm.

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Const/Input

s

Output

mS

Const/Input Const/Input

O

Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The percentage of the output signal level (0 to 10 Vdc, or 0 to 20 mA) that corresponds to 0% input. Range = 0 to 100.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Override Enable Override Value Page Range

Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Input Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.2

Description When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The linear range of the actuator. It allows the driver to drive actuators where the linear range of the actuator corresponds to an output signal of less than 0 to 10 volts, or 0 to 20 mA. It sets a percentage of this range to which the 0 to 100 input range will correspond. Range = 0 to 100 (10 Vdc, or 20 mA corresponds to 100%). Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in Default = 0 The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID

Const/Input Const Const

p R

Const

rG

Const/Input

b

Output

rS

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

vE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Const Const

x y

IQ3 Binary Switch Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 54 $,l

The binary switch driver module provides an ON/OFF type output from an analogue input. It has an analogue input S and provides a single digital output l with an optional antiphase output a. The state of l is calculated by comparing the value of S with the ON and OFF switching levels. If (S) goes above the ON switching level, l will be set to 1, and if it is below the OFF switching level, l will be set to 0. If an antiphase output is used the state of a will always be opposite to the state of l. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The binary switch driver driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s). The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the in phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set according to the table below: In phase output Auto Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand Hand OFF

Antiphase output Auto Hand OFF Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Auto Hand OFF Hand OFF Hand Hand Hand

291

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules If an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module then the channel shall be assumed to be in Auto. Each binary switch driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details HOA Hours Run I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label

Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Input Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Off Level On Level Override Enable Override Value Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Input 292

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = 0 or 1 Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The state of the HOA switch(s) associated with the module. Range = 0 (Auto), 1 (Hand), 2 (OFF), 3 (Error) The length of time the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20-characters can be used. Default = Driver Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in Default = 0 Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm)

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Output

h

Output

H

Const

J

Const

L

Output

I

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Const/Input

s

The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The value the input must fall below before the driver’s output is switched off. Range = 0 to 99 The value the input must rise above before the driver’s output is switched on. Range = 0 to 99 When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in

Output

mS

Const/Input Const/Input

F

Const/Input

O

Const Const

p rG

The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm)

Const/Input

b

Const/Input Const/Input

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay Readback Enable Source

Start Delay Starts

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.3

Description The status of the readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period in seconds for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = 0 or 1 Default = 1 The period in seconds after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 500000 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID S

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

vE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Output

N

Const Const

x y

IQ3 Digital Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 52 $,l

The digital driver module provides an ON/OFF type output controlled by the state of a digital bit. It has a single digital source S and provides a single digital output l with an optional antiphase output a. The state of l is determined directly by the state of S; if used, the state of A is always opposite to (l). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The digital driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s). The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the in phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set according to the table below: In phase output Auto Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand Hand OFF

Antiphase output Auto Hand OFF Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Auto Hand OFF Hand OFF Hand Hand Hand

If an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module then the channel shall be assumed to be in Auto. Each digital driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = 0 or 1

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

293

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Details

Description Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The state of the HOA switch(s) associated with the module. Range = 0 (Auto), 1 (Hand), 2 (OFF), 3 (Error) The length of time the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver.

HOA Hours Run

I/O Module In Phase Channel

In Phase Output

Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Input Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Read back Alarm Group Readback Alarm Input Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay Readback Enable Source Start Delay

294

Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in. Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in. The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = 0 or 1 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes).

Type Const

ID -

Output

h

Output

H

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Const/Input

mS

Output

mS

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const

p rG

Const/Input

rS

Output

rS

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

pE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Starts

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.4

Description The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 500000 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID N

Const

x

Const

y

IQ3 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 57 $,l

The raise/lower continuous driver is designed to drive a split phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors with built-in positioning, limit switches, or clutches. It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to accept a feedback-input F. When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position, the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V causing the associated relay module to lower for a period This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V. The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback-input. If the feedback-input F is set to 0, the position of the valve is estimated by using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50% open, because the value has been driven open for half the full-scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by driving continuously in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback-input is used, the position of the valve will be known exactly. The module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The raise/lower continuous driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s). The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the in phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set according to the table below: In phase output Auto Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand Hand OFF

Antiphase output Auto Hand OFF Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Auto Hand OFF Hand OFF Hand Hand Hand

If an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module then the channel shall be assumed to be in Auto. Each raise/lower continuous driver module has the following parameters:

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

295

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details Feedback

Fs Drive HOA I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label

Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Page Position Readback Alarm Readback Group Readback Status

296

Alarm Alarm

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The driver’s feedback input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. If feedback is not to be used the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The time (in seconds) taken for the actuator to move from one end stop to the other. Range = 1 t0 32767 The state of the HOA switch(s) associated with the module. Range = 0 (Auto), 1 (Hand), 2 (OFF), 3 (Error) The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Driver The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The current position of the actuator. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in. Default = 0 The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

D

Output

h

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const/Input

mS

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Output

mS

Output

mS

Const/Input Const Output

p P

Const/Input

rS

Const

rG

Output

rS

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay

Readback Delay Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.5

The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Default = 0 The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Output

RS

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

-

Const/Input

pE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

IQ3 Raise/Lower End Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 57 $,l

The raise/lower end driver is designed to drive a split-phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors without any built-in positioning or where there are no built-in limit switches, or clutches. It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to accept a feedback-input F. When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position, the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V cause the associated relay module to lower for a period This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V. The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback-input. If the feedback-input (F) is set to 0, the position of the valve is estimated using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50% open because the value has been driven open for half the full scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by additionally driving for the full-scale drive time in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback-input is used the position of the valve will be known exactly. The module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The raise/lower end driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s). The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the in phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set according to the table below:

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

297

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules In phase output Auto Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand Hand OFF

Antiphase output Auto Hand OFF Auto Auto Hand OFF Hand

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Auto Hand OFF Hand OFF Hand Hand Hand

If an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module then the channel shall be assumed to be in Auto. Each raise/lower end driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details Feedback

Fs Drive HOA I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Maintenance Interval Alarm Status

298

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The driver’s feedback-input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. If feedback is not to be used the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The time (in seconds) taken for the actuator to move from one end stop to the other. Range = 1 to 32767 The state of the HOA switch(s) associated with the module. Range = 0 (Auto), 1 (Hand), 2 (OFF), 3 (Error) The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

D

Output

h

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const/Input

mS

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Output

mS

Output

mS

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Position Readback Alarm Readback Alarm Group Readback Alarm Status Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay Readback Delay Readback Enable Source Start Delay X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.6

Description Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The current position of the actuator. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input Const/Input

ID -

Const/Input Const Output

p P

Const/Input

rS

Const

rG

Output

rS

Output

rS

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

-

Const/Input

pE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

IQ3 Time Proportional Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 53 $,l

The time proportional driver provides an output whose mark-space ratio is dependent on the input level. It has an analogue source S and provides a single digital output L with an antiphase output A. The state of L is determined by the value of S, and the period time. If (S) is greater than 0, (L) will be set to 1 for a length of time. This length of time is calculated as a percentage of the period time determined by the value of S. (A) will always be the opposite of (L). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The time proportional driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s). The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the in phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set according to the table below: In phase / raise output Auto Auto Auto Hand OFF

Antiphase / lower output Auto Hand OFF Auto Auto

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Auto Hand OFF Hand OFF 299

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules In phase / raise output Hand Hand OFF

Antiphase / lower output Hand OFF Hand

Value of HOA Parameter (h) Hand Hand Hand

If an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module then the channel shall be assumed to be in Auto. Each time proportional driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details HOA Hours Run

I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Period

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the driver. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The state of the HOA switch(s) associated with the module. Range = 0 (Auto), 1 (Hand), 2 (OFF), 3 (Error) The length of time the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The length time (in seconds) for which the output is on when the source of the module is at 100%.

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Output

h

Output

H

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const/Input

mS

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Output

mS

Output

mS

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const/Input

p P

Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). 300

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Position Readback Alarm Readback Alarm Group Readback Alarm Status Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay

Readback Delay Readback Enable Source Start Delay Starts

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.7.7

Description The current position of the actuator. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Default = 0 The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 500000 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID P

Const/Input

rS

Const

rG

Output

rS

Output

rS

Const/Input

-

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

pE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Output

N

Const

x

Const

y

IQ3 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

D 54 $,l

The time proportional + override driver module is designed to operate a raise/lower relay module using an analogue output channel. Its output L can have one of 3 values 10 V, 7 V, or 4 V. The output (L) is set to 10 V when the override-input (O) is set to 1; otherwise the output is time-proportioned between 4 V (ON) and 7 V (OFF). It also has an antiphase output A, which is not normally used, but is OFF when the value (L) is ON, and ON when the value of output (L) is OFF. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each time proportional + o/r driver module has the following parameters: Parameter Antiphase Channel Antiphase Output

Details

Description Specifies the output channel on the specified I/O module used for the antiphase output channel (if used). Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The antiphase output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the driver.

Type Const

ID A

Output

a

Const

-

Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

301

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Hours Run

I/O Module In Phase Channel In Phase Output

Invert Label Maintenance Alarm Maintenance Alarm Group Maintenance Enable

Int Int Int

Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Maintenance Interval Alarm Status Module State Override Override Enable Override Value Page Period

Position Readback Alarm Readback Alarm Group Readback Alarm Status Readback Alarm Status Readback Delay Readback Delay

302

The length of time the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The I/O module to which the driver is connected. Range = 0 to 32 The output channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the driver. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The output value of the driver. If required the output may be linked to other modules so that the output value of the driver can be used in the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in. Enables/Disables the maintenance interval alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Default = 0 The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Maintenance Interval alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The driver’s override input Range = 0 or 1 (0 = override off, 1 = override on). When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The length time (in seconds) for which the output is on when the source of the module is at 100%. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). Default = 0 The current position of the actuator. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The status of the Readback alarm. Range = 0 or 1 (0 (OFF) = no alarm, 1 (ON) = alarm) Specifies which alarm group the Readback alarm is in. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The status of the Readback alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). The period (in seconds) for which the readback is in an alarm condition before the readback alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes).

Output

H

Const

j

Const

L

Output

l

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Const/Input

mS

Const

mG

Const/Input

mE

Output

mS

Output

mS

Const/Input Const/Input

O

Const/Input Const/Input Const Const/Input

p P

Output

P

Const/Input

rS

Const

rG

Output

rS

Output

rS

Const/Input

rD

Const/Input

-

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Readback Enable Source Start Delay Starts

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

A2.8

Enables/Disables the readback alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The driver’s input. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value e.g. for testing the strategy. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The period (in seconds) after the IQ is powered up before the output of the driver is switched on. Range = 0 to 1275 seconds (21 minutes). The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 500000 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Const/Input

pE

Const/Input

S

Const

T

Output

N

Const

x

Const

y

IQ3 Function Modules

Function modules allow mathematical calculations to be performed on a number of variables. ABS Function Modules Adder/Scaler Function Modules Average Function Modules Divide Function Modules Filter Function Modules Hysteresis Band Function Modules Limit at Function Modules Log Function Modules Maximum Function Modules Multiply Function Modules Proximity Function Modules Rescale to Function Modules TRIG Function Modules A2.8.1

Add Function Modules Analogue to Digital Function Modules Comparator Function Modules Enthalpy Function Modules Gate Function Modules Hysteresis Limits Function Module Limit to Function Modules Lookup Function Modules Minimum Function Modules Power Function Modules Rescale from Function Modules Square Root Function Modules TRUNC Function Modules

IQ3 ABS Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 12 $,D

The ABS function module calculates its output (D) by converting the input (G) to a positive value. If (G) is already positive, no change is made. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each ABS function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input G Label

Module State Output

Description Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Function Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

303

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.8.2

IQ3 Add Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 15 $,D

The add function module calculates its output (D) as the sum of four values (E), (F), (G), and (H). The module uses the following formula: (D)= (E) + (F) + (G) + (H) The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each add function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.8.3

Description Specifies (E) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (F) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (H) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const/Input

H

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const

p x

Const

y

IQ3 Adder/Scaler Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 15 $,D

The adder/Scaler Function module calculates the output (D) as the sum of two inputs (G and H) or the ratio of the two signals according to the formula: (D) = ((E) x (G)) + ((F) x (H)) The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each adder/scaler function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E

Input F

Input G

304

Description Specifies (E) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0 or 1 as appropriate. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (F) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be set to a constant value of 0 or 1 as appropriate. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Input H Label

Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.8.4

Description Specifies (H) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Function Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID H

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

IQ3 Analogue to Digital Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 119 $,D

The analogue to digital function module calculates its output by converting the value of its analogue input (G) to 8 digital outputs (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, and h). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each analogue to digital function module has the following parameters: Parameter a Output b Output c Output d Output e Output f Output g Output h Output Input G Label ,1 Label ,2 Label ,3 Label ,4 Label ,5 Label ,6 Label ,7

Description The output (a) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (b) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (c) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (d) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (e) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (f) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (g) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (h) of the module. It can be used to provide an input other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The analogue value (G) that is to be converted to digital format. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 20-character label for output b. 20-character label for output c. 20-character label for output d. 20-character label for output e. 20-character label for output f. 20-character label for output g. 20-character label for output h.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

to

Type Output

ID a

to

Output

b

to

Output

c

to

Output

d

to

Output

e

to

Output

f

to

Output

g

to

Output

h

Const/Input

G

Const Const Const Const Const Const Const

-

305

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Label, 0 Module State Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description User-friendly label for the module, and for output a. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDUxcite only 20-characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID $

Const/Input Const Const Const

p x y

Note that the parameters Label, 1, Label, 2, Label, 3, Label, 4, Label, 5, Label, 6, Label, 7 are not stored in the controller they are only used by SET. A2.8.5

IQ3 Average Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 15 $,D

The average Function module calculates its output (D) as the average value of two, three, or four inputs (E), (F), (G), and (H). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each average function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Input H Label

Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate A2.8.6

Description Specifies (E) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (F) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (H) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation the Not Used check box next to it should be selected. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Function Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const/Input

H

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

IQ3 Comparator Function Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 13 $,D

The comparator function module calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and F). When (F)>(E), (D)=1, and when (F)=(E), (D)=100, when (G) (E)-(F) or < (E) +(F). It is used to see if (E) and (G) are approximately equal. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each proximity function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies value (E) with which the value (G) is compared in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies value (F) of the maximum difference in the calculation in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the value (G) that is to be compared with (E) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

A2.8.22 IQ3 Rescale from Function Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 14 $,D

The rescale from function module calculates its output (D) by rescaling input (G) that can be between 0 and 100 to a range between a lower limit (E), and an upper limit (F). Note that if the value of (G) is outside the range 0 to 100, it will be limited at these values. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each rescale from function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Module State 314

Description Specifies lower limit (E) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies upper limit (F) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input

-

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID D

Const Const Const

p x y

A2.8.23 IQ3 Rescale to Function Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 14 $,D

The rescale to function module rescales an input (G) that can vary between a lower value (E), and an upper value (F) to the output (D), which is limited to a percentage value between 0 and 100. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each rescale to function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input F Input G Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies lower value (E) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies upper value (F) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

A2.8.24 IQ3 Square Root Function Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 13 $,D

The square root function module calculates its output (D) as the square root of the input (G) multiplied by a value (E). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each square root function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input E Input G Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies (E) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID E

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

315

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.8.25 IQ3 TRIG Function Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 14 $,D

The TRIG function module calculates the sin, cosine, or tangent of the input (G) in degrees, or radians. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each TRIG function module has the following parameters: Parameter Angle Type

Input G Label

Module State Output Page Sub Type X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies whether the input (G) to the calculation is in degrees, or radians. Range = 0 top 1 (0=degrees, and 1=Radians). Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Function Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The Sub-Type parameter specifies whether the module calculates the sin, cosine, or tangent of the input (G). Default = sin Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID R

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const

p E

Const Const

x y

A2.8.26 IQ3 TRUNC Function Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

F 12 $,D

The TRUNC function module takes the value of its input (G), removes any digits after the decimal point and writes it to its output (D), e.g. 23.7654 would become 23. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each TRUNC function module has the following parameters: Parameter Input G Label

Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

316

Description Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Function Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID G

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.9

IQ3 I/O Modules

Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

I 14 $

I/O modules specify any external I/O modules that are connected to the IQ3 controller. A separate I/O module must be added for each physical I/O module connected to the controller. Each I/O module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Module ID Module Type

Description 30-character label for the module. Specifies the id of the I/O module. This must match the CAN address set on the I/O modules address switch. Specifies the type of I/O module that is to be connected to the controller.

Type Const Const

ID $ -

Const

-

A2.10 IQ3 IC Comms Modules IC Comms modules provide the facility for communication between IQ controllers, where two or more networked controllers are in use. There are some limitations for the use of IC Comms modules: IQ3 controllers cannot send Data From IC Comms messages. This is expanded in the table below: IC Comms Type Data From Data To

Global To

Digital Bit or Byte Analogue Digital Byte Digital Bit Analogue Digital Byte Digital Bit Analogue, and Attribute Match

Item

Maximum Sum Average Minimum

Configured in IQ2 to IQ3 Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Configured in IQ3 to IQ2 No No Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes

Configured in IQ3 to IQ3 No No Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes Yes v1.2 or greater Yes Yes

Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater Yes v1.2 or greater

If an IQ3 controller is to receive Data From IC Comms from a pre IQ3 controller an analogue node, or digital byte module must be added. Pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers cannot use Data To, and Global To IC Comms to send digital bytes. There are several different types to cope with differing requirements. Average IC Comms Modules Global To IC Comms Modules Minimum IC Comms Modules

Data To IC Comms Modules Maximum IC Comms Modules Sum IC Comms Modules

A2.10.1 IQ3 Average IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 17 $,D

The average IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all pre IQ3 controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the average value, and makes it available as an output. Each average IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Output

ID F

Const

-

317

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440. The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching option is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID I

Output

D

Const Const

p B

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A2.10.2 IQ3 Data To IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 19 $,S

The data to IC comms module sends the value specified by the source parameter to a particular node (remote node) in another IQ controller. Each data to IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label Message Interval Page Remote Address

Remote Lan Remote Node

Significant Change Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

318

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The address of the remote controller. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 100. 0, disables communications. Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies where the value is to be written. This can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. Analogue values range = where is the analogue node. For byte values range where is the byte. For bit values range , where is the byte containing the bit that is to be written, and that is to be written, and is the bit. Note that byte values cannot be sent to pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers. The amount the value of the source address is allowed to change before a message is sent. Range -3276 to +3276 The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, or bit value. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID F

Const Const

I

Const Const

p A

Const

N

Const

R

Const

S

Const/Input

S

Const Const

x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.10.3 IQ3 Global To IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 19 $,S

The data to IC comms module sends the value specified by the source parameter to a particular node (remote node) in other IQ controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module. Each global to IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label Message Interval Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node

Significant Change Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies where the value is to be written. This can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. Analogue values range = where is the analogue node. For byte values range where is the byte. For bit values range , where is the byte containing the bit that is to be written, and that is to be written, and is the bit. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s source (S). Note that byte values cannot be sent to pre v1.2 IQ3 controllers. The amount the value of the source address is allowed to change before a message is sent. Range -3276 to +3276 The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, a byte value, or bit value. This is normally an output from another module, but can be a constant value. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID F

Const Const

I

Const Const

p B

Const

N

Const

R

Const

S

Const/Input

S

Const Const

x y

A2.10.4 IQ3 Maximum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 17 $,D

The maximum IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all pre IQ3 controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the maximum value, and makes it available as an output. Each maximum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label Message Interval

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Output

ID F

Const Const

I

319

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID D

Const Const

p B

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A2.10.5 IQ3 Minimum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 17 $,D

The minimum IC comms module requests the value of a particular analogue node (remote node (R)) from all pre IQ3 controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the minimum value, and makes it available as an output. Each minimum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

320

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440. The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read.. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID F

Const Const

I

Output

D

Const Const

p B

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.10.6 IQ3 Sum IC Comms Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

N 17 $,D

The sum IC comms module requests the value a particular node (remote node (R)) from all pre IQ3 controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the sum, and makes it available as an output. Each sum IC comms module has the following parameters: Parameter Failed Label Message Interval Output Page Remote Attributes

Remote Lan Remote Node X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. It is set to 1 when a failure occurs. Range = 0 or 1 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. Range 1 to 1440. The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The particular attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. Range = 0 to 7 (0=comms disabled, 1=identifier, 2=F attribute, 3=G attribute, 4=H attribute, 5=I attribute, 6=J attribute, and 7=K attribute) Specifies the Lan of the devices to which the message is to be sent. Range = 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 specifies the local Lan. Specifies the node containing the analogue value that is to be read. If the Label Matching check box is selected the remote node is selected by a match with the label of the module’s output (D). Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID F

Const Const

I

Output

D

Const Const

p B

Const

N

Const

R

Const Const

x y

A2.11 IQ3 Input Modules Input modules take an input from the outside world, to a point within the controller itself. There are several different types to cope with different types of input devices. External Digital Input Modules External Sensor Modules Internal Digital Sensor Modules Knob Modules

External Digital Sensor Modules Internal Digital Input Modules Internal Sensor Modules Switch Modules

A2.11.1 IQ3 Analogue Node Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

A 14 $,D

The analogue node module stores an analogue value. Each analogue node modules has the following parameters: Parameter High Alarm Label Low Alarm Outside Alarm

Limits

Description The status of the high alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) User-friendly label for the input. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The status of the low alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The status of the outside limits alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm)

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Output

ID H

Const

$

Output

L

Output

O

321

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Page Read Alarm Source Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status of the Read alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The value. It can be a constant, or an input from another controller using IC Comms. The value of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Output

ID p R

Const/Input

-

Output

D

Const Const

x y

A2.11.2 IQ3 Digital Byte Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

B 16 $,D

The digital byte module stores a byte of information (8 bits values a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h e.g. 01010100). Each digital byte module has the following parameters: Parameter Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Label, 0 Label, 1 Label, 2 Label, 3 Label, 4 Label, 5 Label, 6 Label, 7 Page Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

322

Description The value of bit 0. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 1. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 2. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 3. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 4. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 5. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 6. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. The value of bit 7. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. User-friendly label for the input, and output bit 0. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDUxcite only 20-characters can be used. User-friendly label for output bit 1. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 2. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 3. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 4. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 5. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 6. It can be up to 30-characters long. User-friendly label for output bit 7. It can be up to 30-characters long. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The value of the byte. It can be a constant, or an input from another controller using IC Comms. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID a

Output

b

Output

c

Output

d

Output

e

Output

f

Output

g

Output

h

Const

$

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const Const/Input

p S

Const

x

Const

y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.11.3 IQ3 External Digital Input Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

I 28 $,S

The external digital input module takes the status from a real digital device such as a pressure switch, connected to a digital input of the controller, checks the value against the required state, and places its value into a digital node. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each external digital input has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Delay

Alarm State

Details Hours Run

I/O Channel I/O Module Label Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Required State Starts

State State Alarm Enabled Status Group X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before an alarm is generated. 20 20 Range = -10 to +10 The current state of the status alarm of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Additional information about the input. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The length of time (in hours) the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 87840 The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the input. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The I/O module to which the input is connected. Range = 0 to 32 User-friendly label for the sensor. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output (S) of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output (S) of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status that the input should be. When the input is not in this state, an alarm will be generated. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF =, 1 = ON) The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 10 9 The output (S) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Enables/Disables the status alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID dID

Output

dIS

Const

-

Output

H

Const

L

Const

j

Const

$

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const/Input

p R

Output

N

Output

S

Const/Input

dIE

Const Const Const

d x y

323

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.11.4 IQ3 External Digital Sensor Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

S 68 $,V

The external digital sensor module is intended for use with universal inputs set to read digital values that require logging. Using this type of sensor ensures that the sensor logging the input is tied to the digital input performing the alarm handling functions. It takes the reading from a digital device, such as a pressure switch, connected to an input of the controller, and stores as an analogue value. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each external digital sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details I/O Channel I/O Module Label Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the sensor. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The I/O module to which the sensor is connected. Range = 0 to 32 User-friendly label for the sensor. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output (S) of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output (S) of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const

c

Const

i

Const

$

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const

p %

Output

V

Const Const

x y

A2.11.5 IQ3 External Sensor Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

S 76 $,V,%

The external sensor module takes the reading from a real sensor connected to the analogue input of the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm levels. The sensor type determines how the scaling is performed. The sensor type is a separate module that defines parameters for a particular type of sensor. An offset is used to allow the reading to be adjusted to the actual value. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each external sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details High Alarm

High Alarm Delay High Alarm Enable High Alarm Group

324

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The status of the high alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be above the high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the high alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group module the high alarm is sent to.

Type Const

ID -

Output

hS

Const/Input

hID

Const/Input

wlE

Const

hIG

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter High Alarm Limit I/O Channel I/O Module Label Low Alarm Low Alarm Delay Low Alarm Enable Low Alarm Group Low Alarm Limit Module State Offset Out of Limits Alarm Enable Out of Limits Delay Outside Alarm

Limits

Outside Limits Alarm Group Override Enable Override Value Page Read Alarm Read Alarm Delay Read Alarm Enable Read Alarm Group Type

Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the sensor. Range = 0 to 32 (0 = Disabled) The I/O module to which the sensor is connected. Range = 0 to 32 User-friendly label for the sensor. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The status of the low alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be below the low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the low alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Default = 0 Specifies which alarm group module the low alarm is sent to. Default = 0 The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The amount by which the sensor reading is to be increased, or decreased to make it accurate. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Enables/Disables the outside limits alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be outside the specified limits before an out of limits alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 The status of the outside limits alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) Specifies which alarm group module the outside limits alarm is sent to. When set to 1 the output (V) of the sensor is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output (V) of the sensor is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status of the Read alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) Specifies the length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must read an invalid reading before an out of limits alarm is generated Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the read alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group module the Read alarm is sent to. The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. Sensor type modules store information about certain types of sensor. Ensure that the sensor type module chosen correctly specifies the sensor that is being used. The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4-characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID H

Const

c

Const

I

Const

$

Output

hIS

Const/Input

lID

Const/Input

llE

Const

lIG

Const/Input

L

Const/Input Const/Input

O

Const/Input

oIE

Const/Input

oID

Output

oIS

Const

oIG

Const/Input Const/Input Const Output

p rIS

Const/Input

vID

Const/Input

rIE

Const Const

rIG Y

Const Output

% V

Const Const

x y

325

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.11.6 IQ3 Internal Digital Input Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

I 26 $,S

The internal digital input module takes the status of a digital value in the controller, checks the value against the required state, and places its value into a digital node. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each internal digital module has the following parameters: Parameter Alarm Delay

Alarm State

Details Hours Run

Label Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Required State Starts

State State Enabled Status

Alarm

Status Group X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

326

Description The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before an alarm is generated. 20 20 Range = -10 to +10 The current state of the status alarm of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Additional information about the input. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The length of time (in hours) the driver has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 87840 User-friendly label for the input. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status that the input should be. When the input is not in this state, an alarm will be generated. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF =, 1 = ON) The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 to 10 9 The output (S) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Enables/Disables the status alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 The input value of the module. Range = 0 or 1 1=ON, 0=OFF Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID dID

Output

dIS

Const

-

Output

H

Const

$

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const/Input

p R

Output

N

Output

S

Const/Input

dIE

Const/Input

I

Const Const Const

d x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.11.7 IQ3 Internal Digital Sensor Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

S 66 $,V,%

The internal digital sensor module allows a digital value to be monitored. It takes the value of a specified digital node, and puts into an analogue node. This allows digital values to be logged. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each internal digital sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label Module State Override Enable Override Value Page Source Value Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. User-friendly label for the sensor. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20-characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The sensors input. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF, 1 ON) The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID -

Const

$

Const/Input Const/Input

-

Const/Input Const Const/Input

p S

Const

%

Output

V

Const Const

x y

A2.11.8 IQ3 Internal Sensor Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

S 74 $,S,%

The internal sensor module allows an analogue node to be monitored. It takes the reading from within the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm levels. Internal sensors have an exponent, and source instead of sensor type, and offset. The source defines the analogue node from which the sensor takes its value. The exponent determines the number of decimal places before the decimal point. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each internal sensor module has the following parameters: Parameter Details High Alarm High Alarm Delay High Alarm Enable High Alarm Group High Alarm Limit Label

Description Additional information about the sensor. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. The status of the high alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be above the high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the high alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the high alarm is in. The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the sensor. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID -

Output

hIS

Const/Input

hID

Const/Input

hIE

Const Const/Input

hIG H

Const

$

327

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Low Alarm Low Alarm Delay Low Alarm Enable Low Alarm Group Low Alarm Limit Module State Out of Limits Delay Outside Alarm

Limits

Outside Limits Alarm Enable Outside Limits Alarm Group Override Enable Override Value Page Read Alarm Read Alarm Delay

Read Alarm Enable Read Alarm Group Source Value Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

328

Description The status of the low alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be below the low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the low alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the low alarm is in The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be outside the specified limits before an out of limits alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 The status of the outside limits alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) Enables/Disables the outside limits alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the outside limits alarm is in When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Enable parameter is set to 1. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The status of the Read alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no alarm, 1 = alarm) Specifies the length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must read an invalid reading before an out of limits alarm is generated. Range 0 to 2730 Enables/Disables the read alarm. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the Read alarm is in The sensor’s input. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The output (V) of the sensor. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID lIs

Const/Input

lID

Const/Input

lIE

Const Const/Input

lIG L

Const/Input Const/Input

oID

Output

oIS

Const/Input

oIE

Const

oIG

Const/Input Const/Input Const Output

p rIS

Const/Input

rID

Const/Input

rIE

Const Const/Input

rIG S

Const

%

Output

V

Const Const

x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.11.9 IQ3 Knob Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

K 13 $,V,%

The knob module enables an analogue value to be changed. It has user-defined limits between which its value can be adjusted. Use of the knob can be restricted by using the PIN level to prevent unauthorised adjustments. Each knob module has the following parameters: Parameter Bottom of Range Details Label Output Page PIN Level Top of Range Units Value X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The minimum value of the knob. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Additional information about the knob. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. User-friendly label for the knob. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The output (D) of the knob. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The PIN level required before the knob can be adjusted. Range 0 to 99 The maximum value of the knob. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The engineering units of the sensor’s value. It can be set to any 4characters. The input value of the knob. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID B

Const

-

Const

$

Output

D

Const Const

p P

Const/Input

T

Const

%

Const/Input

V

Const Const

x y

A2.11.10 IQ3 Switch Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

W 10 $,V

The switch module enables a digital value to be changed. Each switch module has the following parameters: Parameter Details Label Output Page PIN Level Status X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Additional information about the switch. Note that if this parameter is not set up, SET will automatically set it to the label. User-friendly label for the switch. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The output (D) of the switch. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The PIN level required before the switch can be adjusted. Range 0 to 99 The input value of the switch. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = OFF, 1 = ON) Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID -

Const

$

Output

D

Const Const

p P

Const/Input

V

Const Const

x y

329

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.12 IQ3 Logic Modules Logic modules allow outputs to be generated as a function of a number of digital values within a control strategy. Combination Logic Modules Delay Logic Modules Fan Out Logic Modules Timer Logic Modules

Counter Logic Modules D to A Logic Modules Hours Run Logic Modules Readback Logic Modules

A2.12.1 IQ3 Combination Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 19 $,D

The combination logic module calculates its output (D) (0 or 1) as the logical combination of up to 4 logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). Each logical function is itself a function of 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), and (H) which are AND’ed together ((E) AND (F) AND (G) AND (H)). An AND NOT function can be achieved by specifying a lower case letter instead of upper case. This allows combinations of AND, and AND NOT functions within each of the logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). The output (D) is the result of all logical functions OR’ed together ((J) OR (K) OR (L) OR (M). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each combination logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Combination J

Combination K

Combination L

Combination M

Input E Input F Input G Input H Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate 330

Description Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by clicking the boxes for E, F, G or H in the J line of the Logic Combination Parameters dialogue box. Clicking on a box toggles the value between blank, upper case, and lower case letters. Upper case letters indicate the true state, and lower case letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions K, L, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, L, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and M. Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. It is specified by in the same way as the logical combination J. The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and L. Specifies (E) in the logical combinations. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (F) in the logical combinations. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (G) in the logical combinations. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (H) in the logical combinations. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const

ID J

Const

K

Const

L

Const

M

Const/Input

E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

Const/Input

H

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.12.2 IQ3 Counter Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 18 $,D

The counter logic module provides the facility for counting pulse type signals such as those provided by gas and electricity meters. It has two outputs rate (R) and cumulative count (M). (M) is the total number of times the input (S) has been set to 1 since the reset input (A) was last set to 1 multiplied by the scaling factor (F). (R) is the change in (M) over the period (T). The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each counter logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Cumulative Count

Label Module State Page Rate Reschedule Time

Reset Scale Factor Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The cumulative count (M) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The rate (R) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Defines the time, in seconds, over which the rate is calculated. Range 0 to 1275 Default = 1 The value must be a multiple of the cycle time. When set to 1 the cumulative count value will be set to zero. Range = 0 or 1 The value of each pulse the module receives. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The value that is to be counted. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID M

Const

$

Const/Input Const Output

p R

Const/Input

T

Const/Input

A

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

S

Const Const

x y

A2.12.3 IQ3 Delay Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 14 $,D

The delay logic module is specifically designed for interacting with the alarm reporting mechanism of the strategy allowing a grace time before alarms are reported. It calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and G). If they are different for longer than the grace time, the output (D) will be set to 1. If they are the same, output (D) will be 0. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each delay logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Grace Time Input E Input G Label Module State

Description The delay (in seconds) on the change of the digital output or readback signals during which comparisons are not made. Range 0 to 32767 Specifies (E) in the calculation. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (G) in the calculation. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID T

Const/Input

E

Const/Input

G

Const

$

Const/Input

-

331

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID D

Const Const Const

p x y

A2.12.4 IQ3 D to A Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 19 $,D

The D to A logic module converts the digital inputs a, b, c, d, e, f, g, and h into a single analogue output D. The value of (D) represents the binary value of the input bits. a specifies 1 when set, b specifies 2 when set, c specifies 4 when set, d specifies 8 when set, e specifies 16 when set, f specifies 32 when set, g specifies 64 when set, and h specifies 128 when set. E.g. with the following inputs (a)=1, (b)=0, (c)=1, (d)=0, (e)=1, (f)=0, (g)=0, (h)=0, output (D) would be 21. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The module uses the following formula: D=1x(a) + 2x(b) + 4x(c) + 8x(d) + 16x(e) + 32x(f) + 64x(g) + 128x(h) Each D to A logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Input a Input b Input c Input d Input e Input f Input g Input h Label

Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

332

Description Specifies (a) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (b) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (c) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (d) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (e) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (f) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (g) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (h) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Logic Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID a

Const/Input

b

Const/Input

c

Const/Input

d

Const/Input

e

Const/Input

f

Const/Input

g

Const/Input

h

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.12.5 IQ3 Fan Out Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 18 $,D

The fan out logic module takes its input S and writes the value to its in six outputs (J), (K), (L), (M), (N) and (O). If required the value of the outputs can be set to be the opposite of the input. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. The module uses the following formula: (J)=(K)=(L)=(M)=(N)=(O)=(S) Each fan out logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Invert Label

Module State Output J Output K Output L Output M Output N Output O Label J Label K Label L Label M Label N Label O Page Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies whether the state of the outputs is the same, or opposite to the state of the input. Selected = Inverted. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Default = Logic Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (J) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (K) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (L) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (M) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (N) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The output (O) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output J. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output K. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output L. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output M. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output N. 20-character user-friendly label for the module and for output O. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The module’s input. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID I

Const

$

Const/Input Output

J

Output

K

Output

L

Output

M

Output

N

Output

O

Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Const/Input

$ p S

Const Const

x y

Note that the parameters Label K, Label L, Label M, Label N, Label O are not stored in the controller they are only used by SET.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

333

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.12.6 IQ3 Hours Run Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 16 $,O

The hours run logic module calculates its output (O) as the length of time in hours for which the source bit (S) has been ON since reset input (A) was last set to 1. It also calculates its other output (N) as 0 or 1 by comparing output (O) with input (I) (which specifies an interval) and if (O)>I sets (N) to 1 (interval exceeded). Each hours run logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Hours Output

Interval limit Label Limit Output

Exceeded

Module State Page Reset Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The cumulative number of hours run output (O) of the module run calculated by the module (O). It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The maximum number of hours run. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Indicates when the hours run limit is exceeded. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (0 = no exceeded, 1 = exceeded) Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. When set to 1 the count of hours and alarm condition will be set to zero. Range = 0 or 1 The value being timed. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID O

Const/Input

I

Const

$

Output

N

Const/Input Const Const/Input

p A

Const/Input

S

Const Const

x y

A2.12.7 IQ3 Readback Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 18 $,D

The readback logic module calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two input signals (E) and (G). If the value of (E) and (G) differ for longer than the grace time, the output (D) is set to 1. It will be set back to 0 again when (E) and (G) remain the same for longer than the grace time. Two other inputs (F and H) can also be used in the comparison. The module uses the following formula to calculate its output: D=E and NOT G OR G and NOT E OR F and NOT H OR H and NOT F The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each readback logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Grace Time Input E Input F Input G

334

Description The length of time in seconds after the input changes that comparisons are not made. Range 0 to 32767 Specifies (E) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (F) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies (G) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1

Type Const/Input

ID T

Const/Input

E

Const/Input

F

Const/Input

G

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Input H Label Module State Output Page X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies (H) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 0. Range = 0 or 1 User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID H

Const

$

Const/Input Output

D

Const Const Const

p x y

A2.12.8 IQ3 Timer Logic Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

G 18 $,D

The timer logic module calculates its output (D) according to the state of its input (S) and the ON delay (N), minimum ON time (M), and OFF delay (F). If the input (S) is set to 1 the output (D) will not change to 1 until the ON delay time has passed. It will then remain as 1 for at least the length of time specified by the minimum ON time. When the input (S) changes to 0 the output (D) will only be set to 0 providing the minimum ON time has passed. If an OFF delay is set, the output will stay ON until the OFF delay has passed. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each timer logic module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Minimum On Module State Off Delay On Delay Output Page Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an SDU-xcite only 20characters can be used. The minimum time in seconds that the output of a timer module is ON. Range 0 to 32767 Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is OFF before the output is turned OFF. Range 0 to 32767 The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is ON before the output is turned ON. Range 0 to 32767 The output (D) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The value being timed. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID $

Const/Input

M

Const/Input Const/Input

F

Const/Input

N

Output

D

Const Const/Input

p S

Const Const

x y

335

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.13 IQ3 Loop Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

L 55 $,D

Loop modules perform the mathematical calculations that determine, the value of output (D) based on present, and past values of measured variables. The loop module compares the measured value (P) with the current setpoint. The difference between (P) and the current setpoint is the error. The loop then calculates the value of output (D) to reduce the error. The choice of setpoint is dependent on the value of the setpoint select parameter (S). If set to 1 the occupied setpoint (O) is used, if set to 0 the unoccupied setpoint (U) is used. If the manual select parameter (A) is set to 1 the loop will use the manual level (L) as the current output level, if set to 0 the calculated value will be used for the output. The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output value is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules. Each loop module has the following parameters: Parameter Default Action

Default Value Derivative Time Fail Action

Gain Integral Time Label Manual Address Manual Level Module State Occupation Setpoint Output Process Variable PV Fail Alarm

PV Fail Alarm Enable PV Fail Alarm Group PV Fail Delay Reschedule Time

336

Description Indicates when the loop fail action type 2 is taken. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 The value to which the loop will control if the process variable fails, and the fail action is set to use the default level. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The loop’s derivative time in minutes. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The action that is taken when the process variable for a loop is invalid. Range = 0 to 4 (0 = default PV, 1 - default OP, 2 - stay in default OP, 3 - freeze output, 4 - no action) Defines the way the loop responds to changes in the process variable. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The integral time in minutes for the loop. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 30-character label for the module. Specifies whether manual override is imposed on the loop. Range = 0 or 1 The loop’s manual override setpoint Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. The loop’s occupied setpoint Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The loop’s input. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The status of the Process Variable Fail alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (1=Alarm, 0=No Alarm) Specifies whether the process variable fail alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is in. The length of time in seconds that the loop input must be invalid before a pv fail alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 2730 Specifies in seconds, how often the loop calculates its output. If set to 0 the loop is disabled. Range = 1 to 600

Type Output

ID a

Const/Input

E

Const/Input

T

Const

F

Const/Input

G

Const/Input

I

Const Const/Input

$ A

Const/Input

L

Const/Input Const/Input

O

Output

D

Const/Input

P

Output

fS

Const/Input

pE

Const Const/Input

pE fD

Const/Input

R

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Setpoint Dev Alarm

Setpoint Enable

Dev

Alarm

Setpoint Dev Alarm Group Setpoint Dev Delay

Setpoint Dev Level Setpoint Select Unoccupied Setpoint

Description The status of the Setpoint Deviation alarm. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Range = 0 or 1 (1=Alarm, 0=No Alarm) Specifies whether the setpoint deviation alarm is enabled. Selected = Enabled. Range = 0 or 1 Specifies which alarm group the Setpoint Dev alarm is in.

Type Output

ID fS

Const/Input

sE

Const

sE

The length of time in seconds that the loop input must be not at the required setpoint before a setpoint deviation alarm is generated. Range = 0 to 2730 The maximum loop error value that can be reached before a deviation alarm is generated. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies whether the loop controls to the occupied or unoccupied setpoint. Range = 0 or 1 The loop’s unoccupied setpoint Range = -10 20 to +10 20

Const/Input

sD

Const/Input

V

Const/Input

I

Const/Input

U

A2.14 IQ3 Network Modules Network modules are used on IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater to store the parameters specific to the type of physical network being used. IP Network Modules

Lan Network Modules

A2.14.1 IQ3 IP Network Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

n 0 -

IP network modules store the parameters specific to the Ethernet network. Each IP network module has the following parameters: Parameter Addressing Mode Default Router

DNS Servers

Email Server Address Ethernet Mac

Description Specifies whether the IP settings are obtained from a DHCP server or specified manually. The IP address of the router to which messages are sent if the destination address is not on the local subnet. It should be set to the IP address of a router on the same subnet as the controller. If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available it is not set. The IP address of the each of the DNS servers being used. Max 5 addresses. If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available it is not set. The IP address or host name of the email server that the IQ3 is to use to send the email. The MAC address of the controller.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID P

Const

v

Const

N

Const

L

Read Only

M

337

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Host Name

IP Address

Remote Devices

Subnet Mask

UDP Port

WINS Servers

Description The controller’s host name. It provides a network communication name for the controller. It is separate from the Identifier. It must be unique on the network, and must not be greater than 15-characters in length and can only contain 7-bit ASCII characters in the range A-Z, a-z or 0-9 plus ‘-‘ or ‘_. It must start with a character in the range A-Z or a-z and must not end with ‘-‘ or ‘_’. Default = TREND_xx_yy_zz Where xx, yy, and zz are the last 6 hex digits of the units MAC address. The IP address of the controller. The IP address for each controller must be unique to avoid address clashes. If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available it automatically negotiated with other devices on the segment. The IP address or host name and subnet mask of the each of other devices that are to form part of the internetwork on Ethernet, allowing the internetwork to span routers. Known as the remote devices table. The table must be placed in all devices on the network and include the details of at least two devices from each subnet to be linked by the internetwork. For increased reliability details of additional devices should be specified. If automatic addressing is being used the devices must be specified using host names, and if manual addressing is being used the list should contain the devices with the lowest IP addresses. Max 20 devices. The subnet mask of the controller. The subnet mask must be the same for all devices not separated by routers that are to build Lans or an internetwork. This ensures that they are on the same subnet. If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available it is set to 255.255.0.0. The UDP port of the controller. This defines the Ethernet port used by the controller to send messages to other IQ system devices. To construct an internetwork, the all the devices must use the same UDP port. If you are restricted to using one subnet, but wish to have separate sites on that subnet (i.e. more than one internetwork), then you can set different UDP port numbers for each group of devices. The IP address of the each of the WINS servers being used. Max 5 addresses. If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available it is not set.

Type Const

ID $

Const

I

Const

Const

n

Const

E

Const

W

A2.14.2 IQ3 Lan Network Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

n 0 -

Lan network modules store the parameters specific to the IQ current loop network. Each IP network module has the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate

Description Specifies baud rate of the Lan.

Type Read Only

ID -

Note that this module cannot be set up by SET because the only parameter is read only.

338

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.15 IQ3 OSS Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

O 50 $, D

Each time zone has an OSS module and a set of occupation times associated with it. The OSS module can be applied to heating and/or cooling. It provides a self-adaptive routine that learns the characteristics of the building by monitoring and comparing the outside air temperature against the inside air temperature, and the heating/cooling medium temperature. The OSS module then calculates the time that the heating/cooling should be switched on before the occupation of the building to achieve the desired temperature by the start of occupation (the optimum start time). It also calculates when the heating/cooling can be turned off before the end of occupation without diverging from comfortable condition until after the end of occupation (the optimum stop time). The Adaptation Inhibit parameter enables the loss and gain time constants to be prevented from being updated. Each OSS module has the following parameters: Parameter Adaptation Inhibit Cool Down Limit Cooling Ave Medium Temp Cooling Constant

Gain

time

Cooling Medium Temp Cooling Setpoint Cooling Start Elevation

Cooling Stop Elevation

Heating Temp Heating Const

Ave Medium Gain

Time

Heating Medium Temp Heating Setpoint Heating Start Elevation

Heating Stop Elevation

Description Specifies whether the loss and gain time constants are updated. When selected the parameters will not be updated. The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned off before the end of occupation (the cool down period). Range = 0 to 1439 An estimate of temperature of the cooling medium (e.g. supply air temperature) that is used if an actual measurement of the temperature is not available. The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the medium temperature. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range = 0 to 100 The temperature of the cooling medium. If set to 0 the value of the Cooling Medium Temp parameter will be used. Specifies the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. If the Not Used check box is selected the cooling functions will be disabled. The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range -100 to +100 The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected. Range -100 to +100 An estimate of temperature of the heating medium (e.g. supply air temperature) used if an actual measurement of the temperature is not available. The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the medium temperature. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range = 0 to 100 The temperature of the heating medium. If set to 0 the value of the Heating Ave Medium Temp parameter will be used. Specifies the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. If the Not Used check box is selected the heating functions will be disabled. The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range -100 to +100 The maximum variance (in Deg C) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected. Range -100 to +100

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID H

Const/Input

D

Const/Input

cM

Const/Input

cG

Input

cA

Const/Input

cS

Const/Input

cT

Const/Input

cP

Const/Input

hm

Const/Input

hG

Const/Input

hA

Const/Input

hS

Const/Input

hIT

Const/Input

hIP

339

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Inside Temperature Label Loss time Constant

Output 0 Output 1

Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Outside Temperature Page Warm Up Limit X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description Specifies the inside temperature. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to equalise with the outside air temperature at the end of occupation. It is continually adjusted by the OSS module to ensure accuracy at start and stop times. It should be set to a reasonable value to reduce the OSS module’s learning time. Range = 0 to 100 OTP OCCUPIED - Set between start of occupation, and end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. OSS OCCUPIED - Set between optimum start time and optimum stop time (used for switching loops to occupied setpoint). It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. NON OCCUPIED - Set between occupation stop and optimum start time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. WARM UP - Set between optimum start time and the start of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. OCCUPIED - Set between start of occupation and optimum stop time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. COOL DOWN - Set between optimum stop time and the end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Mode-Set to 0 for heating, and 1 for cooling. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the outside air temperature. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned on before the start of occupation (the warm up period). Range = 0 to 1439 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const/Input

ID I

Const Const/Input

$ L

Output

t

Output

S

Output

n

Output

w

Output

O

Output

D

Output

m

Const/Input

O

Const Const/Input

p W

Const

x

Const

y

A2.16 IQ3 Page Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

p 4 None

Page modules store the essential information for each strategy page used to display the modules in SET or other tools. SET defines a page module for each strategy page created in SET. Page modules have the following parameters: Parameter Label

340

Description 30-character user-friendly label for the module.

Type Const

ID $

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.17 IQ3 Plot Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

P 12 $

Plot modules enable the value of a sensor module to be recorded at regular intervals. Each plot can store up to 1000 values depending on the type of controller. After the maximum number of values is stored, the first will be overwritten so that subsequently only the last 1000 values are available. Note that IQ3 is limited to 100,000 logging records (e.g. 100 off 1000 point logs). Each plot module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Number of Records Page Period

Source X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description 30-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the number of records the module can store before the first is overwritten. Range = 0 to 1000 Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The interval between logs. Range = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 (0=1 hour, 1=15 minutes, 2=24 hours, 3=1minute, 4=5 minutes, 5=10 minutes, 6=20 minutes, 7=30 minutes, 8=6 hours, and 9=1 second. The module whose value the plot module is recording. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Const Const

ID $ N

Const Const

p P

Input Const Const

S x y

A2.18 IQ3 Schedule Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs OTP Schedule Modules OSS Schedule Modules Default Overview Parameters

H 19 21 -

IQ3 Schedule modules are only available on IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater. They allow items to be turned off and on at times that are offset from the specified zone module’s occupation times. There are three different types of Schedule module: Occupation Time Profile, Optimum Start/Stop, and Fixed (ON). There are two types of IQ3 schedule modules OTP Schedule modules and OSS Schedules modules. However SET treats them as the same module with the Type parameter defining the modules type. Each schedule module has the following parameters: Parameter Cool Down

Label Manual Level Manual Select Non-Occupation Occupation Output Page Start Deviation Stop Deviation

Description Specifies either the output level used during cool down, or the analogue node from which it is read. Note that this parameter is not used for OTP schedule modules. 30-character user-friendly label for the module. Either specifies the output level used when the schedule is in manual control, or the analogue node from which it is read. The digital node that forces the module to manual control. Either specifies the output level used during non-occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read. Either specifies the output level used during occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read. The analogue node to which the module writes its output (D). Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The difference (in minutes) between the start time specified in the zone module and the start time used by the schedule. Range = -10 20 to +10 20 The difference (in minutes) between the stop time specified in the zone module and the start time used by the schedule. Range = -10 20 to +10 20

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const/Input

ID L

Const Const/Input

$ M

Const/Input Const/Input

A N

Const/Input

O

Output Const Const/Input

D p T

Const/Input

P

341

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Type

Warm Up

X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate Zone

Description The type of schedule module to be used. Range = OTP - This type of schedule module is controlled by the occupation times set in the associated zone module + the start and stop deviation specified on the schedule module itself. (I.e. the output is on during the occupation period, and off during the unoccupied period subject to the application of the start and stop deviations). OSS - This type of schedule module is controlled by the optimum start and stop times calculated by the OSS module. (I.e. the output is on during the OSS on period, subject to the application of the start and stop deviations). Specifies either the output level used during warm up, or the analogue node from which it is read. Note that this parameter is not used for OTP schedule modules. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page. The zone module from which the schedule’s occupation times are taken.

Type Const

ID Y

Const/Input

W

Const

x

Const Const

y Z

A2.19 IQ3 Sensor Type Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

Y 12 $

A sensor type module is a module within a controller that stores information about a certain type of sensor. They are used by the sensor and lookup function modules to convert the input signal into engineering units. Each sensor type module has the following parameters: Parameter Input Points Input Type

Lower Limit Output Points

Part Number Range Scaling Type

Unique Sensor Reference Upper Limit 342

Description The input points specify the actual value of the electrical input signal from the sensor, or the analogue input value from the lookup function module. Up to 20 can be defined. The type of input signal. It should be set to match the hardware-input channel connected to the sensor. If the input is from a lookup function module, it should be set to Internal Analogue Value. Thermistor input channels may use either Thermistor Volts or Thermistor (KOhms). Normally the sensor characteristics will be given in kilohms so Thermistor (KOhms) should be used. However, Thermistor Volts enables a sensor’s characteristics to be produced by measuring voltage values at the input terminals and entering them in the thermistor volts table. Specifies the lowest rated value of the sensor. The output points specify the value of the output for the corresponding input point, or the analogue input value from the lookup function module. Up to twenty can be defined. Note that an output point must be defined for each input point. The part number for the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller. The operating range of the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller. The method used to interpret the reading from the sensor. It can only be set to Characterise which allows a sensor’s characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear characteristics. It is also used for lookup function modules. A reference for the sensor. This parameter is for SET use only it is not written to the IQ controller. Specifies the highest rated value of the sensor.

Type Const

ID -

Const

-

Const Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

-

Const

$

Const

-

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.20 IQ3 Time Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

T N/A None

The time module is a module within a controller that stores information about the current date and time. Parameter 1 minute pulse 1 second pulse 10 minute pulse 15 min pulse 20 minute pulse 24hour pulse 30 min pulse 5 minute pulse 6 hour pulse 60 min pulse Change by

Current Time Day Day of week Pulse 1 Day of week Pulse 2 Day of week Pulse 3 End Day End Month Hours Minutes Minutes since midnight Month Monthly Pulse Seconds Start Day Start Month Time Master Week Pulse

Description The output is set to 1 at the end of each minute for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 every second for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 10-minute period for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 15-minute period for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 20-minute period a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 every at the start of the day for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 30-minute period for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 5-minute period for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each 6-hour period for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The output is set to 1 at the end of each hour for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. Specifies the time adjustment for automatic winter/summer time changes. When set to a value other than 0 the controller will act as a timemaster. Range = 0 to 2 Where 0 no change, 1 = 1 hour, and 2 = 2 hours. The current time. The current day of the month. Set to 1 on Mon, Wed, Fri, and Sun. Set to 1 on Tue, Wed, Sat and Sun. Set to 1 on Thur, Fri, Sat and Sun. The day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is removed from the time. The month containing the day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is removed from the time. The current hours value. The current minutes value. The number of minutes since midnight. The current month. Range = 1 to 12 Where 1 specifies January. The output is set to 1 every at the start of the month for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0. The current seconds value. The day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is added to the time. The month containing the day on which the adjustment for automatic winter/summer time is added to the time. Indicates whether the controller is a timemaster. 1 = Timemaster The output is set to 1 every at the start of the week for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Output

ID k

Output

i

Output

n

Output

o

Output

a

Output

t

Output

q

Output

l

Output

s

Output

r

Const

G

Output Output Output Output Output Const

c D u v w E

Const

T

Output Output Output Output

H N m M

Output

d

Output Const

C S

Const

O

Const

A

Output

b

343

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Weekday Year Yearly Pulse

Description The current day of the week. Range = 1 to 7 Where 1 specifies Monday. The current year. The output is set to 1 every at the start of the year for a single execution of the strategy and then reset to 0.

Type Output

ID W

Output Output

Y z

A2.21 IQ3 User Modules User modules provide the controller's security. The controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a user level of 99. If no user modules are set up, the controller’s security is disabled. There are differences in the user module’s functionality depending on the version of IQ3 controller. IQ3 Pre v1.3 User modules

IQ3 v1.3 or greater User modules

A2.21.1 IQ3 v1.3 or Greater User Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

U 12 $,O

User modules provide the controller's security. The controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a user level of 99. If no user modules are set up, the controller’s security is disabled. Each module has a PIN, password, username and a user level. The user level determines what parameters a user can adjust, and what information they can see when on the controller’s web pages. When a user attempts to make a change to a parameter in the controller that in PIN protected from a supervisor, a PIN that matches one in the controller with an associated user level high enough to authorise the change must be sent to the controller. If it is not high enough to authorise the change, the change will not be allowed. For user to make a change from one of the controller’s web pages, they must be logged on as a user with a user level high enough to make the change. The table below lists the user levels required for various changes. Task Adjust the value of Knobs, Switches, and Time Zones. Prevent module details and values for Knobs, Switches, and Time Zones, from being adjusted even if the user level required for adjustment in the module is 0. Restrict the user to only viewing Sensors, Digital inputs, Knobs, Switches, Drivers, Time Zones, Time, Plots, and Users, and Alarm enables, Alarm levels, Label, Value, and Units on module detail pages. View all module types and module parameters. File upload File download, Configuration changes, and directed text comms. Text comms local global, or global global.

User Level Defined in module. -1 = 80 >= 85 >= 95 >= 99

When a user first accesses the controller from a web browser, they will be given the status of System Guest and the user level of 100 which gives total access. However, if there are any users set, the System Guest user level will be 1, which allows the module details and parameters to be viewed but not adjusted. If the Guest user has been set up without a password, then the user will be given the status of Guest with the level as set for Guest user. This is explained in the table below: Configuration No users set up. User modules set up but a user called Guest is not set up. User modules set up and the Guest user has a password. User modules set up and the Guest user has no password set up.

Description The system will automatically log the user in as System guest. The system will automatically log the user in as System guest.

User Level 100. -1

The system will automatically log the user in as System guest.

-1

The system will automatically log the user in as Guest.

Defined in the Guest user module

Each user module has the following parameters:

344

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Alarms GraphIQs Navigator GraphIQs pages Home Page

Description Specifies if the user can access alarm information when accessing the controller from a web browser. Specifies where the user can access the navigator when accessing the controller’s graphical display pages. Specifies where the user can access graphical display pages when accessing the controller from a web browser. Specifies the URL of the page that is displayed when the user logs in from a web browser. This link can be to a page of information held within the controller, or a web site that is not the IQ3.

Type Const

ID -

Const

-

Const

-

Const

H

Const

L

Const

-

Const Output

$ O

Const Const

p W

Const

P

Const

T

Const

-

Const

x

Const

y

SET provides an easy way to specify the required URL, however the required format is described below. If linking to a Graphical Display Page the URL should be in the format below: GraphIQs//index.htm Where is the directory module structure of the Display module that defines the page. If linking to a Modules List Page the URL should be in the format below: .htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. E.g. type S.htm to display the sensor module list page. If linking to a Modules Details Page the URL should be in the format below: .htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module. E.g. to display the module details page for sensor 3 type S3.

Level Modules Name Output O Page Password Pin Time out Time Zones X Coordinate Y Coordinate

If linking to web sites enter the Website’s URL. E.g. http://www.trendcontrols.com The user level associated with the user module. Range = -1 to 99 Specifies where the user can access module information when accessing the controller from a web browser. 30-character user-name used when logging in from a web browser. Indicates whether user is currently logged in. When the value is 1 the user is logged in when it is 0 they are not logged in. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The 30-character password that must be entered by the user when logging in from a web browser. The 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a display, or must be sent by a tool/supervisor to authorise a change. The length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off. Range = 1 to 15 minutes Specifies where the user can access timezone information when accessing the controller from a web browser. Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

345

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.21.2 IQ3 Pre v1.3 User Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

U 12 $,O

User modules provide the controller’s security. The controller’s security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the first user module set up has a user level of 99. If no user modules are set up, the controller’s security is disabled. Each module has a PIN, password, username and a user level. The user level determines what parameters a user can adjust, and what information they can see when on the controller’s web pages. When a user attempts to make a change to a parameter in the controller that in PIN protected from a supervisor, a PIN that matches one in the controller with an associated user level high enough to authorise the change must be sent to the controller. If it is not high enough to authorise the change, the change will not be allowed. For user to make a change from one of the controller’s web pages, they must be logged on as a user with a user level high enough to make the change. The table below lists the user levels required for various changes. Task Adjust the value of Knobs, Switches, and Time Zones. Prevent module details and values for Knobs, Switches, and Time Zones, from being adjusted even if the user level required for adjustment in the module is 0. Restrict the user to only viewing Sensors, Digital inputs, Knobs, Switches, Drivers, Time Zones, Time, Plots, and Users, and Alarm enables, Alarm levels, Label, Value, and Units on module detail pages. View all module types and module parameters. File upload File download, Configuration changes, and directed text comms. Text comms local global, or global global.

User Level Defined in module. -1 = 80 >= 85 >= 95 >= 99

When a user first accesses the controller from a web browser, they will be given the status of System Guest and the user level of 100 which gives total access. However, if there are any users set, the System Guest user level will be 1, which allows the module details and parameters to be viewed but not adjusted. If the Guest user has been set up without a password, then the user will be given the status of Guest with the level as set for Guest user. This is explained in the table below: Configuration No users set up. User modules set up but a user called Guest is not set up. User modules set up and the Guest user has a password. User modules set up and the Guest user has no password set up.

Description The system will automatically log the user in as System guest. The system will automatically log the user in as System guest.

User Level 100. -1

The system will automatically log the user in as System guest.

-1

The system will automatically log the user in as Guest.

Defined in the Guest user module

Each user module has the following parameters: Parameter Home Page

Description Specifies the URL of the page that is displayed when the user logs in from a web browser. This link can be to a page of information held within the controller, or a web site that is not the IQ3.

Type Const

ID H

SET provides an easy way to specify the required URL, however the required format is described below. If linking to a Graphical Display Page the URL should be in the format below: GraphIQs//index.htm Where is the directory module structure of the Display module that defines the page.

346

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Home Page

Description If linking to a Modules List Page the URL should be in the format below:

Type

ID

Const

L

Const Output

$ O

Const Const

p W

Const

P

Const

T

Const

x

Const

y

.htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. E.g. type S.htm to display the sensor module list page. If linking to a Modules Details Page the URL should be in the format below: .htm Where specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual. specifies the number of the module. E.g. to display the module details page for sensor 3 type S3.

Level Name Output O Page Password Pin Time out X Coordinate Y Coordinate

If linking to web sites enter the Website’s URL. E.g. http://www.trendcontrols.com The user level associated with the user module. Range = -1 to 99 30-character user-name used when logging in from a web browser. Indicates whether user is currently logged in. When the value is 1 the user is logged in when it is 0 they are not logged in. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The 30-character password that must be entered by the user when logging in from a web browser. The 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a display, or must be sent by a tool/supervisor to authorise a change. The length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off. Range = 1 to 15 minutes Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

A2.22 IQ3 Virtual CNC Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

C 9 $

The Virtual CNC modules store information about the IQ3’s virtual CNC. Virtual CNCs enable the connection between a PC running supervisory or tool software and the IQ network to be made over Ethernet to the virtual CNC. Each user module has the following parameters: Parameter Label Node Address Port Number

Description 30-character user-friendly label for the module. The IQ network address of the virtual CNC. Range = 1,4 to 119 excluding 10. The TCP port used by the virtual CNC Range = 1 to 32767

Type Const Const

ID $ A

Const

P

Note that SET cannot set up the virtual CNC module.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

347

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules A2.23 IQ3 XNC Interface Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

t 230 (5 BrIQs must be added for each input, output, store, or savedVars. 20 BrIQs are required for each line of code in the TCL program. $

XNC interface modules are only available on IQ3…/…/XNC/..s. Each module has the following parameters: Parameter Program Name Program Author Program Version Program MAC TCL Engine Version Program State Current line Alarm Reporting LAN Alarm Reporting Outstation Address Last Error String TCL User Alarm Label 1 TCL User Alarm Label 2 TCL User Alarm Label 3 TCL User Alarm Label 4 TCL User Alarm Label 5 TCL User Alarm Label 6

Description A label for the TCL application read from the TCL application. This is the label that will be used when TCL alarms are sent to the alarm group. The author of the TCL application read from the TCL application. The version of the TCL application. Read from the TCL application. The devices MAC address. The TCL engine firmware version number. Read from the TCL application, The current state of the TCL application. Range 1 to 6 where 1 = Stopped, 2 = Loading, 3 = Running, 4 = At Breakpoint, 5 = Debug, 6 = Error The current line number, 0 unless at breakpoint. LAN address node that will accept error reports. – This will be 0 when the module is created, and will be set by TCLTool 2 when is attached to the outstation. Device address of node that will accept error reports. – This will be 0 when the module is created, and will be set by TCLTool 2 when is attached to the outstation. Last Error reported as a free format text string. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 1. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 2. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 3. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 4. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 5. Label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 6.

Type Read Only

ID $

Read Only

a

Read Only

n

Read Only Read Only

m c

Read Only

P

Read only Const

L R

Const

A

Read Only Const Const Const Const Const Const

l U[1] U[2] U[3] U[4] U[5] U[6]

The XNC interface module can also have up to 1000 inputs each of which will use 5 BrIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the inputs. Parameter Label Value

Description A 30-character label for the input. The value of the input.

Type Const Input

ID I($)* I(V)

specifies the number of the input. The XNC interface module can also have up to 1000 outputs each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the inputs. Parameter Label

Description A 30-character label for the output.

Type Const

Value

The value of the output.

Output

ID O($) * O(V)

specifies the number of the output. The XNC interface module can also have 20 stores that contain a specific string, each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the stores. Parameter Label Value

Description A 30-character label for the stores. The string the sore contains.

Type Const Output

ID S($)* S(V)

specifies the number of the output.

348

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules The XNC interface module also has 100 spaces of non-volatile memory, known as savedVars, which can be used to store both string and numeric data, each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the storage areas Parameter String

Description The stored string cannot contain null characters.

Type Output

Number

The stored number as a floating value.

Output

ID N($) * N(V)

specifies the number of the savedVar. The module also contains the TCL program. Each line of code will use 20 brIQs of the controller’s memory.

A2.24 IQ3 Zone Modules Module Identifier Size in brIQs Default Overview Parameters

Z 566 (Includes 20 exceptions. If more exceptions are used they require 13 brIQs each.) $,S

Zone modules define the occupation times for the controller. Each module has a normal week of seven days (weekday profiles) that define the occupation times for the individual days of the week. Each of these weekday profiles can contain 20 time value pairs. These pairs define a time, and whether the time zone is occupied, or unoccupied at that time. Each zone module has the following parameters: Parameter Current Value

Display Mode Label Page PIN Level X Co-ordinate Y Co-ordinate

Description The status of the module. When the value is 1 the zone is occupied when it is 0 it is unoccupied. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. Specifies whether the zone’s occupation times are displayed graphically, or as text. 30-character user-friendly label for the module. Specifies the strategy page containing the module. The level of the PIN required by the user to make changes to the occupation times. Range = 0 to 99 Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page.

Type Output

ID V

Const

-

Const Const Const

$ p P

Const

x

Const

y

The following parameters are repeated for each of the zone’s time value pairs. Parameter Time Value

Description Specifies the time the specified time zone will be set to the value specified by the value associated with the time. It can be set to any valid time using the 24-hour clock. Specifies the value to which the time zone will be set at the associated time. Range = 0 or 1. 0 indicates unoccupied, and 1 indicates occupied.

Type Const

ID P(T)

Const

P(V)

specifies the number of the time value pair. The time zone can also have 50 exceptions set up that enable different occupation times from the normal to be operated at specified times, e.g. for bank holidays, summer working etc. The following parameters are repeated for each of the zone’s exceptions. Parameter End Day End Month Label Priority Source calendar

Description Specifies the day of the month the exception is to stop. Range = 1 to 31 Specifies the month of the exception is to stop. Range = 1 to 12 30-character user-friendly label for the exception. The priority of the exception used to determine which exception is used if there is an overlap. Range = 0 to 16. 1 is highest priority. The calendar that provides the exception with its times.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Type Const

ID E

Const

T

Const Const

$ P

Const

C 349

Appendix 2 IQ3 Modules Parameter Start Day Start Month Type Use

Description Specifies the day of the month the exception is to start. Range = 1 to 31 Specifies the month of the exception is to start. Range = 1 to 12 Specifies whether the exception is for a single day, or a week. Specifies whether of not the exception is to be repeated very year.

Type Const

ID S

Const

O

Const Const

Y U

If the exception is set as a day exception the exception will have a single weekday profile that can contain 20 time value pairs that define the occupation times for the day. These times will be used for each day to which the exception applies. This means that if a day exception is set to operate over a 2-week period the same occupation times will be used every day for those 2 weeks. If the exception is set as a week exception the exception will have seven-week day profiles (one for each day of the week) each of which can contain 20 time value pairs that define the occupation times for the day. These times will be used for day of the week to which the exception applies. This means that if a week exception is set to operate over a 2-week period the occupation times defined for Monday will be used for the 2 Mondays in that period, the same will be true for the other days of the week. If a week exception is less than 7 days then the relevant times will still be used.

350

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3

APPENDIX 3 MENU COMMANDS

This section provides a simple description of each of SET's menu commands. The following menus are available: Comms Menu Device Menu Edit Menu File Menu Help Menu Project Menu Strategy Menu Tools Menu View Menu Window Menu Some menus are only available when a when a project open, and the command available depend on whether a project is open.

A3.1

Comms Menu

This menu is only available when a project open. It contains commands that enable upload and download strategy, use live edit, and live value, and enter configuration mode on pre IQ3 controllers. The following commands are available: Config Download this page Download Live Edit Live Values Upload A3.1.1

Comms>Config

This command enters configuration mode on a controller. A3.1.2

Comms>Download

This command creates the appropriate downloadable file (IQ3, LDF or IQ2) for the selected controller and downloads it over the network, or to a controller connected directly to the PC on which SET is running. A3.1.3

Comms>Download this page

This command downloads the strategy on the current strategy page to the controller. A3.1.4

Comms>Live Edit

This command enables live edit mode. A3.1.5

Comms>Live Values

This command enables the controller to be commissioned with live values. A3.1.6

Comms>Upload

This command uploads the strategy from an IQ controller in IQ3, IQ2, or SCN file format depending on the firmware version of the controller.

A3.2

Device Menu

This menu is only available when a project open. It contains commands that enable the information about the controller to be displayed. The following commands are available: Address Module Autodial Module Comports Device Details I/O Setup Issue Details Modem Module Network Module Notes Record Module Re-Enable All Modules SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

351

Appendix 3 Menu Commands Sensor Types Store Modules A3.2.1

Device>Address Module

This command displays the Address Module dialogue box that allows the necessary parameters for the controller's address module to be specified. A3.2.2

Device>Autodial Module

This command displays the Autodial Module dialogue box that allows the autodial module for the current controller to be specified. A3.2.3

Device>Comports

This command displays the Comports Module dialogue box that allows the comport modules for the current controller to be specified. A3.2.4

Device>Device Details

This command displays the Device Details dialogue box that allows the device details for the current controller to be viewed and edited. A3.2.5

Device>I/O Setup

This command displays the I/O Setup dialogue box that allows I/O modules to be setup. A3.2.6

Device>Issue Details

This command displays the Issue Details dialogue box that allows the issue details for the current controller to be viewed and edited. A3.2.7

Device>Modem Module

This command displays the Modem Module dialogue that allows the necessary parameters for the controller's modem module to be specified. A3.2.8

Device>Network Module

This command is only available for IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater. It displays the Network Module dialogue box that allows the necessary parameters for the controller's network module to be specified. A3.2.9

Device>Notes

This command displays the Notes dialogue that allows the notes printed on the front page of the printout to be defined. A3.2.10 Device>Record Module This command displays the Record Module dialogue box that allows the necessary parameters for the controller's Record Module to be specified. A3.2.11 Device>Re-Enable All Modules This command enables all modules in the strategy that have been disabled. A3.2.12 Device>Sensor Types This command displays the Sensor Types dialogue box that allows sensor type module for the current controller to be specified. A3.2.13 Device>Store Modules This command displays the Store Module dialogue box that allows store modules for the current controller to be specified.

A3.3

Edit Menu

This menu is only available when a project open. It contains commands that enable the strategy page to be edited such copy and paste. The following commands are available: Auto Routing Copy Cut Delete Page Insert Page Paste

352

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands Undo Last A3.3.1

Edit>Auto Routing

This command toggles automatic routing of links between modules on and off. It appears ticked ( ) when auto routing is on. A3.3.2

Edit>Copy

This command copies the selected module or modules to the clipboard. A3.3.3

Edit>Cut

This command copies the selected module or modules on to the clipboard, and deletes it from the strategy page. A3.3.4

Edit>Delete Page

This command deletes the current strategy page. A3.3.5

Edit>Insert Page

This command inserts a blank page before the current strategy page. A3.3.6

Edit>Paste

This command places the copied modules onto the current strategy page using new modules and sequence steps. A3.3.7

Edit>Undo Last

This command undoes the last action performed by the user.

A3.4

File Menu

The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. It contains commands for creating and opening projects, setting up printing options, and comparing files. When there is no project open the following commands are available: Exit Open/New Project Print Setup When a is project open the following commands are available: Close SET Project Close Strategy Compare>IQ2 (V2>) Compare>IQ3 Compare>SCN Exit Print Print Overview Print Setup A3.4.1

File>Close SET Project

This command is only available when a project open; it closes the SET Project that is currently open. A3.4.2

File>Close Strategy

This command is only available when a project open; it closes the controller for the selected strategy page. A3.4.3

File>Compare>IQ2 (V2>)

This command is only available when a project open, it enables an IQ2 file to be compared with the strategy in the project. Note that this menu option is not available when the selected controller firmware is below version v2.0. A3.4.4

File>Compare>IQ3

This command is only available when a project open, it enables an IQ3 file to be compared with the strategy in the project. A3.4.5

File>Compare>SCN

This command is only available when a project open, it enables a SCN file to be compared with the strategy in the project.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

353

Appendix 3 Menu Commands Note that this menu option is not available when the selected controller is v2.0 firmware or above. A3.4.6

File>Exit

This command closes SET. A3.4.7

File>Open Project /New Project

This command is not available when a project open; it enables an existing project to be opened, a new one to be created, a project imported or exported, and a site file to be opened, or created. A3.4.8

File>Print

This command is only available when a project open, it prints out the project documentation on the specified printer. A3.4.9

File>Print Overview

This command is only available when a project open, it prints the project overview for the controllers selected in the Project View. A3.4.10 File>Print Setup This command allows the printer used to print the project documentation to be specified, and set up.

A3.5

Help Menu

The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. It provides access to SET's electronic manual, the Quick Tours, and displays information about SET. When there is no project open the following commands are available: About SET Getting Help Help Topics Tip of the Day When a is project open the following commands are available: About SET Getting Help Help Topics Help Tours>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 1 Help Tours>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 2 Help Tours>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 3 Tip of the Day A3.5.1

Help>About SET

This menu displays information about SET, and licence information. It enables the licence to be updated. A3.5.2

Help>Help Topics

This command displays SET's electronic manual. A3.5.3

Help>Getting Help

This command displays information about how to get help while using SET. A3.5.4

Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 1

This command is only available when a project open, it provides access to the first of SET's Quick Tours for IQ3 controllers, which provide a good way of learning the basics of using SET. Tour 1 is a step-by-step tutorial that shows you how easy it is to use SET to engineer an IQ system. This tour will show you how to create a simple SET project containing a single controller, document it, and create a IQ3 file for ready for downloading to the controller. A3.5.5

Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 2

This command is only available when a project open, it provides access to the second of SET’s Quick Tours for IQ3 controllers, which provide a good way of learning the basics of using SET. Tour 2 is a step-by-step tutorial that takes you beyond the basic principles of using SET. It introduces some features that will enable you to control how the strategy operates more and to speed up the process of creating a better strategy. It builds on the project created in tour 1 using the new techniques to expand the strategy.

354

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.5.6

Help>Learning SET>IQ3 Tour 3

This command is only available when a project open, it provides access to the third of SET’s Quick Tours for IQ3 controllers, which provide a good way of learning the basics of using SET. Tour 3 is a step-by-step tutorial that shows you how to use some of the more advanced features of SET, and how SET can be customised to suit your requirements. A3.5.7

Help>Tip of Day

This command displays the Tip of the Day dialogue box that provides helpful tips about SET and its use.

A3.6

Project Menu

The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. When there is no project open the following command is available: Site(s) When a is project open the following commands are available: Create Data Files Export Project Data to 963 v1.2 Export Project Data to 963 v2 Import ACE File Import Backdrop File Import IQ2 File (V2.1> Firmware Only) Import IQ3 File Project Compare Project Details Site(s) A3.6.1

Project>Create Data Files

This command is only available when a project open. It creates the IQ3, IQ2, or LDF files required for strategy download for the controllers selected in the Project View. A3.6.2

Project>Export Project Data to 963 v1.2

This command is only available when a project open. It enables data to be exported to 963. A3.6.3

Project>Export Project Data to 963 v2

This command is only available when a project open. It enables data to be exported to 963. A3.6.4

Project>Import ACE File

This command is only available when a project open. It enables an ACE file to be imported. A3.6.5

Project>Import Backdrop File

This command is only available when a project open. It imports backdrops that have been uploaded from IQ3 controllers into the backdrop directory of the current SET project. A3.6.6

Project>Import IQ2 File (V2.1> Firmware Only)

This command is only available when a project open. It imports an IQ2 format file into the current project. This is useful for backward engineering an IQ controller. A3.6.7

Project>Import IQ3 File

This command is only available when a project open. It imports an IQ3 format file into the current project. This is useful for backward engineering an IQ controller. A3.6.8

Project>Project Details

This command is only available when a project open. It displays the Project Details dialogue box that allows information about the project to be viewed and edited. A3.6.9

Project>Project Compare

This command is only available when a project open. It enables the strategy held by SET for a number of selected IQ controllers to be compared with the associated strategy file. A3.6.10 Project>Site(s) This command displays the Site Connections dialogue box. SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

355

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.7

Strategy Menu

This menu is only available when a project open. It contains commands that enable the strategy files to be created. The following commands are available: Create LDF File Create IQ2 File Create IQ3 File A3.7.1

Strategy>Create LDF File

This command creates two LDF files of the strategy for the selected controller. The content of the files is the same, however the naming convention is different. One file is named using the convention where the first three characters of the file name specify the Lan number, and the next three specify the controller’s address. E.g. 024025.LDF would be the LDF file for controller 25 on Lan 25. This is the same as that used by 822+/Toolbox. The other file uses the convention where the Lan number is preceded by an ‘L’, and the controller address is preceded by an ‘n’. E.g. L024n025.LDF would be the LDF file for controller 25 on Lan 25. A3.7.2

Strategy>Create IQ2 File

This command creates an IQ2 File of the strategy that has been set up for the selected device. A3.7.3

Strategy>Create IQ3 File

This command creates an IQ3 File of the strategy that has been set up for the selected controller.

A3.8

Tools Menu

The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. It contains commands for performing different tasks on the strategy that has been defined. When there is no project open the following commands are available: IQL Tool 2 Monitor Incoming Alarms SDU Tool SET Options ToolSET Options Trend IP-Tool Unlock XNC Application User Role When a is project open the following commands are available: Command Line Display and Directory Setup Export Device List Free/Next Modules List IQL Tool 2 Label Find and Replace Monitor Incoming Alarms SDU Tool Sequence Steps>Free Sequence Steps>Insert Sequence Steps>Move Sequence Steps>Skip SET Options ToolSET Options Trend IP-Tool Unlock XNC Application Unplaced Modules User Role A3.8.1

Tools>Command Line

This command is only available when a project open. It moves the cursor to the Command Line toolbar providing it is displayed. A3.8.2

Tools>Display and Directory Setup

This command is only available when a project open. It displays the Display and Directory Setup dialogue box, which enables display modules and directory modules to be set up. 356

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.8.3

Tools>Export Device List

This command is only available when a project open. It exports the identifier, IP address, subnet mask, default router, UDP port number, Lan number, and node number for all the IQ3 controllers in the current project to a file. This file can be imported into IP Tool and used to define the devices address settings. A3.8.4

Tools>Free/Next Module List

This command is only available when a project open. It displays a list of how many modules of each module type are still free for use. A3.8.5

Tools>IQL Tool 2

This command runs IQL Tool 2. A3.8.6

Tools>Label Find and Replace

This command is only available when a project open. It enables a find and replace function to be carried out on the specified module labels. A3.8.7

Tools>Monitor Incoming Alarms

This command runs the Alarm Monitoring Applet. A3.8.8

Tools>SDU Tool

This command runs SDU Tool. A3.8.9

Tools>Sequence Steps>Free

This command is only available when a project open. It enables modules to be removed from the sequence table. A3.8.10 Tools>Sequence Steps>Insert This command is only available when a project open. It enables a gap of a specified number of sequence steps to be inserted in the sequence table before a specified step. A3.8.11 Tools>Sequence Steps>Move This command is only available when a project open. It enables a module to be moved to a particular place in the sequence table. A3.8.12 Tools>Sequence Steps>Skip This command is only available when a project open. When a new page is created, SET automatically leaves a gap in the sequence table. This command enables the number of sequence steps skipped between each page to be specified. A3.8.13 Tools>SET Options This command enables the company details, base project directory, strategy block directory, and default labels to be set up. It also enables Auto Edit and Module Tool Tips to be turned on/off. A3.8.14 Tools>ToolSET Options This command display a dialogue box which enables certain parameters relating to how SET works, known as ToolSET functions to be defined. A3.8.15 Tools>Trend-IP Tool This command runs IP Tool. A3.8.16 Tools>Unlock XNC Application This command runs enables a TCL application to be unlocked. A3.8.17 Tools>Unplaced Modules This command is only available when a project open. It displays a list of all the modules that are in the strategy database, but have not yet been placed on a strategy page. Note that modules will only exist in the strategy database, and not on a strategy page if a strategy comparison has been done, and the x, y, and p parameters were not set up. A3.8.18 Tools>User Role This command enables the user role of the current user to be temporally changed.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

357

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.9

View Menu

The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. It contains commands that enable SET’s various toolbars to be toggled ON/OFF, and allow the user to zoom in/out of the modules displayed on the strategy page. When there is no project open the following commands are available: Theme>Grippered Theme>Office 2003 Theme>Office XP Theme>Visio 2003 Theme>Win XP Theme When a is project open the following commands are available: Alarms Command Line Comms Draw Tools Drivers Full Screen Functions Functions 2 ICComms Inputs Logics Other Pointers Project View Sequence SET Tools Standard Status Bar Strategy Library System View Theme>Grippered Theme>Office 2003 Theme>Office XP Theme>Visio 2003 Theme>Win XP Theme Tracker View Window Position Zoom 100% Zoom 150% Zoom 200% Zoom 25% Zoom 300% Zoom 50% Zoom 75% Zoom Window A3.9.1

View Alarms

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Alarms toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.2

View>Command Line

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Command Line toolbar, shown below, ON/OFF. A3.9.3

View>Comms

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Comms toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.4

View>Draw Tool

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Draw Tools toolbar ON/OFF.

358

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.9.5

View>Drivers

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Drivers toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.6

View>Full Screen

This command is only available when a project open. It displays the current strategy page full screen. A3.9.7

View>Functions

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Functions toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.8

View>Functions 2

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Functions 2 toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.9

View>ICComms

This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the ICComms toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.10 View>Inputs This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Inputs toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.11 View>Logics This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Logics toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.12 View>Other This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Other toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.13 View>Pointers This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Pointers toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.14 View>Project View This command is only available when a project open. It displays the Project View. A3.9.15 View>SET Tools This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the SET Tools toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.16 View>Sequence This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Sequence toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.17 View>Standard This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Standard toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.18 View>Status Bar This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Status bar ON/OFF. A3.9.19 View>Strategy Library This command is only available when a project open. It displays the Strategy Library. A3.9.20 View>System View This command is only available when a project open. It displays the System View. A3.9.21 View>Theme>Grippered This command selected the Grippered theme for the toolbar display. A3.9.22 View>Theme>Office 2003 This command selected the Office 2003 theme for the toolbar display. A3.9.23 View>Theme>Office XP This command selected the Office XP theme for the toolbar display. A3.9.24 View>Theme>Win XP Theme This command selected the Win XP theme for the toolbar display. A3.9.25 View>Theme>Visio 2003 This command selected the Visio 2003 theme for the toolbar display.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

359

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.9.26 View>Tracker View This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Tracker View, ON/OFF. A3.9.27 View>Window Position This command is only available when a project open. It toggles the display of the Window Position toolbar ON/OFF. A3.9.28 View>Zoom 25% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to one quarter of the actual size. A3.9.29 View>Zoom 50% This command zooms to half of the actual size. A3.9.30 View>Zoom 75% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to three-quarters of the actual size. A3.9.31 View>Zoom 100% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to the actual size. A3.9.32 View>Zoom 150% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to one and a half times the actual size. A3.9.33 View>Zoom 200% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to twice the actual size. A3.9.34 View>Zoom 300% This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to three times the actual size. A3.9.35 View>Zoom Window This command is only available when a project open. It zooms to a specified area on the current strategy page.

A3.10 Window Menu The commands on this menu vary depending on whether a project open. It enables different windows to be selected, and for them to be organised. When there is no project open the following commands are available: More Windows When a is project open the following commands are available: Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically More Windows A3.10.1 Window>Cascade This command is only available when a project open. It cascades all the windows. A3.10.2 Window>Tile Horizontally This command is only available when a project open. It tiles all the windows horizontally. A3.10.3 Window>Tile Vertically This command is only available when a project open. It tiles all the windows vertically.

360

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 3 Menu Commands A3.10.4 Window>More Windows This command is only available when tasks have opened another window. It displays the Arrange Windows dialogue box that enables windows opened by other tasks to be opened, closed, and activated.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

361

Appendix 3 Menu Commands

This page is intentionally left blank.

362

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 4 Command Line Commands A4

APPENDIX 4 COMMAND LINE COMMANDS

This section lists all the commands that can be used in the Command Line toolbar. Modules Module ABS Function Module ABS Function Module Add Function Module Add Function Module Add Function Module Adder/Scaler Function Module Adder/Scaler Function Module Adder/Scaler Function Module Adjustment Knob Module Adjustment Knob Module Adjustment Knob Module Alarm Destination Module Alarm Destination Module Alarm Group Module Alarm Group Module Alarm Route Module Alarm Route Module Analogue Driver Module Analogue Driver Module Analogue Driver Module Analogue to Digital Function Module Analogue to Digital Function Module Analogue to Digital Function Module Average Function Module Average Function Module Average Function Module Binary Switch Driver Module Binary Switch Driver Module Combination Logic Module Combination Logic Module Combination Logic Module Comparator Function Module Comparator Function Module Comparator Function Module Counter Logic Module Counter Logic Module Counter Logic Module Counter Logic Module D to A Logic Module D to A Logic Module D to A Logic Module Delay Logic Module Delay Logic Module Delay Logic Module Digital Driver Module Digital Driver Module Digital Driver Module Digital Input Module Digital Input Module Digital Input Module Divide Function Module Divide Function Module Dummy IC Comms Module Enthalpy Function Module

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Command to Type F24 FABS F20 ADD FADD ADDER FAD F8 ADJUST ADJUSTMENT KNOB KA ALARM DEST DEST ALARM GROUP GROUP ALARM ROUTE ROUTE ANALOGUE D2 DA A TO D FA/ F18 AVERAGE F13 FAV BIN HYST D5 COMB G1 GCOM FC COMPARATOR F15 G4 COUNTER G4 GC D TO A G8 GDTO G5 DELAY GD D1 DD DIGITAL DIGIN DIGITAL INPUT I DIVIDE F10 DUMMY ENTHALPY

363

Appendix 4 Command Line Commands Module Enthalpy Function Module Enthalpy Function Module External Digital Sensor Module External Digital Sensor Module External Sensor Module External Sensor Module Fan Out Logic Module Fan Out Logic Module Fan Out Logic Module Filter Function Module Filter Function Module Filter Function Module Gate Function Module Gate Function Module Gate Function Module Hours Run Logic Module Hours Run Logic Module Hours Run Logic Module Hysteresis Band Function Module Hysteresis Band Function Module Hysteresis Band Function Module Hysteresis Limits Function Module Hysteresis Limits Function Module Hysteresis Limits Function Module Internal Digital Sensor Module Internal Digital Sensor Module Internal Sensor Module Internal Sensor Module Internal Sensor Module Knob Module Knob Module Limit at Function Module Limit at Function Module Limit at Function Module Limit to Function Module Limit to Function Module Limit to Function Module Log Function Module Log Function Module Log Function Module Lookup Function Module Lookup Function Module Lookup Function Module Loop Module Loop Module Maximum Function Module Maximum Function Module Maximum Function Module Minimum Function Module Minimum Function Module Minimum Function Module Multiply Function Module Multiply Function Module Multiply Function Module Plot Module Plot Module Power Function Module Power Function Module

364

Command to Type F16 FE EXT DIG SEN S3 EXT SEN S1 G7 FANOUT GF F1 FF FILTER F14 FG GATE G6 GH HOURS RUN F17 FH HYSTERESIS F21 FHL HYSTERESIS LIMITS INT DIG SEN S4 INT SEN INTERNAL SENSOR S2 K KNOB F4 FLA LIMIT AT F5 FLT LIMIT TO F6 FL LOG F19 FLK LOOKUP L LOOP F12 FMAX MAXIMUM F11 FMIN MINIMUM F9 FMU MULTIPLY P PLOT F23 FPOW

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 4 Command Line Commands Module Power Function Module Proximity Function Module Proximity Function Module Proximity Function Module Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Module Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Module Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Module Raise/Lower End Driver Module Raise/Lower End Driver Module Raise/Lower End Driver Module Raise/Lower End Driver Module Readback Logic Module Readback Logic Module Readback Logic Module Redraw the screen Rescale from Function Module Rescale from Function Module Rescale from Function Module Rescale to Function Module Rescale to Function Module Rescale to Function Module Schedule Module Schedule Module Schedule Module Square Root Function Module Square Root Function Module Square Root Function Module Switch Module Switch Module Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module Time Proportional Driver Module Time Proportional Driver Module Time Proportional Driver Module Timer Logic Module Timer Logic Module Timer Logic Module TRIG Function Module TRIG Function Module TRIG Function Module TRUNC Function Module TRUNC Function Module TRUNC Function Module Zone Module Zone Module Zone Module SET Commands SET Command Draw a line Draw a rectangle Draw a rectangle Draw an ellipse Draw an ellipse Draw text Fill the window with the used area of the strategy page

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Command to Type POWER PROXIMITY F22 FPROX RAISE LOWER CONT D7 DRLC D4 D4 DRLE RAISE LOWER END G3 GR READBACK REDRAW F2 FRF RESCALE FROM F3 FRT RESCALE TO H SCHED SCHEDULE F7 FSR ROOT SWITCH W D6 TIME PROP ORIDE TPO D3 D3 DTP TIME PROP G2 GT TIMER F26 FTRG TRIG F25 FTR TRUNC TIME TIME ZONE TZ Command to Type LINE RECTANGLE SQUARE CIRCLE ELLIPSE TEXT EXTENT

365

Appendix 4 Command Line Commands SET Command Goto the next page Goto the previous page Zoom to a specific area Zoom to a specific area

366

Command to Type NEXT PREV Z ZOOM

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 5 Toolbars A5

APPENDIX 5 TOOLBARS

This section provides a simple description of each of SET's toolbars. The following toolbars are available: Alarms toolbar Command Line toolbar Comms toolbar Draw Tools toolbar Drivers toolbar Functions 2 toolbar Functions toolbar ICComms toolbar Inputs toolbar Logic toolbar Other toolbar Pointers toolbar Sequence toolbar SET Tools toolbar Standard toolbar Window Position toolbar

A5.1

Alarms Toolbar

The Alarms toolbar enables the different alarm modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

A5.2

Description Enables the Alarm Handling Groups to be set up. Enables a Critical Alarm module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Destination module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Route module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Group module to be added to the strategy page.

Command Line Toolbar

The Command Line toolbar enables the SET’s commands to be entered using keystrokes.

The text box enables the required command to be entered; the icon step to be found.

A5.3

enables the specified module, or sequence

Comms Toolbar

The Comms toolbar enables file uploads and downloads, and access to live values and live editing.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Enters configuration mode on a controller. Enables live edit mode. Enables the controller to be commissioned using live values. Upload the strategy from the controller. Downloads the strategy to the controller. Downloads the strategy on the current strategy page to the controller.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

367

Appendix 5 Toolbars A5.4

Draw Tools Toolbar

The Draw Tools toolbar enables the different objects and text to be added to a strategy page.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

A5.5

Description Adds a circle to the strategy page. Adds a line to the strategy page. Adds a joined line to the strategy page. Adds a rectangle to the strategy page. Adds text to the strategy page. Adds a dummy ic comms module to the strategy page.

Drivers Toolbar

The Drivers toolbar enables the different driver modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

A5.6

Description Enables a Digital Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables an Analogue Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Time Proportional Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Raise Lower End Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Binary Hysteresis Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Time Proportional + Override Driver to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Raise Lower Continuous Driver to be added to the strategy page.

Functions 2 Toolbar

The Functions 2 toolbar enables the different function modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

A5.7

Description Enables a Lookup Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables an Add Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Hysteresis Limits Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Proximity Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Power Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables an ABS Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables a TRUNC Function module to be added to the strategy. Enables a TRIG Function module to be added to the strategy.

Functions Toolbar

The Functions toolbar enables the different function modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar.

368

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 5 Toolbars Icon

A5.8

Description Enables a Filter Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Rescale From Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Rescale To module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Limit At Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Limit To Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Log Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Square Root Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables an Adder/Scaler Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Multiply Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Divide Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Minimum Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Maximum Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables an Average Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Gate Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Comparator Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables an Enthalpy Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables a Hysteresis Band Function module to be added to a strategy page. Enables an A to D Function module to be added to a strategy page.

ICComms Toolbar

The ICComms toolbar enables the different IC Comms modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

A5.9

Description Enables a Data From IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Data To IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Global To IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Minimum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Maximum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables a Sum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page. Enables an Average IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.

Inputs Toolbar

The Inputs toolbar enables the different input modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Enables an External Sensor to be added to the strategy. Enables an Internal Sensor to be added to the strategy. Enables an External Digital Sensor to be added to the strategy. Enables an Internal Digital Sensor to be added to the strategy. Enables a Digital Input to be added to the strategy. Enables a Knob to be added to the strategy. Enables an Adjustment Knob to be added to the strategy. Not IQ3 Enables a Switch to be added to the strategy. Enables an Analogue Node to be added to the strategy. IQ3 Only Enables a Digital Node to be added to the strategy. IQ3 Only

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

369

Appendix 5 Toolbars A5.10 Logics Toolbar The Logics toolbar enables the different logic modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Enables a Combination Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Timer Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Readback Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Counter Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Delay Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables an Hours Run Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Fan Out Logic module to be added to the strategy. Enables a D to A Logic module to be added to the strategy.

A5.11 Other Toolbar The Other toolbar enables modules to be added to the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Enables a To Connective to be added to the strategy. Enables a Connective to be added to the strategy. Enables an Undefined Connective to be added to the strategy. Enables a Loop module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Schedule module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Zone module to be added to the strategy. Enables an OSS module to be added to the strategy. Enables a Plot module to be added to the strategy. Enables a User module to be added to the strategy.

A5.12 Pointers Toolbar The Pointers toolbar enables navigation around the strategy.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

370

Description Enables the Next Module List to be viewed. Goes to the previous strategy page. Goes to go to the next strategy page Goes to a specified strategy page Add a strategy page. Delete the current strategy page. Inserts a strategy page before the current page. Displays details about the current strategy page.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 5 Toolbars A5.13 Sequence Toolbar The Sequence toolbar enables the sequence table to be set up.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Enables modules to be moved modules to a specified step in the sequence table. Enables modules to be removed from the sequence table. Enables a gap to be inserted in the sequence table. Enables the gap left in the sequence table when a page is inserted to be specified.

A5.14 SET Tools Toolbar The SET Tools toolbar provides access to some of SET’s features.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Displays the Project View. Displays the Strategy Library. Zooms to the selected area. Returns the display to the original size. Zooms to the top left corner. Zooms to the top right corner. Zooms to the bottom left corner. Zooms to the bottom left corner. Turns auto routing ON/OFF. Enables the set up of display and directory modules.

A5.15 Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar provides access to the basic SET functions.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

Description Copies the selected modules to the clipboard. Cuts the selected modules to the clipboard. Pastes modules from the clipboard into the strategy. Automatically prints all the project documentation for the selected controller. Displays the About SET dialogue box. Displays SET’s help file. Displays the SET dialogue box. Enables a new project to be created.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

371

Appendix 5 Toolbars A5.16 Window Position Toolbar The Window Position toolbar enables the different windows that are open to be arranged.

The table below describes the icons on the toolbar. Icon

372

Description Displays the Project View. Displays the System View. Displays the Tracker Window. Displays the window full screen. Displays the window in the bottom half of the screen. Displays the window in the bottom left of the screen. Displays the window in the bottom right of the screen. Displays the window in the top half of the screen. Displays the window in the top left of the screen. Displays the window in the top right of the screen. Displays the window on the left of the screen. Displays the window on the right of the screen. Locks the position of all windows.

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Appendix 6 Keyboard Short Cuts A6

APPENDIX 6 KEYBOARD SHORT CUTS

Shortcut CTRL+A CTRL+ALT+I CTRL+C CTRL+F CTRL+L CTRL+M CTRL+N CTRL+O CTRL+T CTRL+U CTRL+V CTRL+X ESC F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Description Select all Create LDF Copy Displays the current strategy page full screen. Displays the System View Select the Command Line toolbar Navigate window Display version info Display the Tracker Window Deselect all Paste Cut Cancel edit Help Zoom Zoom to 100% Display top left Display top right Display bottom left Display bottom right

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

373

Appendix 6 Keyboard Short Cuts

This page is intentionally left blank.

374

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Index INDEX About SET............................................................................................ 66 ABS Function Modules .......................................................245, 303 ACE Files..................................................................................... 191 Import...................................................................................... 355 Add Alarm Group Modules............................................................ 124 Alarm Handling Groups ......................................................... 124 Connectives............................................................................. 164 Connectives to Alarm Status Information .............................. 162 Connectives to System Information ....................................... 163 Directory Modules ....................................................85, 138, 139 Display Modules .......................................................86, 139, 141 Dummy IC Comms Modules.................................................. 121 Free Node................................................................................ 167 Gap in Sequence Table ........................................................... 130 I/O Modules ............................................................................ 126 IQ Controllers ................................................................... 69, 172 IQ System Sites....................................................................... 210 Lans........................................................................................... 68 Modules...........................................................................117, 165 Modules to the Sequence Table.............................................. 129 Modules Using Strategy Blocks ............................................. 117 Modules Using the Command Bar ...........................97, 165, 193 Non IQ System Site ................................................................ 209 Plant Directories ..................................................................... 175 Sensor Definitions..................................................................... 96 Sensor Type Modules .....................................................109, 110 Stategy Block Groups ............................................................... 47 Static Display .......................................................................... 140 Strategy Blocks ......................................................................... 48 Strategy Issues ................................................................149, 150 Strategy Pages...........................................................77, 166, 353 Text ...................................................................................83, 146 TO Connectives ...................................................................... 166 Undefined Connectives to a Module ...................................... 166 Undefined Connectives to a Node .......................................... 167 Unplaced Modules .................................................................. 167 User Parameters ...................................................................... 213 ADD Function Modules ......................................................245, 304 Adder/Scaler Function Module ...........................................246, 304 Address Module...................................................................279, 281 Adjustment Knob Modules.......................................................... 258 ADL Device ....................................................................................... 32 Support............................................................................111, 112 Alarm Cleared Alarms ....................................................................... 223 View ........................................................................................ 223 View History........................................................................... 223 Alarm Address .....................................................................279, 281 Alarm Handling Strategy Set up ...................................................................................... 123 Alarm Toolbar.............................................................................. 358 Alarms Disable .................................................................................... 123 Enable ..................................................................................... 123 Analog Node Array.............................................................................. 167 Analogue Node Array.............................................................................. 186 Analogue Driver Modules ...................................................238, 290 Analogue Node Modules ............................................................. 321 Analogue to Digital Function Modules ...............................246, 305 Analogue Values Chart........................................................................................ 218 Graph....................................................................................... 218 Auto Routing Disable .................................................................................... 353 Enable ..................................................................................... 353 Autodialled Sites...................................................................... 31, 32 Autodialling Information ............................................................................. 178 Average Function Modules .................................................247, 306 Average IC Comms Modules ..............................................254, 317 Backdrop Files .....................................................................190, 355 Backup

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Backup the Project.................................................... 97, 153, 154 Backwards Engineering................................................. 92, 191, 192 BAK file....................................................................................... 155 Base Project Directory................................................................... 99 Binary Switch Driver Modules............................................ 239, 291 Browse the Live Site.................................................................... 205 Change Controller Details ................................................................... 182 Controller Type............................................................... 169, 170 Driver Output Channel ........................................................... 128 File Directory.......................................................................... 224 Firmware Version ........................................................... 169, 170 I/O Module.............................................................................. 126 Labels...................................................................................... 185 Module Configuration Parameters ................................... 76, 127 Module Destination ................................................................ 127 Module Sequence Step ..................................................... 89, 129 Next Module Number............................................................. 197 Node's Value................................................................... 127, 170 Order of Display Modules ...................................................... 143 Outstation address................................................................... 172 Page Details ............................................................................ 196 Project Details......................................................................... 101 Sensor Definition...................................................................... 46 Undefined Connective Label.................................................. 127 Chart............................................................................................. 218 Close Project ............................................................................. 170, 353 SET ......................................................................................... 354 Strategy Page .......................................................................... 170 Colapse Strategy Library ...................................................................... 179 System View........................................................................... 179 Combination Logic Module ................................................ 263, 330 Command Line Toolbar .............................................................. 358 Add Modules ............................................................ 97, 165, 193 Find Modules ............................................97, 185, 188, 189, 193 Find Nodes.............................................................................. 188 Go to a Page............................................................................ 189 Using............................................................................... 185, 189 Comms Connection Delete ........................................................................................ 38 Edit............................................................................................ 39 Comms Toolbar ........................................................................... 358 Communications Window ........................................................... 178 Compact Graphs .......................................................................... 218 Comparator Function Modules............................................ 247, 306 Comparing Strategies IQ2 Files ......................................................................... 153, 155 IQ3 Files ................................................................................... 97 Multiple Strategies.................................................................. 154 Single Strategies ..................................................................... 153 Strategies................................................................... 97, 153, 155 Undo........................................................................................ 155 Compatibility ................................................................................. 18 Config Session Enter........................................................................................ 183 Window................................................................................... 183 Configuration Mode .................................................................... 183 Send Commands ..................................................................... 183 Configuration Parameters.................................................... 127, 198 Configure Communications Settings......................................................... 32 Configuration Mode ............................................................... 183 IQ Controllers ......................................................................... 105 IQ3/XNC................................................................. 106, 115, 116 XNC Interface Module ........................................................... 115 Connect ADL Devices ............................................................................ 32 Autodialled Sites....................................................................... 32 Over Ethernet............................................................................ 31 To a Controller.......................................................................... 32 To a Land Line ......................................................................... 33 To a Node Controller................................................................ 32 Using SANC ............................................................................. 33 Via a MODEM ......................................................................... 33 Connectives

375

Index Add ..................................................................................164, 166 Defining...................................................................................175 Delete ......................................................................................176 To Connectives .................................................................84, 166 Undefined................................................................................175 Contacting Trend ...........................................................................16 Controllers Add ............................................................................................69 Backward Engineer.........................................................191, 192 Change type.....................................................................169, 170 Copy ........................................................................................172 Copy to different project.........................................................172 Delete ......................................................................................177 Download To...........................................................224, 226, 228 Duplicate .................................................................................172 Edit Details..............................................................................182 Firmware Version ...................................................................169 Upload From ...................................................................229, 230 Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................16 Convert IQ2 Strategy to IQ3 Strategy ..........................................169, 170 Copy Controller to different porject .................................................172 Controllers...............................................................................172 Modules...................................................................................173 Strategy Page to Clipboard .....................................................172 Copy an Old Strategy Block to the Custom Library .....................49 Counter Logic Modules .......................................................263, 331 Create Directory Modules ....................................................................85 Duplicate Controllers ..............................................................172 IQ Controllers ...........................................................................69 IQ System Sites.......................................................................210 IQ2 Files..................................................................173, 174, 356 IQ3 Files............................................................79, 173, 174, 356 LDF Files ........................................................................174, 356 Non IQ System Sites...............................................................209 Plant Directories......................................................................175 Projects................................................................................67, 99 Sensor Type Modules .............................................................109 Site Files..........................................................................205, 206 Strategy ...................................................................................105 Strategy Block Group ...............................................................47 Strategy Blocks .........................................................................48 Strategy Pages ...................................................................77, 166 Creating Strategy Block...........................................................................93 D to A Logic Modules .........................................................264, 332 Data From IC Comms Modules...................................................255 Data To IC Comms Modules ...............................................255, 318 Default Display Options.......................................................................198 Define Sensor Type Module ...............................................................109 Strategy's Issue..........................................................79, 149, 150 Undefined Connective ............................................................175 Delay Logic Module ............................................................264, 331 Delete Connection ................................................................................38 Connective ..............................................................................176 Controller ................................................................................177 Directory Module....................................................................143 Display Module.......................................................................143 Exceptions...............................................................................134 Graphics ..................................................................................147 I/O Modules ............................................................................126 Lan...........................................................................................103 Link .........................................................................................177 Modules...................................................................................177 Modules from the Sequence Table .................................129, 130 Plant Directories......................................................................177 Projects....................................................................................102 Sensor Definitions.....................................................................46 Sites .........................................................................................210 Standard Comms Connection ...................................................38 Strategy Block Groups..............................................................50 Strategy Blocks .........................................................................49 Strategy Pages .................................................................177, 353 Text .........................................................................................147

376

User Modules.......................................................................... 137 User Nodes.............................................................................. 213 User Parameters from a User Node ........................................ 213 Users ......................................................................................... 52 Device Change Type ........................................................................... 169 Edit Details ............................................................................. 182 View Details ........................................................................... 200 Device Properties Display .................................................................................... 219 Digital Byte Modules................................................................... 322 Digital Driver Modules........................................................ 240, 293 Digital Input Modules.................................................................. 259 Digital Node Array ......................................................127, 167, 186 Directory Modules ......................................................................... 84 Add............................................................................85, 138, 139 Delete ...................................................................................... 143 Export Structure...................................................................... 144 Import Structure...................................................................... 144 Set up ...................................................................................... 356 Disable Alarms..................................................................................... 123 Modules................................................................................... 177 Display Alarms..................................................................................... 223 Auto dialling Information ....................................................... 178 Cleared Alarms ....................................................................... 223 Communications Information................................................. 178 Compact Graph ....................................................................... 218 Device Information ......................................................... 219, 220 Device Properties.................................................................... 220 Display Module Properties ..................................................... 220 Fee Modules............................................................................ 357 Graphs ..................................................................................... 218 Help File.................................................................................. 354 Language......................................................................... 279, 281 List of Device Contents .......................................................... 214 List of Devices on a Lan......................................................... 215 List of Internetwork Devices .................................................. 215 List of Module Parameters ..................................................... 216 List of Modules....................................................................... 217 List of Objects......................................................................... 217 List of Site Contents ............................................................... 217 List View Window..........................................214, 215, 216, 217 Parameter Properties............................................................... 220 Site Properties ......................................................................... 220 Strategy Page .......................................................................... 189 System View ................................................................... 179, 205 Tip of the Day ......................................................................... 180 Display and Directory Module Structure Export Sturcture...................................................................... 144 Import Sturcture...................................................................... 144 Display Area .................................................................................. 19 Display Modules ............................................................84, 287, 288 Add....................................................................86, 139, 140, 141 Change Order.......................................................................... 143 Delete ...................................................................................... 143 Set up .............................................................................. 141, 143 Display the Item Selector ............................................................ 179 Divide Function Modules .................................................... 248, 307 Dock Project View ........................................................................... 180 Search Library......................................................................... 180 Strategy Library .............................................................. 179, 180 System View ................................................................... 179, 180 Documentation...............................................................79, 150, 151 Download..................................................................................... 226 Different Strategies to Multiple Controllers........................... 226 IQ2 Files..........................................................147, 224, 226, 228 IQ3 Files..........................................................147, 224, 226, 228 IQF Files .................................................................224, 226, 228 LDF Files ........................................................147, 224, 226, 228 PIN ..........................................................................224, 226, 228 Single Page of Strategy........................................................... 180 Single Strategy to Multiple Controllers.................................. 224 Strategy ................................................................................... 351 To a Single Controller ............................................................ 228 To an IQ Controller ................................................................ 147 To Multiple Controllers .................................................. 224, 226

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Index Using Another Tool ................................................................ 149 Using SET............................................................................... 147 Downloadable Files IQ2 ..................................................................................173, 174 IQ3 ............................................................................79, 173, 174 LDF ......................................................................................... 174 Draw Tool Toolbar ...................................................................... 358 Driver Modules Analogue .........................................................................238, 290 Binary Switch .................................................................239, 291 Change Output Channel.......................................................... 128 Digital .............................................................................240, 293 Raise/Lower Continuous ................................................240, 295 Raise/Lower End.............................................................242, 297 Time Proportional ...........................................................243, 299 Time Proportional + O/R ................................................244, 301 Driver Toolbar ............................................................................. 359 Duplicate Controllers................................................................... 172 Edit Configuration Parameters ....................................................... 127 Connection ................................................................................ 39 Controller Details.................................................................... 182 Controller Type....................................................................... 169 Device Details......................................................................... 182 Driver Output Channel ........................................................... 128 I/O Modules ............................................................................ 126 IQ3 Display Modules......................................................143, 144 Labels ...................................................................................... 185 Lan Details .............................................................................. 103 Module Destination ................................................................ 127 Modules.....................................................................76, 127, 128 Next Module Number ............................................................. 197 Node's Value ........................................................................... 127 Page Details ............................................................................ 196 Project Details......................................................................... 101 Sensor Definitions..................................................................... 46 Sequence Table .........................................................89, 129, 130 Site .......................................................................................... 211 Standard Comms Connection ................................................... 39 Strategy Block Properties ......................................................... 50 Strategy Block Strategy ............................................................ 50 Undefined Connective Label .................................................. 127 User Modules .......................................................................... 137 User Nodes.............................................................................. 214 Users ......................................................................................... 52 Value of a Node ...................................................................... 170 EINC .............................................................................................. 31 Enable Alarms..................................................................................... 123 Modules................................................................................... 177 Enter Unlock Code ............................................................................. 28 Enter Configuration Mode........................................................... 183 Send Commands ..................................................................... 183 Enthalpy Function Module ..................................................248, 307 Ethernet .......................................................................................... 31 Exceptions Delete ...................................................................................... 134 Expand Strategy Library ...................................................................... 179 System View ........................................................................... 179 Export Data to 963......................................................................184, 355 Data to IP Tool........................................................................ 184 Display and Directory Module Structure ............................... 144 External Digital Input Modules ................................................... 323 External Digital Sensor Modules.........................................259, 324 External Sensor Modules.....................................................260, 324 Fan Out Logic Modules .......................................................265, 333 Fast Sequencing ............................................................................. 89 Filter Function Modules ......................................................248, 308 Find Fixed System Nodes ............................................................... 186 Modules.....................................................97, 185, 188, 189, 193 Particular Node ...............................................................127, 186 Sequence Step ......................................................................... 189 Where a Node is Used ............................................................ 188 Find and Replace Labels ...................................................................................... 185

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Firmware Version............................................................................ 169, 170 Fixed Nodes Change Value.......................................................................... 170 Find ......................................................................................... 186 Free Modules .................................................................................. 202 Nodes ...................................................................................... 167 Function Modules ABS................................................................................. 245, 303 Add.................................................................................. 245, 304 Adder/Scaler ................................................................... 246, 304 Analogue to Digital ........................................................ 246, 305 Average........................................................................... 247, 306 Comparator ..................................................................... 247, 306 Divide.............................................................................. 248, 307 Enthalpy.......................................................................... 248, 307 Filter................................................................................ 248, 308 Gate................................................................................. 249, 308 Hysteresis Band .............................................................. 249, 309 Hysteresis Limits ............................................................ 249, 309 Limit At .......................................................................... 250, 310 Limit To .......................................................................... 250, 310 Log .................................................................................. 250, 311 Lookup ............................................................................ 251, 311 Maximum........................................................................ 251, 312 Minimum ........................................................................ 251, 312 Multiply .......................................................................... 252, 313 Power .............................................................................. 252, 313 Proximity ........................................................................ 252, 314 Rescale From .................................................................. 253, 314 Rescale To ...................................................................... 253, 315 Square Root .................................................................... 253, 315 TRIG ............................................................................... 254, 316 TRUNC........................................................................... 254, 316 Function Toolbar ......................................................................... 359 Gap in the Sequence Table .......................................................... 130 Global To IC Comms Modules ........................................... 256, 319 Goto A Strategy Page ...................................................................... 189 Graph Chart........................................................................................ 218 Compact .................................................................................. 218 Display .................................................................................... 218 Precision ................................................................................. 218 Graphics Delete ...................................................................................... 147 Move ....................................................................................... 147 Hardware Type .................................................................... 169, 170 Hide Status Bar................................................................................ 198 Strategy Library ...................................................................... 179 System View........................................................................... 179 Hours Run Logic Modules .................................................. 265, 334 How To ........................................................................................ 161 Hysteresis Band Function Modules..................................... 249, 309 Hysteresis Limits Function Modules................................... 249, 309 I/O Modules Add.......................................................................................... 126 Edit.......................................................................................... 126 Remove ................................................................................... 126 Set up ...................................................................................... 125 IC Comms Toolbar.................................................................................... 359 IC Comms Modules Average........................................................................... 254, 317 Data From ............................................................................... 255 Data To ........................................................................... 255, 318 Dummy ................................................................................... 121 Global To ........................................................................ 256, 319 Maximum........................................................................ 257, 319 Minimum ........................................................................ 257, 320 Sum ................................................................................. 258, 321 Icons............................................................................................... 22 Import ACE Files........................................................................ 191, 355 Backdrop Files ................................................................ 190, 355 Display and Directory Module Structure ............................... 144 IQ2 Files ................................................................... 92, 191, 355

377

Index IQ3 Files..........................................................................192, 355 IQF Files..................................................................................191 Projects....................................................................................100 Input Modules Adjustment Knob ....................................................................258 Analogue Node Modules ........................................................321 Digital Byte Modules..............................................................322 Digital Input ............................................................................259 External Digital Input .............................................................323 External Digital Sensor ...................................................259, 324 External Sensor ...............................................................260, 324 Internal Digital Input...............................................................326 Internal Digital Sensor ....................................................261, 327 Internal Sensor ................................................................261, 327 Knob................................................................................262, 329 Switch..............................................................................262, 329 Input Toolbar................................................................................359 Inputs Specify.....................................................................................116 Insert Gap in the Sequence Table .....................................................130 Install EINC .........................................................................................31 Internal Digital Input Modules ....................................................326 Internal Digital Sensor Modules..........................................261, 327 Internal Sensor Modules ......................................................261, 327 IP Network Modules ....................................................................337 IQ Controller Backwards Engineer .................................................................92 Configure ........................................................................105, 183 Delete ......................................................................................177 Download To...........................................................................147 Enter Configuration Mode ......................................................183 Upload From ...........................................................................198 IQ2 Directory Modules Add ..........................................................................................139 Delete ......................................................................................143 IQ2 Display Modules Add ..........................................................................................141 Delete ......................................................................................143 IQ2 Files Comparing...............................................................................153 Create ......................................................................173, 174, 356 Download ................................................................147, 224, 226 Import........................................................................92, 191, 355 IQ3 Directory Modules Add ..........................................................................................138 Delete ......................................................................................143 IQ3 Display Modules Add ..................................................................................139, 140 Delete ......................................................................................143 IQ3 Files Comparing...............................................................................153 Create ................................................................79, 173, 174, 356 Download ................................................................147, 224, 226 Import..............................................................................192, 355 Upload .............................................................................229, 230 IQF Files Download ................................................................224, 226, 228 Import......................................................................................191 Upload .............................................................................229, 230 Issue Details .........................................................................149, 150 Item Selector ..................................................................................20 Display ....................................................................................179 Keyboard Short Cuts....................................................................179 Knob Modules......................................................................262, 329 Labels Find & Replace .......................................................................185 Lan Delete ......................................................................................103 Details .............................................................................103, 200 Edit Details..............................................................................103 Lan Network Modules .................................................................338 Land Line .......................................................................................33 LDF File Create ..............................................................................174, 356 Download ........................................................147, 224, 226, 228 LDF Files Create ......................................................................................174

378

Licence Obtain Unlock Code ................................................................. 28 SET ................................................................................... 28, 195 Limit At Function Modules ................................................. 250, 310 Limit To Function Modules................................................. 250, 310 Link Delete ...................................................................................... 177 Dummy IC Comms Module ................................................... 121 Indicating ................................................................................ 166 Manually Route....................................................................... 122 Modules not in the Strategy............................................ 120, 166 Modules on Different Pages .......................................82, 84, 120 Modules on the Same Page....................................................... 77 Strategy .................................................77, 82, 83, 120, 121, 177 To a Node................................................................................ 120 To a Value................................................................................. 83 To Alarm Status Information in an IQ3 Controller................ 120 To IC Comms Module ............................................................ 121 To System Information ........................................................... 121 Values ..................................................................................... 121 Link TCL Inputs and Outputs to Modules Manually.......... 115, 116 Link the XNC Application File ................................................... 115 List Device Contents...................................................................... 214 Devices on a Lan..................................................................... 215 Internetwork Devices.............................................................. 215 Module Parameters ................................................................. 216 Modules................................................................................... 217 Objects .................................................................................... 217 Site Contents ........................................................................... 217 List View Window...............................................214, 215, 216, 217 Load Existing Project......................................................................... 81 Local Supervisor Port .................................................................... 32 Lock the Position of the Current Windows ................................. 198 Lock Window Position ................................................................ 193 LOG Function Modules....................................................... 250, 311 Logic Modules Combination.................................................................... 263, 330 Counter............................................................................ 263, 331 D to A.............................................................................. 264, 332 Delay ............................................................................... 264, 331 Fan Out............................................................................ 265, 333 Hours Run ....................................................................... 265, 334 Readback......................................................................... 266, 334 Timer............................................................................... 266, 335 Logic Toolbar .............................................................................. 359 Lookup Function Modules................................................... 251, 311 Manually Route a Link ................................................................ 122 Maximum Function Modules .............................................. 251, 312 Maximum IC Comms Modules ........................................... 257, 319 Menu Bar ....................................................................................... 20 Minimum Function Modules ............................................... 251, 312 Minimum IC Comms Modules............................................ 257, 320 Modem Module............................................................................ 352 Module Properties Display .................................................................................... 220 Modules Add to Sequence Table........................................................... 129 Add to Strategy .............................................73, 85, 97, 173, 193 Add Unplaced ......................................................................... 167 Change Destination................................................................. 127 Change Sequence Step...................................................... 89, 130 Copy........................................................................................ 173 Delete ......................................................................137, 143, 177 Disable .................................................................................... 177 Display ............................................................................ 287, 288 Edit ....................................................................76, 127, 128, 137 Enable ..................................................................................... 177 Find ...........................................................97, 185, 188, 189, 193 Free ......................................................................................... 202 Link .............................................................................77, 82, 120 Move ......................................................................................... 75 Next......................................................................................... 202 Paste ........................................................................................ 173 Remove from Sequence Table................................................ 130 Select....................................................................................... 196 Monitor Alarms............................................................................ 223 Move

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Index Graphics .................................................................................. 147 Modules..................................................................................... 75 Modules in the Sequence Table.............................................. 130 Project View ........................................................................... 192 Search Library......................................................................... 192 Strategy Library ...................................................................... 192 System View ........................................................................... 192 Text ......................................................................................... 147 Toolbars .................................................................................. 193 Multiple Controllers Downloading To .............................................................224, 226 Upload From ........................................................................... 230 Multiply Function Modules .................................................252, 313 NDP Address .......................................................................279, 281 Network Modules ................................................................337, 338 IP 337 Lan .......................................................................................... 338 New IQ System Sites....................................................................... 210 Non IQ System Sites............................................................... 209 Project ....................................................................................... 99 Node Edit Value ............................................................................... 127 Find .................................................................................186, 188 Link To.............................................................................. 83, 120 Open Project .............................................................................100, 354 Site File ...........................................................................205, 207 Options......................................................................................... 357 Other Toolbar............................................................................... 359 Output Channel ............................................................................ 128 Outputs Specify .................................................................................... 116 Page Add.................................................................................... 77, 166 Add Text ........................................................................... 83, 146 Add Unplaced Modules .......................................................... 167 Close ....................................................................................... 170 Copy to Clipboard................................................................... 172 Delete ...................................................................................... 177 Delete Graphics....................................................................... 147 Delete Text.............................................................................. 147 Display .................................................................................... 189 Go to........................................................................................ 189 Move Text and Lines .............................................................. 147 Print......................................................................................... 151 Page Details Edit .......................................................................................... 196 Set up ...................................................................................... 196 View ........................................................................................ 201 Parameter Properties Display .................................................................................... 220 Paste Modules................................................................................... 173 Perform SET Commands Using the Command Bar............................. 193 Physical Connections..................................................................... 32 PIN Download................................................................224, 226, 228 Protection ................................................................135, 136, 137 Upload.............................................................................229, 230 Plant Directory Create ...................................................................................... 175 Delete ...................................................................................... 177 Rename ................................................................................... 194 Plant View Set up ...................................................................................... 177 Setup ....................................................................................... 175 Pointers Toolbar........................................................................... 359 Position Lock ........................................................................................ 193 Lock Windows........................................................................ 198 Modules in the Sequence Table.............................................. 129 Tasks ....................................................................................... 193 Toolbars .................................................................................. 193 Windows .........................................................................193, 198 Power Function Modules.....................................................252, 313 Precision Graphs .......................................................................... 218 Prevent a User Node Refreshing ................................................. 209

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Print Pages and Tables .............................................................. 79, 151 Project Documentation ..................................................... 79, 151 Project Overview .................................................................... 150 Report File .............................................................................. 153 Required Strategy Pages......................................................... 151 Single Page of Strategy .......................................................... 194 Strategy Pages......................................................................... 354 Printer Set up ...................................................................................... 354 Project Close ............................................................................... 170, 353 Create ........................................................................................ 99 Delete ...................................................................................... 102 Documentation.......................................................... 79, 150, 151 Import...................................................................................... 100 Open.......................................................................... 81, 100, 354 Overview................................................................................. 150 View Details ........................................................................... 201 Project Details Documentation.......................................................................... 79 Edit.......................................................................................... 101 View........................................................................................ 201 Project View .................................................................................. 20 Dock........................................................................................ 180 Move ....................................................................................... 192 Resize...................................................................................... 194 Proximity Function Modules............................................... 252, 314 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules........................... 240, 295 Raise/Lower End Modules .................................................. 242, 297 Readback Logic Modules .................................................... 266, 334 Redraw the Screen ....................................................................... 194 Refresh Activate................................................................................... 209 Automatically ......................................................................... 209 Turn ON/OFF ......................................................................... 209 Remote Devices ........................................................................... 102 Remove Controller................................................................................ 177 I/O Modules ............................................................................ 126 Lans......................................................................................... 103 User Parameters from a User Node........................................ 213 Rename Plant Directories ..................................................................... 194 Strategy Block Groups ............................................................. 50 Strategy Block Pages ................................................................ 50 Strategy Blocks......................................................................... 50 Rescale From Function Modules......................................... 253, 314 Rescale To Modules ............................................................ 253, 315 Resize Project View ........................................................................... 194 Search Library ........................................................................ 194 Strategy Library .............................................................. 179, 194 System View................................................................... 179, 194 Resize Windows .......................................................................... 193 Restore Project ..................................................................................... 100 Strategy ................................................................................... 155 Re-useable Strategy ......................................................... 90, 93, 117 Reverse Engineer ........................................................................... 92 Run SET ...........................................................66, 195, 205, 206, 207 SANC............................................................................................. 33 SCN Files Upload............................................................................. 229, 230 Search Library ............................................................................... 20 Dock........................................................................................ 180 Move ....................................................................................... 192 Resize...................................................................................... 194 Select Modules .................................................................................. 196 Sensor Definition Delete ........................................................................................ 46 Edit............................................................................................ 46 Use .......................................................................................... 109 Sensor Library Delete Sensor Definition .......................................................... 46 Edit Sensor Definitions............................................................. 46 Edit Sensors .............................................................................. 46

379

Index Sensor Type Modules Define........................................................................................46 Edit ............................................................................................46 Set up.........................................................................72, 109, 110 Sensors Delete Definitions .....................................................................46 Edit Definition...........................................................................46 Edit Library ...............................................................................46 External ...........................................................................260, 324 External Digital ...............................................................259, 324 Internal ............................................................................261, 327 Internal Digital ................................................................261, 327 Sequence Step Change.......................................................................89, 129, 130 Insert........................................................................................357 Locate......................................................................................189 Toolbar ....................................................................................359 Sequence Table Add Modules...........................................................................129 Edit ............................................................................89, 129, 130 Fast Sequencing ........................................................................89 Remove Modules ....................................................................130 Set Up........................................................................89, 129, 130 SET Close........................................................................................354 Licence ......................................................................................28 Run ..........................................................................................195 Set up Controller Security..................................................................136 Guest User...............................................................................135 I/O Modules ............................................................................125 Non IQ System Sites...............................................................209 Page Details.............................................................................196 Printer......................................................................................354 User Modules ..........................................................................136 Set Up IQ System Sites.......................................................................210 Set up Modules Address Module ........................................................................70 Alarm Group Modules ............................................................124 Autodial Module .....................................................................111 Comport Modules ...................................................................112 Default Remote Devices .........................................................102 Display Modules .............................................................141, 143 Driver Modules .......................................................................128 Fast Sequencing ........................................................................89 I/O ...........................................................................................125 Modem Modules .....................................................................111 Network Module .......................................................................71 Record Modules ......................................................................112 Sensor Type Modules ...............................................72, 109, 110 Sequence Table .........................................................................89 Store Modules .........................................................................113 User Modules ..........................................................................137 Short Cuts.....................................................................................179 Single Controller Upload From ...........................................................................229 Site File Create ......................................................................................206 Open ........................................................................................207 Site Properties Display ....................................................................................220 Sites Add ..................................................................................209, 210 Create ..............................................................................209, 210 Delete ......................................................................................210 Edit ..........................................................................................211 New .................................................................................209, 210 Specify Controller Details....................................................................182 Inputs.......................................................................................116 Lan Details ..............................................................................103 Next Module Number .............................................................197 Outputs ....................................................................................116 Stores Manually ......................................................................116 Specify Communications COM Port ..................................................................................32 Specify Details Page .........................................................................................196

380

Specify SET Options Notes Printed on the Front Page ............................................. 150 Which Configuration Parameters are Displayed .................... 198 Square Root Function Modules ........................................... 253, 315 Standard Comms Connection Delete ........................................................................................ 38 Edit ............................................................................................ 39 Standard Toolbar.................................................................. 359, 371 Status Bar ............................................................................... 21, 198 Stores Specify .................................................................................... 116 Strategy Compare............................................................97, 153, 154, 355 Configure ................................................................................ 105 Define Issue ..............................................................79, 149, 150 Download........................................................147, 149, 228, 351 Link ...................................................................77, 120, 121, 177 Print......................................................................................... 151 Restore .................................................................................... 155 Update ..................................................................................... 153 Upload.......................................................92, 198, 229, 230, 351 View Issue............................................................................... 202 Strategy Block Groups Create ........................................................................................ 47 Delete ........................................................................................ 50 Edit ............................................................................................ 50 Rename ..................................................................................... 50 Strategy Block Page Edit ............................................................................................ 50 Rename ..................................................................................... 50 Strategy Blocks Add............................................................................................ 48 Create ........................................................................................ 93 Delete ........................................................................................ 49 Edit ............................................................................................ 50 Principles................................................................................... 93 Rename ..................................................................................... 50 Use Entire.......................................................................... 90, 117 Use Part............................................................................. 90, 117 View Details ........................................................................... 201 Strategy Library ............................................................................. 21 Collapse................................................................................... 179 Display .................................................................................... 179 Dock ................................................................................ 179, 180 Expand .................................................................................... 179 Hide......................................................................................... 179 Move ....................................................................................... 192 Resize.............................................................................. 179, 194 Undock.................................................................................... 179 Strategy Pages Add.................................................................................... 77, 166 Add Text ........................................................................... 83, 146 Add Unplaced Modules .......................................................... 167 Close ............................................................................... 170, 353 Copy to Clipboard................................................................... 172 Delete ...................................................................................... 177 Delete Graphics....................................................................... 147 Delete Text.............................................................................. 147 Display .................................................................................... 189 Go to........................................................................................ 189 Move Text and Lines .............................................................. 147 Print................................................................................. 151, 354 Sum IC Comms Modules .................................................... 258, 321 Supervisor Address.............................................................. 279, 281 Switch Modules ................................................................... 262, 329 System Information ............................................................................. 121 System View .................................................................................. 22 Collapse................................................................................... 179 Display ............................................................................ 179, 205 Dock ................................................................................ 179, 180 Expand .................................................................................... 179 Hide......................................................................................... 179 Move ....................................................................................... 192 Resize.............................................................................. 179, 194 Undock.................................................................................... 179 Tables........................................................................................... 151 TCL Module Link the XNC Application File .............................................. 115

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Index Text Add.......................................................................................... 146 Delete ...................................................................................... 147 Move ....................................................................................... 147 Time Proportional + Driver Modules ..................................243, 299 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules ..........................244, 301 Timer Logic Modules ..........................................................266, 335 Tip of the Day View ........................................................................................ 180 TO Connective....................................................................... 84, 166 Toolbar........................................................................................... 25 Toolbars Alarm ...................................................................................... 358 Command Line ....................................................................... 358 Comms .................................................................................... 358 Draw Tool ............................................................................... 358 Driver ...................................................................................... 359 Function .................................................................................. 359 IC Comms ............................................................................... 359 Input ........................................................................................ 359 Logic ....................................................................................... 359 Move ....................................................................................... 193 Other ....................................................................................... 359 Pointers ................................................................................... 359 Position ................................................................................... 193 Sequence Step ......................................................................... 359 SET View................................................................................ 359 Standard ..........................................................................359, 371 Window Position.............................................................351, 360 Transfer List Load ........................................................................................ 224 Trend Network ...................................................................31, 32, 33 Trend System Object Model.......................................................... 22 TRIG Function Modules......................................................254, 316 TRUNC Function Modules .................................................254, 316 TSOM Model ................................................................................. 22 Turn ON/OFF Status Bar ................................................................................ 198 Turn the Item Selector ON/OFF.................................................. 179 Undefined Connectives Add.......................................................................................... 166 Defining .................................................................................. 175 Destination .............................................................................. 175 To a Module............................................................................ 166 To a Node................................................................................ 167 Undo Compare.................................................................................. 155 Last Action......................................................................198, 353 Undock Strategy Library ...................................................................... 179 System View ........................................................................... 179 Unlock Code .................................................................................. 28 Enter .......................................................................................... 28 Unplaced Modules .......................................................153, 167, 173 Update Strategy............................................................................ 153 Upload From a Single Controller ........................................................ 229 From Multiple Controllers...................................................... 230 IQ2 Files.................................................................................. 198 IQ3 Files..........................................................................229, 230 IQF Files .........................................................................229, 230 SCN Files ................................................................198, 229, 230 Strategy ...........................................................................198, 351 Use

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Command Bar................................................................... 97, 193 Strategy Blocks................................................................. 90, 117 User Modules....................................................................... 344, 346 Add.................................................................................. 135, 136 Delete ...................................................................................... 137 Edit.......................................................................................... 137 Set up ...................................................................................... 137 User Nodes Activate Refresh ..................................................................... 209 Add User Parameters .............................................................. 213 Delete ...................................................................................... 213 Delete User Parameters .......................................................... 213 Edit.......................................................................................... 214 Refresh .................................................................................... 209 User Parameters Add to a User Node ................................................................ 213 Users Delete ........................................................................................ 52 Edit............................................................................................ 52 Using The Command Bar.................................................................. 165 Using SET Add Sites......................................................................... 209, 210 Create a Site.................................................................... 209, 210 New Sites ........................................................................ 209, 210 Values Link To ................................................................................... 121 View Alarms..................................................................................... 223 Current Alarms ....................................................................... 223 Device Details......................................................................... 200 Device Information......................................................... 219, 220 Device Properties.................................................................... 220 Display Module Properties ..................................................... 220 Free Modules .......................................................................... 202 Historic Alarms....................................................................... 223 Incoming Alarms .................................................................... 223 Lan Details.............................................................................. 200 Module List............................................................................. 202 Page Details ............................................................................ 201 Parameter Properties............................................................... 220 Project Details......................................................................... 201 Project View ........................................................................... 179 Site Properties......................................................................... 220 Strategy Block Details ............................................................ 201 Strategy Issues ........................................................................ 202 Strategy Library ...................................................................... 179 Strategy Page .......................................................................... 189 Tip of the Day......................................................................... 180 Zoom In .................................................................................. 203 Zoom Out................................................................................ 203 What's New.................................................................................... 17 Window Position Toolbar.................................................... 351, 360 Windows Lock ................................................................................ 193, 198 Move ....................................................................................... 193 Position ................................................................................... 193 Resize...................................................................................... 193 Tile .......................................................................................... 193 XNC Configure ................................................................ 112, 115, 116 Zoom In 203 Out .......................................................................................... 203

381

Index

382

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

Index

SET Manual TE200147 Issue 6/A 18/04/2006

383

Trend Control Systems Limited P.O. Box 34, Horsham, West Sussex, RH12 2YF, UK. Tel:+44 (0)1403 211888 Fax:+44 (0)1403 241608 www.trend-controls.com

Trend Control Systems USA

6670 185 th Avenue NE, Redmond, Washington 98052, USA. Tel: (425)869-8400, Fax: (425)869-8445 www.trend-controls.com